JP7472475B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a picture display device that changes the display of pictures on the display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, when a winning ball enters an operating port provided in the gaming area, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a special gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, will occur, and the display of changing pictures begins. If the lottery is won, a specific picture combination or the like is displayed as a final stop on the display screen, and the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2002-78904 A

In recent years, various efforts have been made to increase the attention given to games. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of gaming machines in order to increase the attention given to games.

The present invention was made in consideration of the circumstances exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can effectively increase attention to the game.

The present invention relates to
A means for executing a specific determination based on the establishment of a predetermined determination trigger;
A means for transitioning a gaming state to a special gaming state which is more advantageous to a player than a predetermined gaming state based on the result of the specific judgment being a predetermined transition corresponding result;
An operation means operable by a player;
A gaming machine comprising:
The operation means is switchable between a first state and a second state having a larger operation stroke than the first state,
A switching means for switching the operation means from the first state to the second state,
As a performance that can be executed when the operating means is operated after the switching means switches to the second mode, a first performance in which the transition response result has a relatively low expectation level or does not correspond to the transition response result, and a second performance in which the transition response result has a relatively high expectation level or corresponds to the transition response result,
A specifying means for enabling the operation means to be in the second mode after a previous operation on the operation means has been performed and the first performance has been executed;
A first means for enabling a notification corresponding to a mode of the operation means to be executed in a first period before the previous operation that triggers the execution of the first performance is performed;
a second means for enabling a notification corresponding to the state of the operation means to be executed for a second period longer than the first period before a subsequent operation is performed on the operation means when the operation means is set to the second state by the specifying means;
The present invention is characterized in that it is provided with:

The present invention can effectively increase attention to the game.

1 is a front view showing a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment. 1 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of a pachinko machine. 1 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of a pachinko machine. FIG. FIG. This is an oblique view of the game board unit from the front. This is an oblique view of the game board unit from the rear. FIG. FIG. A front view of the back pack unit. A front view of the front door frame. 1A is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the internal structure of the top lamp unit, and FIG. 1B is a timing chart showing the flow of the light production. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing the top lamp section disassembled into its main components. FIG. 2A is a schematic diagram showing a state of light irradiation during low-speed rotation, and FIG. 2B is a schematic diagram showing a state of light irradiation during high-speed rotation. 15(a) is a partially enlarged view of the front door frame, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view taken along line BB of FIG. 15(a). FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. 1 is a schematic diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used in lotteries, etc. 1 is a schematic diagram for explaining the display contents on the display screen of the pattern display device. FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram for explaining the display contents on the display screen of the pattern display device. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU of the main control device. A flowchart showing the winning processing of the operating port. 13 is a flowchart showing an information acquisition process. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the MPU of the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a game play control process. 13 is a flowchart showing a data setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for setting a variable display time. 13 is a flowchart showing a game state transition process. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration related to game presentation. 13 is a flowchart showing the variable display control processing by the MPU of the notification/performance control device. 13 is a flowchart showing the variable start processing. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the types of variable display modes, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an overview of each variable display mode. (a) is a flowchart showing the processing for controlling hold display by the MPU of the display control device, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the state of the hold display. 13 is a flowchart showing confirmation processing for hold notice by the MPU of the main control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for setting a hold command by the MPU of the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing the setting process for the on-hold notice performance by the MPU of the notification/performance control device. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the types of hold icons, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an overview of the preview performance. (a) A schematic diagram showing an overview of a first type preview performance, and (b) a schematic diagram showing an overview of a second type preview performance. This is an oblique view of the front door frame from the front. FIG. 2A is a perspective view of the effect button device as seen from the front of the gaming machine, and FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view showing the performance button device disassembled into its main components. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the effect button device with the side cover omitted. FIG. FIG. 2 is a partially cutaway view of the performance button device. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing the operation block disassembled into its main components. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing the button unit disassembled into its main components. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the operation unit that constitutes the main part of the button unit. FIG. FIG. 2A is a perspective view of the operation block in an operating state, and FIG. 2B is a cross-sectional view of the operation block in an operating state. 11 is a perspective view of the effect button device in a second form. FIG. FIG. FIG. 2A is a perspective view of a rotor, and FIG. FIG. 4A is a cross-sectional view of a lift mechanism in a first configuration; FIG. 4B is a cross-sectional view of a lift mechanism in a second configuration; 1A is a schematic diagram showing the movement of the lift mechanism when switching from a first form to a second form, and FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram showing the movement of the lift mechanism when switching from the second form to the first form. FIG. 2A is a side view of the effect button device in a first form; FIG. 2B is a cross-sectional view of the effect button device in the first form. FIG. 2A is a side view of the effect button device when in the second form; FIG. 2B is a cross-sectional view of the effect button device when in the second form. FIG. 13A is a side view of the effect button device in the third form, and FIG. 13B is a cross-sectional view of the effect button device in the third form. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing an operation flow when in the first mode. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of operations when in the second mode. (a) A schematic diagram showing the relationship between the variable display mode and the expected probability of a jackpot, (b) A schematic diagram showing the flow of the first special presentation. 13 is a flowchart showing the setting process for the first special effect executed by the MPU of the notification/effect control device. 13 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the presentation pattern and the start timing of the operation suggestion. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing an allocation table for super reaches A and B. 13 is a schematic diagram showing an allocation table for Super Reach C. 13 is a flowchart showing the first special effect processing executed by the MPU of the notification/effect control device. This is a timing chart showing the flow of the first special effect A. This is a timing chart showing the flow of the first special effect C. 13 is a schematic diagram showing the movement of the effect button device in the second embodiment. 5 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the positions of the operation buttons and the detection positions. FIG. FIG. 13A is a schematic diagram for supplementing the display flow during reach display, and FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram showing the types of effects applied to characters. FIG. 13A is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between effect levels and triggers for changing the effect levels, and FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram showing effect update patterns. 13 is a flowchart showing the processing for executing the first special effect for the second part. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for executing linked display. A schematic diagram showing the flow of the first special effect in the second part. A schematic diagram showing the flow of the first special effect in the second part. FIG. 13 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a third embodiment. A schematic diagram showing the relationship between the type of second special effect and the linked target. A schematic diagram showing the light-emitting parts of the annular illumination unit and the movable performance device. 5 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the positions of the operation buttons and the detection positions. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the second special effect processing. 13 is a flowchart showing the processing for executing the second special effect. 11 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between a notification object and a shift pattern of a light-emitting object. FIG. A schematic diagram showing the shift pattern when the second special effect A is executed. A schematic diagram showing the shift pattern when the second special effect B is executed. A schematic diagram showing the shift pattern when the second special effect C is executed. A schematic diagram showing the shift pattern when the second special effect D is executed. 13A is a schematic diagram showing divisions of positions of an operation button in a fourth embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the amount of protrusion and the generated torque. A schematic diagram showing an overview of the third special effect. 13 is a flowchart showing the third special effect processing executed by the MPU of the notification/effect control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a third special effect execution process. 13 is a flowchart showing a torque change process. 13 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the third special effect occurs. A schematic diagram showing the flow of the third special performance. A schematic diagram showing the flow of the third special performance. A schematic diagram showing the relationship between the type of jackpot and the display mode in the fifth embodiment. 13A is a schematic diagram showing an overview of a display in a second display mode, and FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram showing an overview of a display in a third display mode. 11 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between a display mode and a variable display time. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a display mode switching process executed by the MPU of the notification/performance control device. 13 is a flowchart showing the fourth special effect processing executed by the MPU of the notification/effect control device. 13 is a flowchart showing processing for a third normal gaming state. 13 is a flowchart showing operation response processing for a third normal gaming state. 13 is a flowchart showing processing for a second normal gaming state. 13 is a flowchart showing operation response processing for a second normal gaming state. 13 is a timing chart showing the flow of the fourth special effect. A schematic diagram showing the flow of the fourth special performance. 23 is a flowchart showing the sixth special effect processing in the sixth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for the first half part. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing switching between a free state and a hold state. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for the latter half part. 13 is a flowchart showing a continuation process. A schematic diagram showing the flow of the sixth special performance. 11 is a timing chart showing the operation of the effect button device. A schematic diagram comparing various seventh special effects in the seventh embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the seventh special effect processing executed by the MPU of the notification/effect control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a first part process. 13 is a flowchart showing a second part process. 10 is a flowchart showing a process of starting switching to a second mode. 13 is a flowchart showing a switching speed change process. 11 is a timing chart showing a state of speed switching. A schematic diagram showing the flow of the seventh special performance. A schematic diagram showing the flow of the seventh special performance. 23 is a flowchart showing the eighth special effect processing in the eighth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for the first half part. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for the latter half part. (a) is a schematic diagram comparing various forms of effect button devices, and (b) is a schematic diagram comparing various 8th special effects. 13 is a flowchart showing a form switching process. A schematic diagram showing the flow of the 8th special performance. A schematic diagram showing the flow of the 8th special performance. 13 is a flowchart showing a ninth special effect setting process in the ninth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram comparing various 9th special effects, and (b) is a schematic diagram comparing the difference in the amount of protrusion at each protrusion level. FIG. 13A is a schematic diagram showing the arrival pattern to LV3, and FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram showing the arrival pattern to LV4. 13 is a flowchart showing the 9th special effect processing. 13 is a flowchart showing processing for the final game round. A schematic diagram illustrating the relationship between the number of reservations and the prominence level. 13 is a flowchart showing a tenth special effect setting process in the tenth embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing the processing for special effects. A schematic diagram illustrating the relationship between the number of reservations and the prominence level. 11A is a schematic diagram comparing various 11th special effects in the 11th embodiment, and FIG. 11B is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the position of the operation button and the operation resistance. 13 is a flowchart showing the 11th special effect processing executed by the MPU of the notification/effect control device. A flowchart showing the 11th special effect main processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a torque variable process. 5 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the position of an operation button and the operation resistance. FIG. A schematic diagram of a performance button device in a twelfth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a height position adjustment process executed by the MPU of the notification/performance control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a position control process. 11 is a schematic diagram showing an operation stroke to an operation detection position for each protrusion level. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram comparing various 12th special effects in the 13th embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the 12th special effect processing executed by the MPU of the notification/effect control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for the first half part. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for repeated operations. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for the latter half part. A schematic diagram showing the flow of the 12th special performance. A schematic diagram showing the flow of the 12th special performance. A schematic diagram showing the relationship between the position of the operation button and position control in the fourteenth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for repeated operations executed by the MPU of the notification/performance control device. 13 is a flowchart showing an auto-repeated-hit process. 13 is a flowchart showing an auto-repeated torque control process. 5 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the position of an operation button and the operation resistance. FIG. 13A and 13B are schematic diagrams showing modified examples of the relationship between the position of the operation button and the operation resistance.

First Embodiment
A first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine"), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. Figure 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10, and Figures 2 and 3 are perspective views showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10 in an expanded form. Note that, for the sake of convenience, the components inside the game area of the pachinko machine 10 are omitted in Figure 2.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a main machine part 12 attached to the outer frame 11.

The outer frame 11 is made of plate material connected on all four sides, forming a rectangular frame. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the island equipment of the amusement parlor by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment. Note that the outer frame 11 is not a required component of the pachinko machine 10, and the outer frame 11 may be attached to the island equipment of the amusement parlor, etc.

The main machine part 12 is supported by this outer frame 11 in a state in which it can be opened and closed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 1, an upper support bracket 17 is fixed to the connection between the upper and left frame parts of the outer frame 11, and a lower support bracket 18 is fixed to the connection between the lower and left frame parts of the outer frame 11. The upper support bracket 17 and the lower support bracket 18 form a support mechanism, which allows the main machine part 12 to rotate forward of the pachinko machine 10 with the left side as the base end and the right side as the tip end when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 relative to the outer frame 11.

A detection sensor that detects the opening and closing of the main part 12 of the gaming machine is provided in the upper right part of the outer frame 11, specifically the connecting part between the upper frame part and the right frame part, and the opening and closing of the main part 12 of the gaming machine is monitored based on the detection information from this detection sensor.

As shown in FIG. 2, the main part 12 of the gaming machine includes an inner frame 13 as a base body, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 (see FIG. 3) disposed behind the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 of the main part 12 of the gaming machine is supported rotatably relative to the outer frame 11.

A front door frame 14 is rotatably attached to the end of the inner frame 13 on the base side of the rotation, and the front door frame 14 can be rotated forward with the left side being the base side of the rotation and the right side being the tip side of the rotation when viewed from the front. Also, as shown in FIG. 3, a back pack unit 15 is rotatably attached to the end of the inner frame 13 on the base side of the rotation, and the back pack unit 15 can be rotated backward with the left side being the base side of the rotation and the right side being the tip side of the rotation when viewed from the front.

Next, the front door frame 14 will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is mainly composed of a synthetic resin frame body 20 having an external shape substantially identical to that of the outer frame 11, and a cover body 21 attached to the front of the frame body 20 and decorated with various ornaments, and covers substantially the entire front side of the inner frame 13. A substantially elliptical window portion 22 (see FIG. 1) is formed in the center of the front door frame 14, allowing substantially the entire playing area PE, which will be described later, to be viewed from the front of the gaming machine, and the window portion 22 is covered from the rear side of the front door frame 14 by a glass unit 30.

As shown in FIG. 2, the frame body 20 is formed with a glass unit installation section 23 surrounding the window section 22. More specifically, the glass unit installation section 23 is disposed on the rear side of the frame body 20 and is recessed toward the front of the pachinko machine 10, with the window section 22 disposed at the bottom. The glass unit 30 fits into the glass unit installation section 23, restricting its displacement in the vertical and horizontal directions.

The glass unit 30 comprises a pair of transparent front and rear glass panels 31, and a glass holder 32 that holds the glass panels 31. The glass holder 32 has an annular frame formed along the window portion 22, and the glass panel 31 is housed in the area surrounded by the frame.

Referring again to FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 (more specifically, the cover body 21) is provided with light-emitting means such as various lamps that emit light according to the game status. The light-emitting means is composed of an annular illumination section 24 that incorporates light-emitting elements such as LEDs along the periphery of the window section 22. In addition, speaker sections 27 that output sound effects and the like according to the game status are provided in the upper left and upper right corners of the front door frame 14.

Below the window 22 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulge 28 and a lower bulge 29 that bulge toward the front are arranged side by side. An upper tray 33 that opens upward is provided in the upper bulge 28, and a lower tray 34 that also opens upward is provided in the lower bulge 29. The upper tray 33 has the function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from the payout device described below, and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism described below while aligning them in a row. In addition, the lower tray 34 has the function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 33.

A performance button device 40 that is manually operated by the player is provided in the upper bulge 28 in a position forward of the upper tray 33 (the storage area for game balls). The performance button device 40 is an operating device that allows the player to give specific instructions during the progress of the game in order to cause a specific performance to be performed on the display screen of the pattern display device (described later).

A game ball launching handle 45 is provided protruding toward the front side at a position aligned with the lower bulge 29. When the game ball launching handle 45 is operated, a game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism described below.

As shown in FIG. 2, a passage forming unit 50 is attached to the back of the front door frame 14. The passage forming unit 50 is molded from synthetic resin and has a front door side upper tray passage that leads to the upper tray 33 and a front door side lower tray passage that leads to the lower tray 34. A receiving port 53 that protrudes rearward and opens upward is formed at the upper corner of the passage forming unit 50, and the receiving port 53 is divided into left and right parts by a partition wall 54 to form an entrance portion of the front door side upper tray passage and an entrance portion of the front door side lower tray passage. The upstream side of the front door side upper tray passage and the front door side lower tray passage lead to a game ball distribution section described later, and game balls that enter the front door side upper tray passage are guided to the upper tray 33, and game balls that enter the front door side lower tray passage are guided to the lower tray 34.

Next, the inner frame 13 will be described in detail with reference to Figure 4. Figure 4 is a front view of the inner frame 13. Note that in Figure 4, the configuration within the play area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted, as in Figure 2.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of an inner frame base body 60, the outer shape of which is almost the same as that of the outer frame 11. Inner frame fittings 71, 72 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the pivot base side (left side of FIG. 4) on the front surface of the inner frame base body 60. Also, bearing fittings 57, 58 are provided on the pivot base side (left side of FIG. 1) on the rear surface of the front door frame 14 in correspondence with the inner frame fittings 71, 72. The inner frame fittings 71, 72 have shafts formed thereon, and the shafts are inserted into the bearing holes of the bearing fittings 57, 58 of the front door frame 14, thereby supporting the front door frame 14 so that it can pivot relative to the inner frame 13. In other words, the inner frame fittings 71, 72 and the bearing fittings 57, 58 constitute an assembly mechanism for the inner frame 13.

A locking device 75 is provided on the front surface of the inner frame 13. The locking device 75 has a plurality of front door hook members 76 that extend toward the front door frame 14. Corresponding to these front door hook members 76, a plurality of hook receiving members 59 that extend toward the inner frame 13 are provided on the rear surface of the front door frame 14 (see FIG. 2). The front door hook members 76 hook onto the hook receiving members 59, thereby locking the front door frame 14 in a closed state. In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, the locking device 75 has inner frame hook members 77 that extend rearward of the inner frame 13. These inner frame hook members 77 hook onto the hook receiving members 19 of the outer frame 11, thereby locking the gaming machine main unit 12 in a closed state relative to the outer frame 11.

A cylinder lock 78 for unlocking the locking device 75 is installed in the lower right corner of the inner frame base body 60. The cylinder lock 78 is integrated with the locking device 75, and its tip portion (keyhole portion) is exposed to the front of the pachinko machine 10 through a hole provided in the front door frame 14. By turning the key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 78 to the right, the front door frame 14 is unlocked from the inner frame 13, and by turning the same key to the left, the inner frame 13 is unlocked from the outer frame 11.

A storage recess 61 for storing the game board unit 80 is formed in the approximate center of the front surface of the inner frame base body 60. The storage recess 61 is recessed toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10 and defines a storage space for storing the game board unit 80, and the game board unit 80 attached to the inner frame base body 60 fits into the storage space.

The game board unit 80 is integrated with a game area forming body 80a, which has a game area PE formed on the front side where game balls flow down, and a back block 80b, which is provided on the back side of the game area forming body 80a and has various game parts (e.g., a variable display unit, a control device, a movable performance mechanism, light-emitting decorative members, etc.) mounted on a base body 251, as described below. The game area forming body 80a is made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and the front portion of the back block 80b is visible through the game area forming body 80a.

As already explained, the play area PE is covered by a glass unit 30 (more specifically, the rear glass panel 31). The glass unit 30 is positioned so that the gap between the rear glass panel 31 and the front surface of the play area forming body 80a is slightly larger than the diameter of a play ball, i.e., so that the play balls flowing down the play area PE are not lined up front and back at the same point in the play area PE. This prevents balls from clogging the play area PE.

The game board unit 80 (particularly the various components arranged in the game area PE of the game area forming body 80a) will be described below with reference to Figures 5 to 7. Figure 5 is a front view of the game board unit 80, Figure 6 is a perspective view of the game board unit 80 seen from the front, and Figure 7 is a perspective view of the game board unit 80 seen from the rear. Note that in Figure 6, the components visible through the game area forming body 80a are also shown by two-dot chain lines, approximating the overall appearance of the game board unit 80 when actually viewed.

The play area forming body 80a has a plurality of openings, large and small, penetrating in the thickness direction (front-rear direction). As shown in FIG. 5, each opening is provided with a general winning opening 81, a variable winning device 82, an operating opening 83a, 83b, a through gate 84, etc. When game balls enter the general winning opening 81, the variable winning device 82, and the operating openings 83a, 83b, the game balls are detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to each ball entry section, and a privilege such as a predetermined number of prize balls (payout of game balls) is given to the player based on the detection result. In addition, an outlet 89 is provided at the bottom of the play area forming body 80a, and game balls that do not enter the various ball entry sections are discharged from the play area PE through the outlet 89. In the following explanation, to clearly distinguish from game balls entering the outlet 89, game balls entering the general winning port 81, the variable winning device 82, and the operating ports 83a and 83b will also be referred to as "winning."

In addition, numerous nail members 93 are planted in the game area forming body 80a to appropriately distribute and adjust the flow path of the game balls, and various components (apparatus) such as windmills 94 are arranged. The various configurations of these nail members 93 and windmills 94 differentiate the flow path of the game balls, and adjustments are made so that winning the above-mentioned general winning hole 81 etc. occurs with an appropriate probability.

A central opening 85 is formed in the center of the play area forming body 80a, and a transparent opening cover 86 is attached so as to cover this central opening 85 from the back side of the play area forming body 80a. Behind this central opening 85, the variable display unit 252 belonging to the back block 80b is located, and the variable display unit 252 etc. can be seen through the central opening 85 (opening cover 86) from the front of the game machine. Note that in Figure 6, for the sake of convenience of explanation, the opening cover 86 is shown by a two-dot chain line, showing the state in which the variable display unit 252 is visible.

Operating ports 83a, 83b and a through gate 84 are arranged around the central opening 85. The operating ports 83a, 83b are composed of an upper operating port 83a arranged below the variable display unit 252 and a lower operating port 83b arranged directly below the upper operating port 83a. In particular, the lower operating port (lottery trigger ball entry section) 83b is provided with an electric device 91 as an opening/closing type ball entry assistance device (ball entry assistance means) or opening/closing member (opening/closing means). The electric device 91 has a movable piece and a solenoid-type drive unit that drives the movable piece. By changing the position of the movable piece by the drive unit, it is possible to switch between an open state (assistance state) in which a ball can be entered into the lower operating port 83b and an open state (non-assistance state) in which the ball cannot be entered and a closed state (non-assistance state) in which the ball cannot be entered.

The through gate 84 is located in the game area PE at a position upstream of the lower operating port 83b (more specifically, to the side of the variable display unit 252), and if a lottery is won when the game ball passes through the through gate 84, the electric device 91 is switched from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined period of time.

When a ball enters the upper actuation port 83a, three game balls are dispensed, and when a ball enters the lower actuation port 83b, four game balls are dispensed, but the number of game balls dispensed is not limited to the above. However, for example, to increase the advantage of the lower actuation port 83b over the upper actuation port 83a, it is preferable to set the number of balls dispensed related to the lower actuation port 83b greater than the number of balls dispensed related to the upper actuation port 83a.

The variable winning device (special ball winning device or special ball winning means) 82 has a large winning opening that leads to the back side of the play area forming body 80a, and is provided with an opening/closing door as an opening/closing member (opening/closing means) that opens and closes the large winning opening. The opening/closing door can be switched between an open state (assistance state) in which the game ball can or can easily enter, and a closed state (non-assistance state) in which the game ball can or cannot enter. The opening/closing door is connected to a variable winning drive unit (more specifically, a solenoid) provided on the back side of the play area forming body 80a, and is normally kept in a closed state, and is switched to an open state when an internal lottery results in a transition to an opening/closing execution mode (opening/closing execution state) (a large win: when the result of the transition to a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state) is obtained).

The opening and closing execution mode is a mode to which the mode will shift if a big win is won. The opening manner of the variable prize winning device 82 in the opening and closing execution mode is set so that the door is repeatedly opened for a number of rounds (e.g. 16 rounds or 4 rounds), with one round being the passage of a predetermined time (e.g. 30 seconds) or the winning of a predetermined number of prizes (e.g. 10 prizes).

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given about the variable display unit 252. The variable display unit 252 has a pattern display device 253 that variably displays (variably displays) patterns when a winning entry into the operating port 83a, 83b is triggered. The pattern display device 253 is configured as a liquid crystal display device with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. On the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253, for example, patterns are displayed in a line at the top, middle, and bottom, and these patterns are variably displayed by scrolling in the left and right direction. When a jackpot is won, a predetermined combination of patterns is displayed stationary on a preset pay line, and the game moves to the above-mentioned opening and closing execution mode (special game state or jackpot). The pattern display device 253 does not necessarily have to be a liquid crystal display device, and may be a dot matrix or 7-segment type display device.

The play area forming body 80a is provided with a center frame 95 surrounding the central opening 85. The center frame 95 is fixed to the play area forming body 80a (specifically, a plate body) from its front side, and in this fixed state, it stands up from the front of the play area forming body 80a, so that the gap dimension between the center frame 95 and the glass unit 30 is configured to be smaller than the diameter dimension of the play ball. This prevents the game ball flowing down the play area PE from colliding with the pattern display device 253, and the flow path of the game ball flowing down the play area PE is roughly divided into a route that bypasses the variable display unit 252 (specifically, the center frame 95) from the right side and a route that bypasses it from the left side.

A stage section is formed on the upper surface of the frame section that constitutes the lower part of the center frame 95, where game balls can roll left and right. Game balls that flow in from inlets formed in the left and right frame sections of the center frame 95 are discharged onto the stage section through a warp passage also formed in the center frame 95. The stage section is configured so that game balls that reach the stage section can relatively easily flow into the upper operating port 83a, which contributes to increasing the player's attention to the movement of the game balls on the stage section. In this embodiment, as described above, the central opening 85 is covered by a transparent opening cover 86, and game balls that reach the stage section are restricted from moving toward the rear block 80b (variable display unit 252).

The actuation openings 83a, 83b are positioned closer to the central opening 85 (variable display unit 252). Since a win at the actuation openings 83a, 83b can trigger a transition to a special game state, it is thought that the player will pay attention to whether or not a win will be made at the actuation openings 83a, 83b, and also to the symbol display device 253 to determine whether or not a transition to a special game state will occur. Providing the actuation openings 83a, 83b closer to the variable display unit 252 is a device to concentrate the player's attention on the area around the variable display unit 252.

A play area partitioning member 99 is disposed at the right end of the play area forming body 80a (the rotating tip of the play board unit 80 described later), which defines the play area PE together with the guide rail 100 described later. A stopper member is disposed on the play area partitioning member 99, against which game balls flying along the main display unit 87 and guide rail 100 collide. The stopper member is a buffer member disposed near the tip of the guide rail 100, and game balls that collide with the stopper member have their momentum weakened before flowing down the play area PE. In other words, the stopper member is endowed with a force-reducing function that weakens the momentum of the colliding game balls.

Here, we will provide additional information about the main display unit 87. The main display unit 87 is embedded in the play area partition member 99, and a portion of it is positioned so that it faces the glass unit 30. This facing portion is provided with a main display section D on which a predetermined image or the like is displayed. The main display unit 87 is electrically connected to a main control device, which will be described later, and the display content of the main display section D is controlled by the main control device.

The main display unit D comprises an upper operating port display unit DU that displays the results of a lottery based on winning at the upper operating port 83a, and a lower operating port display unit DL that displays the results of a lottery based on winning at the lower operating port 83b. In the upper operating port display unit DU, a winning at the upper operating port 83a is used as a trigger to display a changing pattern, and the result of the stopping of the changing display is the result of the internal lottery based on the winning at the upper operating port 83a. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning at the upper operating port 83a is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the opening and closing execution mode, the changing display is stopped in the upper operating port display unit DU, and a predetermined pattern corresponding to the jackpot result is displayed as the stopping result, and then the above-mentioned opening and closing execution mode is transitioned to.

In the lower operating port display unit DL, a winning entry into the lower operating port 83b is used as a trigger to display a changing pattern, and the result of the display stopping is the clear display of the result of the internal lottery based on the winning entry into the lower operating port 83b. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning entry into the lower operating port 83b is a winning result corresponding to a jackpot, the display stopping is stopped in the lower operating port display unit DL, a predetermined pattern corresponding to the jackpot result is displayed as the stopping result, and then the above-mentioned opening/closing execution mode is entered according to the result.

Here, based on a win in either of the actuating ports 83a, 83b, a variable display is started in the corresponding actuating port display unit DL, DU, and after the image corresponding to the lottery result is displayed in a static state, one play round corresponds to the period during which the image remains in a static state for a predetermined static display time (static display period or final display period) (until the final display ends). However, one play round is not limited to the above. For example, it is also possible to configure a single display area to be provided, and for the variable display to be performed in that single display area regardless of whether a win occurs in either of the actuating ports 83a, 83b. In this case, it is also possible to count the period during which the variable display is started in that single display area, the variable display is stopped, and then the final display ends as one play round.

In addition to the above two display sections, the main display section D of the main display unit 87 is also provided with a through gate display section DS that displays the lottery results based on winning at the through gate 84. In the through gate display section DS, winning at the through gate 84 is used as a trigger to display the changing patterns, and the result of the stopping of the changing display is displayed as the result of the internal lottery performed based on winning at the through gate 84. If the result of the internal lottery based on winning at the through gate 84 is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric role opening state, a predetermined stopping result is displayed on the through gate display section DS, the changing display is stopped, and then the electric role opening state is entered. In the electric role opening state, the electric role 91 provided in the lower operating port 83b is opened in a predetermined manner.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the number of times that a game ball has passed through the through gate 84 is reserved up to four times, and the main display section D of the main display unit 87 is provided with a reserved number display section that displays the number of reserved balls.

The main display section D described above can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 30 of the front door frame 14, and visibility is guaranteed because the game balls are prevented from moving in front of these various display sections.

Referring again to FIG. 4, below the storage recess 61 (game board unit 80) in the inner frame base body 60, there is provided a game ball launching mechanism 110 that launches game balls into the game area PE based on the operation of the game ball launching handle 45. The game ball launching mechanism 110 mainly comprises a solenoid 111 that launches game balls placed at a predetermined launch waiting position, a launch rail 112 that determines the launch direction of the game balls launched by the solenoid 111, a ball delivery device 113 that supplies game balls to the launch waiting position, and a base plate 114 on which these various components 111-113 are mounted, and the base plate 114 is attached to the inner frame base body 60 via a reinforcing plate described below.

The launch rail 112 is fixed to the base plate 114 in an obliquely inclined state so that it slopes upward toward the game board unit 80. A ball stopper that stops the game balls supplied from the ball sending device 113 in the above-mentioned launch waiting position is disposed near the downstream end (i.e., the lower end) of the launch rail 112. The above-mentioned solenoid 111 is disposed further downstream than the ball stopper.

The solenoid 111 is electrically connected to a power supply and launch control device, which will be described later. Based on the output of an electrical signal from the power supply and launch control device, the output shaft of the solenoid 111 reciprocates in the extension/contraction direction, causing the game ball placed in the launch standby position to be launched toward the game board unit 80, or more specifically, toward the guide rail 100 attached to the game board unit 80.

The guide rail 100, together with the game area partitioning member 99 (see FIG. 5) described later, partitions the game area PE so that the outer shape of the game area PE is approximately circular. The guide rail 100 is composed of an inner rail 101 and an outer rail 102 arranged to face each other with a gap slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, and a guide passage 103 is partitioned and formed by both rails 101 and 102. The guide passage 103 has an entrance portion 104 that opens at the tip side (diagonally downward) of the launch rail 112, and an exit portion 105 located at the top of the game area PE. The game ball launched based on the operation of the solenoid 111 is guided to the game area PE by moving in the order of the launch rail 112 → the guide rail 100 (entrance portion 104 → exit portion 105). In addition, a return prevention member 106 is attached to the front side of the exit portion 105 of the game board unit 80, specifically near the tip of the inner rail 101, to prevent game balls that have reached the game area PE from returning back into the guide passage 103, preventing game balls that have already reached the game area PE from interfering with the launch of subsequent game balls.

The guide rail 100 and the launch rail 112 are arranged so that the entrance portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 face each other diagonally across a gap. Below the gap thus formed, a foul ball passage 55 (see FIG. 3) is arranged. The foul ball passage 55 is integrally molded with the passage forming unit 50 of the front door frame 14. If a game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 110 does not reach the game area PE and returns as a foul ball in the guide passage 103, the foul ball will enter the foul ball passage 55 through the gap. The foul ball passage 55 leads to the lower tray passage on the front door side, and the game ball that enters the foul ball passage 55 is discharged to the lower tray 34 shown in FIG. 1, etc. This suppresses interference between the foul ball and the next game ball to be launched.

The inner frame base body 60 is also provided with multiple locking devices that can be switched between a locked state that prevents the game board unit 80 from being removed from the storage recess 61, and an unlocked state that allows the game board unit 80 to be removed. In the locked state, the locking devices have abutting portions that abut against the front surface of the game board unit 80, and the abutting portions abut against the front surface of the game board unit 80 to prevent the game board unit 80 from being displaced toward the front door frame 14.

A through hole is formed in the inner frame base body 60 to the left of the launch rail 112 (more specifically, the side supporting the front door frame 14) that penetrates the inner frame base body 60 in the front-rear direction, and a passage forming member 121 is arranged to cover this through hole. The passage forming member 121 is screwed to the inner frame base body 60 and has a main body side upper plate passage 122 and a main body side lower plate passage 123. The upstream side of the main body side upper plate passage 122 and the main body side lower plate passage 123 leads to the game ball distribution section described later. In addition, the receiving portion 53 (see FIG. 2) of the passage forming unit 50 attached to the front door frame 14 is inserted below the passage forming member 121, and the front door side upper plate passage is arranged below the main body side upper plate passage 122, and the front door side upper plate passage is arranged below the main body side lower plate passage 123.

In the inner frame base body 60, below the passage forming member 121, a shutter 124 is provided to restrict the outflow of game balls from the upper tray passage 122 on the main body side and the lower tray passage 123 on the main body side. The shutter 124 is supported by the inner frame base body 60 in a state in which it can be switched between a blocking position in which the outlet portion of both passages is narrowed to block the outflow of game balls, and a permitting position in which the outflow of game balls is permitted. In addition, a biasing member that biases the shutter 124 toward the blocking position is attached to the inner frame base body 60, and when the front door frame 14 is opened relative to the inner frame 13, the shutter 124 remains in the blocking position due to the biasing force of the biasing member. This avoids the inconvenience of the stored balls spilling out when the front door frame 14 is opened with game balls stored in the upper tray passage 122 on the main body side or the lower tray passage 123 on the main body side. In contrast, when the front door frame 14 is closed, the shutter 124 is pushed back to the allowable position against the above-mentioned biasing force by the receiving portion 53 provided in the passage forming unit 50 of the front door frame 14. In this state, the main body side upper tray passage 122 and the front door side upper tray passage are connected to the main body side lower tray passage 123 and the front door side lower tray passage, respectively, and the movement of the game balls is permitted.

Next, the rear structure of the inner frame 13 (the inner frame base body 60 and the game board unit 80) will be described with reference to Figures 7 and 8. Figure 8 is a rear view of the inner frame 13.

As shown in Figure 8, a bearing fitting 132 is attached to the pivot base end side (right side in Figure 8) on the back surface of the inner frame base body 60. Bearing portions 133 are formed on the bearing fitting 132 at vertical intervals, and the back pack unit 15 is rotatably attached to the inner frame 13 by these bearing portions 133. In addition, a plurality of fixing levers 134 are provided on the back surface of the inner frame base body 60 for fixing the back pack unit 15 to the inner frame base body 60 in a closed state.

As already explained, a central opening 64 is formed in the bottom portion of the storage recess 61 in the inner frame base body 60 in the thickness direction of the inner frame base body 60 and is open to the back side of the inner frame base body 60, and the central opening 64 is covered from the front side of the inner frame 13 by the game board unit 80 stored in the storage recess 61. Various components such as a control device are mounted on the back of the game board unit 80 (back block 80b), and these various components are exposed to the back side of the inner frame 13 through the central opening 64. Here, the configuration of the back of the game board unit 80 will be explained.

As already explained, the rear block 80b is attached to the rear of the play area forming body 80a. The rear block 80b has a roughly box-shaped base body 251 that is open on the side of the play area forming body 80a, and this base body 251 is fixed to the rear of the play area forming body 80a, thereby integrating the play area forming body 80a and the rear block 80b.

The front side of the base body 251 is an area for arranging the movable performance mechanism and the luminous decorative members, while the rear side is an area for arranging the control device that controls these various components and the variable display unit 252 (pattern display device 253) mentioned above.

More specifically, a portion of the base body 251 protrudes from the rear side of the inner frame base body 60, and the above-mentioned pattern display device 253 (see FIG. 5) and a display control device for driving the pattern display device 253 are attached to this protruding portion. The pattern display device 253 and the display control device are stacked in the front-to-rear direction (thickness direction of the inner frame base body 60) so that the pattern display device is at the front and the display control device is at the rear. Furthermore, the notification/performance control device 143 is mounted on the rear portion of the base body 251, positioned behind the display control device.

The notification/performance control device 143 is equipped with a notification/performance control board that controls audio output, lamp display, and display control device according to instructions from the main control device described below, and the notification/performance control board is housed in a board box 141 made of a transparent resin material or the like.

A main control device unit 160 is provided below the notification/performance control device 143, covering the base body 96 from the rear. The main control device unit 160 has a synthetic resin mounting base 161 fixed to the rear of the game board unit 80 (specifically, the rear block 80b), and a main control device 162 mounted on the mounting base 161. The main control device 162 has a main control board that has the function of controlling the main game (main control circuit) and the function of monitoring the power supply (power outage monitoring circuit), and the main control board is housed in a board box 163 made of a transparent resin material or the like.

The substrate box 163 comprises a box base (front case body) of a roughly rectangular parallelepiped shape and a box cover (rear case body) that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and box cover are connected to each other by a box sealing section 164 as a sealing means so that they cannot be opened, thereby sealing the substrate box 163. A plurality of box sealing sections 164 are provided on the short sides of the substrate box 163, and at least one of them is used to perform the sealing process.

The box sealing section 164 can be of any configuration as long as it is configured to connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner, but the box base and the box cover are connected in an unopenable manner by inserting a locking pin into the locking hole that constitutes the box sealing section 164. The sealing process by the box sealing section 164 prevents unauthorized opening after sealing, and even if unauthorized opening occurs, makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily, and it is possible to perform the sealing process again even after it has been opened once. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting a locking pin into at least one locking hole of the multiple box sealing sections 164. Then, when the board box 163 is opened, such as when a malfunction occurs in the stored main control board or when inspecting the main control board, the connection part between the box sealing section into which the locking pin is inserted and the main body of the board box 163 is cut. This separates the box base and the box cover of the board box 163, and the main control board inside can be removed. If the sealing process is to be performed again, a locking pin is inserted into another locking hole. If a record of the board box 163 being opened is left on the board box 163, unauthorized opening can be easily detected by looking at the board box 163.

The board box 163 and the mounting base 161 are connected by the base seal 165 in an unopenable manner. More specifically, the base seal 165 has a locking hole and a locking pin, just like the box seal 164, and the board box 163 and the mounting base 161 are connected inseparably by inserting the locking pin into the locking hole. This makes it easier to know if the board box 163 has been illegally removed.

In the front part of the base body 251, facing the lower part of the back of the play area forming body 80a, a recovery passage (not shown) is formed that corresponds to the game board openings of the general winning opening 81, the variable winning device 82, and the operating openings 83a and 83b and gathers in one place downstream. As a result, all game balls that win the general winning opening 81 etc. are configured to collect below the game board unit 80 via the recovery passage. In other words, the base body 251 is given the function of recovering game balls that win in various winning openings.

A discharge passage, which will be described later, is provided below the game board unit 80, and game balls that have gathered below the game board unit 80 are led into the discharge passage by the collection passage. The outlet 89 also leads to the discharge passage, and game balls that have not won in any of the winning ports are led into the discharge passage via the outlet 89.

The base body 251 constituting the rear block 80b is also equipped with detection sensors for each of the ball entry sections described above, including a general entry port detection sensor that detects game balls that have entered the general entry port 81, and an operating port detection sensor that detects game balls that have entered the operating ports 83a and 83b, and these various detection sensors form a winning detection mechanism. These various detection sensors are electrically connected to the main control device 162, and each detection sensor outputs detection information (detection signal) to the main control device 162.

Next, the back pack unit 15 will be described with reference to Figures 9 and 10. Figure 9 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and Figure 10 is a front view of the back pack unit 15.

As shown in FIG. 9, the inner frame 13 is covered from the rear by the back pack unit 15. The back pack unit 15 has a back pack 201 as the main body of the back pack unit 15, and a dispensing mechanism unit 202, a discharge passage panel and a control device assembly unit 204 are attached to the back pack 201.

The back pack 201 is molded from a transparent synthetic resin, and as shown in FIG. 10, comprises a base portion 211 to which the payout mechanism portion 202 and the like are attached, and a protective cover portion 212 that protrudes to the rear of the pachinko machine 10 and has a generally rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 212 is closed on the left and right sides and the top, and only the bottom is open, and is large enough to at least surround the variable display unit 252 (see FIG. 9).

An external output terminal board 213 is provided on the top of the base 211. The external output terminal board 213 has various output terminals, which are connected to wiring WH1 that connects the gaming hall's management control device (hall computer HC) and the pachinko machine 10. Various signals output from the external output terminal board 213 (output terminals) of the pachinko machine 10 are transmitted to the hall computer HC via wiring WH1, and the hall computer HC is configured to grasp the state of the pachinko machine 10 and the game situation based on these various signals.

As shown in FIG. 10, the base portion 211 is provided with a pair of upper and lower latch pins 214 at the right end when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the back pack unit 15 is supported rotatably relative to the inner frame 13 by inserting the latch pins 214 into the bearing portion 133 provided on the inner frame 13. The base portion 211 is formed with a plurality of insertion portions through which the fixing levers 134 provided on the inner frame 13 are inserted, and the back pack unit 15 is fixed to the inner frame 13 by abutting the base portion 211 from behind with the fixing levers 134 inserted into the insertion portions.

The payout mechanism 202 is disposed on the base 211 so as to bypass the protective cover 212. The payout mechanism 202 is provided with a tank 221 that is disposed on the top of the back pack 201 and opens upward, and game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 221. A tank rail 222 that gently slopes toward the downstream side is connected to the side of the tank 221, and a case rail 223 that extends in the vertical direction is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 222. A payout device 224 is provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 223. The game balls paid out from the payout device 224 are supplied to a game ball distribution section 225 provided on the base 211 of the back pack 201 through a payout passage (not shown) provided downstream of the payout device 224.

The game ball distribution section 225 has the function of distributing the game balls dispensed from the payout device 224 to either the upper tray 33, the lower tray 34, or the discharge passage described below, and is formed so that its inner opening leads to the upper tray 33 via the above-mentioned main body side upper tray passage 122 and front door side upper tray passage, and its outer opening leads to the lower tray 34 via the main body side lower tray passage 123 and front door side lower tray passage.

The discharge passage panel and control device assembly unit 204 are attached to the lower end of the base portion 211 so as to sandwich the lower end from the front and rear. A discharge passage that is open to the rear is formed on the surface of the discharge passage panel facing the control device assembly unit 204, and the open part of the discharge passage is blocked by the control device assembly unit 204. The discharge passage is formed so as to discharge game balls to the island equipment of the game hall, and the game balls led to the discharge passage from the above-mentioned collection passage etc. are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 by passing through the discharge passage.

The control device assembly unit 204 has a horizontally long mounting base 241, on which a payout control device 242 and a power supply/launch control device 243 are mounted. The payout control device 242 and the power supply/launch control device 243 are stacked one behind the other so that the payout control device 242 is at the rear of the pachinko machine 10.

In the payout control device 242, a payout control board that controls the payout device 224 is housed in a board box 244, and a state return switch 245 provided on the payout control board protrudes outside the board box 244. For example, when the state return switch 245 is pressed in the event of a payout error, such as a ball jam in the payout device 224, the ball jam is cleared.

The power supply/launch control device 243 has a power supply/launch control board housed in a board box 246. The power supply/launch control board generates and outputs the specified power required by various control devices, etc., and also controls the launch of game balls in response to the player's operation of the game ball launch handle 45. Specifically, it controls the drive of the solenoid 111 that constitutes the game ball launch mechanism 110 and the drive of the ball sending device 113.

The power supply/launch control device 243 is also provided with a power supply switch 247. By operating the power supply switch 247, the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 can be switched between an on state (ON state) and a cut-off state (OFF state).

The pachinko machine 10 has a function for storing various data, so that in the unlikely event of a power outage, the state at the time of the power outage is retained, and when the power returns, the state at the time of the power outage can be restored. For example, if the power is cut off in the normal manner, such as when an amusement parlor closes, the state before the power outage is stored and retained. On the other hand, if the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 166 on the main control unit 162, the RAM data is initialized.

These various switches can be operated from the front of the gaming machine by opening the main machine part 12 (inner frame 13) and exposing the back of the inner frame 13. On the other hand, when the opening of the main machine part 12 is restricted by the locking device 75, these various switches cannot be operated from the front of the gaming machine. In other words, the various switches are difficult to operate when the main machine part 12 is closed, making it difficult for someone who does not have a key for the locking device 75 (e.g., a fraudster) to operate them from the front of the gaming machine.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machine 10, a lottery for a jackpot or the like is held based on balls entering actuation ports 83a, 83b, and the lottery results are announced on the pattern display device 253 (display screen 253a) provided on the gaming board unit 80. Therefore, during play, the player's attention is likely to be drawn particularly to the gaming board unit 80 (particularly the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253). In light of this situation, the gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) shown in this embodiment is designed with consideration given to the player, such as ensuring visibility when playing.

Specifically, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 11, when the pachinko machine 10 is installed in an island facility such as an amusement hall, the game board unit 80 (particularly the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253) is configured to be located directly in front of the player's face. In other words, the player's face is configured to be located in an area (specific area SE described below) in front of the glass panel 31 and in front of the pattern display device 253. This makes it easier for the game board unit 80 (particularly the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253) to fit within the field of view of player P.

As already explained, when playing a game, it is necessary to manually operate the game ball launching handle 45 to launch the game ball. For this reason, the distance between the pachinko machine 10 and the player tends to become close. In this embodiment, the first movable performance device 300, which is a light-emitting type movable performance device, is arranged in the part of the front door frame 14 that is above the game board unit 80. Here, although there are individual differences, the spread of a human's field of vision is approximately 180 degrees to 200 degrees in the left-right direction (the range that can be seen by both eyes at the same time is approximately 120 degrees), and approximately 60 degrees upward and approximately 70 degrees downward in the up-down direction. Therefore, when the player is gazing at the pattern display device 253, the first movable performance device 300 is likely to be located in a blind spot outside the player's field of vision. In other words, the first movable performance device 300 is likely to be outside the player's field of vision (the range that can be seen without moving the eyes).

In particular, when the window portion 22 of the front door frame 14 is enlarged in accordance with the increase in size of the game board unit 80, the placement of the first movable performance device 300 becomes more restricted as shown in FIG. 11, increasing the likelihood of the above-mentioned inconvenience occurring. Furthermore, even if the first movable performance device 300 is within the player's field of vision, if the first movable performance device 300 is located near the boundary between inside and outside the field of vision, it becomes difficult to grasp the color and movement, and the visibility level (discrimination level) drops significantly.

For the above reasons, even if the first movable performance device 300 is used to perform a light performance, it may not be able to effectively appeal to the player who is watching the display screen 253a, and the light performance may be overlooked. Therefore, even if the first movable performance device 300 is given a light performance function (a function for informing and performing for the player), there is a concern that it may not function properly. In the first place, if the first movable performance device 300 is given a function for informing other players or hall managers, rather than a function for informing and performing for the player, the above-mentioned inconvenience does not occur, but the above-mentioned inconvenience occurs when the first movable performance device 300 is used as a means for informing and performing for the player. It is certainly possible to eliminate the above-mentioned inconvenience by increasing the distance between the player and the gaming machine, but such a measure may lead to other inconveniences such as a decrease in visibility and operability of the gaming board unit 80.

One of the features of the first movable performance device 300 shown in this embodiment is that measures have been taken to address the above-mentioned inconveniences that arise when the first movable performance device 300 is provided with a light performance function. Below, the first movable performance device 300 in this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 12(a) and 13. Figure 12(a) is a partial cross-sectional view showing the internal structure of the first movable performance device 300 (partial cross-sectional view taken along line A-A in Figure 10), and Figure 13 is an exploded perspective view showing the first movable performance device 300 disassembled into its main components.

(First movable performance device 300)
As shown in Figure 12 (a), the first movable performance device 300 comprises a light-emitting device 301 as a core on which a light source is mounted, and a housing 302 that forms the outer contour of the first movable performance device 300, and is fixed to the frame body 20 and the cover body 21 with the light-emitting device 301 accommodated within the housing 302.

The housing 302 has a cover body 310 made of a colored transparent synthetic resin material. The cover body 310 is semispherical and open upward (see FIG. 12), and the upper open portion is covered by a lid body 320 that functions as an attachment portion to the frame body 20 or the like. By combining the cover body 310 and the lid body 320, a storage space for the light emitting device 301 is defined and formed.

The lid 320 is dish-shaped, and an opening 322 is formed in its bottom 321, connecting the internal space of the lid 320 with the storage space. A relay board 330 is disposed in the bottom 321 so as to cover the opening 322 from the opposite side (above) to the storage area. The light-emitting device 301 is electrically connected to the notification/performance control device 143 via the relay board 330, and performs (operates) a light performance based on a signal from the notification/performance control device 143.

The light emitting device 301 housed in the housing 302 has a light emitting unit 350 as a target for control by the notification/performance control device 143. The light emitting unit 350 is composed of a columnar light emitting block 355 to which a plurality of light emitters 356 (more specifically, LEDs) are attached, and a base 351 to which the light emitting block 355 is fixed. The base 351 has a cylindrical shape extending vertically (see FIG. 12), and is integrated with the housing 302 by fixing an upper flange portion 352 formed at the upper end to the bottom portion 321. In addition, a lower flange portion 353 formed at the lower end functions as a mounting portion to which the light emitting block 355 is attached. The hollow portion of the base 351 is connected to the opening 322, and the light emitting block 355 and the relay board 330 are connected by wiring through the hollow portion and the opening 322.

In this embodiment, the periphery of the light-emitting block 355 other than the portion facing the front of the gaming machine (side and back surfaces: the portions on the side of the central axis CL1 described below) is the arrangement area of the light-emitting body 356. This prevents the light from the light-emitting block 355 from being directly irradiated in front of the gaming machine. More specifically, the irradiation range of the light from the light-emitting unit 350 (light-emitting block 355) is restricted to the rear and diagonally rear of the gaming machine.

The light-emitting device 301 is equipped with a light reflection mechanism that reflects light from the light-emitting block 355 toward the front of the gaming machine. The light reflection mechanism is movable, and the direction of reflected light, i.e., the direction of light from the first movable performance device 300, changes when the light reflection mechanism operates. Hereinafter, the variable light reflection mechanism that diversifies the direction of light irradiation is referred to as the variable mechanism 340.

(Variable mechanism 340)
The variable mechanism 340 comprises a movable body 360 provided with a reflector 364 as a light reflecting means, and a holder member 370 as a holding means for holding the movable body 360, and is integrated with the housing 302 by attaching the holder member 370 to the cover body 320.

First, the configuration for attaching the variable mechanism 340 to the lid 320 will be described. An annular convex portion 323 is formed on the bottom 321 of the lid 320 so as to surround the installation area (upper flange portion 352) of the light-emitting unit 350. The annular convex portion 323 is cylindrical and configured so that its central axis is coaxial with the opening 322 and the light-emitting unit 350 (base 351).

The holder member 370 has a cylindrical portion 371 surrounding the light-emitting unit 350, and is configured so that the inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 371 is equal to the outer diameter of the annular convex portion 323. The holder member 370 is arranged so that the annular convex portion 323 is inserted therein, and the inner surface of the cylindrical portion 371 is in surface contact with the outer surface of the annular convex portion 323. The central axis of the annular convex portion 323 and the central axis of the holder member 370 (cylindrical portion 371) are coaxial, and the holder member 370 is held by the cover body 320 in a state in which rotation about the central axis CL1 is permitted. Note that the detailed configuration of the holding structure is arbitrary as long as the holder member 370 can be rotatably held.

A motor 381 is disposed on the bottom 321 of the lid 320 as a drive unit for rotating the holder member 370. The motor 381 is connected to the notification/performance control device 143 via the relay board 330, and operates based on a drive signal from the notification/performance control device 143. The drive force of the motor 381 is transmitted to the holder member 370, causing the holder member 370 to rotate about the central axis CL1.

The cylindrical portion 371 of the holder member 370 is formed so that its lower end is at the same height as the lower end of the base 351 of the light-emitting unit 350, and the light-emitting block 355 protrudes downward from the area surrounded by the holder member 370. This prevents the light from the light-emitting block 355 from being blocked by the holder member 370.

A pair of left and right extensions 372 are formed on the lower end of the holder member 370, extending to the same side (downward) as the light-emitting block 355. The extensions 372 face each other across the light-emitting unit 350 (more specifically, the central axis CL1), and a shaft 373 is fixed so as to straddle the extensions 372.

The movable body 360 has a main body 361 made up of long plates arranged side by side (see FIG. 12), and a bearing hole 362 through which the shaft 373 is inserted is formed at the middle position of the main body 361. The bearing hole 362 and the shaft 373 engage with each other, so that the movable body 360 is held by the holder member 370 in a state in which rotation (posture change) around the shaft 373 is permitted.

The reflector 364 is disposed at one end of the main body 361, and the weight 363 is disposed at the other end of the main body 361. The weight of the weight 363 is set so that the center of gravity GP1 of the movable body 360 is closer to the other end than the shaft 373 (rotation center). By shifting the rotation center and the center of gravity GP1, the movable body 360 tilts so that the reflector 364 is on the upper side and the weight 363 is on the lower side.

Here, a stopper portion 366 is formed on the main body portion 361 of the movable body 360, which abuts against the holder member 370 (the lower end of the cylindrical portion 371) to prevent further rotation. The state in which the stopper portion 366 abuts against the lower end of the cylindrical portion 371 and the movable body 360 is tilted obliquely is the standby state of the movable body 360. In this state, the center of gravity GP1 is off the central axis CL1.

When a drive signal is input from the notification/performance control device 143 to the motor 381, the holder member 370 starts to rotate around the central axis CL1. Following this, the movable body 360 held by the holder member 370 also rotates.

In the initial stage when rotation begins from a standby state (stationary state), the rotation speed is slow due to resistance such as friction, but as rotation continues, it accelerates and the rotation speed gradually increases. After the rotation speed reaches a predetermined speed, it transitions to steady rotation. At this time, as the rotation speed increases, the centrifugal force generated in the movable body 360 also increases. As the centrifugal force increases in this way, weight 363 rises and reflector 364 descends against gravity, and the inclination ANG1 of movable body 360 relative to the horizontal plane gradually decreases.

When the rotation speed of the movable body 360 slows down due to, for example, the motor 381 being stopped, the centrifugal force acting on the movable body 360 decreases. As the centrifugal force decreases in this manner, the weight 363 descends and the reflector 364 rises due to gravity, and the inclination ANG1 of the movable body 360 relative to the horizontal plane gradually increases.

Here, taking into account the operating mode of the variable mechanism 340, the flow of the light effect by the first movable effect device 300 will be explained with reference to Fig. 12(b) and Fig. 14. Fig. 12(b) is a timing chart showing the flow of the light effect, and Fig. 14 is a schematic diagram showing the direction of light irradiation in each state.

As shown in FIG. 12(b), when the light effect starts at timing t1, output of a light emission signal (power supply) to the light emitter 356 of the light-emitting unit 350 starts, and output of a drive signal to the motor 381 starts. This causes light from the light-emitting unit 350 to be irradiated forward of the gaming machine by the reflector 364 of the movable body 360.

The reflecting surface 365 of the reflector 364 is curved and convex on the side opposite the center of rotation, suppressing the diffusion of the reflected light. In other words, the light from the light-emitting unit 350 is irradiated in the direction of the reflecting surface 365, with the light being prevented from spreading by the reflecting surface 365. In other words, the reflector 364 (reflecting surface 365) has the function of determining the irradiation direction (optical axis) of the light from the first movable performance device 300.

The rotation speed gradually increases from the time t1 until the time t2 when a predetermined period has elapsed. During the predetermined period, the number of rotations of the movable body 360 is set to be at least greater than a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, once). In this embodiment, the movable body 360 is a rotating type, but by configuring the movable body 360 to rotate at least once during the above-mentioned predetermined period, it is ensured that light is emitted toward the front of the gaming machine at least once in the first irradiation state described below.

The light irradiation mode from timing t1 to timing t2 will now be described with reference to FIG. 14(a). During this period, the reflector 364 (optical axis defined by the reflector) faces diagonally downward. Therefore, the light from the first movable performance device 300 is irradiated diagonally downward. Specifically, the light irradiated from the light-emitting unit 350 is irradiated in the horizontal direction, but the direction is changed by the reflector 364 located on its extension. The direction of the reflector 364 is defined so that the light irradiation direction passes through a specific area SE in front of the pattern display device 253 (display screen 253a).

As already explained, the specific area SE is the area where the head HD (more specifically, the eyes) of the player P is expected to be located. For this reason, the light to the specific area SE is irradiated towards the player P. Hereinafter, the state in which the movable body 360 is tilted and light is irradiated towards the specific area SE is referred to as the first irradiation state. In the first irradiation state, light is irradiated towards the player P, so the player can understand that light is being irradiated.

After that, at the timing ta2 when the rotation speed increases and reaches a predetermined speed, as shown in FIG. 14(b), the tilt of the movable body 360 decreases due to the centrifugal force described above, and its posture changes to be approximately horizontal. As a result, the direction of light irradiation becomes approximately horizontal, and irradiation of light toward the specific area SE is avoided. In other words, the light from the first movable performance device 300 passes over the head of the player P, and irradiation of light toward the player P is avoided. Hereinafter, the state in which irradiation of light toward the specific area SE is avoided (the state in which the direction of light irradiation has changed to the outside of the gaming machine from the first irradiation state) is referred to as the second irradiation state.

Even in the second irradiation state, the player P can visually confirm that the first movable performance device 300 is blinking. However, in this case, the amount of light that reaches the player P's eyes is less than in the first irradiation state. This prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable, such as being too dazzling, even when looking directly at the first movable performance device 300. In this embodiment, the light is irradiated through the curved cover body 310, and the light is diffused as it passes through the cover body 310. Therefore, when the first movable performance device 300 is looked directly at in the second irradiation state, the player is given the impression that the first movable performance device 300 is blinking.

After the first movable performance device 300 enters the second irradiation state, the light performance continues in the second irradiation state for a period longer than the period of the light performance in the first irradiation state. In other words, the output of the light emission signal (power supply) to the light-emitting unit 350 continues until the timing of t3, when the light performance ends. When the output of the light emission signal stops at the timing of t3, the light-emitting unit 350 turns off. After that, the output of the drive signal to the motor 381 stops at the timing of t4.

When the motor 381 stops, the rotational speed of the movable body 360 and the holder member 370 drops rapidly due to resistance such as friction, and at the time t5, the return to the standby state is completed. However, since the light-emitting unit 350 has already been turned off at the time t3, no light is emitted toward the player during this return process.

In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is configured such that a part of the main machine section 12 (front door frame 14) bulges out towards the front side of the pachinko machine 10 when the machine is installed in an island facility in an amusement hall, and a second movable performance device 400, which is a movable performance device, is disposed in this bulging portion. Here, the configuration of the second movable performance device 400 will be described with reference to Figures 2 and 15. Figure 15(a) is a partially enlarged view of the pachinko machine 10 as seen from the front, and Figure 15(b) is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first movable performance device 300 (a partial cross-sectional view taken along line B-B in Figure 15(a)).

(Second movable performance device 400)
As shown in FIG. 2, a bulging portion 435 that bulges out in front of the game is formed in the portion of the cover body 21 of the front door frame 14 that is located above the window portion 22. The bulging amount of the bulging portion 435 gradually increases from both the left and right ends toward the center, and the bulging portion 435 bulges out in a convex manner in front of the game machine. As shown in FIG. 15(1), a storage portion 436 that stores the second movable performance device 400 is formed in the center portion of the bulging portion 435, more specifically, in the portion behind the first movable performance device 300 that constitutes a part of the annular illumination portion 24. In other words, the bulging portion 435 stores two game machines, with the first movable performance device 300 on the front side and the second movable performance device 400 on the rear side.

The storage section 436 is concave and open upward, and a part of the second movable performance device 400 is exposed through the open portion. The second movable performance device 400 has a decorative body 410 with a pattern or other decoration on the outer periphery. The decorative body 410 is held in a state in which it can rotate back and forth around the rotation center axis CL2 by a holding section 438 formed on the side wall section 437 of the storage section 436. By rotating around this rotation center axis CL2, the decorative body 410 can move between a waiting position where it is prevented from protruding from the storage section 436 and a performance position where it protrudes from the storage section 436 to the outside (upward) of the gaming machine.

Three surfaces are formed on the outer periphery of the decorative body 410, aligned in the direction of rotation of the decorative body 410. Specifically, a first flat surface portion 411 and a second flat surface portion 412 are formed, and a curved surface portion 413 is sandwiched between the flat surfaces 411, 412, and is formed so that the cross section is roughly fan-shaped. The key portion of the fan-shaped decorative body 410 is the holding point by the holding portion 438, and the central axis of rotation CL2 and the center of gravity GP2 of the decorative body 410 are misaligned.

As shown in FIG. 15(b1), when the decorative body 410 is placed in the standby position, the second flat surface 412 abuts against the rear wall 439 of the storage section 436, preventing the decorative body 410 from rotating under its own weight. In other words, the rear wall 439 functions as a stopper. In this state, the first flat surface 411 is located on approximately the same plane as the upper surface of the frame body 20, and the open portion of the storage section 436 is blocked by the first flat surface 411. The curved surface section 413 remains within the storage section 436, making it impossible to see the curved surface section 413 from the outside.

The second movable performance device 400 is provided with a solenoid 420 that constitutes a drive means for the decorative body 410. The solenoid 420 is connected to the notification/performance control device 143, and is configured to operate based on a signal from the notification/performance control device 143. When a performance is to be performed by the second movable performance device 400, a drive signal is output to the notification/performance control device 143 to excite the solenoid 420. When the solenoid 420 is excited, the decorative body 410 is pushed by the plunger of the solenoid 420, causing the decorative body 410 to rotate in a predetermined direction.

As shown in FIG. 15(b), when the decorative body 410 reaches the performance position, the protrusion 415 formed on the second flat portion 412 of the decorative body 410 hits the stopper portion 440 provided in the storage portion 436. This prevents further rotation in the specified direction. In this state, the curved portion 413 protrudes from the storage portion 436, allowing the curved portion 413 to be seen from the front of the gaming machine. Note that the decorative body 410 has a built-in light-emitting element (LED), and when a performance is performed using the second movable performance device 400, light from the light-emitting element is irradiated through the curved portion 413 to the front side of the gaming machine. By illuminating the decorative body 410 in this manner, the change in appearance of the second movable performance device 400 is emphasized.

When the performance by the decorative body 410 is completed, the output of the drive signal to the solenoid 420 is stopped, and the solenoid 420 is de-energized. This causes the decorative body 410 to return from the performance position to the standby position due to its own weight, etc. (see FIG. 15(b) → FIG. 15(a)). Incidentally, a biasing means such as a spring may be provided on the second movable performance device 400, and the biasing force of the biasing means may be used to encourage the movement of the decorative body 410 to the standby position.

(Electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10)
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The main control board 601 provided in the main control device 162 is equipped with an MPU 602. The MPU 602 is an element that incorporates a ROM 603 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 602, a RAM 604 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 603, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as random number generators, and the like. Note that some of the functions of the MPU 602, such as the functions of the ROM 603 and the RAM 604, may be configured to be provided as separate elements.

The MPU 602 has an input port and an output port. The input side of the MPU 602 is connected to a power outage monitoring board 605 provided in the main control unit 162, a dispensing control unit 242, various detection sensors, and the like. The power outage monitoring board 605 is connected to the power supply and launch control unit 243, and power is supplied to the MPU 602 via the power outage monitoring board 605.

As part of the various detection sensors, a detection sensor 391a for detecting winning at the general winning port 81, a detection sensor 391b for detecting winning at the variable winning device 82, a detection sensor 391c for detecting winning at the variable winning device 82, a detection sensor 391d for detecting winning at the upper operating port 83a, a detection sensor 391e for detecting winning at the lower operating port 83b, and a detection sensor 391f for detecting winning at the through gate 84 are connected, and the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 judges winning at each ball entry section (ball entry judgment). In addition, the MPU 602 executes a lottery for generating a jackpot based on winning at the upper operating port 83a and the lower operating port 83b, and executes a lottery for generating a support based on winning at the through gate 84.

The output side of the MPU 602 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 605, the payout control device 242, and the notification/presentation control device 143. The payout control device 242 outputs a prize ball command based on the winning judgment result for the winning ball entry section such as the above-mentioned operation port 83a, 83b, etc. In this case, when the prize ball command is output, the command information storage area 625 of the ROM 603 is referenced. Then, when a winning ball is identified in the general winning port 81, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is output, when a winning ball is identified in the variable winning device 82, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 15 game balls is output, when a winning ball is identified in the upper operation port 83a, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 3 game balls is output, and when a winning ball is identified in the lower operation port 83b, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 4 game balls is output.

Various commands, such as a change command, a type command, a change end command, an opening command, and an ending command, are output from the main control device 162 to the notification and performance control device 143. In this case, when outputting these various commands, the command information storage area 625 of the ROM 603 is referenced. Details of these various commands will be explained later. Each of the above commands is configured as a predetermined number of bytes of information, and various information is included as the predetermined number of bytes of information.

Also, the output side of the MPU 602 is connected to a variable winning drive section that opens and closes the opening and closing body (e.g., shutter member 88) of the variable winning device 82, an electric role drive section that opens and closes the electric role 91 of the lower operating port 83b, and the main display unit 87. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 601, and the MPU 602 controls the drive of the various drive sections through these driver circuits.

In other words, in the opening and closing execution mode, the MPU 602 controls the driving of the variable winning drive unit so that the variable winning device 82 opens and closes. Also, if the support lottery for the electric role device 91 is won, the MPU 602 controls the driving of the electric role device drive unit so that the electric role device 91 opens and closes. Also, the MPU 602 controls the display of the main display unit of the main display unit 87.

Furthermore, an external output terminal board 213 is connected to the output side of the MPU 602, and information regarding ball entry into various entry areas and lottery results such as jackpots are output via this external output terminal board 213 to the management and control device (hall computer HC) on the gaming hall side. This makes it possible for the hall computer HC to grasp the state of the pachinko machine 10 and the game situation, etc.

The power failure monitoring board 605 relays between the main control board 601 and the power supply and launch control device 243, and is provided with the function of monitoring the stable DC voltage of 24 V, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply and launch control device 243. The payout control device 242 controls the payout of prize balls and loan balls using the payout device 224 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 162.

The power supply and launch control device 243 is connected to a commercial power supply (external power supply) in, for example, an amusement facility. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, it generates the operating power required for the main control board 601, the payout control device 242, etc., and supplies the generated operating power through a specified power path. The power supply and launch control device 243 is also responsible for controlling the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 110, which is driven when specified launch conditions are met.

The notification/performance control device 143 is provided with a notification/performance control board equipped with an MPU. The MPU has a ROM that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU, a RAM that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM, and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data input/output circuit. Note that it is not essential that the ROM and RAM are integrated into a single chip for the MPU, and each may be integrated into a separate chip. The MPU of the notification/performance control device 143 drives and controls the lamp unit 24, speaker unit 27, movable performance devices 300, 400, etc. installed in the front door frame 14 based on various commands input from the main control device 162, and also controls the display control device 142.

The display control device 142 executes display control of the pattern display device 253 based on commands input from the notification/performance control device 143. In this case, the notification/performance control device 143 determines the variable display mode of the patterns on the pattern display device 253 (for example, whether or not a reach has occurred and the contents of the reach performance, etc.) and the stationary display mode of the patterns (the type of pattern combination that will finally be displayed stationary when the variable display ends) based on various commands input from the main control device 162.

(Regarding various counters)
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

The MPU 602 uses various counter information during play to perform lottery for jackpot occurrence, setting of the display of the main display unit 87 (main display section D), and general setting of the pattern display of the pattern display device 253. Specifically, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 17, it uses a jackpot random number counter C1 used for lottery for jackpot occurrence, a jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the type of jackpot such as a guaranteed jackpot result or a normal jackpot result, a reach random number counter C3 used for a reach lottery when the pattern display device 253 misses and changes, a random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a change type counter CS that determines the change display time of the pattern in the operation port display section DL, DU of the main display unit 87 and the change display time of the pattern in the pattern display device 253. In addition, it uses an electric role opening counter C4 used for lottery for whether or not the electric role 91 of the lower operation port 83b is in an electric role opening state.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after it reaches its maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 631 set in a specified area of the RAM 604. In the lottery counter buffer 631, information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the reserved ball storage area 632, which serves as an acquired information storage means, when a win occurs in the operation port 83a, 83b.

The reserved ball storage area 632 comprises a reserved area RE for the operating port and an execution area AE. The reserved area RE comprises a first area Ra1, a second area Ra2, a third area Ra3, a fourth area Ra4, a fifth area Ra5, a sixth area Ra6, a seventh area Ra7, and an eighth area Ra8. The numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the lottery counter buffer 631 is stored as reserved information in one of the areas Ra1 to Ra8 according to the winning history of the operating ports 83a and 83b. The reserved information corresponds to special information.

When multiple consecutive wins occur at the actuation ports 83a and 83b, the first area Ra1 to the eighth area Ra8 store the numerical information in chronological order in the following order: first area Ra1 → second area Ra2 → third area Ra3 → fourth area Ra4 → fifth area Ra5 → sixth area Ra6 → seventh area Ra7 → eighth area Ra8. By providing eight areas Ra1 to Ra8 in this way, up to four winning histories for each actuation port 83a and 83b (a total of eight) can be reserved and stored. In addition, the reserved ball storage area 632 is provided with a total reserved number storage area, which stores information for specifying the number of reserved information acquired and stored based on wins at the actuation ports 83a and 83b.

The execution area AE is an area for moving the values stored in the first area Ra1 of the reserve area RE when the variable display of the operation port display sections DL and DU of the main display unit 87 begins, and when one game round begins, a win/loss determination is made based on the various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

For more details on each counter, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to increment by one within the range of 0 to 299, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e. 299). In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 goes around once, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 299). The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 when a game ball enters the operation port 83a, 83b.

The random number value that will result in a jackpot win is stored as a win/loss table (win/loss information group) in the win/loss table storage area 621, which serves as a win/loss information group storage means in the ROM 603. The contents of the win/loss table will now be explained.

In the win/lose table, address information consisting of binary information and jackpot numerical information also consisting of binary information are set in a one-to-one correspondence. Specifically, ten types of address information are set, expressed in decimal, from "1" to "10", and ten types of jackpot numerical information are set, expressed in decimal, from "7", "36", "67", "100", "131", "164", "195", "223", "241", and "272", and these address information and jackpot numerical information are set in a one-to-one correspondence. The value of each jackpot numerical information is included in the numerical range of random number information that can be updated in the jackpot random number counter C1, from "0" to "299".

Here, in this pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery modes in the winning/losing lottery means. The number of jackpot numerical information referenced in the low probability mode is different from the number of jackpot numerical information referenced in the high probability mode, with the former being smaller than the latter. Specifically, in the low probability mode, only jackpot numerical information with address information "1" is referenced when the winning/losing lottery is performed, and in the high probability mode, jackpot numerical information corresponding to all address information is referenced when the winning/losing lottery is performed. In other words, in the low probability mode, there is one numerical information that will result in a jackpot win, and in the high probability mode, there are 10 numerical information, which is more than in the low probability mode. As a result, the probability of winning a jackpot in the low probability mode is 1/300, while the probability of winning a jackpot in the high probability mode is 1/30, and the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a jackpot than the low probability mode. Note that as long as the winning probability is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers that will win the jackpot are arbitrary.

The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by one within the range of 0 to 29, and returns to 0 after it reaches its maximum value (i.e., 29). The jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 when a game ball enters the operation port 83a or 83b.

The allocation destination of the game result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as an allocation table (allocation information group) in an allocation table storage area serving as an allocation information group storage means in ROM 603. The allocation destination is set to a normal jackpot result (low probability corresponding special game result) and a special jackpot result (high probability corresponding special game result).

A normal jackpot result is one in which, after the open/close execution mode ends, the win/lose lottery mode becomes a low probability mode, and the support mode becomes a high frequency support mode until the number of plays reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 plays). After the end reference number has elapsed, the mode transitions to a low frequency support mode.

The probability of a jackpot result is a jackpot result in which, after the open/close execution mode ends, the win/lose lottery mode becomes a high probability mode and the support mode becomes a high frequency support mode. This high frequency support mode continues until the lottery result in the win/lose lottery becomes a jackpot state and the mode transitions to the open/close execution mode.

In the distribution table, "0-9" corresponds to the normal jackpot result, and "10-29" corresponds to the special jackpot result, but the distribution of these numbers is arbitrary.

In this embodiment, a difference is provided so that allocation based on winning into the lower actuation port 83b is more advantageous to the player than allocation based on winning into the upper actuation port 83a. Specifically, the probability variable jackpot result is roughly divided into two results with different degrees of advantage, specifically, a 16R probability variable jackpot result with the number of rounds being "16" and a 4R probability variable jackpot result with the number of rounds being "4", and when a probability variable jackpot result is obtained by allocation based on winning into the lower actuation port 83b, it is more likely to result in a 16R probability variable jackpot result than when a probability variable jackpot result is obtained by allocation based on winning into the upper actuation port 83a.

The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 238, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 238). The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 when a game ball enters the operation port 83a, 83b. Then, it is determined whether or not to generate a reach based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 603. However, in a game round that transitions to the open/close execution mode, the MPU 602 determines whether or not to generate a reach, regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. Note that the number of the reach random number counter C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display is the same in each game state, but may be set individually according to each game state. For example, the number of the reach random number counter C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display may be set to be greater when the support mode is the high frequency support mode than when it is the low frequency support mode.

Here, we will provide additional explanation regarding the configuration related to the changing display of the patterns for each game round and the contents of said changing display. In the following explanation, we will refer to Figures 18 and 19 as appropriate. Figures 18 and 19 are schematic diagrams for explaining the display contents on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253.

The display control device 142 is provided with a character ROM. The character ROM prestores data for nine main patterns numbered "1" to "9" (see Figs. 19(a) to (i)) and data for sub-patterns not numbered (see Fig. 19(j)).

As shown in FIG. 18(a), three pattern rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are set on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253, which are an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row. Each pattern row Z1 to Z3 is configured with main patterns and sub-patterns arranged in a predetermined order. Then, on the display screen 253a, the patterns of each of these pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed variably, scrolling periodically in a predetermined direction (specifically, from right to left).

In the upper pattern row Z1, nine main patterns from "1" to "9" are arranged in descending numerical order, with one sub-pattern between each main pattern. In the lower pattern row Z3, nine main patterns from "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, with one sub-pattern between each main pattern. In other words, the upper pattern row Z1 and the lower pattern row Z3 are composed of 18 patterns. In contrast, in the middle pattern row Z2, nine main patterns from "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, with a main pattern of "4" additionally arranged between the main pattern of "9" and the main pattern of "1", with one sub-pattern between each of these main patterns. In other words, the middle pattern row Z2 alone is composed of 20 patterns, with 10 main patterns arranged.

As shown in FIG. 18(b), the display screen 253a is designed to display three symbols per symbol row, resulting in a total of nine symbols being displayed in a 3×3 fashion. Five active lines, namely the left line L1, the middle line L2, the right line L3, the downward-right line L4, and the upward-right line L5, are set on the display screen 253a. The display stops in the order of the upper symbol row Z1, the lower symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2. If the display of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 ends with a predetermined combination of symbols (for example, a combination of symbols with the same number) formed on any of the active lines, a jackpot video is displayed to indicate the occurrence of a normal jackpot result or a guaranteed jackpot result.

In consideration of the fact that the variable display of each pattern row is stopped as described above, the upper pattern row Z1 can be called the first pattern row (or first picture row), the lower pattern row Z3 can be called the second pattern row (or second picture row), and the middle pattern row Z2 can be called the third pattern row (or third picture row).

Of the above main symbols, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to "specific symbols", and when a special jackpot result occurs, for example, a combination of the same specific symbols is displayed as a part of the result. Also, the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to "non-specific symbols", and when a special jackpot result occurs or when a normal jackpot result occurs, for example, a combination of the same non-specific symbols is displayed as a part of the result of the special jackpot result.

The manner in which the pattern display device 253 changes the patterns is not limited to the above and is arbitrary, and the number of pattern rows, the direction of the changing pattern display in the pattern rows, the number of patterns in each pattern row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. For example, multiple pattern rows can be set to be arranged horizontally, and the direction of the changing pattern display in the pattern rows can be set to be vertical.

In the display screen 253a, a reserve display area NE is set below the variable display area ME, which includes the variable display area for the upper pattern row, the variable display area for the middle pattern, and the variable display area for the lower pattern. The reserve display area NE is provided with a reserve number display area Da, which is partitioned so that unit reserve display areas Da1 to Da8, the same number as the maximum number of reserved balls when game balls enter the operation ports 83a and 83b, are lined up in the left-right direction.

Specifically, when game balls enter the actuation ports 83a and 83b, the maximum number of reserved balls is four each (eight in total), and correspondingly, the reserved number display area Da is set with a first unit reserved display area Da1, a second unit reserved display area Da2, a third unit reserved display area Da3, a fourth unit reserved display area Da4, a fifth unit reserved display area Da5, a sixth unit reserved display area Da6, a seventh unit reserved display area Da7, and an eighth unit reserved display area Da8. Reserve icons MP are displayed in these unit reserved display areas as predetermined reserved display images.

For example, if the number of reserved balls is 0 when the game ball enters the operating port 83a, 83b and the current winning brings the number of reserved balls (total number of reserved balls) to 1, the reserved icon MP is displayed only in the first unit reserved display area Da1. If the number of reserved balls becomes 4 when the game ball enters the operating port 83a, 83b, the reserved icon MP is displayed in the first unit reserved display area Da1 to the fourth unit reserved display area Da4. Note that Figure 18(b) shows an example where the number of reserved balls is 3.

The pending display area NE also has an execution target display area Db, which is arranged side-by-side with the pending number display area Da (specifically, the first unit pending display area Da1) and displays a pending icon MP corresponding to the number of plays to be executed (being executed). In this embodiment, the execution target display area Db is arranged to the left of the pending number display area Da, but the positional relationship between these is arbitrary. For example, the execution target display area Db may be arranged to the right of the pending number display area Da.

When a game round ends and the next game round begins, the hold icon MP displayed in the hold number display area Da (specifically, the first unit hold display area Da1) shifts (moves) to the execution target display area Db. If there are other hold icons MP displayed in the hold number display area Da, these hold icons MP will also shift to the (adjacent) unit hold display area closer to the execution target display area Db. For ease of explanation, hereafter, the side closer to the execution target display area Db will be referred to as the "downstream side" and the side opposite the execution target display area Db as the "upstream side."

Here, the term "reach display" (reach state) refers to a display state that makes the player believe that the game machine is in a state where the stop display result after the variable display is likely to be a special display result after the variable display has started and before the stop display result is derived and displayed, in a game machine that has a pattern display device 253 (display screen 253a) capable of displaying a variable (or changeable) pattern (picture), and in which the stop display result after the variable display can be a special display result in a game round where the game result corresponds to the open/close execution mode.

In other words, it is a display state in which the patterns of some of the multiple pattern rows displayed on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 are stopped to display a combination of reach patterns that may result in a combination of patterns corresponding to the occurrence of the open/close execution mode, and in this state, the patterns of the remaining pattern rows are displayed in a variable manner.

More specifically, as a preliminary step to terminating the display of changing patterns, a reach line is formed by displaying a combination of reach patterns that may result in a combination of patterns corresponding to the occurrence of an open/close execution mode on a preset effective line in the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253, and while the reach line is formed, the display of changing patterns is performed using the final stopped pattern sequence.

To explain the display contents on the display screen 253a in more detail, first the display of the changing patterns in the upper pattern row is terminated, and then when the display of the changing patterns in the lower pattern row is terminated, a reach line is formed by the main patterns with numbers attached that make up the winning pattern combination being displayed stationary on one of the active lines, and when the reach line is formed, the display of changing patterns in the middle pattern row is performed, resulting in a reach display. Then, when a jackpot occurs, the display of changing patterns in the middle pattern row is terminated by causing the main patterns that form the reach line and the main patterns with numbers attached that make up the winning pattern combination to be displayed stationary on the reach line.

The reach display also includes a reach effect in which, while a reach symbol combination is displayed as described above, the remaining symbol rows are changed and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image in the background screen, and a reach effect is performed by reducing or hiding the reach symbol combination and then displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen 253a. In addition, when a reach display is being performed or before a reach display, the decision of whether or not to perform a preview display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character may be made using the reach random number counter C3 or another counter.

The variation type counter CS is configured to increment by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, and return to 0 after it reaches a maximum value (i.e., 198). The variation type counter CS is used by the MPU 602 to determine the variation display time in the operating port display sections DL and DU of the main display unit 87 and the variation display time of the pattern in the pattern display device 253. The variation type counter CS is updated once each time the normal processing described below is executed, and is also repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the normal processing. The buffer value of the variation type counter CS is then obtained when determining the variation pattern at the start of the pattern variation by the pattern display device 253.

When determining the variable display time on the symbol display device 253 and main display unit 87 (specifically, the operation port display sections DL and DU), the buffer values of the reach random number counter C3 and the variable type counter CS, and the variable display time table storage area 623 in the ROM 603 are referenced. Also, the MPU 602 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE to determine the stop result on the result display section for the operation port, and when making this determination, a stop result determination table stored in the ROM 603 is used.

The electric role release counter C4 is configured to be incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 249, and to return to 0 after it reaches the maximum value (i.e., 249). The electric role release counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the electric role reserve area 633 of the RAM 604 when the game ball enters the through gate 84. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is held to determine whether or not the electric role 91 should be controlled to an open state based on the stored value of the electric role release counter C4. For example, if C4 = 0 to 199, the electric role 91 is controlled to an open state, and if C4 = 200 to 249, the electric role 91 is not controlled to an open state.

(Regarding various processes executed by the main control device 162)
Next, a description will be given of the timer interrupt processing and normal processing executed by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 to progress the game in each game round. In addition to the timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 602 also executes main processing that is started when the power is turned on and NMI interrupt processing that is started by inputting a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal), but a description of these various types of processing will be omitted.

(Timer interrupt processing)
First, the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 20. This process is started by the MPU 602 periodically (for example, every 2 msec).

In step S101, a process for reading the various winning detection sensors is executed. That is, the state of the various winning detection sensors connected to the main control unit 162 is read, the state of these detection sensors is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Then, in step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is then stored in the corresponding buffer area (lottery counter buffer 631) of RAM 604.

In the next step S103, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric device release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric device release counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their maximum values, they are each cleared to 0. The updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 604 (lottery counter buffer 631).

In the next step S104, a winning process for through is executed in response to a win at the through gate 84. In the winning process for through, it is determined whether or not a winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604, and if the flag is stored, the value of the electric role release counter C4 updated in the above step S103 is stored in the electric role holding area 633, provided that the number of reserved roles stored in the electric role holding area is less than four. Then, if a winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 635, the winning detection flag is erased and the winning process for the through gate is terminated.

After executing the winning process for the through gate in step S104, the process proceeds to step S105, where the winning process for the actuation port associated with the winning at actuation port 83a, 83b is executed, and the timer interrupt process ends.

(Winning process for the operating port)
Here, the winning process for the operating port will be described with reference to the flowcharts of Figures 21 and 22.

In step S201, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the upper operating port 83a (a prize). If it is determined that the game ball has entered the upper operating port 83a, the process proceeds to step S202, and a prize ball command is set to cause the payout control device 242 to pay out three game balls.

In the next step S203, an external signal setting process is performed to output information indicating that a gaming ball has entered the upper operating port 83a to the hall computer HC on the gaming hall side. This allows the hall computer HC to understand that a ball has entered the upper operating port 83a. After that, in step S204, an information acquisition process is performed to store the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, etc., and this winning process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has not entered the upper operating port 83a, the process proceeds to step S205. In step S205, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the lower operating port 83b. If it is determined that the game ball has entered the lower operating port 83b, the process proceeds to step S205, where a prize ball command is set to the payout control device 242 to pay out four game balls. The prize ball command set in steps S202 and S205 is sent to the payout control device 242 in the external output process S401 of the normal process described below.

In the next step S207, an external signal setting process is performed to output information indicating that a game ball has entered the lower operating port 83b to the hall computer HC in the game hall. This allows the hall computer HC to understand that a ball has entered the lower operating port 83b. After that, in step S204, information acquisition process is performed, and this winning process is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in both steps S201 and S205, i.e., if no ball has entered either the upper operating port 83a or the lower operating port 83b, the winning process ends.

Here, the information acquisition process of step S204 will be described with reference to FIG. 22.

(Information Acquisition Processing)
In the information acquisition process, first, in step S301, it is determined whether the start pending memory number N stored in the reserved number storage area FE of the reserved ball storage area 632, specifically, the start pending memory number N related to the operating port that triggered the information acquisition process among the upper operating port 83a and the lower operating port 83b, is less than the upper limit value (in this embodiment, "4") or not. If the start pending memory number N is the upper limit value, the information acquisition process is terminated as it is, and if it is less than the upper limit value, in step S302, the start pending memory number N of the corresponding operating port is incremented by 1, and in step S303, the total reserved number stored in the reserved number storage area FE (hereinafter referred to as the common reserved number CRN) is incremented by 1.

In the following step S304, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS updated in the above step S103 are stored in the first free memory area of the reserve area RE for the operating port, that is, the memory area corresponding to the common reserve number CRN incremented by 1 in the above step S302. After executing the storage process, proceed to step S305.

In step S305, a display update process is executed for the reserved number display section of the main display unit 87 (main display section D). In the display update process, if the current winning destination is the upper operating port 83a, the display in the reserved number display section for the upper operating port is updated, and if the current winning destination is the lower operating port 83b, the display in the reserved number display section for the lower operating port is updated.

The upper actuation port reservation number display is made up of four LEDs, and is configured so that the number of lit LEDs matches the reservation number associated with the upper actuation port 83a. If the reservation number associated with the upper actuation port 83a increases as a result of the current win, the number of lit LEDs is increased accordingly. The lower actuation port reservation number display is similarly made up of four LEDs, and is configured so that the number of lit LEDs matches the reservation number associated with the lower actuation port 83b. If the reservation number associated with the lower actuation port 83b increases as a result of the current win, the number of lit LEDs is increased accordingly.

In the following steps S306 and S307, the sub-side (auxiliary) control devices, the notification/performance control device 143 and the display control device 142, are made to recognize that a win has occurred in the actuation ports 83a and 83b, and a confirmation process for the hold notice and a process for setting a hold command, which are processes for executing the hold notice described below, are executed, and the information acquisition process is terminated. Note that the hold command includes information as to which of the upper actuation port 83a and the lower actuation port 83b the win is based on.

The hold command set in the hold command setting process in step S307 is sent to the notification/performance control device 143 and the display control device 142 in the external output process (step S401) of the normal process described below. Upon receiving the hold command, the display control device 142 executes a process to change the display in the hold number display area Da described above in response to the increase in the number of holds.

Specifically, when the display control device 142 receives the hold command via the notification/performance control device 143, it executes processing to display (e.g. add) the hold icon MP in the hold number display area Da. In the hold number display area Da, hold images are displayed sequentially from the left; for example, if the common hold number CRN is 1, a hold image is displayed in the first unit hold display area Da1 on the left, and if the common hold number CRN is 8, a hold image is displayed in the eighth unit hold display area Da8, which is the eighth from the left. A detailed explanation of each process in steps S306 and S307 will be given later.

(Normal processing)
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 23. Normal processing is processing that starts after main processing that is started when the power is turned on is executed, and in normal processing, main processing of the game is executed. In summary, the processing of steps S401 to S406 is executed as regular processing with a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S408 and S409 is executed in the remaining time.

In normal processing, first, external signal output processing is executed in step S401. In the external signal output processing in step S401, output data such as the timer interrupt processing or commands set in the previous normal processing is sent to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is sent to the payout control device 242. In addition, if various commands such as performance commands such as a fluctuation start command, type command, and fluctuation end command, hold commands, and shift commands described below are set, they are sent to the notification/performance control device 143.

Next, in step S402, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 604.

In the next step S403, a game round control process is executed to control the game in each game round. This game round control process performs a jackpot determination, sets the variable display of the patterns by the pattern display device 253, and controls the display of the main display unit 87.

After executing the game count control process in step S403, the process proceeds to step S404, where the game state transition process is executed. Details will be described later, but this game state transition process transitions the game state to an open/close execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, or the like. Details of the game count control process in step S403 and the game state transition process in step S404 will be described later.

In the next step S405, an electric role support process is executed to drive and control the electric role 91 attached to the lower operating port 83b. In this electric role support process, an electric role opening lottery is executed to determine whether or not the electric role 91 is opened using numerical information acquired from the electric role opening counter C4 stored in the electric role reservation area 633 of the RAM 604, and if the electric role opening state is selected, the opening and closing process of the electric role 91 is executed. In addition, display control of the through gate display unit DS is performed to inform the lottery result of the electric role opening lottery.

As already explained, the support provided by the electric device 91 can be set to a low-frequency support mode or a high-frequency support mode, and a transition to one of these support modes is made during game state transition processing. If a high-frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604 after this processing, the high-frequency support mode is selected, and if the flag is not set, the low-frequency support mode is selected.

In the electric role support process, whether or not the high frequency support mode is selected is determined by determining whether or not the high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. Then, in the high frequency support mode, the number of times that the electric role device 91 opens when the electric role open state is selected is set to be greater than in the low frequency support mode, and the opening time for each opening is set to be longer than in the low frequency support mode. Also, in the high frequency support mode, when the electric role open state is selected and the electric role device 91 opens multiple times, the closing time from the end of one opening state to the start of the next opening state is set to be shorter than the opening time for each opening.

Incidentally, when switching to the opening/closing execution mode, even if the high-frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604, the support mode is forcibly set to the low-frequency support mode.

After that, in step S406, a game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid 111 of the game ball launch mechanism 110 is excited once every predetermined interval period (e.g., 0.6 sec), provided that a launch permission signal has been input from the power supply/launch control device 243. This causes the game ball to be launched toward the play area PE.

In the next step S407, it is determined whether the next execution timing of normal processing has arrived, i.e., whether one period (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal processing. Then, during the remaining time until the next execution timing of normal processing, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counter CS are repeatedly updated.

That is, in step S408, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is then stored in the corresponding area of RAM 604. In addition, in step S409, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is then stored in the corresponding area of RAM 604.

Here, the execution time of each process in steps S401 to S406 changes depending on the game state, so the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using this remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (i.e., the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variation type counter CS can also be randomly updated.

(Game play control process)
Next, the game play control process in step S403 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIG. 24 to FIG.

First, in the game round control process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 24, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the game is in the open/close execution mode. If the game is in the open/close execution mode, the game round control process ends without executing any of the processes from step S502 onwards, i.e., the game round start process in steps S503 to S505 and the game round progress process in steps S506 to S509.

If the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress, step S502 determines whether a game is in progress. Specifically, it determines whether the operating port display sections DL and DU of the main display unit 87 are displaying a variable or fixed value. If a game is not in progress, the process proceeds to steps S503 to S505 for processing to start a game. In the process to start a game, first, step S503 determines whether the total number of start reserved balls (common reserved number CRN) is "0". If the common reserved number CRN is "0", this means that no reserved information is stored in the reserved ball storage area 632. Therefore, the game control process ends as is.

On the other hand, if the common reserved number CRN is not "0", in step S504, a data setting process is executed to set the data stored in the reserved area RE of the reserved ball storage area 632 for variable display, and in step S505, a variable start process is executed to start the variable display of the patterns in the operating port display sections DL and DU of the main display unit 87 and the variable display of the patterns on the display screen of the pattern display device 253, and then this game round control process is terminated.

Here, the data setting process in step S504 and the fluctuation start process in step S505 will be described in detail. First, the data setting process in step S504 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 25.

(Data setting process)
In the data setting process, first, in step S601, the start reservation memory number N stored in the reservation number storage area FE that is the target of the current setting process and the common reservation number CRN are decremented by 1. In the following step S602, the data stored in the first area Ra1 of the reservation area RE is moved to the execution area AE.

Then, in step S603, a process is executed to shift the data (i.e., reserved information) stored in each area Ra1 to Ra8 of the reserved area RE. This data shift process shifts the data stored in the first area Ra1 to the eighth area Ra8 downwards in order, clearing the data in the first area Ra1 and shifting the data in each area in the following order: second area Ra2 → first area Ra1, third area Ra3 → second area Ra2, fourth area Ra4 → third area Ra3, fifth area Ra5 → fourth area Ra4, sixth area Ra6 → fifth area Ra5, seventh area Ra7 → sixth area Ra6, eighth area Ra8 → seventh area Ra7.

In the following step S604, a shift command is set, which is information for making the notification/performance control device 143 recognize that a data shift has been made in the reserved area RE. After that, this data setting process ends. The shift command set in step S604 is sent to the display control device 142 via the notification/performance control device 143 in step S401 of the normal process (Figure 23). Upon receiving the shift command, the display control device 142 executes a process to change the display in the reserved number display area Da for the operation port in response to the reduction in the reserved number.

(Change start processing)
Next, the fluctuation start processing in step S505 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In the variation start process, first, in step S701, a win/loss determination process is executed to determine whether or not the reserved information referenced in the current variation start process corresponds to a jackpot win. Specifically, the information for jackpot determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, the information obtained from the information updated by the jackpot random number counter C1, is grasped. Then, if the win/loss lottery mode is the low probability mode, the win/loss table for the low probability mode stored in the win/loss table storage area 621 of the ROM 603 is referenced to determine whether the above-identified information is included in the information corresponding to a jackpot win, and if the win/loss lottery mode is the high probability mode, the win/loss table for the high probability mode stored in the win/loss table storage area 621 of the ROM 603 is referenced to determine whether the above-identified information is included in the information corresponding to a jackpot win.

In the next step S702, it is determined whether the result of the win/lose determination process in step S701 corresponds to a jackpot win. If the result corresponds to a jackpot win, the type determination process is executed in step S703.

In the type determination process, the type determination information stored in the execution area AE, that is, the information obtained from the information updated by the jackpot type counter C2, is identified. In addition, the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 622 of the ROM 603 is referenced to determine whether the above-identified type determination information is included in the information corresponding to the guaranteed jackpot result. In more detail, if the reserved information corresponds to a ball entering the upper operating port 83a, the distribution table for the upper operating port 83a is referenced, and if the reserved information corresponds to a ball entering the lower operating port 83b, the distribution table for the lower operating port 83b is referenced to determine the type.

In the next step S704, it is determined whether the type of the current jackpot win is a special jackpot result (16R special jackpot result, 4R special jackpot result) based on the information identified in the type determination process in step S703. If it is a special jackpot result, the stop result setting process for the special jackpot is executed in step S705, and if it is not a special jackpot result, the stop result setting process for a normal jackpot is executed in step S706. Also, if it is determined in step S702 that the jackpot win is not a win, the stop result setting process for a miss is executed in step S707. Note that special jackpot results are broadly divided into 16R special jackpot results and 4R special jackpot results. If it is a special jackpot result, it is determined whether it is a 16R special jackpot result or a 4R special jackpot result by the above allocation.

In each stop result setting process from step S705 to step S707, information on the type of the image to be finally displayed on the main display unit 87 is identified by referring to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area of ROM 603, and the identified information is stored in RAM 604. Also, in steps S705 and S706, information for the MPU 602 to identify whether the win/loss determination result of the current game round is a special jackpot result or a normal jackpot result is stored in the various flags storage area 635 of RAM 604. Specifically, in step S705, a special jackpot flag is stored, and in step S706, a normal jackpot flag is stored.

After executing any of the processes in steps S705 to S707, the process of setting the variable display time is executed in step S708.

(Setting process for variable display time)
In the process of setting the variable display time, as shown in the flowchart of Fig. 27, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the winning/losing lottery has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not either the guaranteed winning flag or the normal winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604.

If a negative judgment is made in step S801, that is, if the result of the win/lose lottery is a loss, the process proceeds to step S802. In step S802, it is judged whether or not a reach display will occur on the pattern display device 253 in the current game round. Specifically, if the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of a reach, a positive judgment is made in step S802, indicating that a reach display has occurred. When determining whether or not a reach has occurred using the value of the reach random number counter C3, a reach judgment table stored in ROM 603 is referenced.

If a positive judgment is made in either step S801 or step S802, the process proceeds to step S803, where the variable display time table for reach occurrence stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603 is referenced to obtain variable display time information corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS, etc., and in the following step S804, the variable display time information is set in a variable display time counter area (variable display time measurement means) provided in the various counter area 634 of the RAM 604. After that, this setting process is terminated.

In other words, in this embodiment, the reach display is executed when the result of the win/lose lottery is a jackpot win, or when the result of the win/lose lottery is a loss and the lottery for reaching the reach is won.

Here, the reach display is provided with a normal reach display and a super reach display, which have different variable display modes. Variable display time information corresponding to each of the normal reach display and the super reach display is set in the reach occurrence variable display time table, and variable display time information corresponding to each reach display is obtained by referencing this table. Note that, regarding the determination of the type of reach display, a table is provided in which the type of reach display corresponds to the value of the variable type counter CS, and the reach display corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS is determined by referencing this table.

More specifically, the variable display time table for reach occurrence corresponds to the type of jackpot. Specifically, the variable display time is set so that a combination of specific symbols can be displayed statically in the case of a guaranteed jackpot result, and the variable display time is set so that a combination of non-specific symbols can be displayed statically in the case of a normal jackpot result.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S802, in step S805, the variable display time table for non-reach occurrence stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 is referenced to obtain the variable display time corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS, and in step S806, the variable display time information is set in the variable display time counter area. After that, this setting process is terminated.

The variable display time information when a reach does not occur is set so that the more the number of common reserved numbers CRN, the shorter the variable display time. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured so that it is not dependent on the number of common reserved numbers CRN, and the less the number of common reserved numbers CRN, the shorter the variable display time. In addition, the variable display time table for non-reach occurrence is set so that a shorter variable display time is selected in a situation where the support mode is a high-frequency support mode than in a situation where the number of reserved information is the same, compared with a situation where the support mode is a low-frequency support mode, but this is not limited to this, and the selected variable display time may be the same, or the above relationship may be reversed. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable display time when a reach occurs, and a configuration may be used in which the variable display time that is likely to be selected and the variable display time that is difficult to select are different between a jackpot win and a miss reach. In addition, a variable display time table for a sure-variable jackpot, a variable display time table for a normal jackpot, a variable display time table for a miss reach, and a variable display time table for a complete miss may each be set individually. As described above, the variable display time for each game is determined using parameters such as whether or not a reach has occurred, the type of reach display, the number of pending information, and the value of the variable type counter CS.

Returning to the explanation of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 26), after the fluctuation display time setting process is executed in step S708, a fluctuation start command and a type command are set in step S709. The fluctuation start command includes information on whether or not a reach has occurred and information on the fluctuation display time. Furthermore, the type command includes information on the game result. In other words, the type command includes information on the game result such as information on the special jackpot result, information on the normal jackpot result, and information on the miss result.

The fluctuation start command and type command set in step S709 are sent to the notification/performance control device 143 in step S401 of normal processing (FIG. 23). The notification/performance control device 143 determines the light emission pattern of the circular illumination unit 24 and the sound output pattern from the speaker unit 27 for that game round based on the received fluctuation start command and type command, and controls the circular illumination unit 24 and the speaker unit 27 so that the determined performance content is executed.

The notification/performance control device 143 also transmits the above-mentioned variation start command and type command to the display control device 142 while maintaining their information form. The display control device 142 determines the variation display pattern on the pattern display device 253 for that game round based on the received variation start command and type command, and controls the display of the pattern display device 253 so that the determined variation display pattern is executed. After that, in step S710, the corresponding one of the operation port display sections DL, DU of the main display unit 87 starts displaying the variation of the pattern, and then ends this variation start process.

Returning to the explanation of the game round control process (FIG. 24), if the main display unit 87 is displaying a variable value, the game round progress process of steps S506 to S509 is executed. In the game round progress process, first in step S506, it is determined whether the variable display time for the current game round has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the variable display time information stored in the variable display time counter area of RAM 604 has become "0". As described above, the value of the variable display time information is set in the variable display time setting process (FIG. 27). In addition, the value of this set variable display time information is decremented (subtracted) by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 20) is started.

If the variable display time has not elapsed, the variable display process is executed in step S507. In the variable display process, the display mode of the corresponding one of the operation port display sections DL, DU of the main display unit 87 is changed. After that, this game number control process is terminated.

If the change display time has elapsed, a change end process is executed in step S508. In the change end process, the information stored in RAM 604 in any of the processes in steps S705 to S707 above is identified, and the operation port display units DL and DU are controlled so that the image corresponding to that information is displayed in a stopped state on the operation port display units DL and DU.

In the following step S509, a variation end command is set. After that, this game round control process is terminated. The variation end command set in step S509 is sent to the notification/presentation control device 143 in step S401 in the normal process (Figure 23). The notification/presentation control device 143 sends the received variation end command to the display control device 142 while maintaining its information form. By receiving the variation end command, the display control device 142 displays the final stop pattern combination for that game round as a confirmed display (final stop display).

(Game state transition process)
Next, the game state transition process in step S404 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the game state transition process, first in step S901, it is determined whether or not the game is in the open/close execution mode. If the game is not in the open/close execution mode, the process proceeds to step S902, where it is determined whether or not the timing has come when the changing display of the image on the main display unit 87 (more specifically, the operating port display section DL, DU) for one game round has ended. If the changing display has not ended, the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is the timing when the variable display has ended, in step S903, it is determined whether the game result of the current game round corresponds to a transition to the open/close execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether either a normal jackpot flag or a guaranteed jackpot flag is stored in RAM 604. If none of the above flags is stored, this game state transition process is terminated.

If any of the above flags is stored, in step S904, a value determined according to the type of big win, specifically "16" or "4", is set in the round counter area RC provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604. The round counter area RC is a counter area for counting the number of times the big win opening of the variable win device 82 has been opened. After that, this game state transition process ends.

On the other hand, if the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, a positive judgment is made in step S901, and the process proceeds to step S905. In step S905, the large prize opening opening/closing process is executed. In the large prize opening opening/closing process, if the large prize opening 32a is closed, the large prize opening is opened by driving the variable prize opening drive unit, provided that the round counter area RC is "1" or greater. Also, if the large prize opening is open, the driving state of the variable prize opening drive unit is stopped, and the large prize opening is closed, provided that a predetermined time has passed since the large prize opening was opened, or a predetermined number of game balls have been won.

In the next step S906, it is determined whether the value of the round counter area RC is "0". If the value of the round counter area RC is not "0", the game state transition process ends. If the value of the round counter area RC is "0", in step S907, the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode is executed.

In the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode, if a sure-win jackpot flag is stored in RAM 604, the win/lose selection mode is set to high probability mode, and the support mode is set to high frequency support mode. These high probability mode and high frequency support mode are maintained at least until the next jackpot win occurs. Also, if a normal jackpot flag is stored in RAM 604, the win/lose selection mode is set to low probability mode, and the support mode is set to high frequency support mode. However, the high frequency support mode is ended when 100 consecutive play times have been played, and then the game transitions to a normal game state in which the win/lose selection mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode.

After that, in step S908, the process for ending the open/close execution mode is executed, and then the game state transition process is terminated. In the process for ending the open/close execution mode, any stored flags, either the normal jackpot flag or the special jackpot flag, are erased.

(Regarding the electrical configuration of the notification/performance control device 143 and the display control device 142)
Next, with reference to the block diagram of Figure 29, a supplementary explanation will be given of the electrical configuration of the notification/performance control device 143 and the display control device 142.

The notification/performance control board 911 provided in the notification/performance control device 143 is equipped with an MPU 912. The MPU 912 has built-in ROM 913 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 912, RAM 914 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 913, and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data input/output circuit. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 913 and RAM 914 are integrated into a single chip for the MPU 912, and each may be integrated into a separate chip. This is also true for the MPUs of other control devices.

The MPU 912 is provided with an input port and an output port. The main control device 162 is connected to the input side of the MPU 912, and receives from the main control device 162 game round control commands (game round control information) such as the fluctuation start command, type command, and fluctuation end command, as already explained. It also receives hold display control commands (hold display control information) such as shift commands and hold commands, and furthermore, open/close execution mode commands (open/close execution mode information) such as opening commands and ending commands.

As already explained, the output side of the MPU 912 is connected to the circular illumination unit 24 and speaker unit 27 provided on the front door frame 14, and the display control device 142. Some of the various commands input from the main control device 162 to the notification/performance control device 143 are sent to the display control device 142 while maintaining the information format as is.

The display control device 142 includes an MPU 952, which is an element in which a program ROM 953 and a work RAM 954 are integrated into a chip, a display control board 951 on which a video display processor (VDP) 955, a character ROM 956, and a video RAM 957 are mounted. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 953 and the work RAM 954 are integrated into a single chip for the MPU 952, and each may be integrated into a separate chip.

The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 analyzes various commands received from the main control device 162 via the notification/performance control device 143, or performs a predetermined calculation process based on the various commands received, to control the VDP 955 (specifically, generate internal commands for the VDP 955). More specifically, the MPU 952 executes a process to identify the variable display pattern for each game round in the pattern display device 253 based on the commands sent from the notification/performance control device 143, as well as a process related to the hold notice described below, and executes drawing processing for the VDP 955 in response to the processing results. As a result, various images are displayed on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253.

The program ROM 953 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 952, and also stores and holds JPEG format image data for background images. The work RAM 954 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 952 executes various programs. This work data, flags, etc. are stored in various areas of the work RAM 954.

The VDP955 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device that serves as a liquid crystal display driver built into the pattern display device 253. The VDP955 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is made into an IC chip, and its actual form can be described as a microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP955 mediates the reading and writing of data by adjusting the timing of the MPU952, video RAM957, etc., and reads image data to be stored in the video RAM957 from the character ROM956 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the pattern display device 253.

The character ROM 956 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as the designs displayed on the design display device 253. This character ROM 956 holds bitmap format image data of various display designs, a color palette table that is referenced when determining the color to be displayed for each dot in the bitmap image, and the like.

The character ROM 956 also has, as part of the above data, a reserved image data memory area 971 in which image data (reserved icon MP) for display in the reserved display area NE of the pattern display device 253 and image data for the partition frame to be displayed in the execution target display area Db are stored, and a preview performance image data memory area 972 in which image data to be displayed when a preview performance described below is executed is stored. It is also possible to provide multiple character ROMs 956 and have each character ROM 956 store image data, etc. separately. It is also possible to configure the character ROM 956 to store JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 953.

The video RAM 957 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 253, and the display content of the pattern display device 253 is changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 957. The video RAM 957 is provided with a hold display area 981 and an execution display area 982 that correspond to the hold display area NE.

In the hold display area 981, the first to eighth unit areas are set so as to correspond one-to-one with the first area Ra1 to the eighth area Ra8 in the hold area RE for the operating port. In each unit hold display area Da1 to Da8 of the hold number display area Da on the display screen 253a, the hold icon MP is displayed according to the hold display information (data) written in each unit area. Note that in the unit hold display areas Da1 to Da8 corresponding to unit areas in which no data is set, no image is displayed or the background image of the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 is displayed.

The execution display area 982 corresponds to the execution area AE. In the execution target display area Db on the display screen 253a, the above-mentioned pending icon MP is displayed according to the data written in the execution display area 982. Note that if no data is set, the background image on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 is displayed.

As already explained, in this embodiment, the outline of the variable display mode of the pattern on the display screen 253a is identified by the notification/performance control device 143 with reference to a command from the main control device 162, and the details of the variable display mode are determined by the display control device 142 based on the identification result. Specifically, the MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143 executes a variable display control process as part of periodic processing that is started at a predetermined cycle (e.g., 2 msec), and this variable display control process identifies the outline of the variable display mode of the pattern, etc. Here, the variable display control process will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 30.

(Variable display control process)
In the variable display control process, first, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not a game is being played, that is, whether or not a variable display or a fixed display of the symbols for one game is being executed on the symbol display device 253. If it is determined that a game is not being played, the process proceeds to step S1002, where it is determined whether or not a variable start command transmitted from the main control device 162 has been received.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1002, the variable display control process is terminated. On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step S1002, the variable display control process is terminated after executing the variable start process described below in step S1003.

Returning to the explanation of step S1001, if a positive judgment is made in step S1001, i.e., if it is judged that a game round is in progress, the process proceeds to step S1004. In step S1004, it is judged whether or not a fluctuation end command sent from the main control unit 162 has been received. If a negative judgment is made in step S1004, the process for during fluctuation is executed in step S1005, and then this fluctuation display control process is terminated. The process for during fluctuation is a process for executing various effects and changing the determined effects in the game round started by the process for starting fluctuation.

If a positive judgment is made in step S1004, the process proceeds to step S1006, where a process for ending the variation is executed, and then this variation display control process is terminated. In the process for ending the variation, the variable display of the patterns and the currently being performed presentation are terminated (confirmed and stopped) in accordance with the hold information for the relevant game round. In this process, the speaker unit 27 and the annular illumination unit 24 are driven and controlled to perform a presentation corresponding to the confirmed stop. Then, a confirmation command is output to the display control device 142, and this variation end process is terminated. The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 to confirm and stop the patterns based on the received confirmation command.

(Processing for starting fluctuations)
Here, a supplementary explanation will be given on the fluctuation start processing in step S1003 with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 31. The fluctuation start processing is a processing for starting the presentation for a game round based on the reception of a fluctuation start command transmitted from the main control device 162. In the fluctuation start processing, the reach display and the hold notice presentation described later are set as the presentation for a game round. Here, the processing related to the setting of the reach display is explained, and the processing related to the setting of the hold notice presentation will be explained later.

In the fluctuation start process, first, in step S1101, the currently received fluctuation start command is read, and information on whether or not a reach has occurred and information on the fluctuation display time are identified from the command. Also, as already explained, when a fluctuation start command is sent from the main control device 162, a type command is also sent together. In step S1101, the type command received together with the currently received fluctuation start command is read, and information on the game result, such as information on the guaranteed jackpot result, information on the normal jackpot result, or information on the miss result, is identified from the command. Then, in step S1101, information on whether or not a jackpot has been won, information on the jackpot type if a jackpot has been won, information on whether or not a reach has occurred if a jackpot has not been won, and information on the fluctuation display time are identified from the identified information, and the identified information is stored in a register of the MPU 912.

In the next step S1102, based on the information obtained in step S1101, it is determined whether the game result of the game to be started this time corresponds to a jackpot result. If it is a jackpot result, that is, if it is a special jackpot result or a normal jackpot result, in the next step S1103, a process for setting the effects for a jackpot is executed.

In the jackpot performance setting process, the stopping result of the jackpot symbols is determined (stop result determination process is performed). In the stop result determination process, for some cases of a special jackpot result, the stopping result in which a combination of the same specific symbols (main symbols marked with odd numbers) is formed on one active line L1 to L5 is determined as the stopping result for this game round. Also, for some cases of a special jackpot result and for normal jackpot results, the stopping result in which a combination of the same non-specific symbols (main symbols marked with even numbers) is formed on one active line L1 to L5 is determined as the stopping result for this game round.

The type of main pattern and the effective lines L1-L5 that are stopped and displayed when a jackpot result occurs are determined randomly by lottery or the like. The final stop line tables stored in the various table areas of ROM913 store each of the effective lines L1-L5 and address information, and the final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in a final stop line address storage area provided in RAM914. At this time, a process is also executed to store information on the determined stop result in the stop result address storage area. Note that in the following explanation, address information of the stop result determined in the various stop result determination processes is also stored in the stop result address storage area of RAM914.

In addition, in the performance setting process for the big win, the variable display mode of the pattern for the big win is determined (variable display mode determination process (performance pattern determination process) is performed). As already explained, in the case of a big win result, the result is notified via a reach display. In the variable display mode determination process for the reach display, the variable display pattern table for the reach display stored in various table areas of the ROM 913 is obtained, and the performance pattern of the normal reach display or the super reach display corresponding to the variable display time of the currently received variable start command and the game result in the type command is determined. In addition, a process is executed to store the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 914. Note that in the variable display mode determination process shown below, the corresponding variable display pattern table is obtained from the variable display pattern table storage area of the ROM 913 to determine the performance pattern corresponding to the variable display time and the game result. Then, the address information of the performance pattern determined in the performance pattern determination process is stored in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 914.

If it is determined in step S1102 that the result is not a jackpot, the process proceeds to step S1104. In step S1104, it is determined whether or not a reach will occur in the current game round. If a reach will occur, the process proceeds to step S1105, where a process for setting the effect for the reach occurrence is executed. In the process for setting the effect for the reach occurrence, the outline of the effect and the final combination of symbols to be stopped are determined. The former is similar to the process in step S1103 above, so the explanation will be used here. Since this process corresponds to a miss reach, the stop symbols are determined so that the symbol combination does not correspond to a jackpot result. In other words, the stop result in which a miss reach symbol combination is established on one of the active lines L1 to L5 is determined as the current stop result. In this case, the type of miss reach symbol combination and the active lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. In addition, when making this determination, the stop results on the effective lines are determined so that the same combination of symbols is not established on any of the effective lines L1 to L5, and the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 that are the same as the symbols that form the reach line are finally stopped at a stop position that is shifted forward or backward from the reach line. After that, a process is executed to store the information on the determined stop results in the stop result address storage area.

If it is determined in step S1104 that a reach has not occurred, the process proceeds to step S1106. In step S1106, the outline of the presentation for a complete miss and the final combination of symbols to be stopped are determined. Since this process corresponds to a complete miss, the stopping symbols are determined so that a combination of symbols corresponding to a jackpot result is not formed.

After executing any one of the processes in step S1103, step S1105, or step S1106, the process proceeds to step S1107. In step S1107, a process is executed in which commands including information on the stop result and presentation pattern determined in step S1103, step S1105, or step S1106 are output to the display control device 142 as a stop result command and a pattern command, respectively. Based on the received stop result command and pattern command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the display of the symbol display device 253 to execute the presentation for the current game round.

After executing the process of step S1107, in the following step S1108, a process for starting the presentation for the game round is executed, and then this process for starting the fluctuation is terminated. Specifically, the drive control of the speaker unit 27 and the circular illumination unit 24 is started based on the presentation pattern determined in the above steps S1103, S1105, and S1106, and the presentation for the game round is started.

Here, we will provide additional information on the variable display modes of the patterns displayed on the pattern display device 253 (display screen 253a) based on Figure 32. Figure 32(a) is a schematic diagram showing the types of variable display modes, and Figure 32(b) and the group of Figures 32(b) are schematic diagrams showing an overview of each variable display mode.

(Variable display mode)
As shown in Fig. 32(a), the variable display modes of the symbols executed on the display screen 253a are roughly divided into five types: complete miss, normal reach A, normal reach B, super reach A, super reach B, and super reach C. For each of these variable display modes, the variable display time is set to be different, and it is possible to grasp an overview of the variable display mode for each game based on the information related to the variable display time given to the command from the main control device 162. In this embodiment, the relationship between the variable display mode and the variable display time differs depending on whether the support mode by the electric role object 91 is the low frequency support mode or the high frequency support mode.

First, the case where the low frequency support mode is set will be described. In the low frequency support mode, the variable display time for a complete miss is "3 sec to 8 sec" (the difference is set according to the number of reserved balls), the variable display time for normal reach A is "20 sec", the variable display time for normal reach B is "24 sec" longer than the variable display time for normal reach A, the variable display time for super reach A is "31 sec" longer than the variable display time for normal reach A and B, the variable display time for super reach B is "32 sec" longer than the variable display time for super reach A, and the variable display time for super reach C is "33 sec" longer than the variable display time for other super reaches A and B. For example, if the information on the variable display time given to the command from the main control device 162 is "24 sec", the notification/performance control device 143 will understand that normal reach B should be executed.

Next, we will explain the case where the high frequency support mode is set. In the high frequency support mode, the variable display time for a complete miss is "1 sec to 8 sec" (the difference is set according to the number of reserved balls), the variable display time for normal reach A is "20 sec", the variable display time for normal reach B is "24 sec" which is longer than the variable display time for normal reach A, the variable display time for super reach A is "36 sec" which is longer than the variable display time for normal reach A and B, the variable display time for super reach B is "37 sec" which is longer than the variable display time for super reach A, and the variable display time for super reach C is "38 sec" which is longer than the variable display time for other super reaches A and B. For example, if the information on the variable display time given to the command from the main control unit 162 is "24 sec", the notification/performance control unit 143 will understand that normal reach B should be executed.

In addition, in a game round that corresponds to a jackpot result, the order of likely selections is Super Reach C > Super Reach B > Super Reach A > Normal Reach B > Normal Reach A. In a game round that corresponds to a miss result, the order of likely selections is Complete Miss > Normal Reach A > Normal Reach B > Super Reach A > Super Reach B >
The number of times that the number of reels is increased is determined by the number of times that the number of reels is increased, and the number of times that the number of reels is increased by ....

Here, the variable display mode of normal reach A and B will be described with reference to FIG. 32 (b1). When normal reach A and B are selected, first the variable display (scroll display) of all the symbol rows that are stopped and displayed is started, then the variable display of the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 is ended (stopped and displayed), and the variable display of the symbols in the lower symbol row Z3 is ended (stopped and displayed). In this way, when the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 are stopped and displayed, the main symbols with the same numbers are stopped and displayed on any of the activated lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 6), forming a reach line. Then, when the reach line is formed, the variable display of the middle symbol row Z2 is performed, resulting in a reach display (reach variable display). After the reach display is reached, the variable display of the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed, ending the variable display. When the same symbols as those constituting the reach display stop on the reach line, it is announced that a jackpot has been won, and when other symbols stop on the same reach line, it is announced that a jackpot has not been won. In this way, the final combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed is maintained as is for a predetermined period of time. In other words, the current game round continues until the stopped display period has elapsed, and when the stopped display period has elapsed, it is permitted to move on to the next game round.

In this embodiment, the difference in the variable display time between normal reach A and normal reach B is ensured by setting a difference in the variable display time of the middle pattern row Z2 after the reach line is formed, but the method for setting the difference between the two is arbitrary. For example, it is also possible to ensure the difference in the variable display time by setting a difference in the time from when the variable display begins to when the reach line is formed.

Next, the variable display mode of the super reach A, B, C will be described based on the variable display mode of the normal reach A, B described above. As shown in FIG. 21 (b2) to (b4), for the super reach A, B, C, the above-mentioned reach line is formed through the same process as for the normal reach A, B. Then, after the reach line is formed, a predetermined character is displayed as a video in conjunction with the variable display of the middle pattern column Z2, thereby performing the reach performance. Specifically, for the super reach A, after the reach line is formed, a character imitating a fairy is displayed in the center of the variable display area of the middle pattern column Z2 (the center of the variable display area ME), for the super reach B, after the reach line is formed, a character imitating a boy is displayed in the center of the variable display area of the middle pattern column Z2 (the center of the variable display area ME), and for the super reach C, after the reach line is formed, a character imitating a girl is displayed in the center of the variable display area of the middle pattern column Z2 (the center of the variable display area ME).

(Regarding pending notice)
In this embodiment, the performance related to the reserved notice, which suggests the contents of the reserved information stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604, is executed with a predetermined probability before the game round related to the reserved information starts. By executing the performance corresponding to the reserved information that has not yet become the subject of the lottery at a timing before the game round related to the reserved information becomes the subject of the lottery, the player can not only play the lottery result of the reserved information corresponding to the current game round, but also play the lottery result of the reserved information that will be the subject of the lottery later according to the content of the performance, thereby diversifying the game. This can increase the attention to the game.

The hold notice can be broadly divided into those executed in conjunction with the display of the changing patterns described above in the variable display area ME of the display screen 253a, and those executed in conjunction with changes in the state of the hold display in the hold display area NE of the display screen 253a. Of these, the hold notice executed in the hold display area NE utilizes the hold display on the display screen 253a. Below, the configuration that is the premise of the hold notice and the process for hold display control (command response process for hold display control) executed by the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 33(a) and the schematic diagram in Figure 33(b). The command response process for hold display control is a process executed as part of the periodic process that is started at a specified cycle (2 msec in this embodiment).

(Hold display control command response processing)
33(a), in the hold display control command response process, first in step S1201, it is determined whether or not a hold command has been received from the main control device 162 via the notification/performance control device 143. If a positive determination is made in step S1201, the value of the hold number counter (hold memory number SN) provided in the various counter areas of the work RAM 954 is incremented by 1 in step S1202.

After executing the update process of step S1202, proceed to step S1203 to execute the hold display addition process, and terminate this hold display control command response process. The above-mentioned hold memory number SN corresponds to the hold display area 981 of the video RAM 957. When setting the display of the hold icon MP in the hold display addition process, hold display information (more specifically, the address of the hold image stored in the hold image data storage area 971) is set in the unit area corresponding to the hold memory number SN in the hold display area 981. In each unit hold display area Da1 to Da8 of the hold number display area Da on the display screen 253a, the above-mentioned hold icon MP is additionally displayed according to the data written in each unit area.

For example, as shown in FIG. 33(b1), when a hold command is received in a situation where the hold icon MP is displayed in the first unit hold display area Da1 and the second unit hold display area Da2, i.e., when the hold memory count SN is "2", the hold memory count SN changes from "2" to "3", and hold display information is set in the third unit area of the hold display area 981. As a result, the hold icon MP is displayed in the third unit hold display area Da3, as shown in FIG. 33(b2).

Returning to the explanation of step S1201, if a negative judgment is made in step S1201, the process proceeds to step S1204. In step S1204, it is determined whether or not a shift command has been received from the main control device 162 via the notification/performance control device 143. If a negative judgment is made in step S1204, the process for handling commands for holding display control is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step S1204, the process proceeds to step S1205. In step S1205, the value of the pending number counter (pending memory number SN) in the pending counter area of the work RAM 954 is decremented by 1.

In the next step S1206, a shift process is executed, and the pending display control command response process is terminated. In the shift process, the pending display information set in the first unit area of the pending display area 981 is moved to the execution display area 982, and the pending display information set in the first unit area to the eighth unit area of the pending display area 981 is shifted sequentially to the lower area side.

Specifically, the pending display information of the first unit area is moved to the execution display area 982, and the pending display information in each unit area is shifted in the following order: second unit area → first unit area, third unit area → second unit area, fourth unit area → third unit area, fifth unit area → fourth unit area, sixth unit area → fifth unit area, seventh unit area → sixth unit area, eighth unit area → seventh unit area, and so on.

For example, as shown in FIG. 33(b1), when a shift command is received in a situation where the hold icon MP is displayed in the first unit hold display area Da1 and the second unit hold display area Da2, i.e., when the hold memory count SN is "2", the hold memory count SN changes from "2" to "1". As a result, the hold display information in the execution display area 982 is erased, and the hold display information in the first unit area is shifted to the execution display area 982, the hold display information in the second unit area to the first unit area, and the hold display information in the third unit area to the second unit area. As a result, as shown in FIG. 33(b3), the hold icon MP is displayed in the execution target display area Db and the first unit hold display area Da1.

Here, the hold image data storage area 971 stores hold icons MP of different colors (specifically, four colors: white, blue, yellow, and red) as a hold image group, and the above address differs depending on the color. When setting the hold display information, the notification/performance control device 143 decides which color to display depending on the presence or absence of the hold notice mentioned above, and this information is incorporated into the hold command by the notification/performance control device 143 when the hold command passes through the notification/performance control device 143. In other words, the display control device 142 reads color information from the received hold command and determines which address corresponds to which color to set as the hold display information.

Next, the process for the hold notice executed by the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162 will be described. The process for the hold notice includes a confirmation process for the hold notice (step S306 in FIG. 22) and a process for setting a hold command (step S307 in FIG. 22), and each of these processes is configured to be executed as part of the winning process for the actuation port (see FIG. 21) set as part of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20), more specifically, as part of the information acquisition process of step S204. In other words, the confirmation process for the hold notice and the process for setting a hold command are configured to be executed based on the winning of the actuation port 83a, 83b.

The confirmation process for pending notice will be explained below with reference to the flowchart in Figure 34.

(Confirmation process for pending notice)
In the confirmation process for the reserved ball notice, in step S1301, the start reserved ball memory number N and the common reserved ball number CRN stored in the reserved ball number memory area FE of the reserved ball storage area 632 are read out, and the information on the reserved ball number is stored in the register of the MPU 602. After that, in steps S1302 to S1306, it is confirmed whether or not the reserved ball information acquired by the current winning includes information on the big win.

Specifically, first, in step S1302, the information for determining whether or not a jackpot has been determined from the reserved information acquired in step S304 based on the current winnings at the actuation ports 83a and 83b, i.e., the value of the acquired jackpot random number counter C1, is determined.

In the next step S1303, it is determined whether or not the mode is low probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the current win/lose lottery mode is low probability mode by determining whether or not a high probability mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. If it is low probability mode, the process proceeds to step S1304, and a win/lose table for the low probability mode is referenced to determine whether the information for determining a jackpot grasped in step S1302 (the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) is included in the information group corresponding to a jackpot win. If it is high probability mode, the process proceeds to step S1305, and a win/lose table for the high probability mode is referenced to determine whether the information for determining a jackpot grasped in step S302 (the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) is included in the information set as a jackpot win.

After step S1304 or S1305, the process proceeds to step S1306, where it is determined whether the information for determining a jackpot obtained in step S1302 (the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) corresponds to a jackpot win. If it corresponds to a jackpot win, the jackpot information is stored in the register of MPU 602 in step S1307, and the confirmation process for this pending notice ends.

In the process of step S1307, the information for determining the type of jackpot among the reserved information acquired in step S304 based on the current winning is obtained, i.e., the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2, and the type of jackpot is determined by referring to the allocation table. The information stored in the register of MPU 602 in step S1307 includes information related to the type of jackpot.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S1306, the process proceeds to step S1308. In step S1308, the information for determining whether or not a miss is reached is obtained from the pending information acquired in step S304 based on the current winning of the operation ports 83a and 83b, that is, the value of the already acquired reach random number counter C3.

In the next step S1309, the reach determination table (group of information for reach determination) stored in ROM 603 is referenced to determine whether the information for reach determination grasped in step S1308 (value of reach random number counter C3) is included in the information set as a reach win.

After executing the process of step S1309, the process proceeds to step S1310, where it is determined whether the information for reach determination grasped in step S1308 (the value of the reach random number counter C3) corresponds to the occurrence of a reach. If it corresponds to the occurrence of a reach, then in step S1311, the reach occurrence information is stored in the register of the MPU 602, and then this confirmation process is terminated. On the other hand, if it does not correspond to the occurrence of a reach, this confirmation process is terminated as it is.

(Setting pending commands)
Next, the pending command setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the process of setting the hold command, first in step S1401, it is determined whether or not jackpot information is stored in the register of MPU 602, thereby determining whether or not the information for determining the jackpot was identified as corresponding to a jackpot win in the immediately preceding hold notice confirmation process (FIG. 34). If jackpot information is stored, the process proceeds to step S1302, where a jackpot-compatible hold command is set. The above command setting and the various commands described below are set by storing command information in a command setting area provided in RAM 604. In particular, the jackpot-compatible hold command includes information regarding the type of jackpot.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S1401, that is, if it is judged that no jackpot information is stored in the register of MPU 602, the process proceeds to step S1403, where it is judged whether or not reach occurrence information is stored in the register of MPU 602, thereby judging whether or not the information for reach judgment was identified as corresponding to the reach occurrence in the immediately preceding hold notice confirmation process (FIG. 34). If reach occurrence information is stored, a miss reach corresponding hold command is set in step S1404, and if reach occurrence information is not stored, a complete miss corresponding hold command is set in step S1405.

When setting a hold command in steps S1402, S1404, and S1405, the variable display time is determined by referring to the value of the variable type counter CS, and information related to the variable display time is stored in the hold command. When determining the variable display time, the variable display time table is referred to, as in the variable display time setting process shown in step S708 above. The hold command set in this way is sent to the display control device 142, and the display control device 142 can grasp the variable display mode of the patterns, etc. based on the hold command. As already explained, in the case of a complete miss, the variable display time may change depending on the number of hold information stored when starting a game round related to the hold information. Therefore, when setting a hold command for a complete miss, a provisional setting of the variable display time is performed.

After executing the command setting process of step S1402, step S1404, or step S1405, a process of setting the number of reserved items to the reserved command is executed in step S1406. Specifically, the information of the reserved command set above is configured as multiple bytes of information, some of which contain information indicating that the command is a reserved command and information on the type of reserved command, and the number of reserved items can be set.

In step S1406, first, the information on the number of reserved items stored in the register of MPU 602 in step S1301 in the confirmation process for the immediately preceding reserved notice (FIG. 34) is read, and then the read information on the number of reserved items is stored in the bit for the information on the number of reserved items in the reserved command that has already been set, using an arithmetic process such as a logical OR. As a result, the reserved command set in any of the processes in steps S1402, S1404, and S1405 contains information for identifying which reserved information corresponds to the reserved command. After the process in step S1406 described above in detail is executed, this reserved command setting process ends.

The hold command containing the information on the number of hold items in step S1406 is sent to the notification/performance control device 143 by the external output process in step S401 in the next normal processing (Figure 23). By receiving the hold command, the notification/performance control device 143 determines that the amount of hold information has increased. The notification/performance control device 143 also adds hold notice information, which will be described later, to the hold command and sends it to the display control device 142. The display control device 142 executes processes such as hold display and hold notice based on the received hold command.

The method of setting the hold command is arbitrary as long as the display control device 142 can specify whether or not a jackpot has been won, the type of jackpot if a jackpot has been won, whether or not a reach has occurred if a jackpot has not been won, in other words, the manner in which the patterns change and are displayed. For example, combinations of hold commands for jackpots, hold commands for reach-to-misses, and hold commands for complete misses are individually set in correspondence with each number of holds, and the hold command setting process can be configured to select one hold command depending on the confirmation result in the hold notice confirmation process (Figure 34).

Next, we will explain the process related to the hold notice executed by the MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143. The process related to the hold notice is broadly divided into a command response process that determines the command from the main control device 162 and a hold notice performance setting process that determines the mode of the hold notice.

(Pending command handling process)
In the hold command response process, when a hold command transmitted by the main control device 162 is received, a process corresponding to the information included in the received hold command is executed. The hold command response process is executed as part of a periodic process that is repeatedly started at a predetermined cycle (for example, every 2 msec).

In the pending command response process, first, it is determined whether or not a pending command has been received. The command received by the MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143 is temporarily stored in the command storage area 931 of the RAM 914. The command storage area 931 is configured as a ring buffer that can store multiple commands individually and can read out commands that have been previously stored, so that even if multiple commands are received at the same time, the processing corresponding to each command can be executed smoothly. When determining whether or not a corresponding pending command has been received, it is determined whether or not a jackpot corresponding pending command has been received in the area of the command storage area 931 that is the current target for reading. Note that this configuration for reading commands is the same when reading out other commands such as a command to start fluctuations.

When a hold command is received, various information included in the hold command is stored in the hold information storage area 934. The hold information storage area 934 has the first area Rc1 to the eighth area Rc8, and is configured to be able to store one hold information for each area. The hold information stored in each area Rc1 to Rc8 is shifted to the lower area side in order by receiving a shift command from the main control device 162, that is, when a game round is started. Specifically, the data in the first area Rc1 is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second area Rc2 → first area Rc1, third area Rc3 → second area Rc2, fourth area Rc4 → third area Rc3 ... eighth area Rc8 → seventh area Rc7. In the hold information storage area 934 of the notification/performance control device 143, the hold information is also configured to be stored chronologically regardless of the ball entry destination, similar to the hold ball storage area 632 (more specifically, the hold area RE) of the main control device 162. Specifically, the system identifies the number of pending items included in the currently received command, and stores the various pieces of information listed above in the area corresponding to the identified number of pending items among the first area Rc1 to the eighth area Rc8.

When the above-mentioned hold command is received, a hold command reception flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914, and when a shift command is received, a shift command reception flag is set in the various flag storage area 933. Each of these flags triggers the setting process for the hold notice performance described below, and is erased when the setting process for the hold notice performance is completed.

The MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143 performs setting processing for the on-hold notice performance based on the information stored in the on-hold information storage area 934. Here, the setting processing for the on-hold notice performance will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 36. Note that the setting processing for the on-hold notice performance is a process that is executed as part of a periodic process that is repeatedly activated at a predetermined cycle (e.g., every 2 msec).

(Setting process for holding notice performance)
In the setting process for the hold notice performance, first, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not a hold command has been received from the main control device 162. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a hold command reception flag has been set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. If the determination in step S1501 is affirmative, a lottery process at the time of receiving the hold command is executed in step S1502.

In the lottery process related to the hold command, the lottery subject for the hold notice is limited to the newly added hold information. In other words, a lottery for the availability of the hold notice is performed based on the information stored in the area corresponding to the currently received hold command out of the first area Rc1 to the eighth area Rc8 provided in the hold information storage area 934 of RAM 914. This lottery is performed by determining from the stored information whether the game round related to the hold information is a jackpot, whether a reach display will be displayed, and if a reach display is displayed, the pattern, and then based on the corresponding lottery table and the value of the lottery counter.

In the lottery table storage area of ROM913, the following lottery tables are stored as lottery tables to be used when a hold command is received: a lottery table for a jackpot, a lottery table for a miss normal reach A, a lottery table for a miss normal reach B, a lottery table for a miss super reach A, a lottery table for a miss super reach B, a lottery table for a miss super reach C, and a lottery table for a complete miss.

These tables are set up so that the probability of winning increases in the following order: Jackpot > Super Reach C > Super Reach B > Super Reach A > Normal Reach B > Normal Reach A > Complete Miss.

Returning to the explanation of step S1501, if a negative judgment is made in step S1501, i.e., if it is judged that a hold command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S1503. In step S1503, it is judged whether or not a shift command has been received from the main control device 162. Specifically, it is judged whether or not a shift command reception flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. If a negative judgment is made in step S1503, i.e., if neither a hold command nor a shift command has been received, the process for setting up the hold notice performance is terminated. If a positive judgment is made in step S1503, a lottery process is executed when a shift command is received in step S1504.

In the lottery process related to the shift command, the lottery subject for the hold notice is all the hold information remaining after the shift. In other words, the lottery for the hold notice is conducted based on all the information stored in the first area Rc1 to the eighth area Rc8 provided in the hold information storage area 934 of the RAM 914. This lottery is conducted individually for each piece of stored information. The lottery order (priority order) is specified to be the most recent first (eighth area Rc8 → seventh area Rc7 → ... → first area Rc1). For example, if the common hold number CRN is "2", first the lottery is conducted based on the information stored in the second area Rc2, and if this lottery is not successful, the lottery is conducted based on the information stored in the first area Rc1.

In particular, in this embodiment, as the value of the common hold number CRN increases, the variable display time in the game round corresponding to a complete miss is shortened. Therefore, by giving priority to new hold information as described above, the period of the preview performance when a hold preview is executed can be appropriately secured.

As with the case of receiving a hold command, the lottery method is carried out by determining from the stored information whether the game related to the hold information is a jackpot, whether a reach display will be made, and if a reach display is made, the pattern, and then based on the corresponding lottery table and the value of the lottery counter.

In the lottery table storage area of ROM913, the following lottery tables are stored as lottery tables to be used when a shift command is received: a lottery table for a jackpot, a lottery table for a miss normal reach A, a lottery table for a miss normal reach B, a lottery table for a miss super reach A, a lottery table for a miss super reach B, a lottery table for a miss super reach C, and a lottery table for a complete miss.

These tables are set so that the probability of winning increases in the following order: jackpot > Super reach C > Super reach B > Super reach A > Normal reach B > Normal reach A > Complete miss. However, these lottery tables for when a shift command is received are set so that the probability of winning the reserved advance notice is lower when compared to the lottery tables for when the above-mentioned hold command is received. For example, when comparing lottery tables for jackpots, the probability of winning when referring to the lottery tables for when a shift command is received is set lower than the probability of winning when referring to the lottery tables for when a hold command is received.

However, if the value of the common hold number CRN (number of holds) is less than a predetermined number ("4" in this embodiment), the overall probability of winning is lower than when the hold command was received, but if the value of the common hold number CRN (number of holds) is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the overall probability of winning is set to be higher than when the hold command was received.

In particular, in this embodiment, when the value of the common hold number CRN exceeds the above-mentioned specified number ("4"), the degree of shortening of the variable display time in a game turn corresponding to a complete miss becomes greater compared to when the value of the common hold number CRN is equal to or less than the above-mentioned specified number ("4"). While this can speed up the game progress, there is a concern that the monotony of the game progress will become more noticeable. In this regard, with the above configuration, when the number of hold numbers increases and the shortening of the variable display time becomes noticeable, a hold notice is more likely to occur. This is preferable in terms of speeding up the game progress while preventing a decrease in attention to the game.

After the lottery process of step S1502 or step S1504 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1505. In step S1505, it is determined whether or not the conditions for executing the hold notice performance are met in the lottery process. If a negative determination is made in step S1505, i.e., if no winner is found in steps S1502 and S1504, the hold notice performance setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S1505, a hold notice performance pattern determination process is executed in the following step S1506, and the hold notice performance pattern determined in the following step S1507 is stored, after which the hold notice performance setting process is terminated.

When it is decided that a reserved information preview performance will be performed, based on the information stored in step S1507, the reserved information will not be included in the lottery for the reserved information preview performance until the game round related to the reserved information is executed. The stored information is then erased when the reserved information moves to the execution area.

Now, with reference to the schematic diagrams in Figures 37 and 38, we will explain the types of hold preview effects (more specifically, the preview effects executed in the hold display area NE).

(Types of reserved notice performance)
All of the reserved notice performances have in common that they are configured to suggest the likelihood of a big win by changing the display mode of the reserved icon MP displayed in the reserved display area NE. The display mode (color) of the reserved icon MP is set to four colors: white, blue, yellow, and red. Of these colors, white is the basic color, and when the reserved notice performance is executed, the reserved icon MP becomes another color (blue, yellow, red).

The colors of the reserved icon MP are set in the order of white < blue < yellow < red, so that the likelihood of a jackpot result increases. Specifically, when a reserved notice is issued with a reserved icon MP corresponding to a game that will result in a jackpot, the order of likelihood of selection is white < blue < yellow < red, whereas when a reserved notice is issued with a reserved icon MP corresponding to a game that will result in a miss, the order of likelihood of selection is red < yellow < blue < white.

This reserved notice performance is broadly divided into a first type notice performance and a second type notice performance according to the display mode (color change) of the reserved icon MP. As shown in FIG. 38(a), in the first type notice performance, after the color of the reserved icon MP changes, the color of the reserved icon is maintained until the corresponding game round (until it moves to the execution target display area Db). In contrast, in the second type notice performance, as shown in FIG. 38(b), the color of the reserved icon MP changes multiple times as the game progresses. For example, even if the color that will eventually change is red, it is first changed to a lower color (blue or yellow) with a lower expectation level, and then stepped up (promoted) to a higher color with a higher expectation level at the timing when the reserved icon MP shifts. By using these two types of reserved notice performances in combination, even if the color has a low expectation level, there is a possibility that it will change to a color with a higher expectation level by the time the corresponding game round is reached. This prevents the attention to the reserved notice performance from decreasing early.

The color of the hold icon MP does not only change in the hold display area Ra, but may also change when it moves to the execution target display area Db. For example, when a hold icon MP that is yellow in the hold display area Ra moves to the execution target display area Db, the hold icon MP may change to red, or when a hold icon MP that is white in the hold display area Ra moves to the execution target display area Db, the hold icon MP may change to another color (blue, yellow, red).

(Effect button device 40)
In this embodiment, the configuration related to the effect button device 40 provided in the front door frame 14 and the effect using the effect button device 40 is characteristic. The structure of the effect button device 40 will be supplementarily explained below with reference to Figs. 39 to 44. Fig. 39 is a perspective view of the front door frame 14 seen from the front, Figs. 40(a) and 42 are perspective views of the front door frame 14 seen from the front of the gaming machine, Fig. 40(b) is a side view of the effect button device 40, Fig. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the effect button device 40, Fig. 43 is a partial cutaway view showing the internal structure of the effect button device 40, and Fig. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the operation block. Note that in Fig. 42, for convenience of explanation, the side cover 755 of the effect button device 40 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 39, the effect button device 40 is disposed in the upper bulge 28 of the front door frame 14, specifically in the portion of the upper bulge 28 that is in front of the upper tray 33 (storage area KE). The majority of the effect button device 40 is housed inside the upper bulge 28, and part of the operation button protrudes upward through an opening 28b formed in the top surface 28a of the upper bulge 28.

As shown in Figures 40 and 41, the effect button device 40 includes an operation block 701 having an operation button 721 that is the target of a pressing operation, and a base block 702 on which the operation block 701 is mounted. The base block 702 is composed of a metal base plate 711 that functions as the mounting surface for the operation block 701, and a synthetic resin bracket 712 fixed to the base plate 711 from below, and the effect button device 40 is integrated with the frame body 20 by fixing the bracket 712 to the frame body 20 of the front door frame 14 with a fixing means such as a screw.

The effect button device 40 is not fixed to the upper bulge 28 that forms the upper tray 33, preventing the load generated when the effect button device 40 is operated from being transmitted to the upper bulge 28 through the fixed point. This is a measure to prevent deformation of the storage area KE (see Figure 39) provided in the upper tray 33 and ensure a smooth flow of game balls toward the game ball launching mechanism 110.

As shown in Figure 44, the operation block 701 has a button unit 720 having the above-mentioned operation button 721, and a holder unit 750 that holds the button unit 720. The base plate 711 has a recess in the center (see Figure 42), and the holder unit 750 disposed in this recess is fixed to the base plate 711, thereby integrating the operation block 701 and the base block 702.

Details will be described later, but the holder unit 750 is provided with a lift mechanism 785 (see FIG. 43) for raising and lowering the button unit 720, and a side cover 755 for covering the side of the button unit 720, and the lift mechanism 785 is covered by the outer shell of the button unit 720 and the side cover 755.

Now, the button unit 720 will be described with reference to Figures 45 to 47. Figures 45 and 46 are exploded perspective views of the button unit 720, and Figure 47 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the operation block 701.

As shown in FIG. 45, the button unit 720 is formed by combining the above-mentioned operation button 721 and a movable base 741 vertically. As shown in FIG. 46, the operation button 721 includes double button members 722 and 723 that form the upper part of the operation button 721, and a housing 726 that forms the lower part of the operation button 721.

The button members 722, 723 each have a cylindrical main body and an upper surface that covers the opening at the upper end of the main body. Of these, the upper surface of the outer button member 722 functions as the "operation surface 721a" that is the target of the pressing operation by the player. In the following description, the outer button member 722 and the inner button member will be appropriately distinguished as the inner button member 723.

A decorative body 724 is disposed on the upper surface of the inner button member 723. The outer button member 722 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and the decorative body 724 can be seen through the operation surface portion 721a of the outer button member 722. The housing 726 is fixed to the inner button member 723 from below. The housing 726 is cylindrical with a bottom, and the bottom surface portion 736 of the housing 726 faces the base plate 742 of the movable base 741 across a gap.

The base plate 742 is flat, and a cylindrical guide shaft 743 is fixed to its upper surface. A slider 744 is attached to the guide shaft 743 so that it can slide along the guide shaft 743. The guide shaft 743 extends in the same direction as the central axis of the button members 722, 723, in other words, in the same direction as the combination direction of the operation button 721 and the movable base 741 (hereinafter referred to as the reference direction), and a stopper 743a that prevents the slider 744 from falling off is formed at its upper end.

A coil spring 745 is inserted through the guide shaft 743. The coil spring 745 is sandwiched (compressed) between the slider 744 and the base plate 742, and the coil spring 745 biases the slider 744 toward the side (upward) where it abuts against the stopper 743a. The slider 744 is fixed to the housing 726 using a fastener such as a screw. The slider 744 and the guide shaft 743 function as a connecting means for connecting the base plate 742 and the housing 726. The biasing force of the coil spring 745 is set taking into account the weight of the operation button 721, and the slider 744 is held in a position where it abuts against the stopper 743a when the operation button 721 is not being operated.

The area surrounded by the inner button member 723 and the housing 726 houses the light-emitting block 725. The light-emitting block 725 has a light-emitting board 732 on which multiple light-emitting elements (LEDs) are mounted and a case body 731 that houses the light-emitting board 732, and is arranged so that the element mounting surface of the light-emitting board 732 faces the upper surface side of the inner button member 723. The light-emitting board 732 is connected to the notification/performance control device 143, and the light emission is controlled by the notification/performance control device 143.

The case body 731 is made of a colored transparent synthetic resin and is light-transmitting. Light from the light-emitting substrate 732 is emitted from the performance button device 40 through the case body 731 → the top surface of the inner button member 723 → the decorative body 724 → the top surface (operation surface 721a) of the outer button member 722.

In the present embodiment, the button device 40 has a unique mounting structure for the button unit 720 to the holder unit 750. The mounting structure will be described below with reference to Figures 44 and 47.

As shown in FIG. 44, the button unit 720 and the holder unit 750 are connected by a plurality of (three) shafts 728 that are provided so as to span the button unit 720 and the holder unit 750. Specifically, each shaft 728 extends in the reference direction and is inserted into an insertion portion such as a central opening 737 formed in the bottom surface portion 736 of the housing 726 and the hollow portion of the guide shaft 743.

As shown in FIG. 47, one end (upper end) of each shaft 728 is fixed to a fixing portion 734 provided on the light-emitting block 725 (more specifically, the case body 731) of the button unit 720, and the other end (lower end) is fixed to a fixing portion 765 provided on the holder body 751 of the holder unit 750. This allows the button unit 720 and the holder unit 750 to be integrated via the shaft 728.

The outer diameter of the shaft 728 matches the inner diameter of the guide shaft 743, and the shaft 728 and guide shaft 743 regulate the direction in which the operation button 721 is raised and lowered by the lift mechanism described above to be the same as the reference direction. In addition, multiple shafts 728 are arranged in the circumferential direction around the central axis CLX of the operation button 721, and the shafts 728 regulate the rotation of the operation button 721 (excluding the outer button member 722) around the central axis CLX.

As shown in FIG. 48, when the operation surface portion 721a of the operation button 721 is pressed against the biasing force of the coil spring 745, the operation button 721 descends along the central axis CLX, and the bottom surface portion 736 of the housing 726 abuts against the base plate 742 of the movable base 741, preventing further displacement. The holder unit 750 is provided with a detection sensor 791 (see FIG. 44) that detects the displacement when the operation button 721 descends to a position where it abuts against the base plate 742. The detection sensor 791 is connected to the notification/performance control device 143, and the MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143 determines whether the operation button 721 has been operated based on the detection information from the detection sensor 791. In the following description, the detection position of the operation button 721 by the detection sensor 791 is referred to as the "operation detection position."

(Lift mechanism 785)
In this embodiment, as shown in the schematic diagram of Fig. 49, the amount of protrusion from the upper surface 28a (opening 28b) of the upper bulging portion 28, i.e., the operation stroke of the operation button 721, can be changed by raising and lowering the operation button 721 using a lift mechanism 785. Hereinafter, the lift mechanism 785 will be described with reference to Figs. 44, 47, 50 and 51. Fig. 50 is a perspective view showing the lift mechanism 785 and related configurations, Fig. 51(a) is a perspective view of the rotor 752, and Fig. 51(b) is a plan view of the power transmission mechanism 754.

As shown in Figure 44, the holder body 751 has a disk-shaped bottom 761, a peripheral wall 762 formed along the outer periphery of the bottom 761, and a columnar bearing 763 (see Figure 47) erected in the center of the bottom 761 so as to extend in the same direction (upward) as the reference direction. As shown in Figure 47, the central axis of the bearing 763 is coaxial with the central axis CLX of the operation button 721, and the rotor 752 is attached to this bearing 763.

More specifically, the rotor 752 has a cylindrical holder body 751, which is inserted into a bearing portion 763 and fixed to the bearing portion 763 using a fastener such as a screw. When the rotor 752 is attached to the bearing portion 763, it is restricted from floating up from the bottom portion 761 (displacement in the direction of the central axis CLX), while being permitted to rotate around the central axis CLX.

Central openings 737, 746 are formed in the central portion of the movable base 741 and the central portion of the housing 726, respectively, and the rotor 752 protrudes toward the light-emitting block 725 through these central openings 737, 746. A bearing portion 733 that engages with the upper end portion of the rotor 752 from the inside is formed in the case body 731 of the light-emitting block 725, and this bearing portion 733 prevents the rotor 752 from falling over, etc.

As shown in FIG. 50, a pair of protruding pins 747 are disposed on the base plate 742 of the movable base 741, sandwiching a central opening 746 (central axis CLX). Each protruding pin 747 has a pin member that extends in a direction perpendicular to the central axis CLX, and is attached to the base plate 742 so that the pin members can rotate about the central axis of the pin member.

The ends (tips) of the pin members on the central axis CLX side protrude towards the central opening 746, and roller members 748 are disposed at the respective tips so as to be coaxial with the pin members. The rotor 752 has a set of engagement grooves 772 formed on the outer periphery of the main body 771. The groove width dimension of each engagement groove 772 is set to be slightly larger than the outer diameter dimension of the protruding pin 747 (roller member 748), and the protruding pin 747 (roller member 748) engages with the engagement grooves 772.

As shown in FIG. 51(a), each engagement groove 772 is composed of a horizontal portion 775 extending horizontally and a spiral inclined portion 776 extending upward from one end of the horizontal portion 775. These horizontal portion 775 and inclined portion 776 are continuous, and the protruding pin 747 can move between the horizontal portion 775 and the inclined portion 776 while maintaining an engagement state with the engagement groove 772. In other words, the movable base 741 on which the protruding pin 747 is mounted and the rotor 752 are allowed to change their relative positions in the circumferential direction around the central axis CLX while maintaining the engagement between the roller member 748 and the engagement groove 772.

As shown in FIG. 50, the holder body 751 is provided with a stepping motor 753 as a drive unit for the rotor 752, and a power transmission mechanism 754 that transmits the power of the stepping motor 753 to the rotor 752. As shown in FIG. 51(b), the power transmission mechanism 754 has a drive gear 781 fixed to the output shaft of the stepping motor 753, a driven gear 779 fixed to the main body 771 (lower end) of the rotor 752, and a connecting gear 782 that connects the drive gear 781 and the driven gear 779. The stepping motor 753 is connected to the notification/performance control device 143 and operates based on a drive signal from the notification/performance control device 143. This drive force is transmitted to the rotor 752 via the power transmission mechanism 754, causing the rotor 752 to rotate around the central axis CLX.

In this embodiment, the lift mechanism 785 changes the amount of protrusion of the operation button 721, making it possible to switch the performance button device 40 between three different appearances. Here, the movement of the lift mechanism 785 will be described with reference to Figures 52 and 53. Figure 52 is a cross-sectional view of the lift mechanism 785, and Figure 53 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the protruding pin 747 and the engagement groove 772. In the following description, the rotation direction of the rotor 752 in the clockwise direction about the central axis CLX in a plan view of the performance button device 40 is referred to as the "forward direction," and the rotation direction of the rotor 752 in the counterclockwise direction is referred to as the "reverse direction."

When the protruding pin 747 is positioned in the horizontal portion 775 of the engagement groove 772 as shown in FIG. 52(a), the operation stroke of the operation button 721 is at a minimum. When the stepping motor 753 rotates forward under this condition, the rotor 752 rotates in the forward direction as shown in FIG. 53(a1)→FIG. 53(a2).

When the rotation in the positive direction continues, as shown in FIG. 53(a2)→FIG. 53(a3), the protruding pin 747 is pushed upward by the right wall 777 of the inclined portion 776. Here, the rotor 752 is restricted from being displaced downward along the central axis CLX by the holder unit 750, and the movable base 741 on which the protruding pin 747 is mounted is permitted to be displaced upward along the central axis CLX. The movable base 741 is restricted from rotating about the central axis CLX by the shaft 728. For these reasons, the movable base 741, i.e., the operation button 721, is displaced upward along the central axis CLX in a manner that follows the protruding pin 747 that has been pushed upward.

The amount of rotation of the stepping motor 753 is managed by the number of pulses of the drive signal (pulse control), and as shown in Fig. 53(a3) -> Fig. 53(a4), the output of the drive signal for rotation to the stepping motor 753 is stopped just before the protruding pin 747 reaches the vicinity of the upper end 773 of the engagement groove 772. As a result, as shown in Fig. 52(b), the movable base 741 moves upward away from the holder unit 750, and the operating stroke of the operating button 721 is extended.

In this embodiment, the rotation of the rotor 752 (stepping motor 753) is stopped by pulse control immediately before the protruding pin 747 abuts against the upper end 773 of the engagement groove 772 to avoid collision between the protruding pin 747 and the upper end 773, but it is also possible to configure the rotation of the rotor 752 (stepping motor 753) to stop when the protruding pin 747 abuts against the upper end 773.

The current supply to the stepping motor 753 continues even after the protruding pin 747 reaches the upper end 773. This generates a holding torque in the stepping motor 753 that maintains the rotational position. This holding torque is set taking into account the weight of the operation button 721, and the operation button 721 is held in the position after the stroke change (for example, the maximum protruding position). Details will be described later, but by changing the current supplied to the stepping motor 753, it is possible to change the resistance against the pressing operation.

Here, the outer button member 722 and the inner button member 723 are not fixed, and relative displacement between the outer button member 722 and the inner button member 723 is permitted at least in the circumferential direction centered on the central axis line CLX. This configuration prevents the sensation of the rotor 752 rotating when a pressing operation is performed from being transmitted to the player's hand. This is preferable in terms of preventing the occurrence of discomfort caused by the operation. Furthermore, even if the outer button member 722 is turned by hand, it is possible to prevent the operation button 721 from dropping due to this, and it is possible to preferably prevent the operation from being performed in a manner different from the operation manner (pressing operation) assumed by the performance button device 40.

As shown in FIG. 52(b), when the protruding pin 747 is located near the upper end 773 of the engagement groove 772, the operation stroke of the operation button 721 is at its maximum. When the stepping motor 753 rotates in the reverse direction under this condition, the rotor 752 rotates in the reverse direction, as shown in FIG. 53(b1)→FIG. 53(b2).

As already explained, the rotor 752 is restricted from being displaced downward along the central axis CLX by the holder unit 750, and the movable base 741 on which the protruding pin 747 is mounted is permitted to be displaced downward along the central axis CLX. The movable base 741 is restricted from rotating about the central axis CLX by the shaft 728. For these reasons, the protruding pin 747 follows the right wall portion 777 of the inclined portion 776 and descends under its own weight, and the movable base 741, i.e., the operation button 721, is displaced downward along the central axis CLX.

The amount of rotation of the stepping motor 753 is managed by the number of pulses of the drive signal (pulse control), and as shown in FIG. 53(b3)→FIG. 53(b4), the stepping motor 753 continues to rotate even after the protruding pin 747 reaches the horizontal portion 775 of the engagement groove 772. Then, the output of the rotation drive signal to the stepping motor 753 is stopped just before the protruding pin 747 reaches the vicinity of the lower end portion 774 of the engagement groove 772. As a result, as shown in FIG. 52(a), the movable base 741 abuts against the holder unit 750 from above, and the extension of the operation stroke of the operation button 721 is released.

In this embodiment, the rotation of the rotor 752 (stepping motor 753) is stopped by pulse control immediately before the protruding pin 747 abuts against the lower end 774 of the engagement groove 772 to avoid collision between the protruding pin 747 and the lower end 774. However, it is also possible to configure the rotation of the rotor 752 (stepping motor 753) to stop when the protruding pin 747 abuts against the lower end 774.

After the protruding pin 747 reaches the lower end 774, the current supply to the stepping motor 753 is stopped. In other words, the stepping motor 753 does not generate a holding torque to maintain the rotational position. This configuration makes it possible to minimize the increase in power consumption caused by the multi-functionality of the performance button device 40.

Next, with reference to Figs. 54 to 56, we will provide additional explanation on the relationship between each form of the effect button device 40 and the operation stroke. Fig. 54 is a schematic diagram showing the effect button device 40 in the first form, Fig. 55 is a schematic diagram showing the effect button device 40 in the second form, and Fig. 57 is a schematic diagram showing the effect button device 40 in the third form.

As shown in Fig. 54, in the first form in which the operation stroke of the effect button device 40 is not enlarged, the operation stroke S1 is the same as the gap Sa between the housing 726 (bottom surface 736) of the operation button 721 and the base plate 742 of the movable base 741. In contrast, as shown in Fig. 55, in the second form in which the operation stroke of the effect button device 40 is enlarged to a maximum, the operation stroke S2 is the same as the sum of the gap Sa between the housing 726 (bottom surface 736) of the operation button 721 and the base plate 742 of the movable base 741 and the gap Sb between the base plate 742 of the movable base 741 and the holder main body 751 (bottom surface 761) of the holder unit 750. As shown in FIG. 56, even in the third form in which the operation stroke of the performance button device 40 is expanded to about half that of the second form, the operation stroke S3 is the same as the sum of the gap Sa between the housing 726 (bottom surface portion 736) of the operation button 721 and the base plate 742 of the movable base 741, and the gap Sb between the base plate 742 of the movable base 741 and the holder main body 751 (bottom portion 761) of the holder unit 750.

In other words, the first to third forms have in common that the operation stroke includes the gap Sa, and the difference in the size of the gap Sb is directly reflected in the difference in the operation stroke.

Now, with reference to Figures 57 and 58, the movement of the effect button device 40 when a pressing operation is performed will be described. Note that since the movements during operation are similar for the second and third forms, the movement of the effect button device 40 when in the second form will be described, and the description of the movement when in the third form will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 57(a), when a pressing operation (push-down operation) is performed while the performance button device 40 is in the first form, the operation causes the coil spring 745 (see FIG. 42, etc.) to compress, allowing the operation button 721 to move (drop) in the same direction as the central axis CLX. In the first form, the operation stroke is not extended, and the movable base 741 abuts against the holder body 751 of the holder unit 750 from above. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 57(a) → FIG. 57(b), the operation button 721 (housing 726) abuts against the movable base 741 from above, preventing further displacement.

As shown in FIG. 58(a), when a pressing operation (push-down operation) is performed when the performance button device 40 is in the second form, the coil spring 745 is compressed with the operation, allowing the operation button 721 to be displaced (lowered) in the same direction as the central axis CLX. In the second form, the operation stroke is enlarged, and the movable base 741 is spaced upward from the holder body 751 of the holder unit 750. The holding torque of the movable base 741 (operation block 701) by the stepping motor 753 is greater than the biasing force by the coil spring 745 (see FIG. 49, etc.). Therefore, at the beginning of the pressing operation, the coil spring 745 is compressed, displacing the operation button 721 toward the movable base 741, and displacement of the movable base 741 toward the holder unit 750 is substantially avoided. As shown in Figures 58(b) and 58(c), after the operation button 721 abuts against the movable base 741 from above, as the pressing operation continues, the operation button 721 and the movable base 741 become one unit (button unit 720) and displace toward the holder unit 750 while maintaining that abutting state. Then, the movable base 741 abuts against the holder main body 751 of the holder unit 750 from above, preventing further displacement.

As already explained, the displacement direction (operation direction) of the operation button 721 when it descends toward the movable base 741 is the same as the displacement direction (operation direction) of the operation button 721 when it descends toward the holder unit 750 together with the movable base 741, thereby preventing changes in the trajectory during the stroke.

As already explained, the game effects executed in this pachinko machine 10 include operation-responsive effects that utilize the effect button device 40. Operation-responsive effects are configured to occur in various situations during play, and in this embodiment, a first special effect is provided as one of these operation-responsive effects. The first special effect will be explained below with reference to Figure 59. Figure 59(a) is a schematic diagram showing the types of first special effects, and Figure 59(b) is a schematic diagram showing the patterns of the first special effects.

(First special performance)
As shown in Fig. 59(a), the first special performance is configured to be executed in a part of the game times corresponding to the super reach. The super reach includes the super reach A not corresponding to the first special performance, the super reach B not corresponding to the first special performance, the super reach C not corresponding to the first special performance, the super reach A corresponding to the first special performance, the super reach B corresponding to the first special performance, and the super reach C corresponding to the first special performance, and the expected degree of transition to the special game state (expected degree of big win) when each super reach occurs is set to be higher in the order of the super reach A not corresponding to the first special performance < the super reach B not corresponding to the first special performance < the super reach C not corresponding to the first special performance < the super reach A corresponding to the first special performance < the super reach B corresponding to the first special performance < the super reach C corresponding to the first special performance.

As shown in Figure 59 (b), for Super Reach A to C, the performance parts after the transition to reach display (reach display to confirmed display) are broadly divided into first to third parts. In the first part, which constitutes the early part of the reach display, a branching performance to Super Reach A to C is executed, in the second part, which constitutes the middle part of the reach display, a chance-up performance in which the display mode of the character is changed is executed, and in the third part, which constitutes the final part of the reach display, a chance-up performance that is a cut-in display (interrupt display) is executed.

More specifically, in the branching effect executed in the first part, the characters corresponding to Super Reach A to C are displayed in a rotating manner on the display screen 253a, and the Super Reach that will be the development destination is clearly indicated by one of the characters being displayed stationary in the center of the display screen 253a. As already explained, the expectation of transition to the special game state is set in the order Super Reach A < Super Reach B < Super Reach C, so that players hoping for a transition to the special game state can be encouraged to pay attention to the development destination.

In the chance-up effect executed in the second part, an effect is added to the character displayed in the center of the display screen 253a, and the color of this effect indicates the likelihood of transitioning to the special game state. Three effect colors are provided: white, blue, and red, and the likelihood of transitioning to the special game state increases in the order white < blue < red. Note that in the second part, effects may or may not be added, but the addition of an effect is confirmed when the first special effect occurs.

The chance-up effect executed in the third part is an effect in which a cut-in image for chance-up is displayed on the display screen 253a so as to cover the patterns and characters displayed on the display screen 253a, and the size of the cut-in image indicates the likelihood of transitioning to the special game state. There are three sizes of cut-in image: small, medium, and large, and the order of the likelihood of transitioning to the special game state increases from small < medium < large. Note that in the third part, a cut-in image may or may not be displayed, but when the first special effect occurs, the display of the cut-in image is confirmed.

When the first special effect is executed, the player is prompted to operate the effect button device 40 in at least one of the first to third parts. If the player operates the effect button device 40 in accordance with this prompt, the effect in each part will progress based on that operation.

In more detail, when the effect button device 40 is operated in accordance with the operation suggestion in the first part, the super reach that is the development destination is displayed in accordance with the operation. Specifically, the character corresponding to the development destination at the timing of the operation is displayed stationary in the center of the display screen 253a, and the above-mentioned replacement display ends. When the effect button device 40 is operated in accordance with the operation suggestion in the second part, an effect is added to the character displayed on the display screen 253a in accordance with the operation. Specifically, an effect of a color corresponding to the current first special effect is added at the timing of the operation. When the effect button device 40 is operated in accordance with the operation suggestion in the third part, a cut-in image is displayed on the display screen 253a. Specifically, a cut-in image of a size corresponding to the current first special effect is displayed at the timing of the operation.

If an operation is suggested in the first part but the effect button device 40 is not operated during the valid operation period, the destination of development is clearly indicated at the end timing of the first part. In other words, only the timing at which the destination of development is clearly indicated differs depending on whether or not the effect button device 40 is operated. In contrast, if an operation is suggested in the second part but the effect button device 40 is not operated during the valid operation period, the effect display in the second part is canceled. Also, if an operation is suggested in the third part but the effect button device 40 is not operated during the valid operation period, the cut-in display in the third part is canceled.

Now, referring to the flowchart in Figure 60, we will explain the setting process for the first special effect that is executed as part of regular processing (e.g., the effect setting process in the process for starting fluctuations) by the MPU 912 of the notification/effect control device 143.

(Setting process for first special effect)
In the setting process for the first special effect, first, in step S1601, it is determined whether the current game state is a normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode, specifically, either the second normal game state or the third normal game state. If a negative determination is made in step S1601, this setting process is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S1601, the process proceeds to step S1602.

In step S1602, it is determined whether the game round to be executed this time is a Super Reach compatible game round. If the game round to be executed this time is not a Super Reach compatible game round, this setting process ends. If the game round to be executed this time is a Super Reach compatible game round, a positive determination is made in step S1602 and the process proceeds to step S1603.

In step S1603, a lottery process for the first special effect is executed. In this lottery process, it is determined whether or not to execute the first special effect depending on the result of the win/lose lottery. If the result of the win/lose lottery is a judgment result that corresponds to a transition to the special game state (a big win result), a difference is set so that the probability of winning is higher than if the result is a judgment result that does not correspond to a transition to the special game state (a loss result).

If the lottery process in step S1603 results in a non-winning result, a negative judgment is made in step S1604 and this setting process ends. If the lottery process in step S1603 results in a winning result, a positive judgment is made in step S1604 and the process proceeds to step S1605. In step S1605, a process for determining the performance pattern of the first special effect is executed, and in the following step S1606, a first special effect setting process is executed based on the performance pattern determined in step S1605, and then the setting process for this first special effect ends.

In the first special effect shown in this embodiment, the expectation of transition to the special game state differs depending on the timing at which the operation suggestion is made after the transition to the reach display, more specifically, after the effect button device 40 is switched to the second form. Below, the types of first special effects and their allocation will be explained with reference to Figures 61 to 63. Figure 61 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between Super Reach A to C and the types of first special effects, Figure 62 is a schematic diagram showing an allocation table for Super Reach A to B, and Figure 63 is a schematic diagram showing an allocation table for Super Reach C.

As shown in FIG. 61, the first special effects are broadly divided into first special effect A in which an operation suggestion is made in the first part, first special effect B in which an operation suggestion is made in the second part, first special effect C in which an operation suggestion is made in the third part, first special effect D in which an operation suggestion is made in the first and third parts, first special effect E in which an operation suggestion is made in the second and third parts, and first special effect F in which an operation suggestion is made in a special game state (more specifically, the seventh round) that is entered immediately after the game round when the game round ends without an operation suggestion being made in any of the first to third parts.

(Super Reach A)
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 61(a), in the case of Super Reach A corresponding to the first special effect A, the operation suggestion begins 17 seconds after the start of a game round (during the first part), i.e., 2 seconds after the transition to the reach display, and the operation suggestion ends when the effect button device 40 is operated or 21 seconds have passed since the start of a game round (during the first part).

In the case of Super Reach A, which corresponds to the first special effect B, the operation suggestion starts 24 seconds after the start of the game round (during the second part), and ends when the effect button device 40 is operated or 28 seconds have passed since the start of the game round (during the second part).

In the case of Super Reach A, which corresponds to the first special effect C, the operation suggestion starts 31 seconds after the start of the game round (during the third part), and ends when the effect button device 40 is operated or 35 seconds have passed since the start of the game round (during the third part).

In the case of Super Reach A, which corresponds to the first special effect D, the operation suggestion starts 17 seconds after the start of a game round (during the first part) and ends when the effect button device 40 is operated or when 21 seconds have passed since the start of a game round (during the first part). After that, the operation suggestion starts again 31 seconds after the start of a game round (during the third part) and ends when the effect button device 40 is operated or when 35 seconds have passed since the start of a game round (during the third part).

In the case of Super Reach A, which corresponds to the first special effect E, the operation suggestion starts 24 seconds after the start of a game round (during the second part) and ends when the effect button device 40 is operated or when 28 seconds have passed since the start of a game round (during the second part). After that, the operation suggestion starts 31 seconds after the start of a game round (during the third part) and ends when the effect button device 40 is operated or when 35 seconds have passed since the start of a game round (during the third part).

In the case of Super Reach A, which corresponds to the first special effect F, no operation suggestions are given during the game round and the game round ends. Operation suggestions are given at the start of a specified round (specifically, the seventh round) in the special game state entered after the end of the game round, and the operation suggestions end when the effect button device 40 is operated or when 5 seconds have passed since the start of the seventh round.

(Super Reach B)
As shown in Figure 61 (b), in the case of Super Reach B corresponding to the first special effect A, the operation suggestion begins 17 seconds after the start of a game round (during the first part), i.e., 2 seconds after the transition to the reach display, and the operation suggestion ends when the effect button device 40 is operated or 21 seconds have passed since the start of a game round (during the first part).

In the case of Super Reach B, which corresponds to the first special effect B, the operation suggestion starts 24 seconds after the start of the game round (during the second part), and ends when the effect button device 40 is operated or 28 seconds after the start of the game round (during the second part).

In the case of Super Reach B, which corresponds to the first special effect C, the operation suggestion starts 32 seconds after the start of the game round (during the third part), and ends when the effect button device 40 is operated or 36 seconds have passed since the start of the game round (during the third part).

In the case of Super Reach B, which corresponds to the first special effect D, the operation suggestion starts 17 seconds after the start of a game round (during the first part) and ends when the effect button device 40 is operated or when 21 seconds have passed since the start of a game round (during the first part). After that, the operation suggestion starts 32 seconds after the start of a game round (during the third part) and ends when the effect button device 40 is operated or when 36 seconds have passed since the start of a game round (during the third part).

In the case of Super Reach B, which corresponds to the first special effect E, the operation suggestion starts 24 seconds after the start of a game round (during the second part) and ends when the effect button device 40 is operated or when 28 seconds have passed since the start of a game round (during the second part). After that, the operation suggestion starts 32 seconds after the start of a game round (during the third part) and ends when the effect button device 40 is operated or when 36 seconds have passed since the start of a game round (during the third part).

In the case of Super Reach B, which corresponds to the first special effect F, no operation suggestions are given during the game round and the game round ends. Operation suggestions are given at the start of a specified round (specifically, the seventh round) in the special game state entered after the end of the game round, and the operation suggestions end when the effect button device 40 is operated or when 5 seconds have passed since the start of the seventh round.

(Super Reach C)
As shown in Figure 61 (c), in the case of Super Reach C corresponding to the first special effect B, the operation suggestion begins 24 seconds after the start of a game round (during the second part), i.e., 2 seconds after the transition to the reach display, and the operation suggestion ends when the effect button device 40 is operated or 28 seconds have passed since the start of a game round (during the second part).

In the case of Super Reach C, which corresponds to the first special effect C, the operation suggestion starts 33 seconds after the start of the game round (during the third part), and ends when the effect button device 40 is operated or 37 seconds after the start of the game round (during the third part).

In the case of Super Reach C, which corresponds to the first special effect E, the operation suggestion starts 24 seconds after the start of a game round (during the first part) and ends when the effect button device 40 is operated or when 28 seconds have passed since the start of a game round (during the first part). After that, the operation suggestion starts 33 seconds after the start of a game round (during the third part) and ends when the effect button device 40 is operated or when 37 seconds have passed since the start of a game round (during the third part).

In the case of Super Reach C, which corresponds to the first special effect F, no operation suggestions are given during the game round and the game round ends. After the game round ends, operation suggestions are given at the start of a specified round (round 7) in the special game state entered, and the operation suggestions end when the effect button device 40 is operated or 5 seconds have passed since the start of round 7.

Note that unlike Super Reach A and Super Reach B, Super Reach C is not compatible with the first special effect A and the first special effect D (they will not occur).

Next, the relationship between the game result and the allocation of the first special effects A to F will be described with reference to Figures 62 and 63. Note that in Figures 62 and 63, those effect button devices 40 that switch from the second form to the first form when the effect button device 40 is operated based on the operation suggestion are marked with a circle, and those that maintain the second form even if the operation is performed are marked with a triangle.

(In the case of Super Reach A and Super Reach B)
When it is determined that the first special effect is to be executed for a game in which the Super Reach A to B corresponding to a miss result is executed, 50% of the game will be the first special effect A, 30% will be the first special effect B, and 20% will be the first special effect C, as shown in FIG. 62. When it is determined that the first special effect is to be executed for a game in which the Super Reach A to B corresponding to a normal big win result is executed, 10% of the game will be the first special effect A, 15% will be the first special effect B, 60% will be the first special effect C, 5% will be the first special effect D, and 10% will be the first special effect E. When it is determined that the first special effect is to be executed for a game in which the Super Reach A to B corresponding to a probability big win result is executed, 10% of the game will be the first special effect A, 15% will be the first special effect B, 55% will be the first special effect C, 5% will be the first special effect D, 10% will be the first special effect E, and 5% will be the first special effect F.

(Super Reach C)
On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special effect is to be executed for a game in which a Super Reach C corresponding to a miss result is executed, 50% of the game will be the first special effect A, 30% will be the first special effect B, and 20% will be the first special effect C, as shown in Fig. 63. When it is determined that the first special effect is to be executed for a game in which a Super Reach C corresponding to a normal jackpot result is executed, 15% of the game will be the first special effect B, 70% will be the first special effect C, and 15% will be the first special effect E. When it is determined that the first special effect is to be executed for a game in which a Super Reach C corresponding to a probability jackpot result is executed, 15% of the game will be the first special effect B, 60% will be the first special effect C, 15% will be the first special effect E, and 10% will be the first special effect F.

In other words, when Super Reach A to C are executed, the expected probability of transitioning to the special game state increases in the order of first special effect A < first special effect B < first special effect C, and transition to the special game state is confirmed for first special effects D to F, and for first special effect F, it is confirmed that the game state after the special game state ends will be the third normal game state.

Next, referring to the flowchart in FIG. 64, we will explain the first special effect processing that is executed as part of the regular processing by the MPU 912 of the notification/effect control device 143.

(First special effect processing)
In the first special effect process, first, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not the current game round is a game round compatible with the first special effect. If it is a game round compatible with the first special effect, a positive determination is made in step S1701 and the process proceeds to step S1702. In step S1702, it is determined whether or not the effect button device 40 has been switched to the second form. If it has not been switched to the second form, the process proceeds to step S1703. In step S1703, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to transition to a reach display. If a positive determination is made in step S1703, a switching process is executed to switch the effect button device 40 from the first form to the second form, and the first special effect process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S1703, if a negative judgment is made in step S1703, that is, if it is judged that it is not the timing to transition to the reach display, the process proceeds to step S1705. In step S1705, it is judged whether or not the current game round corresponds to a return to the second form. Specifically, it is judged whether or not the game round corresponds to either the first special effect D or the first special effect E described above. If a negative judgment is made in step S1705, the process proceeds to step S1706. In step S1706, it is judged whether or not it is the timing to return to the second form. If a negative judgment is made in step S1706, the process proceeds to step S1707. In step S1707, a return process is performed to return the effect button device 40 to the second form, and then the process proceeds to step S1707.

Returning to the explanation of step S1702, if a positive judgment is made in step S1702, the process proceeds to step S1708. In step S1708, it is determined whether or not the operation is valid during a period in which operation of the performance button device 40 is validly accepted. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an operation validation flag, which will be described later, is stored in the various flags storage area 933 of the RAM 914.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1708, the process proceeds to step S1709. In step S1709, it is judged whether it is time to start suggesting operation of the effect button device 40. If a negative judgment is made in step S1709, the process for the first special effect is terminated. If a positive judgment is made in step S1709, the process proceeds to step S1710.

In step S1710, a process for setting a valid operation period during which operation of the effect button device 40 is validly accepted is performed. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in a valid operation period counter provided in the various counter area 932 of the RAM 914. The value of this valid operation period count is decremented each time a periodic process (e.g., the first special effect process) is executed by the MPU 912. Thereafter, operation of the effect button device 40 is validly accepted until the valid operation period has elapsed (until the value of the valid operation period counter reaches "0"). Also, in step S1710, an operation enable flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914.

After executing the operation suggestion start process in the following step S1711, this first special effect process is terminated. In the operation suggestion start process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled to output a message encouraging an operation (for example, a voice such as "Press the button") from the speaker unit 27, and an operation suggestion start command is output to the display control device 142. Based on receiving the operation suggestion start command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 to display the operation suggestion message "Press the button", a picture resembling a button, and an indicator showing the remaining valid period on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253.

Returning to the explanation of step S1708, if a positive determination is made in step S1708, i.e., if the operation is within the valid operation period (if the operation enable flag is stored in RAM 914), the process proceeds to step S1712. In step S1712, it is determined whether or not the valid operation period has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the valid operation period counter in RAM 914 is "0".

If a negative judgment is made in step S1712, the process proceeds to step S1713. In step S1713, it is judged whether or not the effect button device 40 has been operated based on the detection information from the detection sensor 791. If no operation has been performed, a negative judgment is made in step S1713, and the first special effect processing is terminated. If an operation has been performed, a positive judgment is made in step S1713, and the process proceeds to step S1714.

In step S1714, an operation acceptance notification process and an operation suggestion end process are executed. In the operation acceptance notification process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled to output a sound effect from the speaker unit 27 indicating that the operation has been validly accepted. In the operation suggestion end process, an operation suggestion end command is output to the display control device 142. Based on receiving the operation suggestion end command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 to end the display of the operation suggestion message, the button-like image, and the indicator showing the remaining valid period.

In the next step S1715, an operation-responsive performance execution process is performed. As a result, if the performance button device 40 is operated in accordance with the operation suggestion in the first part, a character corresponding to the development destination is displayed stationary in the center of the display screen 253a, if the performance button device 40 is operated in accordance with the operation suggestion in the second part, an effect of a color corresponding to the current first special performance is added, and if the performance button device 40 is operated in accordance with the operation suggestion in the third part, a cut-in image of a size corresponding to the current first special performance is displayed. Sound effects and background music corresponding to these various performances are output from the speaker unit 27.

In the next step S1716, a delayed switching process is executed. The delayed switching process is a process for controlling the driving of the stepping motor 753 to maintain the effect button device 40 in the first form. Specifically, if the amount of depression during operation is insufficient, the stepping motor 753 is driven to compensate for this and assist in returning to the first form, but this operation is delayed until it is confirmed that the player's hand has been removed from the effect button device 40 based on the detection information from the detection sensor 791. Note that if the player is still pressing the effect button device 40 after the initial effective period has elapsed, switching to the first form is executed when the effective period has elapsed.

After executing the delayed switching process in step S1716, the process proceeds to step S1717, where the operation enable flag stored in the various flag storage area 933 is erased, and the first special effect process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S1712, if a positive judgment is made in step S1712, i.e., if the operation valid period has elapsed without the performance button device 40 being operated, the process proceeds to step S1718, where an operation suggestion end process is executed. In the operation suggestion end process, an operation suggestion end command is output to the display control device 142. Based on receiving the operation suggestion end command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 to end the display of the operation suggestion message, the button-like image, and the indicator showing the remaining valid period.

In the next step S1719, a process for switching to the first form is executed. Specifically, the stepping motor 753 is driven and controlled to maintain the effect button device 40 in the first form. In other words, unlike when switching to the first form is triggered by an operation, the effect button device 40 is quickly switched to the first form if no operation is performed. Thereafter, in step S1717, the operation enable flag is cleared and the first special effect process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S1701, if a negative judgment is made in step S1701, i.e., if the game is not a round corresponding to the first special effect, the program proceeds to step S1720. In step S1720, it is judged whether or not the game is in a special game state corresponding to the first special effect. If a negative judgment is made in step S1720, the processing for the first special effect ends. If a positive judgment is made in step S1720, the program proceeds to step S1721. In step S1721, it is judged whether or not it is the timing to start the seventh round. If a positive judgment is made in step S1721, the program proceeds to step S1710.

In step S1710, a process for setting the operation valid period during which the operation of the effect button device 40 is validly accepted is performed. As a result, from then on, the operation of the effect button device 40 is validly accepted until the operation valid period has elapsed. Also, in step S1710, an operation enable flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. After the operation suggestion start process is executed in the following step S1711, the first special effect process is terminated. In the operation suggestion start process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled to output a message prompting the operation (for example, a voice such as "press the button") from the speaker unit 27, and an operation suggestion start command is output to the display control device 142. Based on receiving the operation suggestion start command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 to display the operation suggestion message "press the button", a picture imitating a button, and an indicator indicating the remaining valid period on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253.

Returning to the explanation of step S1721, if a negative judgment is made in step S1721, the process proceeds to step S1712. If a negative judgment is made in step S1712, the processes of steps S1713 to S1717 are executed, and if a positive judgment is made in step S1712, the processes of steps S1717 to S1719 are executed, and then the first special effect process is terminated.

Next, we will provide additional information about the flow of the first special effect with reference to Figures 65 and 66. Figure 65 is a timing chart showing the game flow when Super Reach A corresponding to the first special effect A is executed, and Figure 66 is a timing chart showing the game flow when Super Reach A corresponding to the first special effect C is executed.

(Super Reach A for the first special effect A)
At the timing of ta1, the display of the image changes in the operating port display section DL of the main display section D, and the display of the image changes in the display screen 253a of the image display device 253. At the timing of ta2, the display mode of the image on the display screen 253a changes to a reach display. This game round is a game round in which a super reach A corresponding to the first special effect A is executed, and at the timing of ta2, the first part corresponding to the branching effect suggesting the development destination starts. At this timing of ta2, the form of the effect button device 40 switches from the first form to the second form, and the operation stroke of the effect button device 40 is extended. However, no operation suggestion starts at this point.

After the first part starts, the display screen 253a displays a teasing display encouraging a transition to Super Reach, and then the branching effect is executed, specifically, the display of the characters corresponding to Super Reach A to C is switched on. At the timing ta3, when a predetermined waiting period has elapsed since the switching display started, the display screen 253a and the speaker unit 27 issue a suggestion to operate the effect button device 40, and the operation of the effect button device 40 is enabled. If the effect button device 40 is operated at the timing ta4 while the suggestion to operate is continuing, more specifically at the timing ta4 just before the operation suggestion and the operation valid period end, the operation causes the image of a fairy corresponding to Super Reach A to be displayed stationary on the display screen 253a. In other words, the development destination is clearly indicated based on the player's operation.

Then, at the timing of ta5, the first part is switched to the second part, and at the timing of ta6, the third part is switched to. After that, at the timing of ta7, the third part ends, and at the timing of ta8, the game result of that game (e.g., the result of a jackpot) is displayed on the pay line of the display screen 253a in a frozen state, so that the game result of that game can be clearly shown to the player, and a picture corresponding to that game result is displayed on the operation port display section DL in a frozen state.

In this embodiment, the expectation of transition to the special game state is increased the later the timing at which the operation suggestion begins after the effect button device 40 switches to the second form, and the expectation of transition to the special game state is reduced when an operation suggestion occurs in the first part compared to when the operation suggestion occurs in the second or third part. However, even when an operation suggestion occurs in the first part, it is difficult to distinguish between the first special effect A and the first special effect D by visual inspection or the like at the time of the operation suggestion, which encourages the player to look forward to the first special effect D. This is preferable in order to avoid the execution of an operation suggestion in the first part becoming a factor that rapidly reduces attention to the game.

(Super Reach A for the first special effect C)
At the timing of tb1, the display of the image changes in the operating port display section DL of the main display section D, and the display of the image changes in the display screen 253a of the image display device 253. At the timing of tb2, the display mode of the image on the display screen 253a changes to a reach display. This game round is a game round in which a super reach A corresponding to the first special effect C is executed, and at the timing of tb2, the first part corresponding to the branching effect suggesting the development destination starts. At the timing of tb2, the form of the effect button device 40 switches from the first form to the second form, and the operation stroke of the effect button device 40 is extended. However, no operation suggestion starts at this point.

After the start of the first part, the display screen 253a displays a teasing display encouraging a transition to Super Reach, and then the branching effect described above, specifically the display of the characters corresponding to Super Reach A to C, is executed. Unlike the example in Figure 65, no operation suggestions are initiated in the first part, and the image of a fairy corresponding to Super Reach A is displayed stationary on the display screen 253a, clearly indicating to the player where the development will take place.

At time tb4, the first part transitions to the second part, and then at time tb5, the third part transitions. In the second part, no operation suggestion is made to the performance button device 40, and the operation suggestion is carried over to the third part and beyond.

At the timing of tb6 after the start of the third part, the operation suggestion of the effect button device 40 is executed by the display screen 253a and the speaker unit 27, and the operation of the effect button device 40 is enabled. If the effect button device 40 is operated at the timing of tb7 while the operation suggestion is continuing, more specifically, at the timing of tb7 just before the operation suggestion and the operation validity period end, a cut-in image for increasing the chance is displayed on the display screen 253a by the operation, covering the pattern and character displayed on the display screen 253a.

Then, at the timing of tb8, the third part ends, and at the timing of tb9, the game result of that game (e.g., the result of a jackpot) is displayed to the player by displaying a frozen pattern combination corresponding to that game result on the pay line of the display screen 253a, and a picture corresponding to that game result is displayed on the operation port display section DL.

As described above, in this embodiment, the expectation of transitioning to the special game state is increased the later the timing at which the operation suggestion begins after the effect button device 40 switches to the second form, and if no operation suggestion occurs in the first and second parts, it is determined that the operation suggestion will occur in the third part or later. With this configuration, the period during which the second form is maintained is extended, thereby publicly increasing attention to the game.

The first embodiment described above is expected to have the following excellent effects:

If the effect button device 40 is configured to switch between the first form and the second form, the impact on the effect button device 40 can be strengthened, and attention can be drawn to the effect button device 40 itself. Here, when the effect button device 40 becomes the second form, the operation of the effect button device 40 (the operation button 721) is suggested based on the fact that a predetermined waiting period has elapsed since the switch to the second form. A plurality of periods of different lengths are provided as the predetermined waiting period, and the period during which the effect button device 40 is maintained in the second form changes in various ways based on the result of the big win lottery. With this configuration, it is possible to encourage the player to pay attention not only to the change in form but also to the length of the period during which the second form is maintained. This is preferable in terms of suppressing monotony in the game and increasing the attention to the game. In particular, it is possible to make a player who wants to transition to a special game state expect that the period during which the second form is maintained will be as long as possible (to become the second period). Such a configuration is advantageous in terms of increasing the attention to the switch to the second form.

If the effect button device 40 is configured to switch to the second form with the transition to the reach display, and operation suggestions are generated in the first, second, and third parts after the transition to the reach display, the player can infer the period during which the second form is maintained from the progress of the display effect without having to measure said period. In this way, by clarifying the difference in the above-mentioned predetermined waiting periods, the above-mentioned effect of increasing attention can be optimally achieved.

If the effect button device 40 suddenly switches to the first form while waiting for an operation suggestion, this can be a cause of confusion for the player. Therefore, as shown in this embodiment, when the effect button device 40 switches to the second form, it is configured to remain in the second form until the above-mentioned predetermined waiting period has elapsed, thereby making it possible to preferably prevent the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

As described above, if the operation stroke is made larger in the second form than in the first form, the operation can be prevented from becoming complicated by changing to the second form, while the effect button device 40 can be made more noticeable when the first special effect is executed.

In the first embodiment, the difference in time between the timing at which the operation suggestion for the first special effect is made in the first part and the timing at which the operation suggestion for the first special effect is made in the second part is configured to be greater than the period from the timing of switching to the second form (timing of transition to reach display) to the occurrence of the operation suggestion for the first special effect in the first part, and the difference in time between the timing at which the operation suggestion for the first special effect is made in the second part and the timing at which the operation suggestion for the first special effect is made in the third part is configured to be greater than the period from the timing of switching to the second form (timing of transition to reach display) to the occurrence of the operation suggestion for the first special effect in the first part. Such a configuration can prevent the difference in the predetermined waiting period from being lost in the flow of the game, making it difficult to understand.

<Modification 1>
In the first embodiment, the first special effect is divided into a plurality of parts (first part to third part), and an operation suggestion of the effect button device 40 in the second form can occur in each part. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is sufficient that a plurality of first special effects (first special effect A to first special effect F) having different waiting periods from the completion of switching to the second form until the operation suggestion occurs are provided, and it is optional whether or not to provide a correlation between the occurrence timing of the operation suggestion and each of the above parts.

<Modification 2>
In the first embodiment, the difference between the timing at which the operation suggestion occurs when the first special effect A is executed and the timing at which the operation suggestion occurs when the first special effect B is executed is set to 7 sec, and the difference between the timing at which the operation suggestion occurs when the first special effect B is executed and the timing at which the operation suggestion occurs when the first special effect C is executed is set to 7 sec, but the difference in timing is arbitrary. However, in order to prevent confusion over the timing of the operation suggestion, it is preferable to make the difference in timing at which the operation suggestion occurs longer than the period from when the effect button device 40 switches to the second form to the timing at which the first operation suggestion can occur.

<Modification 3>
In the first embodiment, the timing of the transition to the reach display and the timing of the transition to the second form are aligned, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the timing of the transition to the second form is arbitrary. For example, it is possible to transition to the second form before the transition to the reach display (for example, a configuration in which the transition to the second form occurs at the start of the corresponding game round), or it is possible to transition to the second form after the transition to the reach display.

<Modification 4>
In the first embodiment described above, a correlation is provided between the timing of the transition to the reach display and the timing of switching to the second form, thereby preventing a player who is gazing at the pattern display device 253 from missing the timing when the switch to the second form occurs. However, instead of or in addition to this, it is also possible to configure the pattern display device 253 or speaker unit 27 to suggest or explicitly indicate the switch to the second form when the performance button device 40 switches to the second form.

For example, it is possible to display a message or image such as text indicating that the performance button device 40 is transforming on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253, or to output a message or sound effect indicating that the performance button device 40 is transforming from the speaker unit 27.

<Modification 5>
In the game in which the first special effect is executed, the effect button device 40 may be configured to suggest to the player the period during which the second form is maintained. For example, when the second form is switched to, an effect may be added to the outer periphery of the display screen 253a, and the effect may change depending on the period during which the second form is maintained. For example, the effect may be configured to become one step larger by transitioning from the first part (beginning) to the second part (middle), and to become another step larger by transitioning from the second part (middle) to the third part (end). In such a configuration, the effect button device 40 may be configured to end the display of the effect based on the switching to the first form.

<Modification 6>
In the first embodiment, the count of the period until the operation suggestion is executed is started when the effect button device 40 is switched to the second form, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is sufficient that there are multiple periods from the switching to the second form to the execution of the operation suggestion in the first special effect, and it is also possible to configure the period until the operation suggestion is executed to be counted from the start timing of the game round.

<Modification 7>
In the above-described first embodiment, the operation is monitored based on information from the detection sensor 791, and the position of the button unit 720 (operation button 721) in the stroke direction is monitored based on information from the rotary encoder 792, but it is also possible to omit the detection sensor 791 by configuring the rotary encoder 792 to also function as the detection sensor 791. In other words, it is not intended to deny a configuration in which the operation is monitored based on information from the rotary encoder 792. In such a configuration, it is preferable that the rotation angle of the rotor 752 changes in response to the displacement of the operation button 721 even when the operation button 721 is displaced from the standby position to the operating position.

<Modification 8>
In the first embodiment, the height position of the operation detection that is the start trigger of the operation-responsive performance is changed following the change in the operation stroke, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure the height position of the operation detection not to change even if the operation stroke changes. In other words, it is also possible to configure the stroke for moving to the detection position that is the start trigger of the operation-responsive performance to change.

<Modification 9>
In the first embodiment, when the effect button device 40 is in the second form and the protruding amount of the operation button 721 from the upper surface 28a of the upper bulging portion 28 changes, the operation button 721 is maintained at the maximum protruding position by the holding torque of the stepping motor 753, but this is not limited to this. It is also possible to maintain the operation button 721 at the maximum protruding position by the biasing force of a biasing member such as a spring.

<Modification 10>
In a game in which the first special effect is executed, the period that has elapsed since the effect button device 40 was switched to the second mode may be displayed as a timer on the display screen 253a or the like.

<Modification 11>
In a game in which the first special effect is executed, if the effect button device 40 is operated (pushed to the first detection position CP1) between the time of switching to the second form and the time of the suggestion of operation of the effect button device 40, the planned operation suggestion and the first special effect can be canceled. In this case, it is preferable to configure the effect button device 40 to forcibly return to the first form. With such a configuration, the player is prompted to wait until the operation suggestion occurs after switching to the second form, and it is possible to suppress the effect button device 40 from being randomly operated after switching to the second form.

<Modification 12>
In the first embodiment described above, the difference in time between the timing at which an operation suggestion for the first special effect is made in the first part and the timing at which an operation suggestion for the first special effect is made in the second part is configured to be greater than the period from the timing of switching to the second form (the timing of transition to the reach display) to the occurrence of an operation suggestion for the first special effect in the first part, but the former may be configured to be greater than the latter, or the two may be configured to coincide.

The difference in time between the timing at which the operation suggestion for the first special effect is made in the second part and the timing at which the operation suggestion for the first special effect is made in the third part is configured to be greater than the period from the timing of switching to the second form (timing of transition to reach display) to the occurrence of the operation suggestion for the first special effect in the first part, but the former may be configured to be greater than the latter, or the two may be configured to coincide.

<Modification 13>
In the first embodiment, the timing at which the operation suggestion is executed when the first special effect is executed is measured from the start of a game round, but the starting point of the period measurement is arbitrary. For example, it is also possible to measure the timing at which the operation suggestion is executed when the first special effect is executed from the transition timing to the reach display.

<Modification 14>
In the above-described first embodiment, the operation button 721 is configured to come into contact with the movable base 741 by descending, but it is preferable to provide a plurality of abutment portions on the movable base 741 so as to surround the central axis CLX of the operation button 721. With such an arrangement, it is possible to suitably suppress the disturbance of the posture of the operation button 721 when the operation button 721 and the movable base 741 come into contact with each other.

Second Embodiment
In this embodiment, the configuration related to the first special effect, which is one of the operation-responsive effects using the effect button device 40, specifically the configuration related to the second and third parts, differs from that of the first embodiment. Below, a supplementary explanation will be given on the configuration related to the effect button device 40 with reference to Fig. 67, and then the characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be explained, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 67(a), when the effect button device 40 is in the first form, the operation button 721 descends when the effect button device 40 is operated. In other words, the "total operation stroke" = "movement range of the operation button 721", and the movement target is limited to the operation button 721 (the entire button unit 720 does not descend as a unit).

In contrast, when the effect button device 40 is in the second form, the "total operation stroke" = "the range of movement in which the operation button 721 descends independently" + "the range of movement in which the entire button unit 720 descends as a unit." Specifically, the holding torque of the stepping motor 753 described above is greater than the biasing force of the coil spring 745, and when the operation button 721 is pressed from the maximum protruding position, the operation button 721 descends against the biasing force of the coil spring 745, while the holding position of the stepping motor 753 does not change. For this reason, when an operation is performed at the maximum protruding position, the operation button 721 descends independently first. When the operation button 721 descends and reaches the detection position where the operation is detected by the detection sensor 791, the operating force of the player's pressing operation exceeds the holding torque of the stepping motor 753, and the entire button unit 720 descends as a unit.

Here, within the movement range of the button unit 720, the position of the operation button 721 can be determined from the detection information from the rotary encoder 792. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68, in the second form, five detection positions, the first detection position CP1 to the fifth detection position CP5, are set from the top between the maximum protruding position and the lowest position. The topmost first detection position CP1 is the position where an operation is detected based on the detection information from the detection sensor 791. In contrast, the second detection position CP2 to the fifth detection position CP5 are the positions where the descent of the operation button 721 is determined based on the detection information from the rotary encoder 792.

Note that the distance L1 from the maximum protrusion position to the first detection position CP1, the distance L2 from the first detection position CP1 to the second detection position CP2, the distance L3 from the second detection position CP2 to the third detection position CP3, the distance L4 from the third detection position CP3 to the fourth detection position CP4, and the distance L5 from the fourth detection position to the fifth detection position CP5 are all uniform.

Next, the relationship between the second part and the third part in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 69(a). In FIG. 69(a), the case of Super Reach A is illustrated as an example, but the basic configuration is the same for Super Reach B and Super Reach C.

In the third part, the display mode of the character image CA is provided with a low expectation mode (before sudden death) in which the expectation of transition to the special game state is relatively low, and a high expectation mode (after transformation) in which the expectation of transition to the special game state is relatively high. In the latter half of the second part, a character transformation performance is executed, and if this transformation performance is successful and the display mode of the character image CA switches from the low expectation mode to the high expectation mode, the performance in the third part is executed while maintaining the high expectation mode, thereby relatively increasing the expectation of transition to the special game state. In contrast, if the transformation performance is unsuccessful, the display mode of the character image CA is maintained in the low expectation mode even after transition to the third part. This makes the expectation of transition to the special game state relatively low.

In the first half of the second part, a preview of this transformation effect is executed. Specifically, an effect EF is added and updated to the displayed character image CA. As shown in FIG. 69(b), there are five levels of effect EF to be added, from LV1 to LV5, with the levels increasing in the order LV1<LV2<LV3<LV4<LV5. The expected success rate of the transformation effect is differentiated so that it increases as the size of the effect EF increases.

The trigger for adding/updating the effect EF is the operation of the effect button device 40. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 70(a), when the first detection position is reached, the effect EF is added at LV1, and when the second detection position CP2 is reached, the effect EF is updated from LV1 to LV2. Thereafter, when the third detection position CP3 is reached, the size of the effect EF is updated from LV2 to LV3, when the fourth detection position CP4 is reached, the size of the effect EF is updated from LV3 to LV4, and when the fifth detection position CP5 is reached, the size of the effect EF is updated from LV4 to LV5.

There are four update patterns for effect EF: update pattern A to update pattern D. When a decision is made to execute the first special effect, one of these update patterns is set. Here, each update pattern will be explained with reference to FIG. 70(b).

In update pattern A, when the operation button 721 is displaced from the maximum protruding position to the first detection position CP1, the effect EF of LV1 is added, when it is displaced from the first detection position CP1 to the second detection position CP2, the effect EF is updated to LV2, and between the second detection position CP2 and the fifth detection position CP5, the effect EF of LV2 is maintained without change.

In update pattern B, when the operation button 721 is displaced from the maximum protruding position to the first detection position CP1, the effect EF is added at LV1, when it is displaced from the first detection position CP1 to the second detection position CP2, the effect EF is updated to LV2, when it is displaced from the second detection position CP2 to the third detection position CP3, the effect EF is updated to LV3, and between the third detection position and the fifth detection position CP5, the effect EF at LV3 is maintained without being updated.

In update pattern C, when the operation button 721 is displaced from the maximum protruding position to the first detection position CP1, the effect EF is added at LV1, when the operation button 721 is displaced from the first detection position CP1 to the second detection position CP2, the effect EF is updated to LV2, when the operation button 721 is displaced from the second detection position CP2 to the third detection position CP3, the effect EF is updated to LV3, when the operation button 721 is displaced from the third detection position CP3 to the fourth detection position CP4, the effect EF is updated to LV4, and when the operation button 721 is displaced from the fourth detection position CP4 to the fifth detection position CP5, the effect EF at LV4 is maintained without being updated.

In update pattern D, when the operation button 721 is displaced from the maximum protruding position to the first detection position CP1, the effect EF is added at LV1, when the operation button 721 is displaced from the first detection position CP1 to the second detection position CP2, the effect EF is updated to LV2, when the operation button 721 is displaced from the second detection position CP2 to the third detection position CP3, the effect EF is updated to LV3, when the operation button 721 is displaced from the third detection position CP3 to the fourth detection position CP4, the effect EF is updated to LV4, and when the operation button 721 is displaced from the fourth detection position CP4 to the fifth detection position CP5, the effect EF is updated to LV5.

In this manner, in this embodiment, when the effect button device 40 is in the second form, when the operation button 721 is operated, the effect level changes in conjunction with the movement of the operation button 721, suggesting the subsequent development (effect in the third part). Here, the process for effect change (process for executing the first special effect for the second part) executed as part of the regular processing by the MPU 912 of the notification/effect control device 143 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of Figures 71 and 72.

As shown in FIG. 71, in the processing for executing the first special effect for the second part, first, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not the current game round is the game round corresponding to the first special effect. If a negative determination is made in step S1801, this execution processing is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S1801, the process proceeds to step S1802, where the processing for executing the linked display is executed. This processing for the linked display will be described later.

In the next step S1803, it is determined whether the effect button device 40 is in the second form. In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the effect button device 40 is configured to switch from the first form to the second form at the timing of transition to the reach display.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1803, the execution process is terminated. If a positive judgment is made in step S1803, the process proceeds to step S1804. In step S1804, it is determined whether or not the operation is within the valid operation period. If a negative judgment is made in step S1804, the process proceeds to step S1805. In step S1805, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to start an operation suggestion. If a negative judgment is made in step S1805, the execution process is terminated. If a positive judgment is made in step S1805, a process for setting the valid operation period is executed in step S1806, and an operation enable flag is set in the various flags storage area 933 of RAM 914. Thereafter, an operation suggestion start process is executed in step S1807, and the execution process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S1804, if a positive judgment is made in step S1804, i.e., if it is within the valid operation period, the process proceeds to step S1808. In step S1808, it is determined whether or not the valid operation period has elapsed. If a negative judgment is made in step S1808, the process proceeds to step S1809. In step S1809, it is determined whether or not the operation button 721 has reached the first detection position CP1 based on the detection information from the detection sensor 791. If a negative judgment is made in step S1809, the execution process is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step S1809, the process proceeds to step S1810. In step S1810, an operation suggestion end process is executed. In the following step S1811, an effect addition process is executed to add an effect EF to the character image CA being displayed on the display screen 253a. In the effect addition process, a sound effect corresponding to the effect addition is output from the speaker unit 27, and an effect addition command is output to the display control device 142. Based on receiving the effect addition command, the display control device 142 performs a process of adding the LV1 effect EF to the character image CA being displayed on the display screen 253a.

In the next step S1812, a link acceptance flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. In the next step S1813, a reset process for the valid period is executed. In this embodiment, the operation stroke of the performance button device 40 is extended by being in the second form, and an effect change linked (linked) to the movement of the operation button 721 is generated using this extended stroke. Although the period during which this effect change occurs is the valid period for operation acceptance as a rule, if an operation is performed near the end of the valid period due to the extension of the stroke, the period for generating the effect change may be insufficient. In detail, since the valid period for effect update is measured using a timer counter that measures the operation valid period, in step S1813, in order to secure (earn) the period for generating such an effect change, a process is performed to extend the valid period rather than resetting the operation acceptance = timer counter. Specifically, the operation valid period is extended by 1 sec from the period initially set. After that, in step S1814, the operation enable flag stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914 is erased and the execution process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S1808, if a positive judgment is made in step S1808, i.e., if the operation validity period has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S1805. In step S1805, an operation suggestion end process is executed. After that, in step S1816, a switching process is executed to return the performance button device 40 to the first form, and in step S1814, the operation enable flag stored in the various flags storage area 933 of the RAM 914 is erased, and this execution process is terminated.

Next, the process for executing the linked display will be described with reference to FIG. 72. In the process for executing the linked display, first, in step S1901, it is determined whether or not it is the timing for the effect to branch. In other words, it is determined whether or not it is the timing for the transformation effect to start in the latter half of the second part. If a negative determination is made in step S1901, that is, if the first half of the second part is being executed, the process proceeds to step S1902.

In step S1902, it is determined whether or not the valid period after the resetting in step S1813 is in progress. If a negative determination is made in step S1902, the process for executing the linked display is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S1902, the process proceeds to step S1903. In step S1903, it is determined whether or not the valid period after the resetting has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S1903, the process proceeds to step S1904, and a process for identifying the position of the operation button 721 is executed based on the detection information from the rotary encoder 792. Specifically, it is determined at which of the second detection position CP2 to the fifth detection position CP5 the operation button 721 is located. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the operation button 721 has been displaced from the first detection position CP1 to the second detection position CP2, whether or not the operation button 721 has been displaced from the second detection position CP2 to the third detection position CP3, whether or not the operation button 721 has been displaced from the third detection position CP3 to the fourth detection position CP4, or whether or not the operation button 721 has been displaced from the fourth detection position CP4 to the fifth detection position CP5.

In the following step S1905, if there is a displacement from the first detection position CP1 to the second detection position CP2 in step S1904, if there is a displacement from the second detection position CP2 to the third detection position CP3, if there is a displacement from the third detection position CP3 to the fourth detection position CP4, or if there is a displacement from the fourth detection position CP4 to the fifth detection position CP5, the effect EF is updated based on the current update mode.

If the user releases the operation button 721 during operation, the force of the coil spring 745 causes the operation button 721 to rise one section, but this does not change the effect level even if the position of the operation button 721 changes. In other words, the effect EF of the character image CA changes in conjunction with the downward movement of the operation button 721, but does not change in conjunction with the upward movement, creating an irreversible relationship.

If a positive judgment is made in step S1903, i.e., if the valid period has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S1906, where a switching process is executed to switch the effect button device 40 to the first form, and then the linked display process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S1901, if a positive judgment is made in step S1901, that is, if it is the start timing of the transformation performance, which is the latter half of the second part, the process proceeds to step S1907. In step S1907, it is judged whether or not a cooperation reception flag is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. If a positive judgment is made in step S1907, an operation-compatible display process is executed in step S1908, and then the process for executing this cooperation display is terminated. In the operation-compatible display process, the display mode of the character image CA is changed to the display mode (low expectation mode/high expectation mode) set at the start of this game round. If a negative judgment is made in step S1907, that is, if the performance button device 40 is not operated during the valid period despite the operation suggestion, a negative judgment is made in step S1907, and the process proceeds to step S1909, where an operation-incompatible display process is executed, and then the process for executing this cooperation display is terminated. In the operation-incompatible display process, the display mode of the character image CA is set to the low expectation mode regardless of the mode set at the start of the game round. In other words, if the effect button device 40 is not operated, the display mode of the character image CA will remain in the low expectation mode.

Next, referring to Figures 73 and 74, the flow of the first special effect B corresponding to update pattern D in this embodiment will be described. Note that Figures 73 and 74 show the example of Super Reach A, but the basic flow of the effects is the same in the cases of Super Reach B and Super Reach C.

In FIG. 73(1), the game has progressed to a super reach, and a character image CA corresponding to the super reach is displayed stationary in the center of the display screen 253a. Also, at this point in time, the performance button device 40 has already entered its second form, and the operation stroke has been extended.

At a predetermined timing after the transition to the second part, the pattern display device 253 and the speaker unit 27 suggest the operation of the performance button device 40. When the operation is suggested, a message for suggesting the operation is displayed at the top of the display screen 253a, and an image imitating a button in the second form and an indicator showing the remaining valid operation period are displayed in the center of the display screen 253a, but these images are not shown.

When the player presses the effect button device 40 and the operation button 721 descends from the maximum protruding position to the first detection position CP1, an effect EF of LV1 is added to the stationary character image CA, as shown in Figure 73 (2). Thereafter, when the operation button 721 descends from the first detection position CP1 to the second detection position CP2, the effect level is updated from LV1 to LV2 (see FIG. 73 (3)), when the operation button 721 descends from the second detection position CP2 to the third detection position CP3, the effect level is updated from LV2 to LV3 (see FIG. 73 (4)), when the operation button 721 descends from the third detection position CP3 to the fourth detection position CP4, the effect level is updated from LV3 to LV4 (see FIG. 74 (5)), and when the operation button 721 descends from the fourth detection position CP4 to the fifth detection position CP5, the effect level is updated from LV4 to LV5 (see FIG. 74 (6)).

After that, as shown in FIG. 74 (7), the display mode of the character image CA changes from the low expectation mode to the high expectation mode during the transformation performance. After that, the display mode of the character image CA (high expectation mode and state with effect EF added) is maintained and the game moves to the third part.

The second embodiment described above is expected to have the following advantages:

When the effect button device 40 is pressed and the operation button 721 reaches the first detection position CP1 (corresponding to the "predetermined position") on the path along which the button unit 720 (operation button 721) is displaced, an effect EF is added to the character image CA, and when the operation means reaches the second detection position CP2 to the fifth detection position CP5 (corresponding to the "specific positions") after the effect EF has been added, the size of the effect EF is changed. In this way, a configuration in which the effect EF is added and then the size is changed in conjunction with one operation of the operation means makes it possible to create innovative effects that have never been seen before. This is preferable for increasing attention to the game.

When the third detection position CP3 to the fifth detection position CP5 are reached, the size of the effect EF does not necessarily change, and in some cases the size may not change. Creating such a branch prevents the operation-based changes from becoming monotonous, and is advantageous in strengthening the attention-increasing effect described above.

When implementing a configuration in which the size of the effect EF changes in response to an operation, it is assumed that the impact of the size change will be stronger if the change has a certain sense of speed. Here, by setting a time limit on the size change as shown in this embodiment, the player is prompted to operate the operation button 721 toward the maximum pressing position in one go, which contributes to strengthening the impact described above.

As shown in this embodiment, if the size of the effect EF can be changed by the operation button 721 reaching each of the second detection position CP2 to the fifth detection position CP5, that is, if the size can be changed in multiple stages, the expressiveness of the size change can be suitably improved.

As described above, in a configuration in which the movement of the operation button 721 and the size change of the effect EF are linked, the link between the two can be strengthened by switching the performance button device 40 to the second form and expanding the operation stroke of the operation button 721 in advance. It is also assumed that the operation of the operation button 721 is often performed with a lot of force. In this regard, a configuration in which the operation stroke is expanded in advance makes it easier to gain a grace period for the size change of the effect EF. This is preferable in terms of preventing a decrease in distinguishability due to an excessively fast size change, etc.

<Modification 1>
In the second embodiment, the effect level is updated when the operation button 721 is lowered with the effect EF added to the character image CA, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is also possible to update the effect to be smaller when the operation button 721 is released before the final effect is reached.

<Modification 2>
In the second embodiment, the first detection position CP1 to the fifth detection position CP5 are set so that the intervals between the detection positions of the operation button 721 are uniform, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the operation button 721 is pressed, the operation button 721 may descend faster at the back side due to momentum. In view of this, a difference may be provided so that the intervals become larger from the top to the bottom. This makes it possible to preferably prevent the process of the change in the effect level from becoming difficult to see.

In addition, the distance from the maximum protrusion position to the first detection position CP1 does not necessarily have to be the same as the other distances. Considering that the condition for executing the operation-responsive performance is met by reaching the first detection position CP1, it is also possible to make the distance from the maximum protrusion position to the first detection position CP1 larger than the other distances.

<Modification 3>
The effect level update pattern shown in the second embodiment above is configured so that if the change in the effect level stops midway through the operation, there will be no further change. However, an update pattern may also be provided in which if the change stops midway through, the effect level will jump over multiple levels and change all at once at the maximum pressing position (fifth detection position CP5).

<Modification 4>
In the second embodiment, the condition for receiving the operation-responsive performance is satisfied when it is determined that the operation button 721 has reached the first detection position CP1 based on the detection information from the detection sensor 791, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure the condition for receiving the operation-responsive performance to be satisfied when it is determined that the operation button 721 has reached the maximum pressing position (fifth detection position CP5) based on the detection information from the rotary encoder 792.

<Modification 5>
In the second embodiment, the effect level of the character image CA is changed in conjunction with the movement of the operation button 721 when the effect button device 40 is operated in a state in which the stroke extension of the effect button device 40 is in the second form in which the stroke extension of the effect button device 40 is expanded. However, it is also possible to change the effect level of the character image CA in conjunction with the movement of the operation button 721 when the effect button device 40 is operated in a state in which the stroke extension of the effect button device 40 is in the first form in which the stroke extension of the effect button device 40 is not expanded. If the stroke of the operation button 721 is small, the effect level changes at a short pitch, so it is assumed that it is difficult to enjoy the process of change. In view of this situation, it is preferable to transition the operation stroke of the operation button 721 to an expanded state in order to link the operation of the operation button 721 with the change in the effect level.

<Modification 6>
It is also possible to vary the resistance torque (e.g., static torque or drive torque) generated in the stepping motor 753 when the button unit 720 descends. For example, the resistance torque may be increased as the button unit approaches the maximum pressing position from the maximum protruding position. Increasing the operation resistance at the rear side in the operation direction in this way can prevent the size change of the effect from ending too quickly, making the change difficult to distinguish.

<Modification 7>
The intervals between the detection positions CP1 to CP5 do not necessarily need to be constant. For example, a difference may be provided so that the intervals become larger as the position approaches the maximum pressing position from the maximum protruding position. With such a configuration, the period required for movement between positions can be increased as the position approaches the rear side in the operation direction. This makes it possible to prevent the change in size of the effect from ending too quickly, making the change difficult to distinguish. Also, a difference may be provided so that the intervals become larger as the position approaches the maximum pressing position from the maximum protruding position.

<Modification 8>
It may be configured such that the size of the effect EF can be changed when the operation button 721 reaches the second detection position CP2 to the fourth detection position CP4 based on the displacement in the direction of the pressing operation, whereas the size of the effect EF cannot be changed when the operation button 721 reaches the second detection position CP2 to the fourth detection position CP4 based on the displacement in the opposite direction to the direction of the pressing operation. With such a configuration, even if the hand is released from the operation button 721 before it reaches the fifth detection position CP5, the size change of the effect EF is not reversed due to the rebound of the operation button 721. This is preferable in terms of avoiding unintended size changes due to operation errors, etc.

Third Embodiment
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that a second special effect is provided in conjunction with a movable effect device provided in the pachinko machine 10 as one of the operation-responsive effects related to the effect button device 40. The configuration related to the second special effect will be described below with reference to Figures 6, 75, and 76. Figure 75 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, and Figure 76 is a schematic diagram showing the types of the second special effect.

As shown in FIG. 75, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a first movable performance device 300 and a second movable performance device 400 provided on the front door frame 14. The first movable performance device 300 is arranged on the front part of the upper frame part of the front door frame 14, and the second movable performance device 400 is arranged on the upper surface part of the upper frame part of the front door frame 14. In addition to the first movable performance device 300 and the second movable performance device 400, the pachinko machine 10 is also provided with a third movable performance device 803 and a fourth movable performance device 804.

The third movable performance device 803 is disposed on the top of the game board unit 80 (see FIG. 6). The third movable performance device 803 has a movable decorative body that can be moved between a standby position that avoids overlapping with the display screen 253a and a performance position where it overlaps with the display screen 253a from the front, and is configured so that when a performance is performed by the third movable performance device 803, the movable decorative body moves from the standby position to the performance position.

The fourth movable performance device 804 is disposed at the bottom of the game board unit 80 (see FIG. 6). The fourth movable performance device 804 has a movable decorative body that can be moved between a standby position that avoids overlapping with the display screen 253a and a performance position where it overlaps with the display screen 253a from the front, and is configured so that when a performance is performed by the fourth movable performance device 804, the movable decorative body moves from the standby position to the performance position.

It should be noted that it is sufficient for the movable decorative elements of the third movable performance device 803 and the fourth movable performance device 804 to be configured so that they overlap the display screen 253a (more specifically, the variable display area ME of the pattern) to a large extent when moved to the performance position, and it is also possible for them to be configured so that they overlap the display screen 253a in the standby position. However, in order to enhance the impact of the performance, it is preferable to have a smaller overlap with the display screen 253a (variable display area ME) in the standby position compared to the performance position.

Incidentally, the movable decorative elements of the third movable performance device 803 and the fourth movable performance device 804 also have a light-emitting function, similar to the first movable performance device 300 and the second movable performance device 400, and are configured to emit light when moved to the performance position.

Although the first movable performance device 300, the second movable performance device 400, the third movable performance device 803, and the fourth movable performance device 804 all have a function that indicates the expectation of a transition to a special game state, there is a difference in the expectation when each performance device 300, 400, 803, and 804 is activated. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 76, the transition to the special game state is confirmed in the second special performance A in which the first movable performance device 300 is activated, and for the other cases, there is a difference so that the second special performance B in which the second movable performance device 400 is activated has the highest transition expectation, the second special performance C in which the third movable performance device 803 is activated has the next highest expectation, and the second special performance D in which the fourth movable performance device 804 is activated has the lowest expectation.

The second special effects A to D are common in that they are all performed when the effect button device 40 is in the second form. In this configuration, although it is preferable to prevent the game from becoming monotonous by diversifying the effects, the following disadvantages arise because the points that the player should pay attention to are scattered. That is, the most impactful moment in an effect using a movable effect device is the timing when the movable effect device starts to operate, but the scattered points that require attention increase the possibility of missing the movement at the start of the movable effect operation. One of the features of this embodiment is that it has been devised to eliminate such inconveniences. The following will explain the devise with reference to Figures 75, 77, and 78. Figure 77 is a schematic diagram of the front door frame 14 as seen from the front side of the gaming machine, and Figure 78 is a schematic diagram of the effect button device 40.

As shown in Figure 75, the front door frame 14 is provided with a ring-shaped illumination section 24 consisting of a plurality of light-emitting units LT1 to LT14 arranged to surround the window section 22. The ring-shaped illumination section 24 is arranged at approximately equal intervals toward the first movable performance device 300, starting with the first light-emitting unit LT1 adjacent to the performance button device 40, followed by the second light-emitting unit LT2, the third light-emitting unit LT3, the fourth light-emitting unit LT4, the fifth light-emitting unit LT5, the sixth light-emitting unit LT6, the seventh light-emitting unit LT7, the eighth light-emitting unit LT8, the ninth light-emitting unit LT9, the tenth light-emitting unit LT10, the eleventh light-emitting unit LT11, and the twelfth light-emitting unit LT12, in that order, with the twelfth light-emitting unit LT12 at the very back being adjacent to the first movable performance device 300. Additionally, the 13th light-emitting unit LT13 and the 14th light-emitting unit LT14 are arranged outside the 11th light-emitting unit LT11 so as to bypass the 11th light-emitting unit LT11 from the outside. The 14th light-emitting unit LT14 is adjacent to the second movable performance device 400. In other words, the arrangement of the light-emitting units that make up the annular illumination unit branches into a route toward the first movable performance device 300 and a route toward the second movable performance device 400.

As shown in FIG. 77, the seventh light-emitting unit LT7 to the ninth light-emitting unit LT9 are arranged along the left and right edges of the display screen 253a, minimizing changes in the distance from the display screen 253a. A linked display area CE that links with the annular illumination unit 24 is provided on the upper part of the display screen 253a (more specifically, the part that is aligned horizontally with the ninth light-emitting unit LT9) and the lower part of the display screen 253a (more specifically, the part that is aligned horizontally with the seventh light-emitting unit LT7). The annular illumination unit 24 and the linked display area CE constitute a teaching means that teaches the player the movable effects that are the target of operation in the second special effect.

This teaching means is configured to teach the target of operation based on the operation of the effect button device 40, and the configuration related to this teaching is distinctive. Below, we will provide additional explanation on the configuration related to the effect button device 40 with reference to Figure 78.

When the effect button device 40 is in the first form, the operation button 721 descends when the effect button device 40 is operated. In other words, the "total operation stroke" = "movement range of the operation button 721", and the movement target is limited to the operation button 721 (the entire button unit 720 does not descend as a unit).

In contrast, when the effect button device 40 is in the second form, the "total operation stroke" = "the range of movement in which the operation button 721 descends independently" + "the range of movement in which the entire button unit 720 descends as a unit." Specifically, the holding torque of the stepping motor 753 described above is greater than the biasing force of the coil spring 745, and when the operation button 721 is pressed from the maximum protruding position, the operation button 721 descends against the biasing force of the coil spring 745, while the holding position of the stepping motor 753 does not change. For this reason, when an operation is performed at the maximum protruding position, the operation button 721 descends independently first. When the operation button 721 descends and reaches the detection position where the operation is detected by the detection sensor 791, the operating force of the player's pressing operation exceeds the holding torque of the stepping motor 753, and the entire button unit 720 descends as a unit.

Here, within the movement range of the button unit 720, the position of the operation button 721 can be determined from the detection information from the rotary encoder 792. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68, in the second form, thirteen detection positions, a first detection position CP1 to a thirteenth detection position CP13, are set in order from the top between the maximum protruding position and the lowest position. The topmost first detection position CP1 is the position where an operation is detected based on the detection information from the detection sensor 791. In contrast, the second detection position CP2 to the thirteenth detection position CP13 are the positions where the descent of the operation button 721 is determined based on the detection information from the rotary encoder 792.

The distance from the first detection position CP1 to the second detection position CP2, the distance from the second detection position CP2 to the third detection position CP3, the distance from the third detection position CP3 to the fourth detection position CP4, ... the distance from the twelfth detection position CP12 to the thirteenth detection position CP13 are all uniform. Compared to these distances, the distance from the maximum protrusion position to the first detection position CP1 is larger.

Next, referring to the flowcharts in Figures 79 to 80, we will explain the second special effect processing that is executed as part of the regular processing by the MPU 912 of the notification/effect control device 143.

(Second special effect processing)
As shown in FIG. 79, in the second special effect process, first, in step S2001, it is determined whether or not the current game round corresponds to the second special effect. If a negative determination is made in step S2001, the second special effect process is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S2001, the process proceeds to step S2002. In step S2002, the second special effect execution process is executed. Details of this process will be described later.

In the next step S2003, it is determined whether or not the button device 40 is in an effective operation period. If the determination in step S2003 is negative, the process proceeds to step S2004. In step S2004, it is determined whether or not the timing for the grace period for switching to the second form has elapsed. If the determination in step S2004 is negative, the process proceeds to step S2005. In step S2005, it is determined whether or not the timing for starting switching to the second form has elapsed. If the determination in step S2005 is negative, the second special effect process is terminated. If the determination in step S2005 is positive, the switching process for switching the button device 40 to the second form is executed in step S2006. Thereafter, the process for setting the grace period for switching is executed in step S2007, and the second special effect process is terminated. The period required for switching the button device 40 from the first form to the second form is 0.5 sec. The grace period for switching is set to be longer than this period.

Returning to the explanation of step S2004, if a positive determination is made in step S2004, i.e., if the grace period for switching to the second form has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2008. In step S2008, a process for setting the operation valid period is performed. Thereafter, in step S2009, an operation suggestion start process is executed, and the second special effect process is terminated.

In the operation suggestion start process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled to output a message (e.g., a voice such as "Press the button") encouraging an operation from the speaker unit 27, and an operation suggestion start command is output to the display control device 142. Based on receiving the operation suggestion start command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 to display, on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253, the operation suggestion message "Press the button", a picture resembling a button, and an indicator showing the remaining valid period.

Returning to the explanation of step S2003, if a positive judgment is made in step S2003, i.e., if it is within the valid operation period, the process proceeds to step S2010. In step S2010, it is determined whether or not the valid operation period has elapsed. If a negative judgment is made in step S2010, the process proceeds to step S2011. In step S2011, it is determined whether or not the effect button device 40 has been operated based on the detection information from the detection sensor 791. In other words, it is determined whether or not the operation button 721 has reached the first detection position CP1. If no operation has been performed, a negative judgment is made in step S2011, and the second special effect processing is terminated. If an operation has been performed, a positive judgment is made in step S2011, and the process proceeds to step S2012.

In step S2012, an operation suggestion end process is executed. In the operation suggestion end process, an operation suggestion end command is output to the display control device 142. Based on receiving the operation suggestion end command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the symbol display device 253 to end the display of the operation suggestion message, the button-like image, and the indicator showing the remaining valid period.

In the next step S2013, a linkage flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. After that, in step S2014, a waiting period setting process is executed. This waiting period is a period that is referenced when operating the movable performance device that is designated as the operation target when the operation button 721 reaches the first detection position CP1 but does not reach the thirteenth detection position CP13.

After that, in step S2015, the guidance display start process is executed to end the second special performance process. By executing the guidance display start process, multiple arrow images AR pointing from the left and right edges of the display screen 253a toward the third movable performance device 803 and the fourth movable performance device 804 are displayed in the interlocking display area CE of the display screen 253a. Specifically, three arrow images AR1 to AR3 pointing from the ninth light-emitting unit LT9 toward the third movable performance device 803 are displayed in the upper interlocking display area CE, and five arrow images AR4 to AR8 pointing from the seventh light-emitting unit LT7 toward the fourth movable performance device 804 are displayed in the lower interlocking display area CE. However, all of these arrow images AR1 to AR8 are semi-transparent, and the light emission levels are all LOW.

Returning to the explanation of step S2010, if a positive judgment is made in step S2010, i.e. if the operation valid period has elapsed without the operation of the operation button 721, an operation suggestion end process is executed in step S2016, and then a switching process to the first form is executed in the following step S2017, after which the second special effect process is terminated. Note that the processes in steps S2016 and S2017 are the same as the processes in steps S1718 and S1719 described above.

(Second special effect execution process)
Next, the second special effect execution process in step S2002 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In the second special effect execution process, first, in step S2101, it is determined whether the movable effect device is in operation. Specifically, it is determined whether an operation flag described later is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. If a negative determination is made in step S2101, the process proceeds to step S2102. In step S2102, it is determined whether the above-mentioned linkage flag is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. If a negative determination is made in step S2102, the second special effect execution process is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S2102, the process proceeds to step S2103. In step S2103, it is determined whether a waiting period has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S2103, the process proceeds to step S2104. In step S2104, a position determination process is performed to determine the position of the operation button 721 based on the detection information from the rotary encoder 792.

In the following step S2105, it is determined whether the position of the operation button 721 is the thirteenth detection position CP13. If a negative determination is made in step S2105, the process proceeds to step S2106. In step S2106, it is determined whether the position of the operation button 721 has changed since the previous second special effect processing. If a negative determination is made in step S2106, the second special effect execution processing is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S2106, the process proceeds to step S2107, and a shift process of the light-emitting target is performed. Details of this shift process will be described later.

Returning to the explanation of step S2105, if a positive determination is made in step S2105, the process proceeds to step S2108. In step S2108, the guidance display end process is executed. Specifically, the first light-emitting unit LT1 to the fourteenth light-emitting unit LT14 are all turned off, and the first arrow image AR1 to the eighth arrow image AR8 displayed on the display screen 253a are made non-display.

In the next step S2109, the second special effect start process is executed. Specifically, the movable effect device corresponding to this second special effect is activated. After that, in step S2110, the linkage flag stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914 is erased, and in the next step S2111, the operating flag is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914, and the second special effect execution process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S2103, if a positive judgment is made in step S2103, i.e., if the waiting period has elapsed, the processes of steps S2108 to S2111 are executed, and then the process for executing the second special effect is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S2101, if a positive judgment is made in step S2101, i.e., if an operating flag is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of RAM 914, the process proceeds to step S2112. In step S2112, it is judged whether or not it is the timing to end the second special effect. If a negative judgment is made in step S2112, the process for executing the second special effect is terminated. If a positive judgment is made in step S2112, the process for executing the second special effect is executed in step S2113, and then the process for executing the second special effect is terminated. By executing the second special effect termination process, the movable effect device that was the target of activation will return to the state (standby state) before the second special effect.

Here, we will provide additional explanation on the shift processing in step S2107 with reference to Figures 81 to 85.

As shown in FIG. 81, the update pattern (shift pattern) of the lighting targets of the light-emitting elements LT1 to LT14 and the arrow images AR1 to AR8 is set for each of the second special effects A to D.

(Regarding the second special effect A)
When the second special effect A is executed, the effect button device 40 first switches from the first form to the second form, and when the switching is completed and the operation suggestion is started, the operation button 721 of the effect button device 40 lights up. After that, when the operation button 721 reaches the first detection position CP1, the light emission target shifts from the operation button 721 to the first light emitting unit LT1. When the operation button 721 reaches the second detection position CP2, the light-emitting target shifts from the first light-emitting unit LT1 to the second light-emitting unit LT2, when the operation button 721 reaches the third detection position CP3, the light-emitting target shifts from the second light-emitting unit LT2 to the third light-emitting unit LT3, when the operation button 721 reaches the fourth detection position CP4, the light-emitting target shifts from the third light-emitting unit LT3 to the fourth light-emitting unit LT4, when the operation button 721 reaches the fifth detection position CP5, the light-emitting target shifts from the fourth light-emitting unit LT4 to the fifth light-emitting unit LT5, when the operation button 721 reaches the sixth detection position CP6, the light-emitting target shifts from the fifth light-emitting unit LT5 to the sixth light-emitting unit LT6, and when the operation button 721 reaches the seventh detection position CP7, the light-emitting target shifts from the sixth light-emitting unit LT6 to the seventh light-emitting unit LT7. unit LT7, and when the operation button 721 reaches the eighth detection position CP8, the light-emitting target shifts from the seventh light-emitting unit LT7 to the eighth light-emitting unit LT8, and when the operation button 721 reaches the ninth detection position CP9, the light-emitting target shifts from the eighth light-emitting unit LT8 to the ninth light-emitting unit LT9, and when the operation button 721 reaches the tenth detection position CP10, the light-emitting target shifts from the ninth light-emitting unit LT9 to the tenth light-emitting unit LT10, and when the operation button 721 reaches the eleventh detection position CP11, the light-emitting target shifts from the tenth light-emitting unit LT10 to the eleventh light-emitting unit LT11, and when the operation button 721 reaches the twelfth detection position CP12, the light-emitting target shifts from the eleventh light-emitting unit LT11 to the twelfth light-emitting unit LT12 adjacent to the first movable performance device 300. Then, when operation button 721 reaches thirteenth detection position CP13, arrow images AR1 to AR8 are hidden, twelfth light-emitting unit LT12 is turned off, and first movable performance device 300 is activated. In other words, guidance (instruction) by light-emitting units LT1 to LT12 ends, and first movable performance device 300 rotates and emits light (see FIG. 82).

(Regarding the second special effect B)
When the second special effect B is executed, the effect button device 40 first switches from the first form to the second form, and when the switching is completed and the operation suggestion is started, the operation button 721 of the effect button device 40 lights up. After that, when the operation button 721 reaches the first detection position CP1, the light emission target shifts from the operation button 721 to the first light emitting unit LT1. When the operation button 721 reaches the second detection position CP2, the light-emitting target shifts from the first light-emitting unit LT1 to the second light-emitting unit LT2, when the operation button 721 reaches the third detection position CP3, the light-emitting target shifts from the second light-emitting unit LT2 to the third light-emitting unit LT3, when the operation button 721 reaches the fourth detection position CP4, the light-emitting target shifts from the third light-emitting unit LT3 to the fourth light-emitting unit LT4, when the operation button 721 reaches the fifth detection position CP5, the light-emitting target shifts from the fourth light-emitting unit LT4 to the fifth light-emitting unit LT5, when the operation button 721 reaches the sixth detection position CP6, the light-emitting target shifts from the fifth light-emitting unit LT5 to the sixth light-emitting unit LT6, and when the operation button 721 reaches the seventh detection position CP7, the light-emitting target shifts from the sixth light-emitting unit LT6 to the seventh light-emitting unit LT7. When the operation button 721 reaches the eighth detection position CP8, the light-emitting target shifts from the seventh light-emitting unit LT7 to the eighth light-emitting unit LT8, when the operation button 721 reaches the ninth detection position CP9, the light-emitting target shifts from the eighth light-emitting unit LT8 to the ninth light-emitting unit LT9, when the operation button 721 reaches the tenth detection position CP10, the light-emitting target shifts from the ninth light-emitting unit LT9 to the tenth light-emitting unit LT10, when the operation button 721 reaches the eleventh detection position CP11, the light-emitting target shifts from the tenth light-emitting unit LT10 to the thirteenth light-emitting unit LT13, and when the operation button 721 reaches the twelfth detection position CP12, the light-emitting target shifts from the thirteenth light-emitting unit LT13 to the fourteenth light-emitting unit LT14 adjacent to the second movable performance device 400. Then, when operation button 721 reaches thirteenth detection position CP13, arrow images AR1 to AR8 are hidden, fourteenth light-emitting unit LT14 is turned off, and second movable performance device 400 is activated. In other words, guidance (instruction) by light-emitting units LT1 to LT10 and LT13 to LT14 ends, and second movable performance device 400 rotates and emits light (see FIG. 83).

(Regarding the second special effect C)
When the second special effect C is executed, the effect button device 40 first switches from the first form to the second form, and when the switching is completed and the operation suggestion is started, the operation button 721 of the effect button device 40 lights up. After that, when the operation button 721 reaches the first detection position CP1, the light-emitting target shifts from the operation button 721 to the first light-emitting unit LT1. When the operation button 721 reaches the second detection position CP2, the light-emitting target shifts from the first light-emitting unit LT1 to the second light-emitting unit LT2, when the operation button 721 reaches the third detection position CP3, the light-emitting target shifts from the second light-emitting unit LT2 to the third light-emitting unit LT3, when the operation button 721 reaches the fourth detection position CP4, the light-emitting target shifts from the third light-emitting unit LT3 to the fourth light-emitting unit LT4, and when the operation button 721 reaches the fifth detection position CP5, the light-emitting target shifts from the fourth light-emitting unit LT4 to the fifth light-emitting unit LT5, When the operation button 721 reaches the sixth detection position CP6, the light-emitting target shifts from the fifth light-emitting unit LT5 to the sixth light-emitting unit LT6, when the operation button 721 reaches the seventh detection position CP7, the light-emitting target shifts from the sixth light-emitting unit LT6 to the seventh light-emitting unit LT7, when the operation button 721 reaches the eighth detection position CP8, the light-emitting target shifts from the seventh light-emitting unit LT7 to the eighth light-emitting unit LT8, and when the operation button 721 reaches the ninth detection position CP9, the light-emitting target shifts from the eighth light-emitting unit LT8 to the ninth light-emitting unit LT9. After that, when the operation button 721 reaches the tenth detection position CP10, the light emitting target shifts from the ninth light emitting unit LT9 to the first arrow image AR1 (the light emitting level of the first arrow image AR1 becomes HI), when the operation button 721 reaches the eleventh detection position CP11, the light emitting target shifts from the first arrow image AR1 to the second arrow image AR2 (the light emitting level of the second arrow image AR2 becomes HI), and when the operation button 721 reaches the twelfth detection position CP12, the light emitting target shifts from the second arrow image AR2 to the third arrow image AR3 adjacent to the third movable performance device 803 (the light emitting level of the third arrow image AR3 becomes HI). Then, when the operation button 721 reaches the thirteenth detection position CP13, the arrow images AR1 to AR8 are hidden, and the third movable performance device 803 is activated. In other words, when the guidance (instruction) by the light-emitting elements LT1 to LT9 and the arrow images AR1 to AR3 ends, the third movable performance device 803 (movable decorative body) will descend and emit light (see Figure 84).

(Regarding the second special effect D)
When the second special effect D is executed, the effect button device 40 first switches from the first form to the second form, and when the switching is completed and the operation suggestion starts, the operation button 721 of the effect button device 40 lights up. After that, when the operation button 721 reaches the first detection position CP1, the light emission target shifts from the operation button 721 to the first light emitting unit LT1. When the operation button 721 reaches the second detection position CP2, the light-emitting target shifts from the first light-emitting unit LT1 to the second light-emitting unit LT2, when the operation button 721 reaches the third detection position CP3, the light-emitting target shifts from the second light-emitting unit LT2 to the third light-emitting unit LT3, when the operation button 721 reaches the fourth detection position CP4, the light-emitting target shifts from the third light-emitting unit LT3 to the fourth light-emitting unit LT4, when the operation button 721 reaches the fifth detection position CP5, the light-emitting target shifts from the fourth light-emitting unit LT4 to the fifth light-emitting unit LT5, when the operation button 721 reaches the sixth detection position CP6, the light-emitting target shifts from the fifth light-emitting unit LT5 to the sixth light-emitting unit LT6, and when the operation button 721 reaches the seventh detection position CP7, the light-emitting target shifts from the sixth light-emitting unit LT6 to the seventh light-emitting unit LT7. Thereafter, when the operation button 721 reaches an eighth detection position CP8, the light emitting target shifts from the seventh light emitting unit LT7 to the fourth arrow image AR4 (the light emitting level of the fourth arrow image AR4 becomes HI), when the operation button 721 reaches a ninth detection position CP9, the light emitting target shifts from the fourth arrow image AR4 to the fifth arrow image AR5 (the light emitting level of the fifth arrow image AR5 becomes HI), and when the operation button 721 reaches a tenth detection position CP10, the light emitting target shifts from the fifth arrow image AR5 to the sixth arrow image AR6 (the light emitting level of the fifth arrow image AR6 becomes HI). When the operation button 721 reaches the 11th detection position CP11, the light-emitting target shifts from the 6th arrow image AR6 to the 7th arrow image AR7 (the light-emitting level of the 7th arrow image AR7 becomes HI), and when the operation button 721 reaches the 12th detection position CP12, the light-emitting target shifts from the 7th arrow image AR7 to the 8th arrow image AR8 adjacent to the 4th movable performance device 804 (the light-emitting level of the 8th arrow image AR8 becomes HI). Then, when the operation button 721 reaches the 13th detection position CP13, the arrow images AR1 to AR8 are hidden and the 4th movable performance device 804 is activated. In other words, the guidance (instruction) by the light-emitting units LT1 to LT7 and the arrow images AR4 to AR8 ends, and the 3rd movable performance device 803 (movable decoration) descends and emits light (see FIG. 85).

The third embodiment described above is expected to have the following excellent effects:

A configuration in which the second special effect is executed as an operation-responsive effect by the movable effect device based on the player's operation of the effect button device 40 is preferable in terms of encouraging the player to actively participate in the game. However, in such a configuration, the distance between the effect button device 40 and the movable effect device becomes large, and there is a possibility that the beginning of the second special effect will be missed because the movable effect device is out of sight. The second special effect is an effect that involves the movement of the decorative body, and the impact of the beginning of the effect tends to be strong. In view of these circumstances, it is undesirable in terms of increasing attention to the game if the beginning of the effect is missed. In particular, as shown in this embodiment, when multiple movable effect devices that can be operated are used together, more specifically, when the effect execution positions of the decorative bodies of each movable effect device do not overlap with each other, there is a concern that such inconvenience will become more noticeable.

Here, according to the configuration shown in this embodiment, when the second special effect is executed based on the operation of the effect button device 40, the movable effect device that is the target of operation in this second special effect is instructed from the start of the operation of the effect button device 40 to the start of the movement of the ornament. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the above-mentioned oversight and to optimally exert the effect of increasing attention by the second special effect.

The action target is instructed from when the effect button device 40 reaches the first detection position CP1 (corresponding to the "predetermined detection position") and the execution condition for the second special effect is met until the start condition for the second special effect is met. This allows the attention-increasing effect described above to be optimally achieved.

When the effect button device 40 (operation button 721) is pressed, the conditions for executing the second special effect are met, and the operation target is instructed. For example, even if a player who does not expect instruction stops pressing after reaching the first detection position CP1, the second special effect will be executed, so the needs of various players can be met. In other words, it is possible to reduce the opportunities for players to feel that the instruction function is bothersome.

In addition, compared to a configuration in which the conditions for instruction and execution of the operation-responsive effect are met in response to the operation of the operating means, this has the advantage that there is no inconvenience caused by the type of second special effect being revealed from the content of the instruction, causing the operation to be interrupted before reaching the specified detection position.

By shifting the light-emitting target along the route connecting the effect button device 40 and the operation target, the player's gaze can be guided toward the operation target, which can effectively alleviate the above-mentioned concerns. In particular, by linking the movement of the operation button 721 with the shifting of the light-emitting target, it becomes possible for the player to freely control the shift speed while preventing the operation from becoming too complicated.

In the configuration described above in which the movement of the operation button 721 and the shift of the light-emitting target are linked, the link between the two can be strengthened by extending the operation stroke of the operation button 721 in advance. In addition, it is assumed that the operation button 721 is often operated vigorously, and there is a concern that the above-mentioned link may result in the teaching period being extremely short. In this regard, extending the operation stroke can increase the teaching period and preferably prevent the teaching from being overlooked.

When the effect button device 40 is operated, it is highly likely that the player's attention is directed to the effect button device 40 in order to determine the aim of the operation. Therefore, when giving instructions, the effect button device 40 is configured to first emit light at the closest light-emitting point (first light-emitting unit LT1) to the effect button device 40, thereby directing the player's attention to the instruction means.

By configuring the teaching routes to overlap partially on the performance button device 40 side, the initial light-emitting point is the same for all teachings. This is preferable in terms of optimally preventing the start of teaching from being overlooked.

<Modification 1>
In the third embodiment, the function of instructing the movable performance unit to be operated is enabled based on the operation button 721 reaching the first detection position CP1 and the execution condition for the second special effect being established, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure the function of instructing the movable performance device to be operated based on the start of an operation suggestion.

<Modification 2>
In the above third embodiment, the movable performance device is configured to operate after instruction of the movable performance device to be operated is completed, but it is also possible to configure the movable performance device to operate slightly prior to the completion of instruction.

<Modification 3>
In the third embodiment, the teaching is linked to the operation button. However, it is also possible to configure the teaching to be performed in a manner not linked to the operation button when the start condition is satisfied.

<Modification 4>
In the above third embodiment, the condition for executing the second special effect is met when the operation button 721 reaches the first detection position CP1 during the valid operation period. However, this can be modified so that the condition for executing the second special effect is met when the operation button 721 reaches the thirteenth detection position CP13, which is the maximum pressing position.

<Modification 5>
In the above third embodiment, the first light-emitting unit LT1 to the seventh light-emitting unit LT7 (light-emitting points) are shared by each of the second special effects A to D, but it is also possible to configure the device without having a shared light-emitting unit (light-emitting point).

<Modification 6>
In the above third embodiment, when an operation suggestion is made, one of the movable performance devices is activated based on the operation of the operation button 721. However, a configuration in which the movable performance device does not activate even when the operation button 721 is operated (false performance) may also be used in combination.

<Modification 7>
In the above-described third embodiment, it is also possible to make the operation stroke from the maximum protruding position to the operation detection position (first detection position CP1) the same (uniform) as the operation stroke between each detection position detected by the rotary encoder 792.

<Modification 8>
In the above third embodiment, the target to be operated is taught by shifting the light-emitting target toward the movable performance device that is the target to be operated, but it is also possible to configure the light-emitting point that is the source of the shift to maintain its light-emitting state, and to configure the number of light-emitting targets to increase during the teaching process.

<Modification 9>
It is also possible to configure the shift speed of the light-emitting target to be relatively slow on the performance button device 40 side and relatively fast on the movable performance device side. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the teaching period from becoming unnecessarily long and to preferably prevent the teaching from being overlooked. For example, it is preferable to set the intervals between the first detection position CP1 to the thirteenth detection position CP13, which are the triggers for shifting the light-emitting target, to be shorter the closer they are to the thirteenth detection position CP13.

<Modification 10>
In a game round related to the second special effect, either the first half or the second half of the period from when an operation suggestion is made to when the operation effective period of the effect button device 40 has elapsed can be a teaching-responsive period in which the above-mentioned teaching is given based on the operation of the effect button device 40, and the other half can be a teaching-non-responsive period in which the above-mentioned teaching is not given even if the effect button device 40 is operated. For example, it is preferable to configure the teaching start period in which the teaching is started to elapse before the operation effective period of the effect button device 40 has elapsed.

<Fourth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the third special effect, which is one of the operation-responsive effects using the effect button device 40, is characteristic. The third special effect is similar to the first and second special effects in that the operation button 721 is set to be operated when the effect button device 40 is in the second form, but differs from the first and second special effects in that the flow of the subsequent effects changes depending on the pressed position (hold position) of the operation button 721. The third special effect and its related configuration will be described below with reference to Figures 86 and 87. Figure 86(a) is a schematic diagram showing the effect button device 40, Figure 86(b) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the protrusion amount and the torque, and Figure 87 is a schematic diagram showing the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 during the third special effect.

When the effect button device 40 is in the first form, the operation button 721 descends when the effect button device 40 is pressed. In other words, the "total operation stroke" = "movement range of the operation button 721", and the movement target is limited to the operation button 721 (the entire button unit 720 does not descend as a unit).

On the other hand, when the effect button device 40 is in the second form, the "total operation stroke" = "the range of movement in which the operation button 721 descends independently" + "the range of movement in which the entire button unit 720 descends as a unit." Specifically, the torque (static torque and driving torque) by the stepping motor 753 described above is greater than the biasing force of the coil spring 745, and when the operation button 721 is pressed from the maximum protruding position, the operation button 721 descends against the biasing force of the coil spring 745, while the holding position itself by the stepping motor 753 does not change. For this reason, when an operation is performed at the maximum protruding position, the operation button 721 descends independently first. After the operation button 721 descends and reaches the detection position where the operation is detected by the detection sensor 791, the operating force of the pressing operation exceeds the torque of the stepping motor 753, and the entire button unit 720 descends against the torque of the stepping motor 753.

Here, in the movement range in which the entire button unit 720 moves, the position of the operation button 721 can be identified based on the detection information from the rotary encoder 792. That is, when the button unit 720 moves from the maximum protruding position to the first detection position CP1, the movement is identified based on the detection information from the detection sensor 791, and in the range in which the button unit 720 (operation button 721) moves beyond the first detection position CP1 to the maximum pressing position, the position of the button unit 720 (operation button 721) is identified based on the detection information from the rotary encoder 792. In particular, as shown in FIG. 86(a), the range from the first detection position CP1 to the maximum pressing position of the entire operation stroke is roughly divided into a first area E1 on the upper level, a second area E2 on the middle level, and a third area on the lower level, and it is possible to identify in which of these three areas E1 to E3 the button unit 720 (operation button 721) is located based on the detection information from the rotary encoder 792.

As shown in FIG. 86(b), the torque generated in the stepping motor 753 is roughly divided into a first reference torque TQ1, which is a stationary torque generated when the effect button device 40 is in the first form or when the operation button 721 is in the second form and is located at the maximum protruding position, and a second reference torque TQ2 and a third reference torque TQ3, which are driving torques generated when the effect button device 40 is in the second form (excluding when the operation button 721 is located at the maximum protruding position). The first reference torque TQ1 is a torque for holding the button unit 720 in the first form, and the first reference torque TQ1 does not act to raise or lower the button unit 720. In contrast, the second reference torque TQ2 and the third reference torque TQ3 act as driving forces (biasing forces) that move the button unit 720 toward the maximum protruding position. These three torques increase in the order of the first reference torque TQ1 < the second reference torque TQ2 < the third reference torque TQ3.

When the operation button 721 is not pressed while the stepping motor 753 is generating the second reference torque TQ2 or the third reference torque TQ3, the operation button 721 moves to the maximum protruding position by the driving force of the stepping motor 753 and the biasing force of the coil spring 745, and waits at the maximum protruding position.

When the operation button 721 is located at the boundary between the first area E1 and the second area E2, or at the boundary between the second area E2 and the third area E3, a third reference torque TQ3 is generated in the stepping motor 753, and in other areas a second reference torque TQ2 is generated in the stepping motor 753. In other words, the boundary between each area (the boundary and its vicinity) is a high torque section in which the driving torque (resistance) generated in the stepping motor 753 is greater than in other areas. In this way, by increasing the resistance at the boundary, the player can know from the feel of his hand that he has reached the boundary between each area.

Next, the outline of the third special effect will be described with reference to FIG. 87. The third special effect is an operation-responsive effect that occurs in some of the game times related to Super Reach A to C, and is started under the situation where the character image CA corresponding to the Super Reach is displayed in the center of the display screen 253a after the development to the Super Reach. When the third special effect starts, the pattern displayed in the reach is displayed in a reduced size in the upper right corner of the display screen 253a, three door images TA are displayed on the left side of the display screen 253a, and an operation indicator showing the operation amount of the operation button 721 is displayed on the right side of the display screen 253a. The operation indicator is composed of a gauge GA that shows the total operation stroke of the operation button 721, and an icon IG that rises and falls within the gauge GA depending on the operation position of the operation button 721. The gauge GA displays the boundaries of the first area E1, the second area E2, and the third area E3, and the door image TA displays a picture or the like showing the outline of the performance to which it will develop.

When the display on the display screen 253a switches to one corresponding to the third special effect, the effect button device 40 switches from the first form to the second form and the operation stroke is extended. After the stroke extension is completed, a message suggesting the operation of the effect button device 40 (for example, "Press and hold the button to select a door") is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 253a. When the effect button device 40 is operated, the height position of the icon IG changes according to the position of the operation button 721. Also, in the third special effect, the door image TA to which the character image CA will move is displayed in a flashing manner by operating the operation button 721, and the target of this flashing display is also changed in conjunction with the height position of the icon IG. Specifically, when the icon IG is located in the portion of the gauge GA that corresponds to the first area E1 (upper portion), the upper door image TA flashes; when the icon IG is located in the portion of the gauge GA that corresponds to the second area E2 (middle portion), the middle door image TA flashes; and when the icon IG is located in the portion of the gauge GA that corresponds to the third area E3 (lower portion), the lower door image TA flashes.

After that, if the operation button 721 remains in the same area for a predetermined period of time (if it is held), the door image TA to be selected is confirmed, and the character image CA moves towards that door image TA. As described above, each door image TA is associated with a development destination of the reach display, and then the performance selected by the player is executed.

The blinking speed of the door image TA increases as the hold period becomes longer, and blinking stops when the selection is confirmed. If the preset valid operation period elapses before the hold period elapses, the progression to the performance corresponding to the door image TA that is blinking at that point is confirmed, and if the operation button is not operated within the valid operation period (if the first detection position CP1 is not reached), the third special performance will be canceled midway.

Next, referring to the flowcharts in Figures 88 to 90, we will explain the third special effect processing that is executed as part of the regular processing in the MPU 912 of the notification/effect control device 143.

(Third special effect processing)
As shown in FIG. 88, in the third special effect process, first, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the current game round corresponds to the third special effect. If a negative determination is made in step S2201, the third special effect process is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S2201, the process proceeds to step S2202. In step S2202, the third special effect execution process is executed. Details of this process will be described later.

In the next step S2203, it is determined whether or not the button device 40 is in an effective operation period. If the determination in step S2203 is negative, the process proceeds to step S2204. In step S2204, it is determined whether or not the timing for the grace period for switching to the second form has elapsed. If the determination in step S2204 is negative, the process proceeds to step S2205. In step S2205, it is determined whether or not the timing for starting switching to the second form has elapsed. If the determination in step S2205 is negative, the third special effect process is terminated. If the determination in step S2205 is positive, the switching process for switching the button device 40 to the second form is executed in step S2206. Thereafter, the process for setting the grace period for switching is executed in step S2207, and the third special effect process is terminated. The period required for switching the button device 40 from the first form to the second form is 0.5 sec. The grace period for switching is set to be longer than this period.

Returning to the explanation of step S2204, if a positive judgment is made in step S2204, that is, if the grace period for switching to the second form has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2208. In step S2208, a process for setting the operation valid period is performed. Thereafter, in step S2209, an operation suggestion start process is executed, and the third special effect process is terminated.

In the operation suggestion start process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled to output a message encouraging an operation (for example, a voice such as "Press and hold the button to select a door") from the speaker unit 27, and an operation suggestion start command is output to the display control device 142. Based on receiving the operation suggestion start command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 to display, on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253, a message such as "Press and hold the button to select a door" for the operation suggestion, a picture resembling a button, and a period indicator showing the remaining valid period.

Returning to the explanation of step S2203, if a positive judgment is made in step S2203, i.e., if it is within the valid operation period, the process proceeds to step S2210. In step S2210, it is determined whether or not the valid operation period has elapsed. If a negative judgment is made in step S2210, the process proceeds to step S2211. In step S2211, it is determined whether or not the effect button device 40 has been operated based on the detection information from the detection sensor 791. In other words, it is determined whether or not the operation button 721 has reached the first detection position CP1. If no operation has been performed, a negative judgment is made in step S2211, and the third special effect processing is terminated. If an operation has been performed, a positive judgment is made in step S2211, and the process proceeds to step S2212.

In step S2212, an operation acceptance flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of RAM 914. This determines whether the third special effect will progress to one of the three selectable effects. In the following step S2213, a predetermined value (equivalent to 3 seconds) is set in a hold counter for measuring the hold period provided in the various counter area 932 of RAM 914, and the processing for the third special effect is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S2210, if a positive judgment is made in step S2210, i.e., if the valid operation period has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2214. In step S2214, an operation suggestion end process is executed. In the operation suggestion end process, an operation suggestion end command is output to the display control device 142. Based on receiving the operation suggestion end command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 to end the display of operation suggestion messages, button-like patterns, a period indicator showing the remaining valid period, and the like.

In the next step S2215, a switching process is executed to switch the effect button device 40 to the first form. After that, in step S2216, the operation reception flag stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914 is erased, and the third special effect process is terminated.

(Second special effect execution process)
Next, the third special effect execution process of step S2202 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the process for executing the third special effect, first, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not an operation reception flag is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. If a negative determination is made in step S2301, the process for executing the third special effect is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S2301, the process proceeds to step S2302. In step S2302, the position of the operation button 721 is identified based on the detection information from the rotary encoder 792. In the following step S2303, a torque change process is executed. The torque change process will now be described with reference to FIG. 90.

(Torque change process)
In the torque change process, first, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not the operation button 721 is located at the boundary portion of areas E1 to E3. If the determination in step S2401 is affirmative, in step S2404, the torque generated by the stepping motor 753 is set to a third reference torque TQ3. If the determination in step S2401 is negative, in step S2403, it is determined whether or not the operation button 721 is located at the maximum protruding position. In this determination, detection information from the detection sensor 791 is referenced. If the determination in step S2403 is affirmative, the torque generated by the stepping motor 753 is set to a first reference torque TQ1. If the determination in step S2403 is negative, the torque generated by the stepping motor 753 is set to a second reference torque TQ2.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 89, after executing the torque change process in step S2303, the process proceeds to step S2304. In step S2304, it is determined in which of the first area E1 to the third area E3 the position of the operation button 721 determined in step S2302 is included. In the following step S2305, it is determined whether the valid operation period has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S2305, the process proceeds to step S2306.

In step S2306, it is determined whether the area in which the operation button 721 is located has changed since the previous execution of the third special effect process. If no area change has occurred, a negative determination is made in step S2306 and the process proceeds to step S2307. In step S2307, the value of the hold counter provided in the various counter area 932 of the RAM 914 is updated (subtracted by 1). In the following step S2308, it is determined whether the value of the hold counter is "0", that is, whether the above-mentioned hold period has elapsed. If the hold period has not elapsed, a negative determination is made in step S2308 and the process for executing the third special effect is terminated as is. If the hold period has elapsed, a positive determination is made in step S2308 and the process proceeds to step S2309. In step S2309, a display process corresponding to the third special effect is executed. This confirms the development to the effect selected by the player, and the character image CA moves toward the selected door image TA.

Returning to the explanation of step S2306, if a positive determination is made in step S2306, i.e., if the area in which the operation button 721 is located has changed, the hold counter is reset to the above-mentioned predetermined value (corresponding to 3 seconds).

Returning to the explanation of step S2305, if the operation valid period has elapsed before the hold counter value becomes "0", a display process corresponding to the third special effect is executed in step S2309. In this process, the development destination is confirmed so that the effect corresponding to the current position of the operation button 721 is executed, and the movement of the character image CA toward the confirmed door image TA is started.

Here, we will explain the torque changes that accompany the flow of the third special effect with reference to Figure 91. Figure 91 is a timing chart illustrating the flow of the third special effect.

(Torque change)
At the timing of tc1, the display of the image variation in the operating port display unit DU and the display of the image variation in the image display device 253 are started. At the timing of tc2, the display transitions to the reach display, and at the timing of tc3, the display progresses to the third special effect. In accordance with the start of the third special effect, the torque generated in the stepping motor 753 of the effect button device 40 is changed from the first reference torque TQ1, which is the stationary torque, to the second reference torque TQ2, which is the driving torque. As a result, the button unit 720 (operation button 721) starts moving toward the maximum protruding position. At the timing of tc4 immediately thereafter, the button unit 720 (operation button 721) reaches the maximum protruding position, and the switching of the effect button device 40 from the first form to the second form is completed. At this timing of tc4, the torque generated in the stepping motor 753 is switched to the first reference torque TQ1, and the button unit 720 is held (stopped) at the maximum protruding position by the first reference torque TQ1.

When the operation button 721 is pressed at the timing of tc5, the operation button 721 descends. In the process of the operation button 721 descending, when the operation button 721 passes through the boundary between the first area E1 and the second area E2, the torque generated in the stepping motor 753 switches to the third reference torque TQ3, and the operation resistance temporarily increases. After passing through the boundary, the torque generated in the stepping motor 753 switches to the second reference torque TQ2, and the operation resistance decreases. The operation button 721 continues to descend thereafter, and when the operation button 721 passes through the boundary between the second area E2 and the third area E3, the torque generated in the stepping motor 753 switches to the third reference torque TQ3, and the operation resistance temporarily increases. After passing through the boundary, the torque generated in the stepping motor 753 switches to the second reference torque TQ2, and the operation resistance decreases. At timing tc7, which is the time when the hold period has elapsed since the operation button 721 reached the third area E3, the direction of the second reference torque TQ2 generated in the stepping motor 753 is reversed, and the button unit 720 (operation button 721) is pulled down.

By pulling down the button unit 720 (operation button 721), the effect button device 40 is switched to the first form. When the switching of the effect button device 40 to the first form is completed at timing tc8, the torque generated in the stepping motor 753 is switched to the first reference torque TQ1.

(Flow of the third special performance)
Next, the flow of the third special effect will be explained with reference to Figures 92 and 93. Figures 92 and 93 are schematic diagrams illustrating the flow of the third special effect, in which the (a) group shows the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253, and the (b) group shows the effect button device 40.

As shown in Fig. 92(1)→Fig. 92(2), the game round related to the third special effect corresponds to the super reach display, and after the transition to the reach display, a character image CA corresponding to the super reach is displayed in the center of the symbol display device 253 (display screen 253a). As shown in Fig. 92(2)→Fig. 92(3), when the game progresses to the third special effect, multiple (three) door images TA corresponding to the subsequent development destination are displayed vertically on the left side of the display screen 253a, and an operation indicator (gauge GA and icon IG) indicating the amount of operation of the operation button 721 is displayed on the right side of the display screen 253a.

In the example shown in Figure 93, the operation button 721 is pressed and held in the second area E2. As for the operation indicator on the display screen 253a, an icon is displayed stationary in the center of the gauge GA, and the central door image TA of the three door images TA is displayed flashing. When a predetermined holding period has elapsed while the operation button 721 is held in the second area E2, the character image CA moves toward the door image TA selected by the player, as shown in Figure 93 (4). Accordingly, the form of the performance button device 40 is switched to the first form.

In the example shown in Figure 93, the central door image TA corresponds to the singing effect. After the character image CA reaches the central door image TA, the singing effect is executed in the center of the display screen 253a (see Figure 93 (4) → Figure 93 (5)). The game result of that game round is indicated to the player depending on whether the third special effect (singing effect) is successful or not. After the third special effect ends, as shown in Figure 93 (5) → Figure 93 (6), the character image CA is hidden and the symbol combination corresponding to the game result is stopped and displayed in the center of the display screen 253a.

The fourth embodiment described above is expected to have the following excellent effects:

When the operation button 721 is held in any one of the first area E1 to the third area E3 for a period of time that reaches a reference period, the presentation will progress to a presentation that corresponds to the area in which the operation means is held. By realizing such innovative operation-responsive presentation, the presentation button device 40 can be used to effectively increase the attention to the game.

If the configuration is such that the development destination changes depending on the area where the operation button 721 is staying, there is a concern that the smaller areas will make it difficult to hold the desired area, making it difficult to actively participate in the game (hold operation of the effect button device 40). In other words, there is a concern that the difficulty of the hold operation will hinder the achievement of the attention-increasing effect described above. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this embodiment, when the third special effect, which is one of the operation-responsive effects, is executed, the effect button device 40 is configured to switch to the second form before the operation suggestion of the effect button device 40 is made, and by increasing the operation stroke in advance, it is possible to enlarge each of the above areas E1 to E3. This makes it possible to prevent the above-mentioned inconvenience from occurring.

In a configuration in which development can branch depending on the hold position of the operation button 721, it can be difficult to grasp the position of the operation button 721 using only tactile information. This difficulty is an obstacle to diversifying presentation patterns by subdividing the entire operation stroke into multiple areas. In this regard, as shown in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably eliminated by providing the player with information indicating the relationship between the detected position of the operation button 721 and the area.

<Modification 1>
In the fourth embodiment, the stepping motor 753 generates a drive torque during the effective operation period in the third special effect, except when the operation button 721 is in the maximum protruding position, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to generate a stationary torque in the operation button 721 during the effective operation period in the third special effect. In this case, it is preferable to increase the resistance to the operation by increasing the stationary torque while the operation button 721 is located at the boundary between the areas E1 to E3.

<Modification 2>
In the fourth embodiment, the torque generated by the stepping motor 753 is changed to the third reference torque TQ3 at the boundary between areas E1 and E3 to increase the resistance to the operation, but this is not limiting. It is also possible to configure the torque generated by the stepping motor 753 to be the second reference torque TQ2 at the boundary between areas E1 and E3 so that the resistance to the operation is not increased.

<Modification 3>
In the fourth embodiment, the maximum protrusion position to the first detection position CP1 are not included in the first area E1, while when the operation button 721 is pressed to the first detection position CP1 and then released from the operation button 721, and as a result the operation button 721 is located at the maximum protrusion position upon the lapse of the valid operation period, the operation button 721 is treated as if it were being held in the first area E1, but this is not limited thereto. For example, the maximum protrusion position to the first detection position CP1 may be included in the first area E1.

<Modification 4>
In the fourth embodiment, the condition for the third special effect to develop is met when the operation button 721 reaches the first detection position CP1, which is the operation detection position, but this may be modified as follows. That is, it is also possible to configure the condition for the third special effect to develop when the operation button is held in a predetermined area for a predetermined period of time. In this case, the maximum protruding position may or may not be included in the first area. However, if the maximum protruding position is included, it is preferable to start counting the hold period at least once when the maximum protruding position is displaced from the maximum protruding position. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent an erroneous determination that the first area E1 has been selected even though the operation button 721 has not been operated.

<Modification 5>
In the third special effect shown in the fourth embodiment, it is also possible to configure the magnitude of the drive torque generated by the stepping motor 753 during the effect selection period (operation valid period) to change over time. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the difficulty of holding the operation button 721 in the desired area, and to prevent the hold operation from becoming monotonous.

<Modification 6>
When the third special effect is executed, at least one of the first area E1 to the third area E3 is set as a winning area, and when the hold operation is performed by holding the operation button 721 on the winning area in accordance with the operation suggestion, an effect corresponding to the area being won is executed, while when the hold operation is performed by holding the operation button 721 on an area other than the winning area, an effect corresponding to the area not being won is executed.

<Modification 7>
It is also possible to configure the device to show the player the period information indicating the area stay period of the operation button 721 using the pattern display device 253, the speaker unit 27, etc. However, in a configuration in which the operation button 721 is held, there is a possibility that the operation button 721 may move between areas with a slight change in the amount of force applied. If such a move between areas frequently causes the hold period (stay period) being measured to be reset, etc., the player may feel that it is bothersome, and there is a concern that the operation button 721 may no longer be operated. Considering that the amount of force must be adjusted when holding, it is preferable to configure the device not to show the above-mentioned stay period (display of period information) at the beginning of a stay when the player stays in an area continuously.

<Modification 8>
In the fourth embodiment, the first area E1 to the third area E3 are the same size, but this is not limiting. It is also possible to make the second area E2 between the first area E1 on the maximum protruding position side and the third area E3 on the maximum pressing position side larger than them.

When performing a hold operation of the operation button 721, it is expected that the operation of staying in the second area E2 between the upper and lower limit areas E1 and E3 will be more difficult due to the presence or absence of a guide. As a result, it is expected that players who want an easier operation will tend to exclude the second area E2 from their options. In this regard, the configuration shown in this modified example can suitably alleviate the above concerns.

Fifth embodiment
In this embodiment, the fourth special effect, which is one of the operation-responsive effects using the effect button device 40, is characteristic. The fourth special effect is similar to the first and second special effects in that the operation button 721 is set to be operated under a situation in which the effect button device 40 is in the second form, but differs in configuration from the first to third special effects in that the second form is maintained over a plurality of game rounds. Hereinafter, the fourth special effect and its related configuration will be described with reference to Figs. 94 to 96. Fig. 94 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the game state and the display mode, Fig. 95(a) is a schematic diagram showing the display screen 253a in the second display mode, Fig. 95(b) is a schematic diagram showing the display screen 253a in the third display mode, and Fig. 96 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the display mode and the variable display mode.

As shown in FIG. 94, the lottery results based on winning the actuation ports 83a and 83b include a 16R special jackpot result, a 4R special jackpot result A, a 4R special jackpot result B, a 4R regular jackpot result A, and a 4R regular jackpot result B.

The 16R special jackpot result is a jackpot result in which, after the end of the special game state corresponding to 16 rounds, the game transitions to a third normal game state A in which the support mode of the electric device 91 corresponds to a high frequency support mode and the lottery mode corresponds to a high probability mode. This third normal game state A continues until the next jackpot.

The 4R special jackpot result A is a jackpot result in which, after the end of the special game state corresponding to 4 rounds, the game transitions to the third normal game state A in which the support mode of the electric device 91 corresponds to the high frequency support mode and the lottery mode corresponds to the high probability mode. This third normal game state A continues until the next jackpot.

The 4R special jackpot result B is a jackpot result in which, after the end of the special game state corresponding to 4 rounds, the game transitions to a third normal game state B in which the support mode of the electric device 91 corresponds to a high frequency support mode and the lottery mode corresponds to a high probability mode. This third normal game state B continues until the next jackpot.

The 4R normal jackpot result A is a jackpot result in which, after the end of the special game state corresponding to 4 rounds, the game transitions to a second normal game state A in which the support mode of the electric device 91 corresponds to a high frequency support mode and the lottery mode corresponds to a low probability mode. This second normal game state A continues until the number of times that have been played reaches the specified number (100 times).

The 4R normal jackpot result B is a jackpot result in which, after the end of the special game state corresponding to 4 rounds, the game transitions to a second normal game state B in which the support mode of the electric device 91 corresponds to a high frequency support mode and the lottery mode corresponds to a low probability mode. This second normal game state B continues until the number of times that have been played reaches the specified number (100 times).

In the case of a 16R special jackpot result, "7", "7", and "7" are displayed on the active line of the display screen 253a as a symbol combination indicating that the result is a 16R special jackpot result, and in the case of a 4R special jackpot result A, any of "1", "1", "1", "3", "3", "3", "5", "5", "5", "9", "9", and "9" are displayed on the active line of the display screen 253a as a symbol combination indicating that the result is a 4R special jackpot result A. In contrast, in the case of a 4R special jackpot result B, a 4R normal jackpot result A, or a 4R normal jackpot result B, any of "2", "2", "2", "4", "4", "4", "6", "6", "6", "8", "8", and "8" are displayed on the active line of the display screen 253a. In other words, it is difficult to determine whether the result is a 4R special jackpot result B, a 4R normal jackpot result A, or a 4R normal jackpot result B from the symbol combination displayed. Of these, for the 4R normal jackpot result A, a display during the special game state will clearly indicate to the player that this is the 4R normal jackpot result A, while for the 4R special jackpot result B and the 4R normal jackpot result B, the result will not be indicated and the game will transition to the normal game state.

To further explain each game state, the first normal game state is a game state that is advantageous to the game hall, while the second normal game state A, the second normal game state B, the third normal game state A, the third normal game state B, and the special game state (open/close execution mode) are all game states that are advantageous to the player.

Here, first to fourth display modes are provided as display modes that determine the background display on the display screen 253a and the BGM output from the speaker unit 27.

The first display mode corresponds to the first normal game state that supports the low frequency support mode and the low probability mode. During the first display mode, the background of the display screen 253a turns blue, and the first display mode clearly indicates that the first normal game state is being played.

The second display mode corresponds to the second normal game state A, which corresponds to the high frequency support mode and low probability mode. During the second display mode, the background of the display screen 253a turns yellow, and the second display mode clearly indicates that the game is in the second normal game state A. During this second display mode, as shown in FIG. 95(a), the words "Chance Zone" are displayed at the top of the display screen 253a, and the number of remaining plays to be maintained in that game state is displayed in a countdown manner.

The third display mode corresponds to the second normal game state B corresponding to the high frequency support mode and low probability mode, and the third normal game state B corresponding to the high frequency support mode and high probability mode. During the third display mode, the background of the display screen 253a turns green, suggesting that the third display mode is either the second normal game state B or the third normal game state B. During this third display mode, as shown in FIG. 95(b), the word "WARNING" is displayed at the top of the display screen 253a. However, unlike the second display mode, the remaining number of plays is not displayed even in the second normal game state B with a play count limit.

The fourth display mode corresponds to the third normal game state A, which is compatible with the high frequency support mode and the high probability mode. During the fourth display mode, the background of the display screen 253a turns red, and the fourth display mode clearly indicates that the third normal game state A is active.

In this embodiment, among the first to fourth display modes, the third display mode corresponds to the fourth special effect. Here, we will provide additional information about the third display mode with reference to FIG. 96.

In the third display mode, which corresponds to the second normal game state B, the pattern change display mode executed on the display screen 253a is limited to complete miss and normal reach A, and normal reach B and super reach A to C do not occur. The change display time is set to 2 to 8 seconds for complete miss and 10 seconds for normal reach A.

In the third normal game state B, the third display mode is maintained until the number of plays executed in the third normal game state B reaches a specified number, at which point the display mode switches to the fourth display mode. In the third display mode, like the second display mode, the variable display mode of the symbols executed on the display screen 253a is limited to complete misses and normal reach A, and normal reach B and super reach A to C do not occur. The variable display time is set to 2 to 8 seconds in the case of a complete miss, and 10 seconds in the case of normal reach A. In the fourth display mode, the variable display mode of the symbols executed on the display screen 253a is a complete miss, any of normal reaches A to B, and super reaches A to C, and the above limitations do not occur. The variable display time is set to 1 to 6 seconds for a complete miss, 20 seconds for normal reach A, 24 seconds for normal reach B, 36 seconds for super reach A, 37 seconds for super reach B, and 38 seconds for super reach C. In other words, in the fourth display mode, the variable display time for a complete miss is shorter than in the third display mode, while the variable display time when a reach display occurs is longer than in the third display mode.

Now, with reference to the flowchart in Figure 97, we will explain the display mode switching process that is executed as part of the regular processing by the MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143.

(Display mode switching process)
In the display mode switching process, first, in step S2501, it is determined whether or not the third display mode is in effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a third display mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. If a negative determination is made in step S2501, the process proceeds to step S2502. In step S2502, it is determined whether or not it is time to transition to the first normal gaming state. If a positive determination is made in step S2502, a first display mode setting process is executed in step S2503, and then the display mode switching process is terminated.

In the first display mode setting process, the display mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914 is erased, the first display mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 933, the background music output from the speaker unit 27 is switched to background music corresponding to the first display mode, and a first display mode command is sent to the display control device 142. Based on receiving the first display mode command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 switches the background of the pattern display device 253 (display screen 253a) to a display corresponding to the first display mode.

Returning to the explanation of step S2502, if a negative judgment is made in step S2502, i.e., if it is not the time to transition to the first normal gaming state, the process proceeds to step S2504. In step S2504, it is determined whether it is the time to end the opening and closing execution mode (special gaming state) corresponding to the fourth normal jackpot result A. If a positive judgment is made in step S2504, the second display mode setting process is executed in step S2505, and then this display mode switching process is terminated.

In the second display mode setting process, the display mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914 is erased, the second display mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 933, the background music output from the speaker unit 27 is switched to background music corresponding to the second display mode, and a second display mode command is sent to the display control device 142. Based on receiving the second display mode command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 switches the background of the pattern display device 253 (display screen 253a) to a display corresponding to the second display mode.

Returning to the explanation of step S2504, if a negative judgment is made in step S2504, i.e., if it is not the timing to end the opening and closing execution mode (special game state) corresponding to the 4th normal jackpot result A, the process proceeds to step S2506. In step S2506, it is determined whether it is the timing to end the opening and closing execution mode (special game state) corresponding to the 4R special jackpot result B or the 4R normal jackpot result B. If a positive judgment is made in step S2506, the third display mode setting process is executed in step S2507, and then this display mode switching process is terminated.

In the third display mode setting process, the display mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914 is erased, the third display mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 933, the background music output from the speaker unit 27 is switched to background music corresponding to the third display mode, and a third display mode command is sent to the display control device 142. Based on receiving the third display mode command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 switches the background of the pattern display device 253 (display screen 253a) to a display corresponding to the third display mode.

Returning to the explanation of step S2506, if a negative judgment is made in step S2506, that is, if it is not the timing to end the opening and closing execution mode (special game state) corresponding to the 4R special jackpot result B or the 4R normal jackpot result B, the process proceeds to step S2508. In step S2508, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to end the opening and closing execution mode (special game state) corresponding to the 16R special jackpot result or the 4R special jackpot result A. If a negative judgment is made in step S2508, the display mode switching process is terminated as is. If a positive judgment is made in step S2508, the fourth display mode setting process is executed in step S2509, and then the display mode switching process is terminated.

In the fourth display mode setting process, the display mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914 is erased, the fourth display mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 933, the background music output from the speaker unit 27 is switched to background music corresponding to the fourth display mode, and a fourth display mode command is sent to the display control device 142. Based on receiving the fourth display mode command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 switches the background of the pattern display device 253 (display screen 253a) to a display corresponding to the fourth display mode.

Returning to the explanation of step S2501, if a positive judgment is made in step S2501, that is, if the current display mode is the third display mode, the process proceeds to step S2510. In step S2510, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the game round. If a negative judgment is made in step S2510, the display mode switching process is terminated as it is. If a positive judgment is made in step S2510, the process proceeds to step S2511. In step S2511, it is determined whether or not a third display mode mid-termination flag described later is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. If a negative judgment is made in step S2511, the process proceeds to step S2502. If a positive judgment is made in step S2511, the process proceeds to step S2512. In step S2512, the third display mode mid-termination flag stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914 is erased, and the process proceeds to step S2505. In other words, if the third display mode mid-termination flag is stored, the process transitions to the second display mode. In addition, when the third display mode is ended midway and the transition is made to the second display mode, the variable display time does not change, and the background music, background display, etc. simply switch to those corresponding to the second display mode.

Next, the fourth special effect processing executed as part of the regular processing by the MPU 912 of the notification/effect control device 143 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 98 to 102.

(Fourth special effect processing)
As shown in FIG. 98, in the fourth special effect process, first, in step S2610, it is determined whether the current display mode is the third display mode. If a negative determination is made in step S2601, the process proceeds to step S2602. In step S2602, it is determined whether the mode is in the open/close execution mode (special game state) corresponding to the 4R certainty jackpot result B or the 4R normal jackpot result B. If a negative determination is made in step S2602, the process for the fourth special effect is terminated as it is. If a positive determination is made in step S2602, the process proceeds to step S2603. In step S2603, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the final round (fourth round). If a negative determination is made in step S2603, the process for the fourth special effect is terminated as it is. If a positive determination is made in step S2603, the process proceeds to step S2604. In step S2604, a switching process is executed to drive and control the stepping motor 753 to switch the effect button device 40 to the second form. In other words, when the transition to the third display mode is confirmed, the effect button device 40 is switched from the first form to the second form in the final round of the opening and closing execution mode (special game state). This switching is completed before the opening and closing execution mode ends, i.e., before the third display mode begins.

Returning to the explanation of step S2601, if a positive judgment is made in step S2601, i.e., if the game is in the third display mode, the program proceeds to step S2605. In step S2605, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the third normal game state B. If a positive judgment is made in step S2605, the program executes processing for the third normal game state in step S2606, and then terminates the processing for the fourth special effect. If a negative judgment is made in step S2605, the program executes processing for the second normal game state in step S2607, and then terminates the processing for the fourth special effect.

Below, the third normal game state processing in step S2606 will be explained with reference to Figures 99 to 100.

(Third normal gaming state processing)
As shown in Fig. 99, in the third normal game state process, first, in step S2701, it is determined whether or not it is during the operation valid period. If a negative determination is made in step S2701, the process proceeds to step S2702. In step S2702, it is determined whether or not the current game round corresponds to a big win result. If a positive determination is made in step S2702, the process proceeds to step S2703.

In step S2703, it is determined whether or not it is time to start a game round. If a negative determination is made in step S2703, the process for the third normal game state ends. If a positive determination is made in step S2703, the process proceeds to step S2704. In step S2704, a process for setting the valid operation period is performed. As a result, operation of the effect button device 40 is validly accepted until the valid operation period has elapsed.

Returning to the explanation of step S2702, if a negative judgment is made in step S2702, that is, if the game round corresponds to a miss result, the process proceeds to step S2705. In step S2705, it is judged whether or not it is the start timing of the game round corresponding to the miss reach. If a negative judgment is made in step S2705, the process for the third normal game state is terminated as it is. If a positive judgment is made in step S2705, the process proceeds to step S2706. In step S2706, it is judged whether or not there is a game round corresponding to the jackpot result in the subsequent game rounds executed during the third normal game state. If a negative judgment is made in step S2706, the process for the third special effect execution is terminated as it is. If a positive judgment is made in step S2706, a continuation flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. After the process of step S2707 is executed, the process for setting the operation valid period is executed in step S2704, and the process for the third special effect execution is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S2701, if a positive judgment is made in step S2701, i.e., if the operation is within the valid period, the process proceeds to step S2708. In step S2708, it is determined whether or not a suggestion to operate the performance button device 40 is currently being made. If a negative judgment is made in step S2708, the process proceeds to step S2709. In step S2709, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to start an operation suggestion. If a positive judgment is made in step S2709, an operation suggestion start process is executed in step S2710.

In the operation suggestion start process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled to output a message (e.g., a voice such as "Press the button") encouraging an operation from the speaker unit 27, and an operation suggestion start command is output to the display control device 142. Based on receiving the operation suggestion start command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 to display, on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253, the operation suggestion message "Press the button", a picture resembling a button, and an indicator showing the remaining valid period.

After executing the processing of step S2710, if a positive judgment is made in step S2708, or if a negative judgment is made in step S2709, the operation response processing for the third normal gaming state is executed in step S2711, and then the processing for the third normal gaming state is terminated. Here, the operation response processing for the third normal gaming state in step S2711 will be described with reference to FIG. 100.

(Third normal gaming state operation response process)
In the third normal game state operation response process, first, in step S2801, it is determined whether or not the operation valid period has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S2801, the process proceeds to step S2802, and it is determined whether or not the effect button device 40 has been operated based on the detection information from the detection sensor 791. If a negative determination is made in step S2802, the third normal game state operation response process is terminated as it is. If a positive determination is made in step S2802, the process proceeds to step S2803. In step S2803, an operation response display process and an operation suggestion end process are executed. In the operation response display process, the display screen 253a is blacked out (darkened), and a message suggesting the expected degree of transition to the special game state is displayed in the center of the display screen 253a. As this message, one of "Chance", "Super Hot", and "Super Lucky" is selected based on the game result. In the operation suggestion end process, an operation suggestion end command is output to the display control device 142. Based on receiving the operation suggestion end command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the symbol display device 253 to end the display of the operation suggestion message, the button-like symbol, and the indicator showing the remaining valid period.

In the following step S2804, the operation valid period is cleared. After that, in step S2805, it is determined whether or not a continuation flag is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. If a negative determination is made in step S2805, a switching process is executed in step S2806 to switch the effect button device 40 to the first form, and then the operation response process for the third normal game state is terminated. Specifically, if the effect button device 40 is already in the first form, it is maintained in the first form, and if it is in the second form, a driving torque for descending is generated in the stepping motor 753 to forcibly switch the effect button device 40 to the first form.

If a positive judgment is made in step S2805, continuation processing is executed in step S2807, and then the third normal game state operation response processing is terminated. The continuation processing is a process for maintaining the effect button device 40 in the first form until the end of the game round, and returning it to the second form at the start of the next game round. In other words, if the continuation flag is set, it will return to the second form even if the effect button device 40 is operated during the valid operation period and a miss result is clearly indicated. Furthermore, in the continuation processing, the continuation flag stored in the various flags storage area 933 of the RAM 914 is erased.

Next, the second normal game state processing in step S2607 will be described with reference to Figures 101 and 102.

(Processing for the second normal gaming state)
As shown in FIG. 101, in the second normal game state process, first, in step S2901, it is determined whether or not it is within the valid operation period. If a negative determination is made in step S2901, the process proceeds to step S2902. In step S2902, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of a game round corresponding to a big win result. If a positive determination is made in step S2902, the process proceeds to step S2903. In step S2903, a process for setting the valid operation period is performed. As a result, operation of the effect button device 40 is validly accepted until the valid operation period has elapsed.

Returning to the explanation of step S2902, if a negative judgment is made in step S2902, i.e., if it is not the start timing of a game round corresponding to a jackpot result, the process proceeds to step S2904. In step S2904, it is judged whether or not it is the start timing of the first game round corresponding to a miss reach after the transition to the second normal game state. If a negative judgment is made in step S2904, the process for the second normal game state is terminated. If a positive judgment is made in step S2904, an operation valid period setting process is executed in step S2903, and then the process for the second normal game state is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S2901, if a positive judgment is made in step S2901, i.e., if the operation is within the valid period, the process proceeds to step S2905. In step S2905, it is determined whether or not a suggestion to operate the performance button device 40 is currently being made. If a negative judgment is made in step S2905, the process proceeds to step S2906. In step S2906, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to start an operation suggestion. If a positive judgment is made in step S2906, an operation suggestion start process is executed in step S2907.

In the operation suggestion start process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled to output a message (e.g., a voice such as "Press the button") encouraging an operation from the speaker unit 27, and an operation suggestion start command is output to the display control device 142. Based on receiving the operation suggestion start command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 to display, on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253, the operation suggestion message "Press the button", a picture resembling a button, and an indicator showing the remaining valid period.

After executing the processing of step S2907, if a positive judgment is made in step S2905, or if a negative judgment is made in step S2906, the second normal gaming state operation response processing is executed in step S2908, and then the second normal gaming state processing is terminated. Here, the second normal gaming state operation response processing of step S2908 will be described with reference to FIG. 102.

(Second normal gaming state operation response processing)
In the second normal game state operation response process, first, in step S3001, it is determined whether or not the operation valid period has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S3001, the process proceeds to step S3002, and it is determined whether or not the effect button device 40 has been operated based on the detection information from the detection sensor 791. If a negative determination is made in step S3002, the second normal game state operation response process is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S3002, the process proceeds to step S3003. In step S3003, an operation response display process and an operation suggestion end process are executed. In the operation response display process, the display screen 253a is blacked out (goes dark), and a message suggesting the expected degree of transition to the special game state is displayed in the center of the display screen 253a. As this message, either "Super Hot" or "Super Lucky" is selected based on the game result. In addition, "Super Lucky" corresponds to a jackpot result, and "Super Hot" corresponds to both a jackpot result and a miss result.

In the operation suggestion end process, an operation suggestion end command is output to the display control device 142. Based on receiving the operation suggestion end command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the symbol display device 253 to end the display of the operation suggestion message, the button-like symbol, and the indicator showing the remaining valid period.

In the following step S3004, the operation valid period is cleared, and in step S3005, a switching process is executed to switch the effect button device 40 to the first form. After that, in step S3006, it is determined whether or not the number of games executed during this second normal game state has reached a specified number. If a negative determination is made in step S3006, a flag for midway termination of the third display mode is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914 in step S3007, and the operation response process for the second normal game state is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S3006, the operation response process for the second normal game state is terminated as is. Thus, in this embodiment, if the effect button device 40 is operated during the operation valid period even before the specified number of games has been reached, or if the operation valid period has elapsed without the effect button device 40 being operated during the operation valid period, the third display mode may end midway and transition to the second display mode.

Returning to the explanation of step S3001, if a positive judgment is made in step S3001, i.e., if the operation valid period has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S3008. In step S3008, an operation suggestion end process is executed, and in the following step S3009, an operation incompatible display process is executed. In the operation incompatible display process, the display of the changing patterns is continued without performing the above-mentioned blackout (darkening) display.

Then, steps S3005 to S3007 are executed to end the second normal game state operation response process.

Next, the flow of the fourth special effect will be explained with reference to Figures 103 and 104. Figure 103 is a timing chart illustrating the game flow when the fourth special effect occurs, and Figure 104 is a schematic diagram illustrating the flow of the fourth special effect. Note that Figure 103 illustrates an example in which a jackpot result occurs in the fifth play in the third normal game state B.

(Flow of the 4th special performance)
The game round started at td1 corresponds to the 4R special jackpot result B. In this game round, at the timing of td2, a symbol combination (e.g., "2", "2", "2") corresponding to the 4R special jackpot result B is displayed on the pay line of the display screen 253a. At the timing of td3 when the fixed display period has elapsed, the first normal game state is switched to the special game state. In addition, the display mode is also switched from the first display mode to the display mode corresponding to the special game state (special display mode) in accordance with this.

At the timing td4 when the final round (fourth round) ends in the special game state, the effect button device 40 switches from the first form to the second form. In addition, at the same time, the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253 and the speaker unit 27 notify the player that the effect button device 40 will switch to the second form.

At the timing of td5, the special game state is switched to the third normal game state B, and the first game round in the third normal game state B is started. In the third normal game state B, the display mode is switched to the third display mode, and the word "WARNING" corresponding to the third display mode is displayed at the top of the display screen 253a (see FIG. 104 (a1)). At the timing of td6, the fifth game round after the transition to the third normal game state B is started. This game round corresponds to the result of a jackpot.

At the timing of td6 when a game round is started, an operation valid period during which operation of the effect button device 40 is valid is set. After that, operation of the effect button device 40 is valid until the operation valid period has elapsed. At the timing of td7 after the display mode on the display screen 253a becomes a reach display, the player is suggested to operate the effect button device 40 (see FIG. 104(a2)). At the timing of td8 when the effect button device 40 is operated in accordance with the operation suggestion, the display screen 253a goes black and a message indicating the expected degree of transition to a special game state (for example, "Super Lucky" or "Super Hot") is displayed (see FIG. 104(a3)). At the same time, the above-mentioned operation suggestion and operation valid period end. This operation switches the effect button device 40 from the second form to the first form.

At the timing of td9 immediately afterwards, the blackout and message display are cancelled, and the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is displayed as a static combination on the pay line of the display screen 253a, clearly informing the player that a jackpot result has been obtained (see FIG. 104(a4)). After that, at the timing of td10, the game transitions to the special game state.

The fifth embodiment described above is expected to have the following excellent effects:

In the second normal game state B and the third normal game state B, the effect button device 40 (corresponding to the "state suggesting means") provided on the front door frame 14, which is the "front part of the gaming machine", takes on the second form, suggesting that the gaming state is favorable to the player. Since the front door frame 14 is a part that is more easily visible to other players than, for example, the pattern display device 253 disposed at the back of the gaming machine, the effect button device 40 provided on the front door frame 14 is configured to suggest that the gaming state is favorable to the player, thereby suitably encouraging a sense of superiority in the player playing the gaming machine.

Here, the effect button device 40 can be operated even when it is in the second form. In this way, if the effect button device 40 can be operated in a game state that is advantageous to the player, this is advantageous in that it gives the player a good impression of the effect button device 40, which is a state suggestion means, and increases the attention paid to the effect button device 40 being in the second form.

When the effect button device 40 (second form) is operated in the second normal game state B and the third normal game state B, an effect corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery for the game in which the operation was performed is executed. Since the second normal game state B and the third normal game state B are game states that are advantageous to the player, the operation increases the opportunities for an effect that is advantageous to the player to occur. This is advantageous in forming a good impression of the player regarding the effect button device 40, and in increasing the attention paid to the effect button device 40 being in the second form.

When the effect button device 40 is in the second form in the second normal game state B and the third normal game state B, and is operated according to the operation suggestion, the subsequent form is split into the first form and the second form. With this configuration, it is possible to create a sense of tension regarding the operation of the effect button device 40.

When a decision is made to return to the second form during the second normal game state B and the third normal game state B, the configuration is such that the return is delayed at least until the end of the game round in which the effect button device 40 was operated in accordance with the operation suggestion. In this way, by configuring the return to be delayed until the end of the game round, it is possible to preferably prevent a decrease in attention to the game due to the movement of the effect button device 40 being transmitted to the player's hand, etc.

When the effect button device 40 is switched to the second form, the amount of protrusion of the effect button device 40 from the front door frame 14 increases. Although this is preferable in terms of making the effect button device 40 stand out, it makes it difficult to access the back of the effect button device 40. Such circumstances result in stronger restrictions on the placement of the effect button device 40, which is undesirable in terms of improving the convenience and attention of the effect button device 40. In this regard, as shown in the present embodiment, if the effect button device 40 is configured to switch to the second form in the high-frequency support mode in which the loss of game balls is suppressed, the effect button device 40 can be prevented from substantially interfering with the supply of game balls even if it is placed around (especially on the front side) the upper tray 33 as a storage means. In this way, by relaxing the restrictions on the placement of the effect button device 40, a practically preferable configuration can be realized.

When executing the fourth special effect in the third display mode, there is no need to switch the button to the second form when the effect begins. In this way, by eliminating the need for a preparatory action to switch the form of the effect button device 40, it is possible to preferably avoid revealing the occurrence of the fourth special effect due to the preparatory action.

<Modification 1>
In the fifth embodiment, the second normal game state B and the third normal game state B are substantially difficult to distinguish from each other, and the effect button device 40 is maintained in the second form during the third display mode corresponding to the second normal game state B and the third normal game state B to suggest that the game state is advantageous to the player. In view of the fact that the second normal game state B and the third normal game state B are both advantageous to the player, although the degree of advantage differs, it is also possible to separate the display modes to make each game state easily distinguishable, and to maintain the effect button device 40 in the second form in the second normal game state B and the third normal game state B to suggest that the game state is advantageous to the player.

<Modification 2>
In the fifth embodiment, the fourth special effect is executed in the second normal game state B and the third normal game state B, which are "advantageous states", but the fourth special effect can be applied to any game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode and the low-probability mode. For example, instead of or in addition to the second normal game state B and the third normal game state B, the fourth special effect can be executed in the second normal game state A corresponding to the high-frequency support mode and the low-probability mode, and the third normal game state A corresponding to the high-frequency support mode and the high-probability mode.

<Modification 3>
In the fifth embodiment, the fourth special effect occurs not only in the game times related to the big win result but also in some of the game times related to the miss result, but this is not limited to this. The fourth special effect may occur only in the game times related to the big win result, that is, the occurrence of the fourth special effect = a big win is confirmed.

<Modification 4>
In the fifth embodiment, in the normal game state corresponding to the third display mode, in the game round corresponding to the big win result, the operation suggestion is performed after a certain period of time has elapsed after the operation button is enabled. In other words, even if the operation button is operated before the operation suggestion is performed, the operation reception → operation corresponding performance may occur. This may be changed so that the operation suggestion is performed simultaneously with the operation enablement. Also, the operation suggestion may be performed after the operation enablement for only some of the big win results.

<Modification 5>
In a normal game state corresponding to the third display mode, when the effect button device 40 is operated outside the operation valid period, the effect button device 40 is switched to the first form by the operation and can be configured to be maintained in the first form. This can suitably prevent the player's impression of the fourth special effect from being deteriorated due to the difficulty in checking the amount of game balls stored in the upper tray 33 or the difficulty in accessing the upper tray 33. Note that, when the effect button device 40 is operated outside the operation valid period, it is preferable to configure the effect button device 40 to be switched from the first form to the second form in the game round in which the fourth special effect is executed.

<Modification 6>
In the fifth embodiment, the effect button device 40 is maintained in the second form in a part of the second normal game state and the third normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode, suggesting that the game state is advantageous to the player. Here, in the high frequency support mode, the decrease in the number of balls held as the game progresses is mitigated, but the number of balls held will gradually decrease as the game progresses. It is also possible to change the configuration to maintain the effect button device 40 in the second form when the game state is such that the number of balls held increases (slight increase) as the game progresses (so-called small win RUSH, etc.). With such a configuration, it is practically unnecessary to refill the upper tray 33 with game balls during the game state, so that the effect button device 40 in the second form can be easily accessed while preferably avoiding the effect button device 40 in the second form from interfering with the game progress.

<Modification 7>
In the above fifth embodiment, when the normal game state corresponding to the third display mode is reached, the form of the effect button device 40 is maintained in the second form to suggest that the game state is favorable to the player, but this is not limited to the above. For example, when the normal game state corresponding to the third display mode is reached, the above-mentioned second movable effect device 400 can be maintained in a protruding state to suggest that the game state is favorable to the player. By configuring the second movable effect device 400 to be switched to a non-protruding state by the player's pressing operation, it is possible to preferably avoid the data display device, etc. located above the pachinko machine 10 in the island equipment of the game hall becoming difficult to see.

<Modification 9>
In the third display mode, when the effect button device 40 is operated during a period in which the effect button device 40 is in the second form and no operation suggestion is being made, the return to the second form during the third display mode may be restricted. In the configuration in which the effect button device 40 functioning as a state suggesting means suggests that the game state is favorable to the player as described above, if the effect button device 40 is operated carelessly and the effect button device 40 breaks down, the suggestion function will not be performed properly. This is undesirable because it is a factor that undermines the reliability of the state suggestion function of the gaming machine (the effect button device 40). In this regard, the configuration shown in this modified example reduces the opportunities for the effect button device 40 to be operated carelessly, and the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconveniences can be suitably suppressed.

Sixth embodiment
With regard to the effect button device 40 shown in each of the above embodiments, the form of the effect button device 40 can be switched between a first form in which the operating stroke of the operation button 721 is relatively small and a second form in which the operating stroke is relatively large, and in some operation-responsive effects, the player is prompted to operate the effect button device 40 with the effect button device 40 switched to the second form, thereby increasing the attention paid to the effect button device 40.

In such a configuration, it is expected that the greater the change before and after switching, the stronger the impact when switching to the second form. In view of this situation, for example, making the operation stroke in the second form even larger would be effective in terms of increasing attention. However, if the operation stroke is to be greatly expanded, it is expected that it will be difficult to ensure the strength of the effect button device 40. Given that the effect button device 40 is the object to be operated by the player, there is concern that a decrease in the strength of the effect button device 40 will cause the effect button device 40 to malfunction, etc., and become a factor in reducing the reliability of the gaming machine. In consideration of such circumstances, one of the features of this embodiment is that it has been devised to optimally exert the effect of increasing attention while suppressing the decrease in reliability of the gaming machine.

Specifically, the sixth special effect, which involves a change in the form of the effect button device 40, and various configurations related to the sixth special effect are distinctive. The sixth special effect is an effect that is executed after the transition to the reach display (after development) in the game round corresponding to the reach display, and is composed of a first half part that executes an operation-responsive effect (a cut-in effect using a character image) based on the operation button 721 being operated when the effect button device 40 is in the first form, and a second half part that executes an operation-responsive effect (a linked effect of the first movable effect device 300) based on the operation button 721 being operated when the effect button device 40 is in the second form.

As shown in FIG. 105(a), the sixth special effects are broadly divided into a sixth special effect X that is executed in a game round corresponding to a losing result, and a sixth special effect Y that is executed in a game round corresponding to a winning result. The sixth special effect Y is configured so that a light-emitting effect is executed by the first movable effect device 300 when the operation button 721 is operated during the effective operation period of the second half part, whereas the sixth special effect X is configured so that a light-emitting effect is not executed by the first movable effect device 300 when the operation button 721 is operated during the effective operation period of the second half part.

Below, we will first refer to the flowcharts in Figures 105(b) and 106 to explain the processing for the sixth special effect (sixth special effect processing) executed by MP912 of the notification/effect control device 143. The sixth special effect processing is processing executed as part of regular processing by MPU912, similar to the above-mentioned first special effect processing, etc.

(Sixth special effect processing)
As shown in Fig. 105(b), in the sixth special effect process, first, in step S3101, it is determined whether or not the current game round corresponds to the sixth special effect. Whether or not to execute the sixth special effect is determined by the MPU 912 of the notification/effect control device 143 at the start of the game round. If a negative determination is made in step S3101, the sixth special effect process is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S3101, the process proceeds to step S3102.

In step S3102, it is determined whether or not the first half part is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an operation-responsive performance based on the first operation (a cut-in performance using a character image) is being performed, and if the operation-responsive performance is not being performed, it is determined whether or not a continuation flag or a non-continuation flag, which will be described later, is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. If the operation-responsive performance is being performed, or if the operation-responsive performance is not being performed but neither a continuation flag nor a non-continuation flag is stored, a positive determination is made in step S3102 and the process proceeds to the first half part processing. Then, after the first half part processing is performed in step S3103, the sixth special performance processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the operation-responsive performance is not being performed and either a continuation flag or a non-continuation flag is stored, a negative determination is made in step S3102 and the process proceeds to step S3104, where the second half part processing is performed and the sixth special performance processing is terminated.

Next, we will explain the processing for the first half part with reference to the flowchart in Figure 106.

(Processing for the first half part)
In the processing for the first half part, first, in step S3201, it is determined whether or not the first operation in the sixth special effect (hereinafter referred to as the first operation) is in a valid period. If a negative determination is made in step S3201, the process proceeds to step S3202. In step S3202, it is determined whether or not it is the suggestion start timing to start suggesting the first operation. If a negative determination is made in step S3202, the processing for the first half part is terminated as is. If a positive determination is made in step S3202, the process proceeds to step S3203.

In step S3203, a process for setting the valid period of the first operation is performed. During this valid period, the operation of the operation button 721 is monitored based on the detection information (detection signal) from the detection sensor 791.

In the next step S3204, a first operation suggestion start process is executed. In the first operation suggestion start process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled to output a message prompting an operation (e.g., a voice such as "Press the button") from the speaker unit 27, and a first operation suggestion start command is output to the display control device 142. Based on receiving the suggestion start command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 to display on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 the message "Press!!" for suggesting an operation, a picture for suggesting an operation indicating a button, and an indicator showing the remaining valid period.

After that, in step S3205, a hold standby process is executed to terminate the sixth special effect process. In the sixth special effect shown in this embodiment, a second operation (hereinafter, second operation) is suggested after the first operation is completed. The operation button 721 pressed to the operation completion position (maximum pressing position) by the first operation is held in that operation completion position and is restricted from returning to its initial position. Here, a supplementary explanation of the configuration related to this restriction is provided with reference to FIG. 107.

A hold mechanism 795 that holds the operation button 721 at an operation detection position (maximum pressing position) is disposed on the movable base 741 of the performance button device 40. The hold mechanism 795 has a movable piece 796 that can slide in a direction perpendicular to the operation direction of the operation button 721, and a drive unit (solenoid) that slides the movable piece 796. When the drive unit is de-energized, the movable piece 796 of the hold mechanism 795 waits in a retracted position that does not overlap with the operating trajectory of the operation button 721, and is configured to move to a protruding position that overlaps with the operating trajectory of the operation button 721 when the drive unit is de-energized.

As shown in FIG. 107(a)→FIG. 107(b), when the drive unit of the hold mechanism 795 is excited, the movable piece 796 moves from the retracted position toward the protruding position, and its tip is pressed against the vertical wall of the operation button 721. When the operation button 721 is lowered from this state to the maximum pressing position, as shown in FIG. 107(b)→FIG. 107(c), the tip of the movable piece 796 enters the groove portion 739 formed on the side of the operation button 721, and the movable piece 796 and the groove portion 739 engage with each other. As a result, the operation button 721 is held in the operation completion position, and the return to the position before the operation is restricted. After that, the drive unit of the hold mechanism 795 is de-excited, and the movable piece 796 moves to the retracted position, and the operation button 721 returns to the position before the operation by the biasing force of the coil spring 745 (see FIG. 107(c)→FIG. 107(a)). In the following description, the state in which the hold mechanism 795 restricts the return of the operation button 721 will be referred to as the "hold state," and the state in which the return is not restricted will be referred to as the "free state."

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 106 again, if a positive judgment is made in step S3201, i.e., if it is judged that the first operation is within its valid period, the process proceeds to step S3206. In step S3206, it is judged whether or not the valid period of the first operation has elapsed. If a negative judgment is made in step S3206, the process proceeds to step S3207. In step S3207, it is judged whether or not the first operation has been performed based on the detection information from the detection sensor 791. If a negative judgment is made in step S3207, the process for the first half part is terminated. If a positive judgment is made in step S3207, the process proceeds to step S3208.

In step S3208, the acceptance notification process and the suggestion end process for the first operation are executed. In the acceptance notification process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled to output a sound effect from the speaker unit 27 indicating that the operation has been validly accepted. In the operation suggestion end process, an operation suggestion end command is output to the display control device 142. Based on receiving the operation suggestion end command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 to end the display of the operation suggestion message, the operation suggestion picture indicating the button, and the indicator showing the remaining valid period.

In the next step S3209, operation-responsive performance execution processing is performed. In this operation-responsive performance execution processing, sound effects for the operation-responsive performance (cut-in performance of a character image) are output from the speaker unit 27, and a command for the operation-responsive performance is sent to the display control device 142, and the execution period (2 sec) of the operation-responsive performance is set. Based on receiving the command, the display control device 142 displays (cuts in) on the display screen 253a a character image selected based on the win/loss result of that game round.

Then, in step S3210, a continuation flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of RAM 914, and processing for this first half part is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S3206, if a positive judgment is made in step S3206, that is, if the valid period of the first operation has elapsed without the first operation being performed, the process proceeds to step S3211. In step S3211, a suggestion end process for the first operation is executed. In the suggestion end process, a suggestion end command for the first operation is output to the display control device 142. Based on receiving the suggestion end command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 to end the display of the operation suggestion message, the button-like image, and the indicator showing the remaining valid period.

In the next step S3212, the hold standby release process is executed. Specifically, the drive unit of the hold mechanism 795 is de-energized, and the movable piece 796 is returned to the retracted position. In the next step S3213, a non-continuation flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914, and the process for the first half part is terminated.

Next, the processing for the latter part in step S3104 (see FIG. 105(b)) will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIG. 108 and FIG. 109.

(Processing for the latter part)
In the latter half part process, first, in step S3301, it is determined whether or not a continuation flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. If the determination is affirmative in step S3301, the process proceeds to step S3302. In step S3302, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to start the latter half part. If the determination is affirmative in step S3302, the process proceeds to step S3303. In step S3303, a process to start a guidance effect that draws the player's attention to the performance button device 40 is executed, and then the process for the latter half part is terminated. In the guidance effect start process, the speaker unit 27 starts outputting a sound effect for switching to the second form, and a guidance effect command is output to the display control device 142. Based on receiving the guidance effect command, the display control device 142 starts displaying a video for the guidance effect on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253. The video for the guidance effect is an animated video in which the performance button device 40 switches from the first form to the second form.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3302, i.e., if it is not time to start the second half part, continuation processing is executed in step S3304, and then the second half part processing ends. This continuation processing will be described later.

Returning to the explanation of step S3301, if a negative judgment is made in step S3301, i.e., if a continuation flag is not stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914, the process proceeds to step S3305. In step S3305, it is judged whether or not a non-continuation flag is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. If a non-continuation flag is not stored, a negative judgment is made in step S3305, and the process for the latter half part is terminated. If a positive judgment is made in step S3305, non-continuation processing is executed in step S3306, and then the process for the latter half part is terminated. In the non-continuation processing, the speaker unit 27, the lamp unit 24, and the display control device 142 are controlled to execute an alternative performance (operation-incompatible performance) when the first operation is not performed on the performance button device 40.

Next, the continuation process of step S3304 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 109.

(Continuation Processing)
In the continuation process, first, in step S3401, it is determined whether or not the second operation is currently in a valid period. If a negative determination is made in step S3401, the process proceeds to step S3402. In step S3402, it is determined whether or not the timing has elapsed for the switching grace period for switching the effect button device 40 to the second form. If a negative determination is made in step S3402, the process proceeds to step S3403. In step S3403, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to start switching to the second form. If a negative determination is made in step S3403, the continuation process is terminated.

If a determination is made in step S3403, a switching process is executed in step S3404 to switch the effect button device 40 to the second form. After that, a hold release process is executed in step S3405. In the hold release process, the drive unit of the hold mechanism 795 is de-energized to return the movable piece 796 to the retracted position. After that, a switching grace period setting process is executed in step S3406, and this continuation process is terminated. The period required for switching the effect button device 40 from the first form to the second form is 0.5 sec. The switching grace period is set to be longer than this required period. Then, the above-mentioned guidance effect is completed when the grace period has elapsed.

Returning to the explanation of step S3402, if a positive determination is made in step S3402, that is, if it is time for the grace period for switching to the second form to elapse, the process proceeds to step S3407. In step S3407, it is determined whether or not switching to the second form has been completed. If a positive determination is made in step S3407, the process proceeds to step S3408. In step S3408, a process for setting the valid period of the second operation is performed. Thereafter, in step S3409, a process for starting a suggestion for the second operation is executed, and this continuation process is terminated.

In the second operation suggestion start process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled to output a message encouraging an operation (for example, a voice such as "Press the button") from the speaker unit 27, and an operation suggestion start command is output to the display control device 142. Based on receiving the operation suggestion start command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 to display on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 a message such as "One hit!!" for the operation suggestion, a pattern imitating a button in the second form, and a period indicator showing the remaining valid period. In other words, the above-mentioned guidance performance ends as the grace period elapses, and the device transitions to operation suggestions.

Returning to the explanation of step S3407, if a negative judgment is made in step S3407, the process proceeds to step S3410. In step S3410, a switching process is executed to switch the performance button device 40 to the first form. In other words, if the movement of the operation button 721 is obstructed by a hand, for example, and the switching to the second form is not completed within the grace period, the switching to the second form is canceled.

After that, in step S3411, an alternative performance execution process is performed, and this continuation process is terminated. The alternative performance execution process results in the execution of an alternative performance that does not correspond to the operation of the performance button device 40.

Returning to the explanation of step S3401, if a positive judgment is made in step S3401, i.e., if the second operation is still in its valid period, the process proceeds to step S3412. In step S3412, it is determined whether the valid period of the second operation has elapsed. If a negative judgment is made in step S3412, the process proceeds to step S3413.

In step S3413, it is determined whether or not the operation button 721 has been operated based on the detection information from the detection sensor 791. If no operation has been performed, a negative determination is made in step S3413 and this continuation process is terminated. If an operation has been performed, a positive determination is made in step S3413 and the process proceeds to step S3414. In step S3414, the second operation acceptance notification process and suggestion end process are executed. In the acceptance notification process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled to output a sound effect indicating that the operation has been validly accepted from the speaker unit 27. In the operation suggestion end process, an operation suggestion end command is output to the display control device 142. Based on the reception of the operation suggestion end command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 to end the display of the operation suggestion message, the operation suggestion picture indicating the button, and the indicator indicating the remaining valid period.

In the next step S3415, operation-responsive presentation execution processing is performed. In the operation-responsive presentation execution processing, a presentation is executed to clearly show the game result of the current game round to the player. Specifically, if the result is a win, a light-emitting presentation (confirmation presentation) is executed by the first movable presentation device 300 and the letter "V" is displayed in the center of the display screen 253a, and if the result is a loss, the letter "Too bad" is displayed. After that, the process proceeds to step S3416, where the continuation flag stored in the various flags storage area 933 of the RAM 914 is erased and this continuation process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S3412, if a positive judgment is made in step S3412, i.e., if the valid period of the second operation has elapsed without the second operation being performed, the process proceeds to step S3417. In step S3417, a suggestion end process for the second operation is executed. In the suggestion end process, a suggestion end command for the first operation is output to the display control device 142. Based on receiving the suggestion end command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 to end the display of the operation suggestion message, the button-like image, and the indicator showing the remaining valid period.

In the following step S3418, a switching process is executed to switch the effect button device 40 to the first form. After that, in step S3419, an alternative effect is executed, and then this continuation process is terminated. In the alternative effect, regardless of whether the result is a win or a miss, no light-emitting effect is executed by the first movable effect device 300.

Now, with reference to Figure 110, the flow of the sixth special effect will be explained. Figure 110(a) is a schematic diagram showing the display screen 253a and the first movable effect device 300, and Figure 110(b) is a schematic diagram showing the effect button device 40. Note that in the example shown in Figure 110, the number of times the sixth special effect (more specifically, the sixth special effect Y) is executed corresponds to a winning result, and the sixth special effect progresses in the order of Figure 110(1) → Figure 110(2) → Figure 110(3) → Figure 110(4) → Figure 110(5).

At the timing after the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 displays the variable display mode of the pattern, a button icon imitating the operation button 721, a message for operation suggestion (e.g., "Press!!"), and an indicator showing the remaining operation valid period are displayed on the display screen 253a. If the operation button 721 is operated during the operation valid period, a cut-in image of a character is displayed based on the operation. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 110, which is a game round corresponding to a winning result, an image of a girl holding a flag with the characters "super hot" is displayed in the center of the display screen 253a. When the operation button 721 reaches the operation detection position (maximum pressing position) by this first operation (first operation), the operation button 721 is held by the hold mechanism 795, and the return to the initial position is restricted. In other words, the operation button 721 remains at the operation detection position (maximum pressing position) even after the player's hand is released from the operation button 721. After the cut-in display is complete, the sixth special effect will transition from the first half to the second half.

The first half of the sixth special effect is structured so that it can occur as an operation-responsive effect other than the sixth special effect, that is, the effect corresponding to the first half can occur alone. For this reason, it is difficult for the player to identify that the current effect is the sixth special effect from the first half.

After moving to the second half, the image on the display screen 253a switches from the image of the girl to the animated video for the guidance effect described above. This video suggests to the player that a situation may occur in which the effect button device 40 may be switched, and encourages attention to the effect button device 40. After a certain interval from the start of the guidance effect, the effect button device 40 starts to switch from the first form to the second form. Specifically, the movement restriction by the hold mechanism 795 is released and the stepping motor 753 is driven and controlled, causing the operation button 721 to rise.

When the switch to the second form is completed, the above-mentioned guidance effect ends, and operation suggestions for the operation button 721 begin. For example, a button icon imitating the operation button 721 in the second form, a message suggesting an operation (e.g., "One hit!!"), and an indicator showing the remaining valid operation period are displayed on the display screen 253a.

As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 110, the number of plays corresponds to a winning result. Therefore, when the player operates the operation button 721 during the valid operation period, a light-emitting effect is executed by the first movable effect device 300, and the letter "V" indicating a winning result is displayed on the display screen 253a. This clearly indicates to the player that the number of plays in question is a winning result.

Next, referring to FIG. 111, we will provide additional information about the flow when the effect button device 40 is switched from the first form to the second form in the sixth special effect. FIG. 111 is a timing chart illustrating the flow when the effect button device 40 is switched from the first form to the second form.

At time te1 after the start of the sixth special performance (first half), a suggestion to operate the operation button 721 begins, and in conjunction with the start of this suggestion, the drive unit of the hold mechanism 795 switches from de-energized to energized. Then, at time te2, the player operates the operation button 721, and immediately thereafter, at time te3, the operation button 721 reaches the lower limit position (operation detection position). This causes the above-mentioned cut-in display to be executed.

At this time, the hold mechanism 795 is already in a hold standby state, and the operation button 721 is held at the lowest limit position by the hold mechanism 795. At the subsequent time te4, the player's hand has left the operation button 721 and the pressure has been released, but because the operation button 721 is being held by the hold mechanism 795, it will not return to the upper limit position (initial position).

At timing te5 after the cut-in display ends and the transition to the second half part begins, the drive unit of the hold mechanism 795 switches from excited to de-excited, and the output of a drive signal to the stepping motor 753 begins. This causes the operation button 721 to start moving toward the upper limit position (initial position), and the movable base 741 also starts moving from the lower limit position toward the upper limit position.

Here, in the performance button device 40, from the viewpoint of posture stability, a slight time lag occurs between when the stepping motor 753 starts to operate and when the movable base 741 starts to rise (see, for example, FIG. 53). However, during this time lag, the operation button 721 first rises independently due to the biasing force of the coil spring 745, and then the operation button 721 rises due to the biasing force of the coil spring 745 and the movable base 741 rises due to the driving force of the stepping motor 753. This allows the stroke to be extended by continuous, uninterrupted movement, and by moving the operation button 721 and the movable base 741 simultaneously in parallel (overlapping the rising periods), improved responsiveness is achieved during stroke extension.

If the effect button device 40 is configured to switch between the first form and the second form as described above, the visual impact of the effect button device 40 can be enhanced to draw attention to the effect button device 40 itself. Increasing the amount of displacement of the operation button 721 when switching from the first form to the second form is advantageous in terms of enhancing the impact when switching to the second form. However, if the amount of displacement is simply increased, it is concerned that it will be difficult to ensure the strength of the effect button device 40 in the second form. This is not preferable because it can cause the effect button device 40 to break down. In this regard, in the configuration shown in the present embodiment, the operation button 721 is configured to remain at a predetermined position (lower limit position) behind the standby position (initial position or upper limit position) of the operation button 721 in the first form as a preparatory operation before switching to the second form, so that the amount of displacement when switching to the second form can be earned. This makes it possible to more suitably exert the effect of improving the level of attention while eliminating the above-mentioned structural concerns.

<Modification 1>
In the sixth embodiment, when the first operation (first operation) and the second operation (second operation) are consecutive, the operation button 721 that has reached the operation detection position (maximum pressing position) by the first operation is held. In other words, the operation of the player is used as a means for temporarily lowering the operation button 721 before switching to the second form. This can be changed to a configuration in which the operation button 721 is temporarily lowered to the operation detection position using an actuator such as a motor before switching to the second form. With this configuration, for the sixth special performance that is premised on switching to the second form, it is not necessary to require consecutive operations of the operation button 721, and the first half part can be omitted.

Note that when using the first half as a preparatory part for the second half, it is possible to omit the operation-corresponding performance based on the first operation and have the first operation be a preparatory operation for the second operation.

<Modification 2>
When the entire stroke is the driving range of the stepping motor 753, the stepping motor 753 may be controlled to stop when the operation button 721 reaches the lower limit position, thereby keeping the operation button 721 at the lower limit position, or the output of the drive signal to the stepping motor 753 may be stopped so that the operation button 721 remains at the lower limit position due to its own weight.

<Modification 3>
A specific configuration for restricting the operation button 721 that has reached the operation detection position (maximum pressing position) from returning to its initial position is arbitrary. For example, instead of a configuration for restricting the return to its initial position by engaging the movable piece 796 with the groove portion 739, a configuration for restricting the return to its initial position by adsorption by the magnetic force of a magnet or the like may be used.

<Modification 4>
In the sixth embodiment, the operation period for moving the operation button 721 to the upper limit position and the operation period for moving the movable base 741 to the upper limit position are configured to overlap when the effect button device 40 is switched from the first form to the second form, but the manner in which each operation period overlaps may be changed arbitrarily. For example, instead of the operation button 721 being moved to the upper limit position at the beginning of switching from the first form to the second form of the effect button device 40, it is also possible to configure the operation button 721 to be moved to the upper limit position at the end of switching. Also, instead of the operation period for moving the operation button 721 to the upper limit position partially overlapping with the operation period for moving the movable base 741 to the upper limit position when the effect button device 40 is switched from the first form to the second form, it is also possible to configure the entire operation period for moving the operation button 721 to the upper limit position and the entire operation period for moving the movable base 741 to the upper limit position to overlap.

<Modification 5>
In the sixth embodiment, the operation period in which the operation button 721 is moved to the upper limit position and the operation period in which the movable base 741 is moved to the upper limit position are overlapped when the effect button device 40 is switched from the first form to the second form, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure the operation period in which the operation button 721 is moved to the upper limit position and the operation period in which the movable base 741 is moved to the upper limit position when the effect button device 40 is switched from the first form to the second form so that they do not overlap. For example, it is also possible to configure the operation button 721 to be moved to the upper limit position and then the movable base 741 to be moved to the upper limit position, or to configure the operation button 721 to be moved to the upper limit position and then the movable base 741 to be moved to the upper limit position when the effect button device 40 is switched from the first form to the second form.

<Modification 6>
In the sixth embodiment, the stepping motor 753 is started to be driven at the same time as the hold on the operation button 721 is released (the restriction on movement to the initial position is released), but it is also possible to start driving the stepping motor 753 prior to the hold being released. However, in order to enhance the impact of switching to the second form, it is preferable to make it difficult for the player to distinguish the preceding operation of the stepping motor 753 so that the switching to the second form is not revealed in advance.

Seventh embodiment
As shown in each of the above embodiments, it is advantageous to configure the movable performance device to perform an operation-responsive performance based on the operation when the performance button device 40 is switched to the second form (the operation stroke is extended), in order to increase the attention to the game. However, if such behavior occurs at the final stage of the game round performance, it is concerned that the operation → non-operation of the movable performance device will result in a high probability of a miss, and a negative impression will be left as a backlash against the increased expectations. This can be a factor in refraining from operating when the second form is reached, or even refraining from operating in the first form. On the other hand, if the suggestion of the operation in the second form is directly linked to the winning result, not only will the significance of operating the performance button device 40 be diminished, but it is assumed that the opportunity to operate, i.e., the opportunity to exercise the form switching function of the performance button device 40, will be greatly reduced. In this embodiment, one of the features is that the device is designed to take these circumstances into consideration. Specifically, the seventh special performance, which is an operation-responsive performance associated with the operation in the second form, is a distinctive feature. Below, with reference to FIG. 112, an overview of the seventh special performance will be described. Note that a description of the configuration common to the above-described embodiments will basically be omitted.

The seventh special effect is an effect that occurs in the final stage of a game round effect in which a reach display occurs, and is broadly divided into seventh special effect X, which is mainly executed when the result of the win/loss lottery is a loss result, seventh special effect Y, which is mainly executed when the result of the win/loss lottery is a win result, and seventh special effect Z, which is executed only when the result of the win/loss lottery is a win result.

In the seventh special effect X, operation of the operation button 721 is suggested after the effect button device 40 is switched from the first form to the second form, and if the operation button 721 is operated in accordance with this operation, the third movable effect device 803 is deactivated. In other words, the seventh special effect X is an effect that is likely to result in a loss. In contrast, in the seventh special effect Y, operation of the operation button 721 is suggested after the effect button device 40 is switched from the first form to the second form, and if the operation button 721 is operated in accordance with this suggestion, the third movable effect device 803 is activated. In other words, the seventh special effect Y is an effect that is likely to result in a win.

For the seventh special performance X and the seventh special performance Y, the number of times the performance button device 40 is switched to the second form is one. In contrast, for the seventh special performance Z, the number of times the performance button device 40 is switched to the second form is two. Specifically, even if the operation button 721 is operated according to the operation suggestion after the performance button device 40 is switched from the first form to the second form, the third movable performance device 803 does not operate, which is the same as the seventh special performance X, but after that, when the performance button device 40 is switched back to the second form and the operation button 721 is operated according to the operation suggestion after the switching, the third movable performance device 803 operates. In other words, the seventh special performance X and the seventh special performance Y are one-part configurations, while the seventh special performance Z is two-part configurations in which a performance corresponding to the seventh special performance X is executed, and then a performance specific to the seventh special performance is executed. This seventh special effect Z is an effect that occurs only in the case of a winning result, so if the third movable effect device 803 operates in response to the second operation suggestion, a winning result is confirmed.

For the sake of convenience, in the following explanation, the seventh special effect X and the seventh special effect Y and the first half of the seventh special effect Z will be referred to as the "first part," and the second half of the seventh special effect Z will be referred to as the "second part."

Next, the seventh special effect process (seventh special effect process) executed by the MPU 912 of the notification/effect control device 143 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 113 to 117. The seventh special effect process is executed as part of regular processing by the MPU 912.

(Seventh special effect processing)
As shown in FIG. 113, in the seventh special effect process, first, in step S3501, it is determined whether or not the current game round corresponds to the seventh special effect. If a negative determination is made in step S3501, the seventh special effect process is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S3501, the process proceeds to step S3502.

In step S3502, it is determined whether it is the timing to start the first part. If a positive determination is made in step S3502, the process proceeds to step S3503, where a process for starting a guidance effect is executed to draw the player's attention to the effect button device 40. In the guidance effect start process, the speaker unit 27 starts outputting a sound effect for switching to the second form, and a guidance effect command is output to the display control device 142. Based on receiving the guidance effect command, the display control device 142 starts displaying a video for the guidance effect on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253. The video for the guidance effect is an animated video in which the effect button device 40 switches from the first form to the second form. In addition, in the guidance effect start process of step S2503, the third movable effect device 803 is switched from an off state to a lit state or a flashing state.

After the processing of step S3503 is executed, or if a negative judgment is made in step S3502, the process proceeds to step S3504. In step S3504, it is judged whether or not the first part is in progress. If a positive judgment is made in step S3504, the processing for the first part is executed in step S3505, and then the processing for the seventh special effect is terminated. If a negative judgment is made in step S3504, the processing for the second part is executed in step S3506, and then the processing for the seventh special effect is terminated.

(Processing for the first part)
As shown in FIG. 114, in the processing for the first part, first, in step S3601, it is determined whether or not the first operation (hereinafter referred to as the first operation) is in a valid period. If a negative determination is made in step S3601, the processing proceeds to step S3602. In step S3602, it is determined whether or not the timing has elapsed for the switching grace period for switching the effect button device 40 to the second form. If a negative determination is made in step S3602, the processing proceeds to step S3603. In step S3603, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to start switching to the second form. If a negative determination is made in step S3603, the processing for the first part is terminated.

If a determination is made in step S3603, a switching process is executed in step S3604 to switch the effect button device 40 to the second form. Thereafter, a switching grace period setting process is executed in step S3605, and the process for this first part is terminated. The period required for switching the effect button device 40 from the first form to the second form is 0.5 sec. The switching grace period is set to be longer than this required period. Note that the above-mentioned guidance effect is completed when the grace period has elapsed.

Returning to the explanation of step S3602, if a positive judgment is made in step S3602, that is, if it is time for the grace period for switching to the second form to elapse, the process proceeds to step S3606. In step S3606, it is judged whether or not switching to the second form has been completed. If a positive judgment is made in step S3606, the process proceeds to step S3607. In step S3607, a process for setting the validity period of the first operation is performed. Thereafter, in step S3608, a process for starting a suggestion for the first operation is executed, and the process for the first part is terminated.

In the first operation suggestion start process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled to output a message encouraging an operation (for example, a voice such as "Press the button") from the speaker unit 27, and an operation suggestion start command is output to the display control device 142. Based on receiving the operation suggestion start command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 to display on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 a message such as "Press!!" for the operation suggestion, a pattern imitating a button in the second form, and a period indicator showing the remaining valid period. In other words, the above-mentioned guidance performance ends as the grace period elapses, and the device transitions to operation suggestions.

Returning to the explanation of step S3606, if a negative judgment is made in step S3606, the process proceeds to step S3609. In step S3609, a switching process is executed to switch the performance button device 40 to the first form. In other words, if the movement of the operation button 721 is obstructed by a hand, for example, and the switching to the second form is not completed within the grace period, the switching to the second form is canceled.

After that, in step S3610, an alternative performance execution process is performed, and the processing for this first part is terminated. The alternative performance execution process results in the execution of an alternative performance that does not correspond to the operation of the performance button device 40.

Returning to the explanation of step S3601, if a positive judgment is made in step S3601, that is, if the first operation is in its valid period, the process proceeds to step S3611. In step S3611, it is determined whether or not the valid period of the first operation has elapsed. If a negative judgment is made in step S3611, the process proceeds to step S3612. In step S3612, it is determined whether or not the operation button 721 has been operated based on the detection information from the detection sensor 791. If no operation has been performed, a negative judgment is made in step S3612, and the process for the first part is terminated. If an operation has been performed, a positive judgment is made in step S3612, and the process proceeds to step S3613. In step S3613, the first operation acceptance notification process and the suggestion end process are executed. In the acceptance notification process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled to output a sound effect indicating that the operation has been validly accepted from the speaker unit 27. In the operation suggestion end process, an operation suggestion end command is output to the display control device 142. Based on receiving the operation suggestion end command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the symbol display device 253 to end the display of the operation suggestion message, the operation suggestion image indicating the button, and the indicator showing the remaining valid period.

In the next step S3614, a first operation corresponding effect execution process is performed. In the first operation corresponding effect execution process, if the current seventh special effect is the seventh special effect Y, the third movable effect device 803 is moved toward the center of the display screen 253a while remaining lit or flashing. This significantly increases the likelihood of a winning result. In contrast, if the current seventh special effect is the seventh special effect X or the seventh special effect Z, the third movable effect device 803 is switched to an off state while remaining in the standby position. This reduces the likelihood of a winning result.

After the first operation response effect execution process is performed in step S3614, the process proceeds to step S3615. In step S3614, it is determined whether or not the current seventh special effect is the seventh special effect Z. If a negative determination is made in step S3614, the process for the first part is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S3614, a second part transition flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of RAM 914 in step S3616, and the process for the first part is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S3611, if a positive judgment is made in step S3611, that is, if the valid period of the first operation has elapsed without the first operation being performed, the process proceeds to step S3617. In step S3617, a suggestion end process for the first operation is executed. In the suggestion end process, a suggestion end command for the first operation is output to the display control device 142. Based on receiving the suggestion end command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 to end the display of the operation suggestion message, the button-like image, and the indicator showing the remaining valid period.

In the following step S3618, a switching process is executed to switch the effect button device 40 to the first form. After that, in step S3619, an alternative effect is executed, and then the process for this first part is terminated. In the alternative effect, regardless of the winning/losing result, the linked effect is not executed by the third movable effect device 803.

Next, the second part processing in step S3506 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 115.

(Processing for the second part)
In the second part processing, first, in step S3701, it is determined whether or not the second operation is valid. If the determination in step S3701 is negative, the process proceeds to step S3702. In step S3702, it is determined whether or not the timing of the grace period for switching to the second form has elapsed. If the determination in step S3702 is negative, the process proceeds to step S3703. In step S3703, it is determined whether or not switching to the second form is in progress. If the determination in step S3703 is negative, the process proceeds to step S3704. In step S3704, it is determined whether or not the switching trigger is valid. In this embodiment, the switching trigger to the second form is set to be that the operation button 721 is out of the operation detection position, that is, that the detection signal from the detection sensor 791 is OFF, and the period for determining whether the switching trigger is established is specified to be until 3 sec has elapsed after the start of the second part. If the determination in step S3704 is positive, the process proceeds to step S3705.

In step S3705, it is determined whether the operation button 721 is removed from the operation detection position (OFF) based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 791. If a negative determination is made in step S3705, the second part processing ends as is. If a positive determination is made in step S3705, the process proceeds to step S3706, where processing to start switching to the second form is executed. Here, processing to switch to the second form is executed with reference to FIG. 116.

(Processing for starting switching to second mode)
In the process of starting switching to the second mode, first, in step S3801, it is determined whether or not the switching trigger effective period remains. For example, if the player releases the operation button 721 and the operation button 721 returns to its initial position before the start of the second half part, it is determined that the switching trigger effective period remains, and the remaining period is 3 sec. Also, if the operation button 721 is turned OFF 3 sec after the start of the second half part, it is determined that there is no switching effective period remaining (the remaining period is 0 sec).

If a positive determination is made in step S3801, the process proceeds to step S3802. In step S3802, low-speed drive processing is executed. In this embodiment, the drive control modes of stepping motor 753 include a low-speed drive control mode in which stepping motor 753 rotates at a low speed (first speed) and a high-speed drive control mode in which stepping motor 753 rotates at a high speed. The low-speed drive processing shown in step S3802 is a drive control process based on the low-speed drive control mode, and this process causes stepping motor 753 to rotate at a low speed. This causes movable base 741 to rise at a low speed.

In the next step S3803, a speed change flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. As will be described in detail later, by setting the speed change flag, the drive control mode of the stepping motor 753 is switched midway from the low-speed drive control mode to the high-speed drive control mode. Thereafter, in step S3804, a process for setting the low-speed drive period is executed, and this switching start process is terminated. In the process for setting the low-speed drive period, the low-speed drive period is set by referring to a map stored in the ROM 913, specifically a map showing the relationship between the remaining period and the low-speed drive period. As will be described in detail later, this map is configured so that the longer the remaining period, the longer the low-speed drive period, and the shorter the remaining period, the shorter the low-speed drive period.

Returning to the explanation of step S3801, if a negative determination is made in step S3801, i.e., if the remaining period is 0, high-speed drive processing is executed in step S3805, and then the switching start processing is terminated. The high-speed drive processing shown in step S3805 is a drive control processing in a high-speed drive control mode, and this processing causes the stepping motor 753 to rotate at high speed (second speed). This causes the movable base 741 to rise at high speed.

The first and second speeds are both slower than the rotation speed (third speed) of the stepping motor 753 when the performance button device 40 is switched to the second form in the first part. As already explained, when switching to the second form occurs in the latter part, the winning result is effectively indicated. The reason for intentionally delaying the switching to the second form in the latter part as described above is to ensure time to enjoy switching to the second form.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 115, after the switching start process to the second form is executed in step S3706, the switching grace period setting process is executed in step S3707, and the guidance effect start process is executed in step S3708, and then the processing for this second part is terminated. In the second part of the seventh special effect, the required period for switching the effect button device 40 from the first form to the second form is 5 sec. The switching grace period is set to be longer than this required period. In other words, the required period and grace period are longer than those of the first part. In addition, the guidance effect is basically the same animation as the guidance effect executed in step S3503, but the button transformation speed in the animation is changed to be slower than that of step S3505. In addition, at the beginning of the animation, a cut-in display is executed to indicate that the seventh special effect will continue. Note that the above-mentioned guidance effect will be completed when the grace period has elapsed.

Returning to the explanation of step S3704, if a negative judgment is made in step S3704, the process proceeds to step S3709. In step S3709, it is judged whether or not the timing is such that the switching trigger effective period has elapsed. If a negative judgment is made in step S3709, the process for the second part is terminated. If a positive judgment is made in step S3709, the process for the second part is terminated after performing the alternative performance execution process in step S3715 described below.

Returning to the explanation of step S3703, if a positive judgment is made in step S3703, i.e., if the effect button device 40 is in the process of switching to the second form, the switching speed change process is executed in step S3710, and then the second part processing is terminated. Here, the switching speed change process will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 117.

(Switching speed change process)
In the switching speed change process, first, in step S3901, it is determined whether or not a speed change flag is stored in the various flags storage area 933 of the RAM 914. If the determination in step S3901 is negative, the switching speed change process ends. If the determination in step S3901 is positive, the process proceeds to step S3902.

In step S3902, it is determined whether or not the timing has elapsed after the low-speed drive period set in step S3804. If a negative determination is made in step S3902, the switching speed change process ends. If a positive determination is made in step S3902, high-speed drive processing is executed in step S3903, and then the switching speed change process ends. By executing the high-speed drive processing, the stepping motor 753 switches from low-speed rotation to high-speed rotation, and the rising speed of the movable base 741 (operation button 721) switches from low speed to high speed.

Here, we will provide additional information about the low-speed/high-speed switching pattern with reference to Figure 118. Figure 118 is a timing chart showing the flow of play when the seventh special effect Z is executed.

In the example shown in FIG. 118, the operation response performance is executed at the timing of tf1, and the transition to the second part occurs at the timing of tf2. The transition to the second part is accompanied by the above-mentioned switching trigger effective period. If the return of the operation button 721 to the initial position is completed by the time of transition to the second part (if the detection sensor 791 is OFF), the stepping motor 753 starts rotating at a low speed at the start of the second part. This causes the movable base 741 (operation button 721) to start rising at a low speed. In this case, the low-speed drive period is the longest, and the operation of the stepping motor 753 switches from low speed to high speed at the timing of tf6 when the low-speed drive period has elapsed. After that, the movable base 741 reaches the upper limit position at the timing of tf7, and the stepping motor 753 stops.

In contrast, as shown by the dashed line in FIG. 118, when the operation button 721 has completed returning to its initial position at tf3 during the effective switching trigger period (when the detection sensor 791 turns OFF), the stepping motor 753 starts rotating at low speed at tf3. This causes the movable base 741 (operation button 721) to start rising at low speed. In this case, the low-speed drive period is shorter than when operation at low speed is started at tf2, and the operation of the stepping motor 753 switches from low speed to high speed at tf5 when the low-speed drive period has elapsed. Thereafter, the movable base 741 reaches the upper limit position at tf7, and the stepping motor 753 stops.

Next, as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 118, when the operation button 721 has returned to its initial position at timing tf4 when the switching trigger effective period ends (when the detection sensor 791 turns OFF), the stepping motor 753 starts rotating at high speed at timing tf4. This causes the movable base 741 to start rising at high speed. In this case, the low-speed drive period becomes 0. After that, at timing tf7, the movable base 741 reaches the upper limit position and the stepping motor 753 stops.

In this way, in this embodiment, the period from the start of the second part to the timing at which the movement of the movable base 741 is completed (timing tf7) is set to be the same regardless of the timing at which the operation button 721 has returned to its initial position during the effective switching trigger period (when the detection sensor 791 has turned OFF). In the second part, the timing at which switching to the second form begins will differ depending on the timing at which the player releases the operation button 721, but this is a design that allows for such diversity while preventing the flow of presentation in the second part from becoming excessively diverse.

Returning to the explanation of step S3702 in FIG. 115, if a positive judgment is made in step S3702, that is, if it is time for the grace period for switching to the second form to elapse, the process proceeds to step S3711. In step S3711, it is judged whether or not switching to the second form has been completed. If a positive judgment is made in step S3711, the process proceeds to step S3712. In step S3712, a process for setting the valid period of the second operation is performed. Thereafter, in step S3713, a process for starting a suggestion for the second operation is executed, and the process for the second part is terminated.

In the second operation suggestion start process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled to output a message encouraging an operation (for example, a voice such as "Press the button") from the speaker unit 27, and an operation suggestion start command is output to the display control device 142. Based on receiving the operation suggestion start command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 to display on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 a message such as "One hit!!" for the operation suggestion, a pattern imitating a button in the second form, and a period indicator showing the remaining valid period. In other words, the above-mentioned guidance performance ends as the grace period elapses, and the device transitions to operation suggestions.

Returning to the explanation of step S3711, if a negative judgment is made in step S3711, the process proceeds to step S3714. In step S3714, a switching process is executed to switch the performance button device 40 to the first form. In other words, if the movement of the operation button 721 is obstructed by a hand, for example, and the switching to the second form is not completed within the grace period, the switching to the second form is canceled.

After that, in step S3715, an alternative performance execution process is performed, and the processing for this second part is terminated. The alternative performance execution process results in the execution of an alternative performance that does not correspond to the operation of the performance button device 40.

Returning to the explanation of step S3701, if a positive judgment is made in step S3701, i.e., if the second operation is still in its valid period, the process proceeds to step S3716. In step S3716, it is determined whether the valid period of the second operation has elapsed. If a negative judgment is made in step S3716, the process proceeds to step S3717.

In step S3717, it is determined whether the operation button 721 has been operated (second operation) based on the detection information from the detection sensor 791. If the second operation has not been performed, a negative determination is made in step S3717, and the process for this second part is terminated. If the second operation has been performed, a positive determination is made in step S3717, and the process proceeds to step S3718. In step S3718, the acceptance notification process and the suggestion end process for the second operation are executed. In the acceptance notification process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled to output a sound effect indicating that the operation has been validly accepted from the speaker unit 27. In the operation suggestion end process, an operation suggestion end command is output to the display control device 142. The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 based on the reception of the operation suggestion end command, and ends the display of the operation suggestion message, the operation suggestion picture indicating the button, and the indicator indicating the remaining valid period.

The next step S3719 is to carry out a second operation corresponding performance execution process. In the second operation corresponding performance execution process, a performance is executed that clearly shows the game result of the current game round to the player. Specifically, if the result is a win, the third movable performance device 803 is driven to move the movable ornament of the third movable performance device 803 from the standby position to the performance position. In addition, an effect display is performed on the display screen 253a to highlight the ornament.

Returning to the explanation of step S3716, if a positive judgment is made in step S3716, that is, if the valid period of the second operation has elapsed without the second operation being performed, the process proceeds to step S3720. In step S3720, a suggestion end process for the second operation is executed. In the suggestion end process, a suggestion end command for the first operation is output to the display control device 142. Based on receiving the suggestion end command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 to end the display of the operation suggestion message, the button-like image, and the indicator showing the remaining valid period.

In the following step S3721, a switching process is executed to switch the effect button device 40 to the first form. After that, in step S3722, an alternative effect is executed, and then the process for the second part is terminated. In the alternative effect, regardless of whether it is a win or a miss, the linked effect is not executed by the third movable effect device 803.

Here, referring to the schematic diagrams of FIG. 119 to FIG. 120, a supplementary explanation will be given on the flow of the seventh special effect (seventh special effect Z) when the seventh special effect is executed in the game round corresponding to the winning result. FIG. 119(a) group and FIG. 120(a) group are schematic diagrams showing the display screen 253a and the third movable effect device 803, and FIG. 119(b) group and FIG. 120(b) group are schematic diagrams showing the effect button device 40. Note that in the example shown in FIG. 119 and FIG. 120, the game round in which the seventh special effect (more specifically, the seventh special effect Z) is executed corresponds to the winning result, and the seventh special effect progresses in the order of FIG. 119(1) → FIG. 119(2) → FIG. 119(3) → FIG. 119(4) → FIG. 120(5) → FIG. 120(6) → FIG. 120(7) → FIG. 120(8).

The seventh special effect (seventh special effect Z) is started after the variable display mode of the patterns on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 becomes a reach display. After a guidance effect indicating that a form change is occurring is executed on the display screen 253a, a button icon imitating the operation button 721, a message suggesting an operation (for example, "Press!!"), and an indicator showing the remaining valid operation period are displayed on the display screen 253a.

If the player operates the operation button 721 during this operation suggestion, the displayed button icon is displayed shattered, and the movable decoration of the third movable performance device 803 remains in the standby position. After that, the symbol combination corresponding to the miss result is temporarily stopped and displayed on the display screen 253a.

Immediately after the symbol combination corresponding to the losing result is temporarily frozen on the display, a cut-in of a girl appears on the display screen 253a, and the symbols start to change again. After that, the display switches from the cut-in to an animated video of the guidance effect, and the form of the effect button device 40 switches back to the second form. At this time, the speed at which the operation button 721 rises is set to be slower than when the switch to the second form occurs in the first part.

After the operation button 721 slowly rises to a certain extent, the speed switches from low to high, and the switch to the second form is quickly completed. After the switch to the second form is completed, a button icon imitating the operation button 721, a message suggesting an operation (e.g., "One hit!!"), and an indicator showing the remaining valid period of the operation are displayed on the display screen 253a.

When the player operates the operation button 721 during this operation suggestion, the movable decoration of the third movable performance device 803 falls from the standby position to the performance position, and an effect emphasizing the movable decoration is displayed on the display screen 253a. After that, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning result is displayed as a stopped combination (confirmed display) on the display screen 253a.

If the button device 40 is configured to switch between the first and second forms as shown in this embodiment, the impact of the appearance of the button device 40 can be enhanced to draw attention to the button device 40 itself. When the button 721 is operated after the button device 40 is switched to the second form, either the first special performance (not linked to the third movable performance device 803) with a relatively low expectation of a winning result or the second special performance (linked to the third movable performance device 803) with a relatively high expectation of a winning result is executed. Here, if the first special performance occurs despite the expectation of the second special performance being raised, there is a concern that the impression that the second form → operation was a waste will remain. In this case, there is a concern that even if the button device 40 is switched to the second form to encourage the operation, the opportunity to perform the operation will decrease. In this respect, in the configuration shown in this embodiment, when the first special performance is executed, the button device 40 returns to the second form. By allowing re-operation in the second mode, it is possible to keep the hope of a chance for a highly anticipated operation-responsive effect to occur. This is preferable in terms of preventing the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconveniences and increasing attention to the game using the effect button device 40.

As shown in this embodiment, when a disadvantageous first special effect is executed, the second special effect can be generated by returning to the second form and then operating again, which prevents a rapid decrease in the player's attention to the game when the first special effect occurs, in anticipation of the second special effect.

By configuring the replay to be avoided when the advantageous second special performance is performed, and allowing the replay to be resumed only when the disadvantageous first special performance is performed, it is possible to effectively prevent a decrease in attention to the game when the first special performance is performed.

Diversifying the displacement speed of the operation button 721 when switching the performance button device 40 from the first form to the second form can effectively prevent the return operation from becoming monotonous. In particular, by configuring the displacement speed to switch from low to high speed and ensuring a drive period at low speed, it is possible to effectively prevent the movement of the operation button 721 from being overlooked. The earlier the timing at which the start condition for the return operation is met, the longer the displacement period at low speed becomes. With this configuration, it is possible to ensure the longest possible drive period at low speed.

As described above, gaining drive time at low speed is preferable in terms of improving player satisfaction. However, delaying the presentation progression due to such a function can lead to excessive diversification of presentation progression patterns. In this regard, as shown in this embodiment, the above concerns can be conveniently alleviated by limiting the period from the start of a game round to the completion of return to the second form to the same regardless of the timing at which the start condition for the return operation is met.

It is preferable to switch to the second form quickly the first time in order to enhance the impact. Furthermore, by making the time required for the first switch different from the time required for the second switch, it is possible to make it less likely that the impression will be given that the switch to the second form has simply occurred twice. In particular, differentiating the time required for the second switch to the second form to be longer than the first switch is preferable in terms of increasing the player's satisfaction by providing a period of time to follow the movement at the time of return.

<Modification 1>
In the seventh embodiment, the winning result is clearly indicated by the effect button device 40 switching to the second form in the second part, but this is not limited to the above. It is also possible to configure the effect button device 40 to switch to the second form in the latter half part so that the winning result is not obtained (it may result in a losing result). In other words, it is also possible to configure the seventh special effect Z to occur even in a game round corresponding to a losing result.

<Modification 2>
In the seventh embodiment, when the effect button device 40 is switched to the second form in the second part, the switching speed (the rotation speed of the stepping motor 753) is switched from low to high during the switching, but it is also possible to configure the device not to perform the switching. That is, the switching speed when the effect button device 40 is switched to the second form in the second part may be limited to speed 1.

<Modification 3>
In the seventh embodiment, the difference is set so that the switching speed when the effect button device 40 is switched to the second form in the second part is slower than the switching speed when the effect button device 40 is switched to the second form in the first part, but this is not limited to this. In order to make the switching speed in the first part different from the switching speed in the second part, it is also possible to set a difference so that the switching speed when the effect button device 40 is switched to the second form in the second part is faster than the switching speed when the effect button device 40 is switched to the second form in the first part.

<Modification 4>
In the seventh special effect Z in the seventh embodiment, it is also possible to use the hold mechanism shown in the sixth embodiment, for example, so that when the operation button 721 is operated in the first half part, the operation button 721 is held at the operation detection position (maximum pressing position), and the hold is released when switching to the second form in the second part.

Eighth embodiment
As already explained, the effect button device 40 shown in each of the above embodiments can be switched to a plurality of forms with different operation strokes of the operation button 721. In this embodiment, the eighth special effect, which is an operation-responsive effect utilizing the form switching function of the effect button device 40, is a feature. The eighth special effect is roughly divided into a first half part in which an operation-responsive effect is executed based on a long press operation (first operation), and a second half part in which an operation-responsive effect is executed based on a single operation (second operation), and is an effect in which a maximum of two operation suggestions are executed during one eighth special effect. Below, the configuration related to the eighth special effect will be described, focusing on the differences from each of the above embodiments. First, with reference to the flowcharts of Figures 121 to 124, the process for the eighth special effect (process for the eighth special effect) executed by the MPU 912 of the notification/effect control device 143 will be described. The process for the eighth special effect is a process executed as part of regular processing by the MPU 912.

(8th special effect processing)
As shown in FIG. 121, in the eighth special effect process, first, in step S4001, it is determined whether or not the current game round corresponds to the eighth special effect. If the determination in step S4001 is negative, the eighth special effect process is terminated. If the determination in step S4001 is positive, the process proceeds to step S4002.

In step S4002, it is determined whether or not it is in the first half part. Specifically, this determination is made based on whether or not a second half part transition flag, which will be described later, is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of RAM 914. If a positive determination is made in step S4002, i.e., if the second half part transition flag is not stored, processing for the first half part is executed in step S4003, and the processing for the eighth special effect is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S4002, i.e., if the second half part transition flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S4004.

In step S4004, it is determined whether it is the timing to start the second half part. If a positive determination is made in step S4004, a guidance performance start process is executed in step S4005. In the guidance performance start process, the speaker unit 27 starts outputting a sound effect for switching to the second form, and a guidance performance command is output to the display control device 142. Based on receiving the guidance performance command, the display control device 142 starts displaying a video for the guidance performance on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253. The video for the guidance performance is an animated video in which the performance button device 40 switches from the first form to the second form.

After executing the guidance effect start process in step S4005, or if a negative judgment is made in step S4004, processing for the second half part is executed in step S4006, and the processing for this 8th special effect is terminated.

(Processing for the first half part)
As shown in FIG. 122, in the process for the first half part, first, in step S4101, it is determined whether or not the first operation, which is a long press operation, is in an effective period. If a negative determination is made in step S4101, the process proceeds to step S4102. If a negative determination is made in step S4102, the process for the first half part is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S4102, the process proceeds to step S4103. In step S4103, a process for setting the effective period of the first operation is executed. In the following step S4104, a process for setting the criterion period for the first operation is executed. The criterion period is a period during which the operation button 721 is held at the operation detection position (maximum pressing position), and is a criterion period for determining that the operation is completed in the subsequent determination process. For this criterion period, multiple candidates are provided, and a relatively long period is likely to be set in the case of a miss result, and a relatively short period is likely to be set in the case of a hit result. Thereafter, in step S4105, the first operation suggestion start process is executed, and the process for the first half part is terminated.

As an effect similar to the eighth special effect, a similar special effect is provided in which the latter half of the eighth special effect is omitted. In other words, the outline of this similar special effect is the same as the first half of the eighth special effect, and it is difficult to determine whether it is the similar special effect or the eighth special effect from its behavior. In this similar special effect, multiple candidates are provided for the judgment reference period, and a relatively long period is likely to be set in the case of a loss result, and a relatively short period is likely to be set in the case of a win result. In a game round that results in a win, the first movable performance device 300 immediately operates when the long press period reaches the judgment reference period, and the player is clearly informed that it is a win result, while in a game round that results in a loss, the first movable performance device 300 remains inoperative even if the long press period reaches the judgment reference period.

In the first operation suggestion start process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled to output a message (e.g., a voice such as "press and hold the button") encouraging the operation from the speaker unit 27, and an operation suggestion start command is output to the display control device 142. Based on receiving the operation suggestion start command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 to display, on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253, a message such as "press and hold the button" for operation suggestion, a picture imitating the button in the first form, and a period indicator showing the remaining valid period. In addition, an operation indicator whose display state changes depending on the period for which the operation button 721 is pressed and held is displayed on the display screen 253a. When this operation indicator reaches MAX, it is suggested to the player that the operation has been completed.

Returning to the explanation of step S4101, if a positive judgment is made in step S4101, the process proceeds to step S4106. In step S4106, it is determined whether or not the valid period of the first operation has elapsed. If a negative judgment is made in step S4106, the process proceeds to step S4107. In step S4107, it is determined whether or not the cumulative period of the long press operation (first operation) has reached the judgment reference period. If a negative judgment is made in step S4107, the process for the first half part is terminated as is. If a positive judgment is made in step S4107, the process proceeds to step S4108. In step S4108, an operation completion notification process and a suggestion end process for the first operation are executed. In the reception notification process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled to output a sound effect from the speaker unit 27 indicating that the operation has been validly received. In the operation suggestion end process, an operation suggestion end command is output to the display control device 142. Based on receiving the operation suggestion end command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the symbol display device 253 to end the display of the operation suggestion message, the operation suggestion image indicating the button, and the indicator showing the remaining valid period.

The next step, step S4109, is to carry out the first operation response performance execution process. In the first operation response performance execution process, a countdown display of "3" → "2" → "1" → "0" is displayed on the display screen 253a. Note that the eighth special performance does not end with the first half, and the first movable performance device 300 remains inactive even when the countdown display is completed.

After that, in step S4110, a second half part transition flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. Then, in step S4111, a hold standby process, which is a control process for the drive unit of the hold mechanism 795 (see the sixth embodiment), is executed, and then the first half part process is terminated.

In the eighth special effect shown in this embodiment, a second operation (hereinafter, the second operation) is suggested after the first operation is completed. The operation button 721 that is pressed to the operation completion position (maximum pressing position) by the first operation is held at the operation completion position and is restricted from returning to the initial position.

Returning to the explanation of step S4106, if a positive judgment is made in step S4106, that is, if the valid period of the first operation has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S4112. In step S4112, it is judged whether the first operation is continuing. In other words, it is judged whether the first operation was not completed within the valid period of the operation, but was continued until the valid period of the operation had elapsed. If a positive judgment is made in step S1412, the operation is deemed to have been completed even though the conditions related to the judgment reference period are not satisfied, and the processes of steps S4108 to S4111 are executed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S4112, the process proceeds to step S4113. In step S4113, a first operation suggestion end process is executed. In this suggestion end process, a first operation suggestion end command is output to the display control device 142. Based on receiving the suggestion end command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the symbol display device 253 to end the display of the operation suggestion message, the button-like image, and the indicator showing the remaining valid period. Thereafter, an alternative performance execution process is executed in step S4114, and the process for this first half part is terminated.

Next, we will explain the processing for the latter part by referring to the flowchart in Figure 123.

(Processing for the latter part)
In the processing for the latter part, first, in step S4201, it is determined whether or not the second operation is in a valid period. If a negative determination is made in step S4201, the process proceeds to step S4202. In step S4202, it is determined whether or not the timing for the grace period for switching to the second form has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S4202, the process proceeds to step S4203. In step S4203, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to start switching to the second form. If a positive determination is made in step S4203, the process proceeds to step S4204.

In step S4204, a process for setting a switching grace period is performed. In the following step S4205, a hold standby release process is executed. This causes the movable piece of the hold mechanism 795 to move from the protruding position to the retracted position, and the restriction on the operation button 721 returning to its initial position is released. This causes the operation button 721 to start moving toward its initial position due to the biasing force of the coil spring 745.

After that, in step S4206, the process for setting the stop position of the movable base 741 is executed, and the process for the latter half part is terminated. In the process for setting the stop position, the stop position of the movable base 741 in this eighth special effect, i.e., the form of the effect button device 40, is determined based on the win/lose result. In this embodiment, in addition to the first, second, and third forms, the form of the effect button device 40 is provided with a fourth form in which the protruding level (operation stroke) of the operation button 721 is between the first and third forms. That is, as shown in Figures 124 (a) to (d), the protruding level of the operation button 721 is configured to increase in the order of first form < fourth form < third form < second form. In the following description, for convenience, the protruding level of the first form is referred to as "LV0", the protruding level of the fourth form is referred to as "LV1", the protruding level of the third form is referred to as "LV2", and the protruding level of the second form is referred to as "LV3".

As shown in FIG. 124(e), the 8th special effects are broadly divided into 8th special effect A, whose protruding level is set to "LV1", 8th special effect B, whose protruding level is set to "LV2", and 8th special effect C, whose protruding level is set to "LV3", with differences provided so that the expected probability of transitioning to the special game state increases in the order 8th special effect A < 8th special effect B < 8th special effect C. In step S4206, it is determined which of 8th special effects A to C the current 8th special effect will be based on the win/loss result and the operation status of the first operation.

Specifically, if the first operation transitions to the second half without reaching the criterion period, "LV3" is excluded from the setting candidates, and either "LV1" or "LV2" is set. At this time, a difference is provided so that "LV2" is more likely to be set if the result is a win, and "LV1" is more likely to be set if the result is a miss.

In contrast, when the first operation reaches the criterion period and transitions to the latter half of the game, one of the protruding levels "LV1" to "LV3" is set. In this case, if the result is a win, the levels are likely to be set in the order "LV1" < "LV2" < "LV3", and if the result is a miss, the levels are likely to be set in the order "LV3" < "LV2" < "LV1".

Returning to the explanation of step S4203 in FIG. 123, if a negative judgment is made in step S4203, i.e., if it is not the timing to start switching to the second form, the process proceeds to step S4207. In step S4207, it is judged whether or not it is the grace period for switching to the second form. If a negative judgment is made in step S4207, the process for the latter half part ends as is. If a positive judgment is made in step S4207, the process for switching form is executed in step S4208, and then the process for the latter half part ends. Here, the process for switching form will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 125.

(Form switching process)
In the mode switching process, first, in step S4301, it is determined whether or not the stepping motor 753 is being rotated at low speed. If a negative determination is made in step S4301, the process proceeds to step S4302. In step S4302, it is determined whether or not the operation button 721 has been turned off based on detection information from the detection sensor 791. If a negative determination is made in step S4302, the mode switching process is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S4302, low-speed drive processing is executed in step S4303, and then the mode switching process is terminated.

In this low-speed drive process, the stepping motor 753 is rotated at a low speed. Here, "low speed" in this embodiment refers to a speed that is lower than the rotation speed of the stepping motor 753 when form switching is performed in a type of special effect in which the protruding level of the effect button device 40 does not change according to the expected degree of transition to a special game state, such as the first special effect shown in the first embodiment. In this way, the period required for form switching is lengthened, thereby preventing the process in which differences in the protruding level occur from being overlooked.

Returning to the explanation of step S4301, if the device is being driven at low speed, a positive judgment is made in step S4301 and the process proceeds to step S4304. In step S4304, it is determined whether or not the movable base 741 has reached the stop position set in step S4206. If a negative judgment is made in step S4304, the form switching process ends. If a positive judgment is made in step S4304, the process proceeds to step S4305. In step S4305, the stepping motor 753 is stopped. This completes the form switching of the performance button device 40.

Returning to the explanation of step S4202 in FIG. 123, if a positive judgment is made in step S4202, that is, if the timing of the grace period for switching has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S4209. In step S4209, it is judged whether or not switching to the second mode has been completed. If a positive judgment is made in step S4209, the process proceeds to step S4210. In step S4210, a process for setting the valid period of the second operation is performed. Thereafter, in step S4211, a process for starting a suggestion for the second operation is executed, and the process for the latter part is terminated.

In the second operation suggestion start process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled to output a message encouraging the operation (for example, a voice such as "Press the button") from the speaker unit 27, and an operation suggestion start command is output to the display control device 142. Based on receiving the operation suggestion start command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 to display on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 a message such as "One hit!!" for the operation suggestion, a pattern imitating a button with an extended operation stroke, and a period indicator showing the remaining valid period. In other words, the above-mentioned guidance performance ends as the grace period elapses, and the device transitions to operation suggestions.

Returning to the explanation of step S4209, if a negative judgment is made in step S4209, the process proceeds to step S4211. In step S4211, a switching process is executed to switch the performance button device 40 to the first form. In other words, if the movement of the operation button 721 is obstructed by a hand, for example, and the switching to the second form is not completed within the grace period, the switching to the second form is canceled.

Then, in step S4212, an alternative performance execution process is performed, and the processing for the second half part is terminated. The alternative performance execution process executes an alternative performance that does not correspond to the operation of the performance button device 40.

Returning to the explanation of step S4201, if a positive judgment is made in step S4201, i.e., if the second operation is still in its valid period, the process proceeds to step S4214. In step S4214, it is determined whether the valid period of the second operation has elapsed. If a negative judgment is made in step S4214, the process proceeds to step S4215.

In step S4215, it is determined whether the operation button 721 has been operated (second operation) based on the detection information from the detection sensor 791. If the second operation has not been performed, a negative determination is made in step S4215 and the process for this latter part is terminated. If the second operation has been performed, a positive determination is made in step S4215 and the process proceeds to step S4216. In step S4216, the acceptance notification process and the suggestion end process for the second operation are executed. In the acceptance notification process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled to output a sound effect indicating that the operation has been validly accepted from the speaker unit 27. In the operation suggestion end process, an operation suggestion end command is output to the display control device 142. Based on the reception of the operation suggestion end command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 to end the display of the operation suggestion message, the operation suggestion picture indicating the button, and the indicator indicating the remaining valid period.

Then, in step S4217, a second operation corresponding effect execution process is performed. In the second operation corresponding effect execution process, an effect is executed that clearly shows the game result of the current game round to the player. Specifically, the first movable effect device 300 is driven to perform a light emission effect by the first movable effect device 300. At the same time, the display screen 253a is temporarily turned off (blacked out).

Returning to the explanation of step S4214, if a positive judgment is made in step S4214, i.e., if the valid period of the second operation has elapsed without the second operation being performed, the process proceeds to step S4218. In step S4218, a suggestion end process for the second operation is executed. In the suggestion end process, a suggestion end command for the first operation is output to the display control device 142. Based on receiving the suggestion end command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 to end the display of the operation suggestion message, the button-like image, and the indicator showing the remaining valid period.

In the following step S4219, a switching process is executed to switch the effect button device 40 to the first form. After that, in step S4220, an alternative effect is executed, and then the process for the latter half part is terminated. In the alternative effect, regardless of whether the result is a win or a miss, the light emission effect by the first movable effect device 300 and the turning off effect (blackout effect) of the pattern display device 253 are not executed.

The following provides a supplementary explanation of the flow of the 8th special effect (8th special effect C) when the 8th special effect is executed in the game round corresponding to the winning result, with reference to the schematic diagrams of Figs. 126 to 127. Figs. 126(a) and 127(a) are schematic diagrams showing the display screen 253a and the first movable effect device 300, and Figs. 126(b) and 127(b) are schematic diagrams showing the effect button device 40. Note that in the example shown in Figs. 126 and 127, the game round in which the 8th special effect (specifically, the 8th special effect C) is executed corresponds to the winning result, and the 8th special effect progresses in the order of Fig. 126(1) → Fig. 126(2) → Fig. 126(3) → Fig. 126(4) → Fig. 127(5) → Fig. 127(6) → Fig. 127(7) → Fig. 127(8).

The eighth special effect (eighth special effect C) begins after the variable display mode of the symbols on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253 becomes a reach display. The eighth special effect in this embodiment is a so-called mission effect, and the player is notified of information indicating what event must occur in this effect to transition to a special game state. Specifically, the message "Turn on the patrol lamp" is displayed in the center of the display screen 253a.

Then, the symbol display device 253 is controlled to display, instead of the message, a message suggesting an operation such as "Press and hold the button," a picture imitating a button with an expanded operation stroke, and a period indicator indicating the remaining valid period. In addition, the display screen 253a displays an operation indicator whose display mode changes depending on the period during which the operation button 721 is pressed and held.

When the operation button 721 is pressed and held in accordance with the operation suggestion, the display state of the operation indicator changes according to the duration of the long press. When the duration of the long press reaches a preset criterion period, a message indicating the operation is complete (e.g., the word "Complete") is displayed on the display screen 253a. In addition, the operation button 721 is held at the operation detection position (maximum pressing position) and is restricted from returning to its initial position. After that, a guidance effect is executed on the display screen 253a to encourage attention to the operation button 721. In the guidance effect, first, the words "Pay attention to the button" and a picture of an arrow pointing toward the operation button 721 are displayed, and then a video imitating the change in shape of the performance button device 40 is displayed.

In accordance with the display of the video, the form of the effect button device 40 will switch from the first form to any of the second to fourth forms. In other words, the protruding level of the operation button 721 will change. The expectation of accomplishing the above-mentioned mission, i.e., the expectation of transitioning to a special game state, increases in the order of protruding level LV1 < protruding level LV2 < protruding level LV3, and it is expected that players hoping to accomplish the mission will pay attention to the behavior of the operation button 721.

After the transformation of the effect button device 40 is complete, a button icon resembling the operation button 721, a message suggesting an operation (e.g., "One hit!!"), and an indicator showing the remaining valid operation period are displayed on the display screen 253a.

If the player operates the operation button 721 during this operation suggestion, the display screen 253a goes dark (blacks out) and the first movable performance device 300 starts a light-emitting performance. After that, while the light-emitting performance continues, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning result is displayed stopped (confirmed) on the pay line of the display screen 253a.

According to this embodiment, after the operation button 721 is operated to execute the effect, the operation button is switched to one of the protruding levels LV1 to LV3 by releasing the operation button 721. These protruding levels LV1 to LV3 are determined according to the result of the win/lose lottery. In this way, if the destination (return destination) of the operation button 721 can be changed according to the win/lose result, it is possible to preferably prevent attention to the effect button device 40 from suddenly decreasing as a result of the operation.

When the button device 40 undergoes successive changes in form, the impression that the changes are merely repeated is strong, which is undesirable in terms of increasing attention. Therefore, as shown in this embodiment, by creating a difference such that the displacement speed of the operation button 721 during the change in form after operation is slower than the displacement speed of the operation button 721 during the change in form before operation, it is possible to prevent such inconvenience from occurring. In the transformation after operation, the degree of expectation may differ depending on the position reached, so by deliberately displacing it slowly, it is possible to appropriately arouse the player's sense of expectation.

<Modification 1>
In the eighth embodiment, when the protrusion level is switched based on the operation of the operation button 721, the protrusion levels LV1 to LV3 are the switching targets, but this is not limited to this. When the protrusion level is switched based on the operation of the operation button 721, the protrusion levels LV0 to LV3 can also be the switching targets.

<Modification 2>
When executing the eighth special effect in the above-mentioned eighth embodiment, the switching operation may be temporarily stopped or slowed down at the boundary between each protrusion level when switching the shape of the effect button device 40 in conjunction with the transition to the latter part.

<Modification 3>
In the eighth special effect in the eighth embodiment, the rotation speed of the stepping motor 753 when switching the form of the effect button device 40 with the transition to the latter half part is configured to be the same for all of the protrusion levels "LV1" to "LV3", but the rotation speed of the stepping motor 753 may be differentiated according to the set protrusion level. For example, the rotation speed of the stepping motor 753 may be made faster as the protrusion amount increases, or the rotation speed of the stepping motor 753 may be made faster as the protrusion amount decreases.

<Modification 4>
In the eighth embodiment described above, if the operation period of the first operation in the first half part does not reach the judgment reference period, the protrusion level "LV3" is excluded from the setting candidates for the protrusion level of the operation button 721 in the second half part, but it is also possible to configure it to include the protrusion level "LV3".

<Modification 5>
In the eighth embodiment, the setting mode of the protruding level in the latter part is different between the case where the operation period of the first operation in the former part has not reached the judgment reference period and the case where the operation period of the first operation in the former part has reached the judgment reference period, but this is not limited to this.It is also possible to configure the setting mode of the protruding level in the latter part to be the same between the case where the operation period of the first operation has not reached the judgment reference period and the case where the judgment reference period has been reached.

Ninth embodiment
In this embodiment, the configuration differs from each of the first to eighth embodiments described above in that a ninth special effect is executed in which the change in shape of the effect button device 40 continues over multiple game rounds. The configuration relating to the ninth special effect will be described below, focusing on the differences from those embodiments. First, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 128, the setting process for the ninth special effect (ninth special effect setting process) executed by the MPU 912 of the notification/effect control device 143 will be described. The ninth special effect setting process is executed by the MPU 912 as part of regular processing.

(Ninth special effect setting process)
In the ninth special effect setting process, first, in step S4401, it is determined whether or not a hold command indicating that hold information has been added, or a shift command indicating that the hold information has been consumed and the game will move to the next round, has been received from the main control device 162. If a negative determination is made in step S4401, the ninth special effect setting process is terminated as it is. If a positive determination is made in step S4401, the process proceeds to step S4402. In step S4402, it is determined whether or not the ninth special effect has been set. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a ninth special effect flag, which will be described later, is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. If a positive determination is made in step S4402, the process proceeds to step S4403.

In step S4403, it is determined whether or not an operation-responsive effect using the effect button device 40 is scheduled to be executed in the current game round. If a positive determination is made in step S4403, the ninth special effect setting process is terminated as is. If a negative determination is made in step S4403, the process proceeds to step S4404. In step S4404, one of the currently stored holds is provisionally determined as a target. In this provisional determination, it is first determined whether or not there is a hold that corresponds to the reach display, and if there are multiple holds that correspond to the reach display, one of the multiple holds is provisionally determined as a candidate for the tenth special effect. In this determination, holds with longer variable display times are favored so that they are more likely to be the target of the provisional determination than holds with shorter variable display times.

If there are no reserved items that have been provisionally determined, a negative judgment is made in step S4405 and the ninth special effect setting process ends. If there are reserved items that have been provisionally determined, a positive judgment is made in step S4405 and the process proceeds to step S4406.

In step S4406, it is determined whether or not all of the holds preceding the hold that is the subject of the provisional determination correspond to a complete miss (a miss result that does not correspond to the reach display). If a negative determination is made in step S4406, the ninth special effect setting process is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S4406, the ninth special effect lottery process is executed in step S4407. If the lottery process is won, the provisional determination is followed by confirmation of the start (final determination).

If the start of the 9th special effect has been confirmed, a positive judgment is made in step S4408 and the process proceeds to step S4409. In step S4409, the maximum number of steps up to the determined target hold is identified. Specifically, the number of holds that exist between the determined target hold and the hold for the current play round is identified.

In the next step S4410, the final form of the effect button device 40 before the operation suggestion is determined based on the reserved information (C1, C2, C3, CS) that was the subject of the provisional determination. In the effect button device 40 in this embodiment, protruding levels LV0 to LV5 are provided as the protruding levels of the operation button 721, and differences are provided so that the expectation of transitioning to the special game state increases in the order of protruding level LV1 < protruding level LV2 < protruding level LV3 < protruding level LV4 < protruding level LV5. In other words, the ninth special effect is broadly divided into ninth special effect A whose final form is protruding level LV1, ninth special effect B whose final form is protruding level LV2, ninth special effect C whose final form is protruding level LV3, ninth special effect D whose final form is protruding level LV4, and ninth special effect E whose final form is protruding level LV5 (see FIG. 129(a)).

As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 129(b), the difference in the amount of protrusion at each protrusion level is basically set to be about the same, but the difference in the amount of protrusion X1 between protrusion level LV0 and protrusion level LV1 is differentiated to be greater than the differences X2 to X5 between the other protrusion levels. This is a way to enhance the visual impact when the form is first changed.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 128, after the final form is determined in step S4410, the process leading up to the final form, i.e., the form switching pattern, is determined in step S4411. After that, in step S4412, a form switching process is executed to switch the effect button device 40 from protruding level LV0 to protruding level LV1, and in the following step S4413, the ninth special effect flag is set in the various flags storage area 933 of the RAM 914, and the ninth special effect setting process is terminated.

The form switching pattern is structured so that for every "1" play round, the protruding level also rises by at least "1 level." In other words, the protruding level will not decrease as the play round progresses. However, it will be difficult for players to identify which play round this 9th special effect was started for, so players will hope that the 9th special effect will continue for as long as possible.

In addition, there may be multiple protruding levels that can change as the game progresses by "1", and such behavior may cause the protruding level to rise all at once, so even if the number of reserved balls is small when the 9th special performance begins, it is possible to effectively prevent the player's attention from decreasing.

For example, Figure 130 (a) illustrates a form switching pattern in which the final form is protruding level LV3. In pattern 1, the protruding level is stepped up in order from protruding level LV1 to protruding level LV2 to protruding level LV3, and in pattern 2, the protruding level is stepped up from protruding level LV1 to protruding level LV3, skipping protruding level LV2. That is, in pattern 1, the corresponding number of reserved items (excluding pending pending items) is "2", and in pattern 2, the corresponding number of reserved items (excluding pending pending items) is "1".

Figure 130 (b) illustrates a form switching pattern in which the final form is protruding level LV4. In pattern 1, protruding level LV1 → protruding level LV2 → protruding level LV3 → protruding level LV4 are stepped up in this order, in pattern 2, protruding level LV1 → protruding level LV2 is stepped up to protruding level LV4 skipping protruding level LV3, in pattern 3, protruding level LV1 is stepped up to protruding level LV3 skipping protruding level LV2 and then to protruding level LV4, and in pattern 4, protruding level LV1 is stepped up to protruding level LV4 skipping protruding level LV2 and protruding level LV3. That is, in pattern 1, the corresponding reserved number (excluding pending pending) is "3", in pattern 2 and pattern 3, the corresponding reserved number (excluding pending pending) is "2", and in pattern 4, the corresponding reserved number (excluding pending pending) is "1".

Next, the process for the ninth special effect (ninth special effect process) executed by the MPU 912 of the notification/effect control device 143 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 131 and 132. The ninth special effect process is executed as part of regular processing by the MPU 912.

(9th special effect processing)
In the ninth special effect process, first, in step S4501, it is determined whether or not a ninth special effect flag is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. If a negative determination is made in step S4501, the ninth special effect process ends as is. If a positive determination is made in step S4501, the process proceeds to step S4502. In step S4502, it is determined whether or not the game time is related to the ninth special effect, that is, the game time related to the target reservation determined in the ninth special effect setting process. If a negative determination is made in step S4502, the process proceeds to step S4503.

In step S4503, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of a game round. If a negative determination is made in step S4503, the ninth special effect process is terminated as is. If a positive determination is made in step S4503, the process proceeds to step S4504. In step S4504, it is determined whether or not the game round involves form switching. If a negative determination is made in step S4504, the ninth special effect process is terminated as is. If a positive determination is made in step S4504, form switching processing is executed in step S4505, and then the ninth special effect process is terminated. In the form switching processing of step S4505, the form of the effect button device 40 is switched according to the form switching pattern determined in step S4411 above.

Returning to the explanation of step S4502, if a positive judgment is made in step S4502, the process proceeds to step S4506. In step S4506, processing for the final game round related to the 9th special effect (final game round processing) is executed. Below, the final game round processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 132.

(Final game round processing)
In the processing for the final game round, first, in step S4601, it is determined whether or not the operation is within the valid period. If a negative determination is made in step S4601, the process proceeds to step S4602. In step S4602, it is determined whether or not the grace period for switching to the final form has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S4602, the process proceeds to step S4603. In step S4603, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing for the final game round related to the ninth special performance. If a negative determination is made in step S4603, the processing for the final game round is terminated as is. If a positive determination is made in step S4603, the process proceeds to step S4604.

In step S4604, a process for setting the switching grace period is performed. In the following step S4605, a form switching process is executed. Specifically, a drive signal is output to the stepping motor 753, and the movable base 741 is raised so that the performance button device 40 assumes a pre-determined final form.

Returning to the explanation of step S4602, if a positive judgment is made in step S4602, that is, if the switching grace period has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S4606. In step S4606, it is judged whether or not it is the operation activation timing for activating the operation of the operation button 721. If a negative judgment is made in step S4606, the process for the final game round is terminated as is. If a positive judgment is made in step S4606, the process proceeds to step S4607. In step S4607, a process for setting the operation valid period is performed. Thereafter, in step S4608, an operation suggestion start process is executed to suggest the operation of the operation button 721, and the process for the final game round is terminated.

In the operation suggestion start process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled to output a message encouraging an operation (for example, a voice such as "Press the button") from the speaker unit 27, and an operation suggestion start command is output to the display control device 142. Based on receiving the operation suggestion start command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 to display on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 a message such as "Press!!" for operation suggestion, a pattern imitating a button with an expanded operation stroke, and a period indicator showing the remaining valid period.

Returning to the explanation of step S4601, if a positive judgment is made in step S4601, i.e., if the operation is within the valid period, the process proceeds to step S4609. In step S4609, it is determined whether the valid operation period has elapsed. If a negative judgment is made in step S4609, the process proceeds to step S4610.

In step S4610, it is determined whether or not the operation button 721 has been operated based on the detection information from the detection sensor 791. If no operation has been performed, a negative determination is made in step S4610 and the process for the final game round is terminated. If an operation has been performed, a positive determination is made in step S4610 and the process proceeds to step S4611. In step S4611, an operation acceptance notification process and a suggestion end process are executed. In the acceptance notification process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled to output a sound effect indicating that the operation has been validly accepted from the speaker unit 27. In the operation suggestion end process, an operation suggestion end command is output to the display control device 142. The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 based on receiving the operation suggestion end command, and ends the display of the operation suggestion message, the operation suggestion picture indicating the button, and the indicator indicating the remaining valid period.

Then, in step S4612, an operation-responsive performance execution process is performed. In the operation-responsive performance execution process, a performance is executed that clearly shows the game result of the current game round to the player. Specifically, the first movable performance device 300 is driven to perform a light-emitting performance by the first movable performance device 300. At the same time, the display screen 253a is temporarily turned off (blacked out).

Returning to the explanation of step S4609, if a positive judgment is made in step S4609, that is, if the operation valid period has elapsed without an operation being performed, the process proceeds to step S4610. In step S4610, an operation suggestion end process is executed. In this suggestion end process, an operation suggestion end command is output to the display control device 142. Based on receiving the suggestion end command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 to end the display of the operation suggestion message, the button-like image, and the indicator showing the remaining valid period.

In the following step S4614, a switching process is executed to switch the effect button device 40 to the first mode. After that, in step S4615, an alternative effect is executed, and then the process for the final game round is terminated. In the alternative effect, regardless of whether the result is a win or a loss, the light emission effect by the first movable effect device 300 and the turning off of the pattern display device 253 (blackout effect) are not executed.

Here, referring to FIG. 133, a supplementary explanation will be given on the flow of the ninth special effect (ninth special effect E) when the ninth special effect is executed. FIG. 133(a) to FIG. 133(f) are schematic diagrams showing the hold display area NE and the effect button device 40 arranged vertically on the display screen 253a, and in the example shown in FIG. 133, the game rounds proceed in the order of FIG. 133(a) → FIG. 133(b) → FIG. 133(c) → FIG. 133(d) → FIG. 133(e) → FIG. 133(f). Note that in FIG. 133, the hold that triggered the start of the ninth special effect and the hold corresponding to the final game round in the ninth special effect match, and the display mode of the hold icon is different to distinguish the hold from other holds, but the hold icon actually displayed has the same appearance as the other hold icons. Note that this is not the case when the ninth special effect occurs in overlap with another hold notice effect, and the appearance of the hold icon of the corresponding hold may be changed to a special one that is different from the other hold icons.

When a winning bid is made into the operating port 83a during a game round and the number of reserved bids increases from "3" to "4", a reserved bid icon is added to the reserved bid display area NE of the display screen 253a (more specifically, the fourth unit reserved bid display area Da4 in the reserved bid display area Da). This added reserved bid (hereinafter, the relevant reserved bid) corresponds to a winning result, and the reserved bid related to the current game round and the three preceding reserved bids all correspond to complete misses (no operation-responsive effects are generated).

If the lottery for the occurrence of the 9th special effect for the relevant reserved ball is won, an operation-responsive effect will occur in the final stage of the game round related to the reserved ball, and the form of the effect button device 40 will change at the timing when the reserved ball is acquired. Specifically, the protrusion level of the operation button 721 will switch from protrusion level LV0 to protrusion level LV1. In conjunction with this, the words "Waiting for opportunity" will be displayed at the top of the display screen 253a as a hint of the 9th special effect, and an effect will be added to the outer periphery of the display screen 253a. The words "Waiting for opportunity" and the effect will be hidden when the 9th special effect ends.

In the example shown in FIG. 133, the newly added reserve triggers the start of the 9th special effect and is the final play round, but the trigger for the start of the 9th special effect in this embodiment does not necessarily match the final play round. The reason for not specifying the target in this way is to expand the range of predictions for the number of times the form change will occur.

As shown in FIG. 133(b)→FIG. 133(c), when the number of game rounds advances by "1", the form of the effect button device 40 also switches from protruding level LV1 to protruding level LV2. Similarly, as shown in FIG. 133(c)→FIG. 133(d)→FIG. 133(e)→FIG. 133(f), the form of the effect button device 40 switches in the following order with each game round: protruding level LV2→protruding level LV3→protruding level LV4→protruding level LV5. Protruding level LV5 is maintained until the effect button device 40 is operated in the final game round, and switches to protruding level LV0 (first form) due to the player's operation or the lapse of the valid operation period.

In addition, control to maintain the protruding level is executed from the start of the 9th special performance until the effective operation period for the final game is set. Even if the operation button 721 is operated during this period, it will automatically return to the latest form. This configuration prevents the operation stroke when an operation suggestion is made from becoming shorter, thereby preventing a decrease in the impact of the operation.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, the standby position of the operation button 721 of the effect button device 40 provided on the front door frame 14 is changed to correspond to the number of reserved information stored. In other words, the shape of the effect button device 40 changes as the game progresses. In this way, by changing the shape of the effect button device 40 provided in a position close to the player each time a game round progresses, it is possible to emphasize that the game round is progressing and dramatically increase the attention to the game.

Increasing the number of standby positions for the operation button 721 is preferable in terms of achieving diversification. However, if standby positions are set haphazardly, it becomes difficult to ensure the strength of the performance button device 40, and there is concern that this may cause a loss of reliability for the performance button device 40. In this regard, by setting multiple standby positions so that they are aligned in the operation direction as shown in this embodiment, that is, by limiting them to positions in the operation stroke, such concerns can be suitably eliminated.

As shown in this embodiment, by changing the protruding level by expanding the operation stroke of the operation button 721 each time the number of preceding pending items decreases, the player can focus their attention on how far the expansion of the operation stroke will continue. Here, since an upper limit is set on the number of pending items that can be stored, there is also a practical upper limit on the expansion of the operation stroke, and attention is drawn to the relationship between the number of pending items stored and the protruding level.

By changing the protrusion level when the hold icon displayed in the hold display area NE shifts, the correlation between the movement of the operation button 721 and the number of hold information can be strengthened. This allows the effect button device 40 to essentially function as a hold number display unit similar to the hold display area NE, making it easy to notice when the game has progressed while paying attention to the effect button device 40.

<Modification 1>
If the operation button 721 is operated while the ninth special effect is being executed, the operation can be used as a trigger to end the ninth special effect midway.

<Modification 2>
In the above ninth embodiment, a difference was made between the range of change in the amount of protrusion when protrusion level LV0 changes to protrusion level LV1 and the range of change in the amount of protrusion when protrusion level LV(N) changes to protrusion level LV(N+1) (N=1 to 4), but it is also possible to unify these ranges.

<Modification 3>
In the ninth embodiment, the ninth special effect is started when the reserved item is shifted and when the reserved item is added, but the present invention is not limited to this. The start trigger can be limited to either the reserved item being shifted or the reserved item being added.

<Modification 4>
In the above ninth embodiment, the form switching pattern in the ninth special performance is configured to include a form switching pattern that skips some forms, but it is also possible to configure it so that it does not include these form switching patterns.

<Modification 5>
In the ninth embodiment, when the ninth special effect is executed, at least one stage of change in form occurs each time the game is played, but this is not limited to this. A pattern in which no change in form occurs as the game progresses may be added.

Tenth embodiment
In this embodiment, the configuration differs from each of the first to eighth embodiments described above in that a tenth special effect is executed in which the shape of the effect button device 40 continues to change over a number of game rounds. The configuration relating to the tenth special effect will be described below, focusing on the differences from those embodiments. First, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 134, the setting process for the tenth special effect (tenth special effect setting process) executed by the MPU 912 of the notification/effect control device 143 will be described. The tenth special effect setting process is executed by the MPU 912 as part of regular processing.

(Tenth special effect setting process)
In the tenth special effect setting process, first, in step S4701, it is determined whether or not a hold command indicating that hold information has been added from the main control device 162, or a shift command indicating that the hold information has been consumed and the game will move to the next round, has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S4701, the tenth special effect setting process is terminated as it is. If a positive determination is made in step S4701, the process proceeds to step S4702. In step S4702, it is determined whether or not the tenth special effect has been set. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a tenth special effect flag, which will be described later, is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. If a positive determination is made in step S4702, the tenth special effect setting process is terminated as it is. If a negative determination is made in step S4702, the process proceeds to step S4703.

In step S4703, it is determined whether or not an operation-responsive effect using the effect button device 40 is scheduled to be executed in the current game round. If a positive determination is made in step S4703, the 10th special effect setting process is terminated as is. If a negative determination is made in step S4703, the process proceeds to step S4704. In step S4704, one of the currently stored holds is provisionally determined as the target. In this provisional determination, it is first determined whether or not there is a hold that corresponds to the reach display, and if there are multiple holds that correspond to the reach display, one of the multiple holds is provisionally determined as a candidate for the 10th special effect. In this determination, holds with longer variable display times are favored so that they are more likely to be the target of the provisional determination than holds with shorter variable display times.

If there are no reserved items that have been provisionally determined, a negative judgment is made in step S4705 and the 10th special effect setting process ends. If there are reserved items that have been provisionally determined, a positive judgment is made in step S4705 and the process proceeds to step S4706.

In step S4706, it is determined whether or not all of the holds preceding the hold that is the subject of the provisional determination correspond to a complete miss (a miss result that does not correspond to the reach display). If a negative determination is made in step S4706, the 10th special effect setting process is terminated as is. If a positive determination is made in step S4706, a 10th special effect lottery process is executed in step S4707. If the lottery process is won, the provisional determination is followed by confirmation of the start (final determination).

If the start of the 10th special effect has been confirmed, a positive judgment is made in step S4708 and the process proceeds to step S4709. In step S4709, the maximum number of steps up to the determined target hold is identified. Specifically, the number of holds that exist between the determined target hold and the hold for the current play round is identified.

In the next step S4710, the initial form of the effect button device 40 is determined based on the reserved information (C1, C2, C3, CS) that was the subject of the provisional determination. In the effect button device 40 in this embodiment, protrusion levels LV0 to LV5 are provided as the protrusion levels of the operation button 721, and the protrusion amounts are differentiated in the order of protrusion level LV1 < protrusion level LV2 < protrusion level LV3 < protrusion level LV4 < protrusion level LV5. Note that the difference in the protrusion amount at each protrusion level is basically set to be about the same, but the difference in the protrusion amount between protrusion level LV0 and protrusion level LV1 is differentiated to be greater than the difference between the other protrusion levels. Details will be described later, but in the 10th special effect, an operation suggestion for the operation button 721 is generated in the corresponding game round. At this time, the protrusion level of the effect button device 40 is protrusion level LV1, but this is a device to clearly indicate the difference from the first form with protrusion level LV0.

After the initial form is determined in step S4710, the process proceeds to step S4711. In step S4711, a form switching process is executed to switch the protrusion level of the effect button device 40 so as to obtain the initial form determined in step S4710. After that, in step S4712, the 10th special effect flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914, and the 10th special effect setting process is terminated.

The form switching pattern for the 10th special effect is different from the 9th special effect described above, and is stipulated as follows. That is, when the number of play turns progresses by "1", the protruding level also drops by "1 level". In other words, the number of reserved balls and the protruding level are completely linked, and it is possible to identify from the initial form which reserved ball is being targeted as the 10th special effect progresses.

Next, the process for the 10th special effect (process for the 10th special effect) executed by the MPU 912 of the notification/effect control device 143 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 135. The process for the 10th special effect is a process executed as part of regular processing by the MPU 912.

(10th special effect processing)
In the tenth special effect process, first, in step S4801, it is determined whether or not a tenth special effect flag is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. If a negative determination is made in step S4801, the tenth special effect process is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S4801, the process proceeds to step S4802. In step S4802, it is determined whether or not the game time is related to the tenth special effect, that is, the game time related to the target reservation determined in the tenth special effect setting process. If a negative determination is made in step S4802, the process proceeds to step S4803.

In step S4803, it is determined whether or not it is time to start a game round. If a negative determination is made in step S4803, the 10th special effect process is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S4803, the process proceeds to step S4804, where a form switching process is executed, and the 10th special effect process is terminated. In the form switching process of step S4804, the form of the effect button device 40 is switched so that the protrusion level is lowered by "one level."

Returning to the explanation of step S4802, if a positive judgment is made in step S4802, the process proceeds to step S4806. In step S4806, processing for the final game round related to the 10th special effect (final game round processing) is executed. The final game round processing is explained below.

(Final game round processing)
In the process for the final game round, first, it is determined whether or not it is within the valid operation period. If it is within the valid operation period, it is determined whether or not the grace period for switching the form in the final game round has elapsed. If the grace period has not elapsed, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the final game round related to the tenth special effect. If it is not the start timing of the final game round, this process for the final game round is terminated as it is. If it is the start timing of the final game round, the process for setting the grace period for switching the form change described above and the process for switching the form of the effect button device 40 are executed. Specifically, a drive signal is output to the stepping motor 753 to lower the movable base 741 so that the effect button device 40 reaches the protruding level LV1, which is the final form.

On the other hand, if the grace period for switching the mode described above has elapsed, it is determined whether or not it is time to enable the operation of the operation button 721. If it is not time to enable the operation, the process for the final game round ends. If it is time to enable the operation, a process for setting the operation valid period is performed. Thereafter, a process for starting an operation suggestion is executed to suggest the operation of the operation button 721, and the process for the final game round ends.

In the operation suggestion start process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled to output a message encouraging an operation (for example, a voice such as "Press the button") from the speaker unit 27, and an operation suggestion start command is output to the display control device 142. Based on receiving the operation suggestion start command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 to display on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 a message such as "Press!!" for operation suggestion, a pattern imitating a button with an expanded operation stroke, and a period indicator showing the remaining valid period.

On the other hand, if it is within the valid operation period, it is determined whether or not the valid operation period has elapsed. If it is not the time when the valid operation period has elapsed, it is determined whether or not the operation button 721 has been operated based on the detection information from the detection sensor 791. If no operation has been performed, the process for the final game round is terminated. If an operation has been performed, the operation acceptance notification process and the suggestion end process are executed. In the acceptance notification process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled to output a sound effect indicating that the operation has been validly accepted from the speaker unit 27. In the operation suggestion end process, an operation suggestion end command is output to the display control device 142. The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 based on receiving the operation suggestion end command, and ends the display of the operation suggestion message, the operation suggestion picture indicating the button, and the indicator indicating the remaining valid period.

Next, operation-responsive performance execution processing is performed. In the operation-responsive performance execution processing, a performance is executed that clearly shows the game result of the current game round to the player. Specifically, the first movable performance device 300 is driven to perform a light-emitting performance by the first movable performance device 300. At the same time, the display screen 253a is temporarily turned off (blacked out).

Here, if the valid operation period has elapsed even though the operation is still in progress, i.e., if the valid operation period has elapsed without any operation being performed, an operation suggestion end process is executed. In this suggestion end process, an operation suggestion end command is output to the display control device 142. Based on receiving the suggestion end command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 to end the display of the operation suggestion message, the button-like image, and the indicator showing the remaining valid period.

Next, a switching process is executed to switch the effect button device 40 to the first mode. After that, an alternative effect is executed, and then the process for the final game round is terminated. In the alternative effect, regardless of whether the result is a win or a loss, the light-emitting effect by the first movable effect device 300 and the turning-off effect (blackout effect) of the pattern display device 253 are not executed.

Here, referring to FIG. 136, a supplementary explanation will be given on the flow of the 10th special effect when the 10th special effect is executed. FIG. 136(a) to FIG. 136(f) are schematic diagrams showing the hold display area NE and the effect button device 40 on the display screen 253a arranged vertically, and in the example shown in FIG. 136, the game rounds proceed in the order of FIG. 136(a) → FIG. 136(b) → FIG. 136(c) → FIG. 136(d) → FIG. 136(e) → FIG. 136(f). Note that in FIG. 136, the hold that triggered the start of the 10th special effect and the hold corresponding to the final game round in the 10th special effect are the same, and the display mode of the hold icon is different to distinguish the hold from other holds, but the hold icon actually displayed has the same appearance as the other hold icons. Note that this is not the case when the 10th special effect occurs in overlap with another hold notice effect, and the appearance of the hold icon of the corresponding hold may be changed to a special one that is different from the other hold icons.

When a winning bid is made into the operating port 83a during a game round and the number of reserved bids increases from "3" to "4", a reserved bid icon is added to the reserved bid display area NE of the display screen 253a (more specifically, the fourth unit reserved bid display area Da4 in the reserved bid display area Da). This added reserved bid (hereinafter, the relevant reserved bid) corresponds to a winning result, and the reserved bid related to the current game round and the three preceding reserved bids all correspond to complete misses (no operation-responsive effects are generated).

If the lottery for the occurrence of the 10th special effect for the relevant reserved ball is won, an operation-responsive effect will occur in the final stage of the game round related to the reserved ball, and the form of the effect button device 40 will change at the timing when the reserved ball is acquired. Specifically, the protrusion level of the operation button 721 will switch from protrusion level LV0 to protrusion level LV5. In conjunction with this, the words "Waiting for Opportunity" will be displayed at the top of the display screen 253a as a hint for the 10th special effect, and an effect will be added to the outer periphery of the display screen 253a. The words "Waiting for Opportunity" and the effect will be hidden when the 10th special effect ends.

As shown in FIG. 136(b)→FIG. 136(c), when the number of game rounds advances by "1", the form of the effect button device 40 also switches from protruding level LV5 to protruding level LV4. Similarly, as shown in FIG. 136(c)→FIG. 136(d)→FIG. 136(e)→FIG. 136(f), with each game round, the form of the effect button device 40 switches in the order of protruding level LV4→protruding level LV3→protruding level LV2→protruding level LV1. Protruding level LV1 is maintained until the effect button device 40 is operated in the final game round, and switches to protruding level LV0 (first form) due to the player's operation or the lapse of the valid operation period.

In addition, control to maintain the protruding level is executed from the start of the 10th special performance until the effective operation period for the final game is set. Even if the operation button 721 is operated during this period, it will automatically return to the latest form. This configuration prevents the operation stroke when an operation suggestion is made from becoming shorter, thereby preventing a decrease in the impact of the operation.

As shown in this embodiment, by changing the protruding level by reducing the operation stroke of the operation button 721 each time the number of preceding pending information items decreases, the player can focus their attention on how far the reduction in the operation stroke will continue. Here, since an upper limit is set for the number of pending information items that can be stored, there is an effective lower limit for the reduction in the operation stroke, and attention is drawn to the relationship between the number of pending information items stored and the protruding level.

<Modification 1>
According to the tenth embodiment, during the tenth special performance, the protruding level is configured to drop by a certain level each time the game is played, but this does not deny the configuration in which the protruding level to be dropped is changed each time. For example, there may be a case where the protruding level drops by "1 level", a case where the protruding level drops by "2 levels", a case where the protruding level drops by "3 levels", and a case where the protruding level drops by "4 levels".

<Modification 2>
According to the above tenth embodiment, during the tenth special performance, the protruding level is always decreased with each game round, but it is also possible to provide a pattern in which the protruding level has no effect in some game rounds.

<Modification 3>
According to the tenth embodiment, in the final game round (when an operation is suggested) in the tenth special effect, the protruding levels of the effect button devices 40 are all set to protruding level LV1, but this is not limited to this. The protruding level in the final game round (when an operation is suggested) may be other than protruding level LV1. For example, it may be protruding level LV0, or may be protruding level LV2 or higher.

It is also possible to provide multiple candidates for the protruding level in the final game round, and to configure the expectation of transitioning to the special game state to differ depending on the candidate. For example, differences in the expectation may be provided so that the protruding levels in the final game round increase in the order of protruding level LV0 < protruding level LV1 < protruding level LV2 < protruding level LV3 < protruding level LV4 < protruding level LV5.

Eleventh embodiment
As already explained, the effect button device 40 shown in each of the above embodiments can be switched to a plurality of forms that differ in the operation stroke of the operation button 721. In this embodiment, the eleventh special effect, which is an operation-responsive effect that utilizes the form switching function of the effect button device 40, is a distinctive feature.

The 11th special effect is an effect that creates a tactile difference by varying the operating resistance (resistance torque) when the operating button 721 is operated in accordance with the operation suggestion after the form of the effect button device 40 is changed to the second form, and is broadly divided into an 11th special effect A in which the operating resistance is set to be relatively small, and an 11th special effect B in which the operating resistance is set to be relatively large (see the schematic diagram in Figure 137 (a)).

When the effect button device 40 is switched to the second form, the button unit 720 (movable base 741) is held at the maximum protruding position (upper limit position) by the static torque (holding torque) of the stepping motor 753. As described in the other embodiments, the static torque of the stepping motor 753 is sufficiently large compared to the biasing force of the coil spring 745 that supports the operation button 721. Therefore, when the operation button 721 is operated while the effect button device 40 is in the second form, the operation button 721 first descends with the coil spring 745 compressed, and after the operation button 721 abuts against the movable base 741, the operation button 721 and the movable base 741 descend together against the resistance torque of the stepping motor 753.

As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 137(a), the entire section (first detection position CP1 to thirteenth detection position CP13) in which the operation button 721 and the movable base 741 descend together is not a variable resistance torque section, but is broadly divided into a variable resistance torque section (fourth detection position CP4 to thirteenth detection position CP13) and a non-variable resistance torque section (first detection position CP1 to fourth detection position CP4). Details will be described later, but this non-variable section is a speed detection section that detects the displacement speed of the operation button 721, and the resistance torque generated in the stepping motor 753 is corrected according to the speed detected in this speed detection section. Below, the process for the eleventh special effect (eleventh special effect process) executed by the MPU 912 of the notification/effect control device 143 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIG. 138 to FIG. 140. The eleventh special effect process is a process executed by the MPU 912 as part of regular processing.

(11th special effect processing)
As shown in FIG. 138, in the 11th special effect processing, first, in step S4901, it is determined whether or not the game round corresponds to the 11th special effect. If a negative determination is made in step S4901, the 11th special effect processing ends as is. If a positive determination is made in step S4901, the process proceeds to step S4902. In step S4902, the 11th special effect main processing is executed, and in the following step S4903, the torque variable processing is executed. Details of the 11th special effect main processing and the torque variable processing will be described later.

In step S4904, it is determined whether or not the operation of operation button 721 is currently in a valid period. If a negative determination is made in step S4904, the process proceeds to step S4905. In step S4905, it is determined whether or not the timing for the grace period for switching to the second form has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S4905, the process proceeds to step S4906, where it is determined whether or not it is the timing to start switching to the second form. If it is not the timing to start switching to the second form, a negative determination is made in step S4906, and the process for the eleventh special effect is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S4907, the process proceeds to step S4907.

In step S4907, a process for switching to the second form is executed. Specifically, the output of a drive signal to the stepping motor 753 is started. After that, in step S4908, a process for setting a switching grace period is executed, and the process for the eleventh special effect is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S4905, if a positive determination is made in step S4905, i.e., if the timing has come to pass for the grace period for switching to the second mode, the process proceeds to step S4909. In step S4909, a process for setting the operation valid period is executed. In the following step S4910, a process for starting an operation suggestion is executed.

In the operation suggestion start process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled to output a message encouraging an operation (for example, a voice such as "Press the button") from the speaker unit 27, and an operation suggestion start command is output to the display control device 142. Based on receiving the operation suggestion start command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 to display on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 a message such as "Press!!" for operation suggestion, a pattern imitating a button with an expanded operation stroke, and a period indicator showing the remaining valid period.

In the next step S4911, the output of the drive signal to the stepping motor 753 is terminated, and the movable base 741 (operation button 721) is stopped. More specifically, the torque generated in the stepping motor 753 is switched from drive torque to stationary torque. As a result, when the operation button 721 is operated, a resistance torque that impedes the operation is generated, but even if the movable base 741 descends against the resistance torque, it is prevented from returning to the position of the movable base 741. In other words, the active operation of the operation button 721 is terminated by switching from drive torque to stationary torque.

In the following step S4912, it is determined whether or not the current 11th special effect corresponds to 11th special effect B. If a negative determination is made in step S4912, the processing for this 11th special effect is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S4912, a torque variable flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of RAM 914, and then the processing for this 11th special effect is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S4904, if a positive judgment is made in step S4904, i.e., if it is within the valid operation period, the process proceeds to step S4914. In step S4914, it is determined whether or not the valid operation period has elapsed. If a negative judgment is made in step S4914, the process proceeds to step S4915. In step S4915, it is determined whether or not the operation button 721 has reached the first detection position CP1 based on the detection information (detection signal) from the detection sensor 791. If a positive judgment is made in step S4915, the process proceeds to step S4916.

In this embodiment, the operation itself is considered to have been validly accepted based on reaching the first detection position CP1, and there is no difference in whether or not an operation-responsive effect occurs depending on whether or not there is a further pressing operation. However, by continuing the operation after reaching the first detection position CP1, the player can guess whether the current effect is the 11th special effect A (low expectation) or the 11th special effect B (high expectation) based on the difference in operation resistance.

In step S4916, a partial operation suggestion termination process is executed. In the partial operation suggestion termination process, an operation suggestion partial termination command is output to the display control device 142. The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the symbol display device 253 based on the reception of the operation suggestion partial termination command, and terminates the display of the indicator showing the remaining valid period. Note that the operation suggestion message and the symbol resembling a button continue to be displayed.

In the following step S4917, a linkage flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914, and in step S4918, a waiting time setting process is executed, after which the eleventh special effect process is terminated. In the waiting time setting process, a predetermined value (equivalent to 1 sec) is set in a waiting counter provided in the various counter area 932 of the RAM 914. The value of this waiting counter is decremented by 1 each time the eleventh special effect process is executed.

Returning to the explanation of step S4914, if a positive judgment is made in step S4914, that is, if the timing is such that the operation valid period has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S4919. In step S4919, an operation suggestion end process is executed. In the operation suggestion end process, an operation suggestion end command is output to the display control device 142. Based on receiving the operation suggestion end command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the symbol display device 253 to end the display of the operation suggestion message, the button-like image, and the indicator showing the remaining valid period.

After that, in step S4920, a process for switching to the first form is executed, and the process for the eleventh special effect is terminated. The eleventh special effect shown in this embodiment is configured so that the third movable effect device 803 operates when the operation button 721 is operated in accordance with the operation suggestion, but if the operation button 721 is not operated within the valid period, the operation of the third movable effect device 803 is avoided.

Next, the 11th special effect main processing of step S4902 (see FIG. 138) will be described with reference to FIG. 139.

(11th Special Effects Main Processing)
In the 11th special effect main process, first, in step S5001, it is determined whether or not the third movable effect device 803 is in operation. If a negative determination is made in step S5001, the process proceeds to step S5002. In step S5002, it is determined whether or not a linkage flag is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. If a negative determination is made in step S5002, the 11th special effect main process is terminated.

If a positive determination is made in step S5002, the process proceeds to step S5003. In step S5003, the value of the standby counter is referenced to determine whether or not the standby period set in step S4918 has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S5003, the process executes a position determination process in step S5004. Specifically, the position of the button unit 720 (more specifically, the movable base 741) is determined based on detection information from the rotary encoder 792. Specifically, the position of the button unit 720 is determined to be one of the first detection position CP1 to the thirteenth detection position CP13. If the button unit 720 has not reached the thirteenth detection position CP13, the process proceeds to step S5006.

In step S5006, the operation process of the third movable performance device 803 is executed. As a result, the movable decoration of the third movable performance device 803 emits light and descends from the standby position to the performance position. After that, in step S5007, the linkage flag stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914 is erased, and in step S5008, the operation flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. Then, in step S5009, the operation suggestion complete end process is executed, and then the eleventh special performance main process is terminated. In the operation suggestion complete end process, an operation suggestion complete end command is output to the display control device 142. Based on receiving the operation suggestion complete end command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 to hide the operation suggestion message and button-like pattern that had been continuously displayed.

Returning to the explanation of step S5003, if a positive judgment is made in step S5003, i.e., if the standby period has elapsed, steps S5006 to S5009 are executed, and then the 11th special effect main processing is terminated. In other words, in the 11th special effect shown in this embodiment, the operation condition is met when the operation button 721 is pressed to the first detection position CP1 in accordance with the operation suggestion, and if the 13th detection position CP13 has not been reached, the third movable effect device 803 is activated after the standby period has elapsed.

Returning to the explanation of step S5001, if a positive judgment is made in step S5001, i.e., if the third movable effect device 803 is in operation (if an operation flag is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of RAM 914), the process proceeds to step S5010. In step S5010, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the 11th special effect. If a negative judgment is made in step S5010, the 11th special effect main processing ends as is. If a positive judgment is made in step S5010, the 11th special effect end processing is executed in step S5011, and then the 11th special effect main processing ends.

Next, the torque variable processing of step S4903 (see FIG. 138) will be described with reference to FIG. 140.

(Variable torque processing)
In the torque variation process, first, in step S5101, it is determined whether or not a torque variation flag is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. If a negative determination is made in step S5101, the torque variation process ends as is. If a positive determination is made in step S5101, the process proceeds to step S5102. In step S5102, a process of identifying the position of the button unit 720 (more specifically, the movable base 741) is executed. Specifically, it is determined at which of the first detection position CP1 to the thirteenth detection position CP13 the button unit 720 is located, based on detection information from the rotary encoder 79.

In the next step S5103, it is determined whether or not there has been a change in the position of the button unit 720 (more specifically, the movable base 741). If a negative determination is made in step S5103, the torque variation process ends. If a positive determination is made in step S5103, the process proceeds to step S5104. In step S5104, it is determined whether or not a detection condition for the displacement speed of the button unit 720, in other words, the operation speed, is met. Specifically, the detection condition is met when the button unit 720 passes between the first detection position CP1 and the fourth detection position CP4. If a positive determination is made in step S5104, a speed correction value determination process is performed in step S5105. The speed correction value determination process is a process for determining a correction value for correcting the magnitude of the resistance torque according to the detected operation speed.

After that, in step S5106, it is determined whether a correction value has been set, and if a correction value has not been set, in step S5107, a first resistance torque setting process is executed, and then this torque variable process is terminated. If a correction value has been set, in step S5108, a second resistance torque setting process is executed, and then this torque variable process is terminated.

The first resistance torque setting process corresponds to the speed detection section, and the resistance torque is set so that the resistance torque is basically constant, and the stepping motor 753 is controlled based on this set resistance torque. In contrast, the second resistance torque setting process corresponds to outside the speed detection section, and the resistance torque is specified to increase smoothly from the fourth detection position CP4 to the thirteenth detection position CP13. Here, the torque curve indicating the torque increase pattern is changed by setting the above correction value. Below, a supplementary explanation is given of the relationship between the position (protrusion amount) of the operation button 721, the detection speed, and the resistance torque, with reference to the schematic diagram in FIG. 141.

As shown in FIG. 141, the magnitude of the resistance torque is determined regardless of the operation speed until the speed detection section is passed. In this speed detection section, there is no difference in the resistance torque between the 11th special effect A and the 11th special effect B, making it difficult to distinguish which effect is being performed from the resistance (tactile sensation) from the operation button 721.

After passing through the speed detection section, the magnitude of the resistance torque is adjusted according to the speed detected when passing through the speed detection section. Specifically, a correction value is calculated from the detected speed in the speed detection section, and the generated resistance torque (target value) is changed based on this correction value. Specifically, if the detected speed is lower than the reference speed, the resistance torque is corrected to be smaller than the reference resistance torque, and if the detected speed is higher than the reference speed, the resistance torque is corrected to be larger than the reference torque. The relationship between the detected speed and the resistance torque is determined by referring to a map for determining the correction value stored in ROM 913.

As shown in this embodiment, if the position of the operation button 721 in the operation direction (button unit 720) is identified when the operation button 721 (button unit 720) is displaced in the operation direction, and the operation resistance is varied based on the identified position, the tactile change that occurs in the hand operating the operation button 721 makes it possible to create innovative effects that have not been seen before.

For transforming type effect button devices, the occurrence of transformation (second form) often means an opportunity. For these reasons, in the second form, there is a high possibility that the operation button 721 will be operated forcefully. In such an operation, there is concern that the impact on the hand and the effect button device 40 will be large. In this regard, as shown in this embodiment, if the configuration is such that the operation resistance is amplified so that the resistance is greater on the far side in the operation direction, it is possible to mitigate the impact during operation and contribute to protecting the player's hands and the effect button device 40.

For hardening type effect button devices, if the hardness is changed drastically at the back side, there is a high possibility that the player will mistakenly believe that he has reached the backmost position. In this regard, if the operation resistance is configured to increase at a greater rate at the back side than at the front side, as shown in this embodiment, the operation resistance will change smoothly, and the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suppressed. In addition, configuring the operation resistance to increase at a greater rate at the back side than at the front side is also preferable in terms of mitigating the impact when the operation button 721 is operated forcefully.

In addition, this embodiment allows you to enjoy the change in the operation resistance of the operation detection, while preventing the operation resistance from increasing, making it difficult to reach the operation detection position.

Twelfth embodiment
One of the features of this embodiment is that the effect button device 40 is designed to improve the convenience of the player. The following describes the design, focusing on the configuration that differs from the above-mentioned embodiments, with reference to Fig. 142. Fig. 142 is a schematic diagram showing the effect button device 40. Please refer to the first embodiment for the basic structure of the effect button device 40.

In this embodiment, the basic form of the effect button device 40 is configured so that the protrusion level can be changed by the player at will. Specifically, by driving the stepping motor 753 to adjust the height position of the movable base 741, the protrusion level can be changed to a total of 12 levels, from protrusion level LV0 to protrusion level LV11. Note that the protrusion level LV11 is specified so that the operation button 721 is lower than the maximum protrusion position to leave room for expansion of the operation stroke of the operation button 721.

When considering the amount of eye movement from the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 and ease of hand placement, the preferred height position of the operation button 721 (operation surface) may differ depending on the player's physique, etc. Being able to change the height position as described above can contribute to improving convenience for the player.

The basic form of the effect button device 40 is the form in which the effect button device 40 is maintained (resident) except when the effect of extending the operation stroke of the operation button 721 is being performed, and when the operation stroke is extended, the operation button 721 rises from this basic form, thereby switching to another form. It can also be said that the basic form is the form that is maintained for the longest period of time, at least in the first normal game state.

Height position adjustment processing executed by the MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143 to achieve the above-mentioned height adjustment will be described below with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 143. The height position adjustment processing is processing executed as part of regular processing in the first normal game state.

(Height position adjustment process)
In the height position adjustment process, first, in step S5201, it is determined whether or not a height position adjustment flag is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. If a negative determination is made in step S5201, the process proceeds to step S5202. In step S5202, it is determined whether or not a game is being played. Specifically, if a game is being played or a game ball is being launched, it is determined that a game is being played, and if a game is not being played and a game ball is not being launched, it is determined that a game is not being played.

If a positive judgment is made in step S5202, this height position adjustment process is terminated. If a negative judgment is made in step S5202, the process proceeds to step S5203. In step S5203, it is determined whether or not an operation to start the height position adjustment has been performed. Specifically, a cross key 41 (see FIG. 1) is provided in the upper bulge 28 of the front door frame 14 along with the performance button device 40. This cross key 41 is connected to the notification/performance control device 143, and operation information from the cross key 41 is input to the notification/performance control device 143. In the judgment process of step S5203, it is determined whether or not an operation to start the height position adjustment (more specifically, a long press of the center button of the cross key 41) has been performed based on the operation information from the cross key 41.

If a negative judgment is made in step S5203, this height position adjustment process is terminated. If a positive judgment is made in step S5203, the process proceeds to step S5204. In step S5204, it is judged whether or not the current protrusion level is protrusion level LV0. If a positive judgment is made in step S5204, an operation check process is executed in step S5205. Specifically, the stepping motor 753 is operated within a range in which the protrusion level (height position) of the operation button 721 does not change (see FIG. 53), and it is checked whether the stepping motor 753 is operating normally.

If it is confirmed that the stepping motor 753 is operating normally, a positive judgment is made in step S5206 and the process proceeds to step S5207. In step S5207, a height position adjustment flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914 and the height position adjustment process ends. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step S5204, a height position adjustment flag is set in step S5207 and the height position adjustment process ends.

If the stepping motor 753 is not operating normally, i.e., if the height position adjustment function is not functioning properly, a negative judgment is made in step S5205 and the height position adjustment process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S5201, if a positive judgment is made in step S5201, i.e., if a height position adjustment flag is stored in the various flags storage area 933 of the RAM 914, the process proceeds to step S5208. In step S5208, it is determined whether or not a game round has started. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a fluctuation start command has been received from the main control device 162. If a negative judgment is made in step S5208, the process proceeds to step S5209.

In step S5209, it is determined whether the height position is being changed or whether the player is changing the height position by pressing the operation button 721, etc. If a negative determination is made in step S5209, the process proceeds to step S5210. In step S5210, it is determined whether the timing has passed the waiting reference period. In the height position adjustment mode shown in this embodiment, the height position adjustment mode is configured to end if the waiting reference period (5 sec) has passed since the protrusion level was changed without any height position adjustment operation (operation of the up and down buttons of the cross key 41) being performed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S5210, the process proceeds to step S5211. In step S5211, it is determined whether or not a height position adjustment operation has been performed. If a negative judgment is made in step S5211, the height position adjustment process ends. If a positive judgment is made in step S52111, the drive control process is executed in step S5212, and then the height position adjustment process ends.

In the drive control process of step S5212, if the up button of the cross key 41 is operated, the stepping motor 753 is controlled to raise the protrusion level by "1", and if the down button of the cross key 41 is operated, the stepping motor 753 is controlled to lower the protrusion level by "1". Also, if the protrusion level has changed due to the player operating the operation button 721 for trial, etc., the stepping motor 753 is controlled to return it to the protrusion level before the change.

Returning to the explanation of step S5210, if a positive judgment is made in step S5210, that is, if the standby reference period has elapsed without an adjustment operation being performed, the process proceeds to step S5215. In step S5215, it is judged whether the protrusion level is other than protrusion level LV0. If a positive judgment is made in step S5215, the current height position (protrusion level) is determined and stored as the reference position in step S5216. In the following step S5217, a position control flag is set in the various flags storage area 933 of RAM 914, and an adjustment completion notification process is executed in step S5218. This clearly indicates to the player that the height position adjustment has been completed. Thereafter, in step S5219, the height position adjustment in progress flag is erased, and this height position adjustment process is terminated. If a negative judgment is made in step S5215, the processes of steps S5218 and S5219 are executed, and then this height position adjustment process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S5209, if a positive judgment is made in step S5209, that is, if the height position is being changed or the player is changing the height position by pressing the operation button 721, etc., the process proceeds to step S5213. In step S5213, it is judged whether or not the position (protruding level) specified by operation of the cross key 41 has been reached. If a negative judgment is made in step S521, this height position adjustment process is terminated as is in order to continue drive control of the stepping motor 753. If a positive judgment is made in step S5213, a stationary control process is executed in step S5214, and then this height position adjustment process is terminated. By executing this process, the torque generated in the stepping motor 753 is switched to stationary torque.

Returning to the explanation of step S5208, if a positive judgment is made in step S5208, i.e., if it is time to start a game round, forced termination processing is executed in step S5220, and then this height position adjustment processing is terminated. In this forced termination processing, various flags for adjusting the height position are cleared, and the protrusion level is forced to switch to protrusion level LV0.

As already explained, the static torque generated in the stepping motor 753 is sufficiently larger than the biasing force of the coil spring 745, so that when the player operates the operation button 721, the coil spring 745 first deforms, causing the operation button 721 to descend. However, if the operation is performed forcefully, the operating force may exceed the static torque and the button unit 720 (movable base 741) may descend. If a position shift occurs in this way, the function is provided to automatically return the button to the position before the shift occurred (the above-mentioned reference position). Below, the automatic return process (position control process) executed by the MPU 912 of the notification/notification/performance control device 143 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 144. The position control process is executed as part of regular processing by the MPU 912.

(Position control process)
In the position control process, first, in step S5301, it is determined whether or not the position control flag is stored in the various flags storage area 933 of the RAM 914. If a negative determination is made in step S5301, the position control process ends. If a positive determination is made in step S5301, the process proceeds to step S5302. In step S5302, it is determined whether or not a return operation to the reference position is in progress. If a negative determination is made in step S5302, the process proceeds to step S5303.

In step S5303, the current height position of the button unit 720 (movable base 741) is identified based on information from the rotary encoder 792. In the following step S5304, it is determined whether the identified current height position is out of the reference position. If a negative determination is made in step S5304, the position control process ends. If a positive determination is made in step S5304, a return control process is executed in step S5305, and then the position control process ends. In the return control process, the stepping motor 753 is driven to move the button unit 720 towards the reference position.

Returning to the explanation of step S5302, if a positive judgment is made in step S5302, i.e., if the return operation to the reference position is in progress, the process proceeds to step S5306. In step S5306, it is determined whether or not the retraction has been completed. In other words, it is determined whether or not the current height position and the reference position match. If a negative judgment is made in step S5306, the position control process is terminated. If a positive judgment is made in step S5306, the process proceeds to step S5307. In step S5307, a stationary control process is executed. Specifically, the stepping motor 753 is stopped, and the torque generated in the stepping motor 753 is switched from driving torque to stationary torque.

After that, in step S5308, the execution frequency of the return control is calculated. That is, the period for which the return control in step S5305 is executed per unit time (for example, one hour) is calculated from past accumulated information. Then, in step S5309, a torque correction process is executed based on the calculation result in step S5308. In the torque correction process, if the execution frequency of the return control is higher than the judgment reference frequency, a process is executed to increase the resistance torque (driving torque or stationary torque) generated by the stepping motor 753. It is specified that the increase in the resistance torque increases as the execution frequency of the return control increases.

As described above in detail, in this embodiment, convenience is improved by allowing the player to arbitrarily change the height position (protruding level) of the effect button device 40. Here, no matter how the height position is adjusted, the stroke until operation of the operation button 721 is detected by the detection sensor 791 remains constant (approximately 10 mm), and adjusting the height position does not result in an unnecessary increase in the operation stroke (see X0, X5, and X11 in FIG. 145). This is preferable in terms of increasing satisfaction with the height position adjustment function.

<Modification 1>
In the twelfth embodiment, the maximum protrusion position is excluded from the adjustment range, but it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the maximum protrusion position is included.

<Modification 2>
The condition for the forced termination may be the start of a game round. In this case, however, it is preferable that the operation response effect (particularly the operation response effect related to the change of the operation stroke) is not generated for the game round that triggered the forced termination.

<Modification 3>
In the twelfth embodiment, the protrusion level of the operation button 721 in the basic mode can be changed by operating the cross key 41, but there is no need to provide a separate operation unit for adjustment. For example, it is also possible to configure the height position adjustment to be performed based on the operation of the operation button 721 when the operation button 721 is pressed and held while not being played. More specifically, it is preferable to configure the mode to be changed to adjust the height position by a long press operation, and then to change the protrusion level by one step each time the operation button 721 is operated.

Thirteenth embodiment
As already explained, the effect button device 40 shown in each of the above embodiments can be switched to a plurality of forms that differ in the operation stroke of the operation button 721. In this embodiment, a twelfth special effect, which is an operation-responsive effect that utilizes the form switching function of the effect button device 40, is a distinctive feature.

As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 146, the 12th special performance is roughly divided into a 12th special performance A in which the third movable performance device 803 operates based on a specific single operation after the performance button device 40 switches from the first form to the second form, and a 12th special performance B in which the third movable performance device 803 operates based on a specific single operation after the performance button device 40 switches from the first form to the second form (repeated operation). In addition, the 12th special performance A and the 12th special performance B are different in that the luminous color of the movable ornament of the third movable performance device 803 is limited to white in the 12th special performance A, and the luminous color of the movable ornament of the third movable performance device 803 can change from white to blue or red based on the repeated operation in the 12th special performance B. In addition, when comparing 12th special effect A and 12th special effect B, 12th special effect B has a higher probability of transitioning to the special game state, and the light colors of the movable decorations are differentiated so that the probability of transitioning to the special game state increases in the order of white < blue < red.

The configuration for the 12th special effect will be described below, focusing on the differences from the above-mentioned embodiments. First, the processing for the 12th special effect (processing for the 12th special effect) executed by the MPU 912 of the notification/effect control device 143 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 147 to 150. The processing for the 12th special effect is processing executed by the MPU 912 as part of regular processing.

(12th special effect processing)
As shown in Fig. 147, in the 12th special effect process, first, in step S5401, it is determined whether or not the current game round corresponds to the 12th special effect. If a negative determination is made in step S5401, the 12th special effect process is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S5401, the process proceeds to step S5402.

In step S54, it is determined whether it is the timing to start the first half of the 12th special effect. If a positive determination is made in step S5402, the process proceeds to step S5403, where a process for starting a guidance effect is executed to draw the player's attention to the effect button device 40. In the guidance effect start process, the speaker unit 27 starts outputting a sound effect for switching to the second form, and a guidance effect command is output to the display control device 142. Based on receiving the guidance effect command, the display control device 142 starts displaying a video for the guidance effect on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253. The video for the guidance effect is an animated video in which the effect button device 40 switches from the first form to the second form. In addition, in the guidance effect start process of step S5403, the third movable effect device 803 is switched from an off state to a lit state or a flashing state.

After the processing of step S5403 is executed, or if a negative judgment is made in step S5402, the process proceeds to step S5404. In step S5404, it is judged whether or not it is during the first half part. If a positive judgment is made in step S5404, processing for the first half part is executed in step S5405, and then the 12th special effect processing is terminated. If a negative judgment is made in step S5404, processing for the second half part is executed in step S5406, and then the 12th special effect processing is terminated.

(Processing for the first half part)
As shown in FIG. 114, in the processing for the first half part, first, in step S5501, it is determined whether or not it is within the valid period for the rapid-fire operation. If a negative determination is made in step S5501, the processing proceeds to step S5502. In step S5502, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the switching grace period for switching the effect button device 40 to the second form has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S5502, the processing proceeds to step S5503. In step S5503, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to start switching to the second form. If a negative determination is made in step S5503, the processing for the first half part is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step S5503, a switching process is executed in step S5504 to switch the effect button device 40 to the second form. Thereafter, a process for setting a switching grace period is executed in step S5505, and the process for the first half part is terminated. The period required for switching the effect button device 40 from the first form to the second form is 0.5 sec. The switching grace period is set to be longer than this required period. Note that the above-mentioned guidance effect is completed when the grace period has elapsed.

Returning to the explanation of step S5502, if a positive judgment is made in step S5502, i.e., if the timing for the grace period for switching to the second form has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S5506. In step S5506, it is determined whether the switching to the second form has been completed. If a positive judgment is made in step S5506, the process proceeds to step S5507. In step S5507, it is determined whether the current game round corresponds to the 12th special effect A or the 12th special effect B. If it corresponds to the 12th special effect A, a positive judgment is made in step S5507, and the process proceeds to step S5508.

In step S5508, a process for setting the validity period of the specific single operation is performed, and in step S5509, a process for starting a suggestion of the specific single operation is executed. In the process for starting a suggestion of the specific single operation, the speaker unit 27 is controlled to output a message (e.g., a voice such as "Press the button") that prompts the user to perform an operation from the speaker unit 27, and an operation suggestion start command is output to the display control device 142. Based on receiving the operation suggestion start command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 to display on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 a message such as "One hit!!" for suggesting an operation, a pattern that resembles a button in the second form, and a period indicator that indicates the remaining validity period. In other words, the above-mentioned guidance performance ends as the grace period elapses, and the operation suggestion begins.

In the next step S5510, the output of the drive signal to the stepping motor 753 is stopped, and the generated torque is switched from drive torque to stationary torque. After that, in step S5511, the second half part transition flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914, and the first half part processing is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S5507, if the current game round corresponds to the 12th special effect B, a negative judgment is made in step S507 and the process proceeds to step S5512. In step S5512, a process for setting the effective period of the repeated operation is performed. This effective period is specified to be longer than the effective period of the specific single operation. In the following step S5513, a process for starting a suggestion of a repeated operation is executed. In the process for starting a suggestion of a repeated operation, the speaker unit 27 is controlled to output a message (for example, a voice such as "press the button repeatedly") that prompts an operation from the speaker unit 27, and an operation suggestion start command is output to the display control device 142. Based on receiving the operation suggestion start command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 to display a message such as "Repeat!!" for operation suggestion on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253, a pattern imitating a button in the second form, and a period indicator indicating the remaining effective period. In other words, the above-mentioned guidance effect ends with the lapse of the grace period, and the operation suggestion starts. Additionally, the display screen 253a displays an operation indicator whose display state changes depending on the number of times the operation button 721 is operated.

In the next step S5514, the output of the drive signal to the stepping motor 753 is stopped, and the generated torque is switched from the drive torque to the static torque. Here, the static torque set in step S5514 is specified to be larger than the static torque set in the above step S5511. This prevents the movable base 741 from sinking when repeated hits are performed.

Returning to the explanation of step S5506, if a negative determination is made in step S5506, i.e., if the switching to the second form is not completed within the grace period, the process proceeds to step S5515, where the switching to the first form is executed. In other words, the switching to the second form is canceled.

Then, in step S5516, an alternative performance execution process is performed, and the processing for the first half of the process is terminated. The alternative performance execution process results in the execution of an alternative performance that does not correspond to the operation of the performance button device 40.

Returning to the explanation of step S5501, if a positive judgment is made in step S5501, i.e., if the repeated operation is valid, the process proceeds to step S5517, and the repeated operation process is executed. The repeated operation process will be explained below with reference to FIG. 149.

(Processing for repeated operations)
In the process for rapid operation, first, in step S5601, it is determined whether or not the valid period for rapid operation has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S5601, the process proceeds to step S5602. In step S5602, it is determined whether or not operation button 721 has been operated based on detection information from detection sensor 791. If a negative determination is made in step S5602, the process for rapid operation is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S5602, the process proceeds to step S5603.

In step S5603, an operation reception notification process is executed. In the reception notification process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled to output a sound effect from the speaker unit 27 indicating that an operation has been validly accepted, and an operation reception command for repeated operations is output to the display control device 142. The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 changes the display mode of the operation indicator based on the reception of this operation reception command for repeated operations.

In the following step S5604, it is determined whether the number of times the operation button 721 has been operated has reached the reference number of times to change. In this embodiment, when it is determined at the start of a game round that the 12th special effect B will be performed, the number of operations that will trigger a change in the light color of the third movable effect device 803 (reference number of times to change) and the number of operations that will trigger the completion of the continuous operation (reference number of times to end) are determined. If a positive determination is made in step S5604, the process proceeds to step S5605 and a light color change control process is executed to change the light color of the third movable effect device 803 (more specifically, the movable decorative body).

After executing the change process of step S5606, or if a negative judgment is made in step S5604, the process proceeds to step S5606. In step S5606, it is judged whether or not the number of times the operation button 721 has been operated has reached the termination reference number. If a negative judgment is made in step S5606, the process for rapid operation is terminated. If a positive judgment is made in step S5606, the process proceeds to step S5607.

In step S5607, a process for displaying the completion of a rapid-fire operation is performed, and in the following step S5608, a process for ending a suggestion for a rapid-fire operation is performed. As a result, a message indicating that the rapid-fire operation has been completed (for example, the text "Operation Completed") is displayed in place of the message suggesting the operation on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253. After that, the message is hidden along with the display of a picture resembling a button and an indicator showing the remaining valid period.

After executing the processing of step S5608, the process proceeds to step S5609. In step S5609, a rapid-fire operation completion flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. In the following step S5610, a transition flag for the latter half part is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914, and the process proceeds to step S5611. In step S5611, a delay period is set in the delay timer counter provided in the various counter area 932 of the RAM 914, and the rapid-fire operation processing ends.

The effect button device 40 shown in this embodiment is set so that the holding torque (resistance torque) of the stepping motor 753 in the second form is sufficiently larger than the biasing force of the coil spring 745. Therefore, when the operation button 721 is operated in the second form, the coil spring 745 is compressed first, thereby allowing the operation button 721 to descend. Here, after the operation button 721 reaches the operation detection position and reaches the movable base 741, the operation force exceeds the holding torque, and the operation button 721 and the movable base 741 descend together. In this way, when the movable base 741 itself descends, the stepping motor 753 is driven and controlled so as to return the movable base 741 to the upper limit position, which takes a certain amount of time. In this way, the second form of the effect button device 40 is not a completely fixed form, and it is configured to take a certain amount of time to return to the second form, so that the delay timer counter is used to buy time to return the effect button device 40 to the second form when moving from a continuous operation to a specific operation. In other words, the value set in the delay timer counter in step S5611 is set to be longer than the time required to switch from the first form to the second form.

Returning to the explanation of step S5601, if a positive judgment is made in step S5601, that is, if the valid period of the repeated operation has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S5612. In step S5612, it is judged whether or not the operation button 721 has been operated at least once during the valid period. If a negative judgment is made in step S5612, the process proceeds to step S5613, where a process of ending the suggestion of the repeated operation is executed. In the process of ending the suggestion of the repeated operation, a command to end the suggestion of the repeated operation is output to the display control device 142. Based on the reception of the suggestion end command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 to end the display of the message for the operation suggestion, the image resembling the button, and the indicator showing the remaining valid period.

In the following step S5614, a process for switching to the first form is executed. After that, in step S5615, a process for executing an alternative performance is executed, and then the process for rapid-fire operation is terminated. In the alternative performance, regardless of the result of a win/loss, etc., no linked performance is executed by the third movable performance device 803.

If a positive judgment is made in step S5612, i.e., if the operation button 721 has been operated at least once, a positive judgment is made in step S5612, and the process proceeds to step S5607, and after executing each of the processes in steps S5607 to S5611, this process for rapid operation is terminated.

Next, we will explain the processing for the second half part with reference to Figure 150.

(Processing for the latter part)
In the processing for the latter part, first, in step S5701, it is determined whether or not the specific single operation is in a valid period. If a negative determination is made in step S5701, the process proceeds to step S5702. In step S5702, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned rapid-fire operation completion flag is stored in the various flags storage area 933 of the RAM 914. If a negative determination is made in step S5702, the processing for the latter part is terminated as is. If a positive determination is made in step S5702, the process proceeds to step S5703.

In step S5703, it is determined whether the value of the delay timer counter set in step S5611 is "0". If the determination in step S5703 is negative, the processing for the latter part is terminated. If the determination in step S5703 is positive, the processing proceeds to step S5704.

In step S5704, a process for setting the validity period of the specific single operation is performed, and in the following step S5705, a process for starting a suggestion of the specific single operation is executed. In the process for starting a suggestion of the specific single operation, the speaker unit 27 is controlled to output a message (e.g., a voice such as "Press the button") that prompts the user to perform an operation from the speaker unit 27, and an operation suggestion start command is output to the display control device 142. Based on receiving the operation suggestion start command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 to display on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 a message such as "One hit!!" for suggesting an operation, a pattern that resembles a button in the second form, and a period indicator that indicates the remaining validity period. In other words, the above-mentioned guidance performance ends as the grace period elapses, and the operation suggestion begins.

In the next step S5706, the static torque of the stepping motor 753 is reduced. In other words, the static torque is switched from large to small. After that, in step S5707, the continuous operation completion flag stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914 is erased, and the processing for the latter part is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S5701, if a positive judgment is made in step S5701, i.e., if the specific one-off operation is within its valid period, the process proceeds to step S5708. In step S5708, it is determined whether or not the valid period of the specific one-off operation has elapsed. If a negative judgment is made in step S5708, the process proceeds to step S5709. In step S5709, it is determined whether or not the operation button 721 has been operated based on the detection information from the detection sensor 791. If a negative judgment is made in step S5709, the process for the latter part is terminated. If a positive judgment is made in step S5709, the process proceeds to step S5710.

In step S5710, a process for notifying the acceptance of a specific single operation is executed, and in step S5711, a process for ending a suggestion of a specific single operation is executed. In the process for notifying the acceptance, the speaker unit 27 is controlled to output a sound effect from the speaker unit 27 indicating that the operation has been validly accepted. In the process for ending the suggestion of an operation, a command for ending a suggestion of a specific single operation is output to the display control device 142. Based on the reception of the suggestion end command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 to end the display of the message for suggesting an operation, the image for suggesting an operation indicating a button, and the indicator showing the remaining valid period.

Then, in step S5712, a specific single-operation corresponding performance execution process is performed. In the specific single-operation corresponding performance execution process, the third movable performance device 803 is moved toward the center of the display screen 253a while being maintained in a lit or flashing state, and an effect display that emphasizes the movable ornament of the third movable performance device 803 is performed on the display screen 253a. After that, in step S5713, the second half part transition flag is erased from the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914, and the process for the second half part is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S5708, if a positive judgment is made in step S5708, that is, if the valid period of the specific single operation has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S5714. In step S5714, a suggestion end process for the specific single operation is executed. In this suggestion end process, a suggestion end command for the first operation is output to the display control device 142. Based on receiving the suggestion end command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the symbol display device 253 to end the display of the operation suggestion message, the button-like image, and the indicator showing the remaining valid period.

In the following step S5715, a switching process is executed to switch the effect button device 40 to the first form. After that, in step S3619, an alternative effect is executed, and then the process for this first part is terminated. In the alternative effect, regardless of the winning/losing result, the linked effect is not executed by the third movable effect device 803.

The following provides a supplementary explanation of the flow of the 12th special effect (specifically, the 12th special effect B) with reference to the schematic diagrams of Figs. 151 to 152. Figs. 151(a) and 152(a) are schematic diagrams showing the display screen 253a and the third movable effect device 803, and Figs. 151(b) and 152(b) are schematic diagrams showing the effect button device 40. Note that in the example shown in Figs. 151 and 152, the number of times the game is played in which the 12th special effect (specifically, the 12th special effect B) is executed corresponds to a winning result, and the 12th special effect progresses in the order of Fig. 151(1) → Fig. 151(2) → Fig. 151(3) → Fig. 151(4) → Fig. 152(5) → Fig. 152(6) → Fig. 152(7) → Fig. 152(8).

In the example shown in FIG. 151, the 12th special effect (12th special effect B) is started after the variable display mode of the patterns on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 becomes a reach display. With the start of the 12th special effect, the mode of the effect button device 40 switches from the first mode to the second mode. In addition, the display screen 253a displays the message "Press repeatedly!!" to suggest rapid operation, a pattern imitating a button with an extended operation stroke, a period indicator showing the remaining valid period, and an operation indicator whose display mode changes depending on the number of times the operation button 721 is operated. In addition, the movable decoration of the third movable effect device 803 emits white light in the standby position.

When the operation button 721 is pressed repeatedly in response to a suggestion for a rapid operation, the display state of the operation indicator changes according to the number of times pressed. Then, when the number of operations reaches the above-mentioned reference number of changes, the color of the movable decoration of the third movable performance device 803 changes from white to blue. In other words, the first half of the 12th special performance functions as a chance-up performance by pressing the button repeatedly.

After that, when the number of operations reaches the end reference number, the operation indicator becomes MAX, and the display screen 253a displays the message "Ready" indicating that the operation is complete. After that, after a short interval, the message "One hit!!" is displayed, suggesting a specific single operation.

When the operation button 721 is operated in response to the suggestion of the specific single operation, the movable decoration of the third movable performance device 803 descends from the standby position to the performance position, and an effect emphasizing the movable decoration is displayed on the display screen 253a. After that, the movable decoration returns from the performance position to the standby position, and the pattern combination corresponding to the winning result is displayed (confirmed display) on the pay line on the display screen 253a.

As shown in this feature, if the effect button device 40 is configured to switch between the first form and the second form, the visual impact of the effect button device 40 can be enhanced, and attention can be drawn to the effect button device 40 itself. Here, when the effect button device 40 is in the second form, the position of the movable base 741 paired with the operation button 721 rises, and the operation button 721 is operated and the operation button 721 descends, causing the operation button 721 to come into contact with the movable base 741. This makes it possible to convey a tactile change to the player through the operation button 721. With this configuration, it is possible to suggest to the player, for example, that the operation detection position has been reached or that the operation detection position is in front of them. This is preferable in that it makes the operation easier in the second form in which the operation stroke is extended, and favorably exerts the above-mentioned attention-increasing effect.

As shown in this embodiment, if the position of the movable base 741 is changed so that the operation stroke at which the operation button 721 and the movable base 741 contact in the first form is the same as the operation stroke at which the operation button 721 and the movable base 741 contact in the second form, it is possible to significantly change the appearance of the performance button device 40 depending on the form, while preferably avoiding the operation in one form being more difficult than the operation in the other form.

<Fourteenth embodiment>
One of the features of this embodiment is that the effect button device 40 is designed to improve the convenience of the player. The following describes the design, focusing on the configuration that differs from the thirteenth embodiment, with reference to Fig. 153. Fig. 153 is a schematic diagram showing the effect button device 40. Please refer to the first embodiment for the basic structure of the effect button device 40.

In the above-mentioned 12th special performance, the color of the movable ornament of the third movable performance device 803 can be changed by performing a rapid operation when the performance button device 40 is in the second form. Here, the performance button device 40 shown in this embodiment is configured to activate the auto rapid-fire function by pushing the operation button 721 further back (lower) than the operation detection position by the detection sensor 791. Specifically, a detection position for auto rapid-fire is provided further back (lower) than the detection sensor 791, and the MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143 is configured to monitor whether the operation button 721 has reached the detection position for auto rapid-fire based on the detection information from the rotary encoder 792. When the operation button 721 reaches the detection position for auto rapid-fire, the auto rapid-fire function is activated, and the operation button 721 is treated as if it had been rapidly pressed even without repeatedly pressing and releasing the operation button 721.

The player is notified on the display screen 253a that the auto-hit detection position has been reached. The player can directly grasp that the auto-hit detection position has been reached by the change in the tactile sensation of the hand touching the operation button 721. Specifically, when the operation button 721 reaches the auto-hit detection position, the resistance torque of the stepping motor 753 is raised from a medium level to a high level. In other words, the resistance torque increases stepwise (suddenly) as the auto-hit detection position is reached.

The following describes the rapid-fire operation process corresponding to the twelfth special effect, first with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 154. The basic flow of the rapid-fire operation process is similar to the rapid-fire operation process shown in the thirteenth embodiment (see FIG. 149), so the explanation will be simplified.

(Processing for repeated operations)
In the process for repeated operations, first, in step S5801, it is determined whether or not the valid period for repeated operations has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S5801, the process proceeds to step S5802. In step S5802, it is determined whether or not the operation button 721 has been operated based on the detection information (detection signal) from the detection sensor 791. Specifically, the detection signal from the detection sensor 791 switches from a LOW level to a HIGH level upon detecting the operation button 721. In step S5802, it is determined whether or not a rising edge of this signal has occurred. If a rising edge of the signal has not occurred, a negative determination is made in step S5802, and the process proceeds to step S5803. On the other hand, if a rising edge of the signal has occurred, a positive determination is made in step S5802, and the process proceeds to step S5806.

In step S5806, an operation reception notification process is executed. In the reception notification process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled to output a sound effect from the speaker unit 27 indicating that an operation has been validly accepted, and an operation reception command for repeated operations is output to the display control device 142. The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 changes the display mode of the operation indicator based on the reception of this operation reception command for repeated operations.

In the following step S5807, it is determined whether the number of operations of the operation button 721 has reached the reference number of changes. In this embodiment, when it is determined at the start of a game round that the 12th special effect B will be performed, the number of operations that will trigger a change in the light color of the third movable effect device 803 (reference number of changes) and the number of operations that will trigger the completion of the continuous operation (reference number of terminations) are determined. If a positive determination is made in step S5604, the process proceeds to step S5808 and a light color change control process is executed to change the light color of the third movable effect device 803 (more specifically, the movable decorative body).

After executing the change process of step S5808, or if a negative judgment is made in step S5807, the process proceeds to step S5809. In step S5809, it is judged whether or not the number of times the operation button 721 has been operated has reached the termination reference number. If a negative judgment is made in step S5809, the process for rapid operation is terminated. If a positive judgment is made in step S5809, the process proceeds to step S5810.

In step S5810, a process for displaying the completion of a rapid-fire operation is performed, and in the following step S5811, a process for ending a suggestion for a rapid-fire operation is performed. As a result, a message indicating that the rapid-fire operation has been completed (for example, the text "Operation Completed") is displayed in place of the message suggesting the operation on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253. After that, the message is hidden along with the display of a picture resembling a button and an indicator showing the remaining valid period.

After executing the processing of step S5811, the process proceeds to step S5812. In step S5812, a rapid-fire operation completion flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. In the following step S5813, a transition flag for the latter half part is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914, and the process proceeds to step S5814. In step S5814, a delay period is set in the delay timer counter provided in the various counter area 932 of the RAM 914, and the rapid-fire operation processing ends.

The effect button device 40 shown in this embodiment is set so that the holding torque (resistance torque) of the stepping motor 753 in the second form is sufficiently larger than the biasing force of the coil spring 745. Therefore, when the operation button 721 is operated in the second form, the coil spring 745 is compressed first, thereby allowing the operation button 721 to descend. Here, after the operation button 721 reaches the operation detection position and reaches the movable base 741, the operation force exceeds the holding torque, and the operation button 721 and the movable base 741 descend together. In this way, when the movable base 741 itself descends, the stepping motor 753 is driven and controlled so as to return the movable base 741 to the upper limit position, which takes a certain amount of time. In this way, the second form of the effect button device 40 is not a completely fixed form, and it is configured to take a certain amount of time to return to the second form, so that the delay timer counter is used to buy time to return the effect button device 40 to the second form when moving from a continuous operation to a specific operation. In other words, the value set in the delay timer counter in step S5814 is set to a time longer than the time required to switch from the first form to the second form.

Returning to the explanation of step S5801, if a positive judgment is made in step S5801, that is, if the valid period of the repeated operation has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S5815. In step S5815, it is judged whether or not the operation button 721 has been operated at least once during the valid period. If a negative judgment is made in step S5815, the process proceeds to step S5816, where a process of ending the suggestion of the repeated operation is executed. In the process of ending the suggestion of the repeated operation, a command to end the suggestion of the repeated operation is output to the display control device 142. Based on the reception of the suggestion end command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 to end the display of the message for the operation suggestion, the image resembling the button, and the indicator showing the remaining valid period.

In the following step S5817, a process for switching to the first form is executed. After that, in step S5818, a process for executing an alternative performance is executed, and then the process for rapid-fire operation is terminated. In the alternative performance, regardless of the result of a win/lose, etc., no linked performance is executed by the third movable performance device 803.

If a positive judgment is made in step S5815, i.e., if the operation button 721 has been operated at least once, a positive judgment is made in step S5815, the process proceeds to step S55810, and the processes of steps S5810 to S5814 are executed, after which the process for this rapid operation ends.

Returning to the explanation of step S5802, if a negative judgment is made in step S5802, i.e., if the detection signal from the detection sensor 791 does not rise from a LOW level to a HIGH level, the process proceeds to step S5803. In step S5803, it is judged whether or not an auto-repeated-hit flag, which will be described later, is stored in the various flags storage area 933 of the RAM 914. If the auto-repeated-hit flag is not stored, a negative judgment is made in step S5803, and the process for repeated operation is terminated. If the auto-repeated-hit flag is stored, a positive judgment is made in step S5803, and the process proceeds to step S5804.

In step S5804, the auto-hit timer counter provided in the various counter area 932 of the RAM 914 is referenced to determine whether the value of the timer counter is "0". This auto-hit timer counter specifies the time interval at which it is determined that an operation has been performed pseudo-by auto-hit, and its value is decremented by "1" each time the 12th special effect process is executed in the MPU 912. If a negative determination is made in step S5804, the process for this rapid-fire operation is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S5804, the process proceeds to step S5805, where an auto-hit timer reset process is executed, and the processes from step S5806 onwards are executed. In this reset process, a predetermined value (equivalent to 0.3 sec) is set in the auto-hit timer counter.

Next, the auto-hit process executed by the MPU 912 of the notification/effect control device 143 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 155 and 156. The auto-hit process is executed as part of the 12th special effect process, which is a periodic process executed by the MPU 912.

(Automatic repeat processing)
In the auto-repeated-hit process, first, in step S5901, it is determined whether or not the repeated operation is valid. If the determination in step S5901 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S5902. In step S5902, the auto-repeated-hit torque control process is executed. The details of this process will be described later.

In the following step S5903, it is determined based on the detection information from the rotary encoder 792 whether the movable base 741 is located within the auto-repeat detection range, more specifically, within the auto-repeat detection position or at a position below it. If a positive determination is made in step S5903, the process proceeds to step S5904. In step S5904, it is determined whether the detection signal from the detection sensor 791 is at a HI level. If a positive determination is made in step S5904, the process proceeds to step S5905.

In step S5905, it is determined whether or not an auto-hit repeat flag is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. If the auto-hit repeat flag is already stored, a positive determination is made in step S5905, and the auto-hit repeat processing ends. If the auto-hit repeat flag is not stored, a negative determination is made in step S5905, and the process proceeds to step S5906.

In step S5906, the auto-repeated-hits flag is stored in the various flags storage area 933 of the RAM 914. After that, in step S5907, the auto-repeated-hits display start process is executed, and the auto-repeated-hits process is terminated. In the auto-repeated-hits display start process, an auto-repeated-hits start command is output to the display control device 142. Based on receiving the auto-repeated-hits start command, the display control device 142 displays a message indicating that the auto-repeated-hits function is enabled (for example, the words "Auto-repeated-hits ON") on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253.

If a negative judgment is made in any of steps S5901, S5903, or S5904, the process proceeds to step S5908. In step S5908, it is judged whether or not an auto-repeat flag is stored in the various flags storage area 933 of the RAM 914. If an auto-repeat flag is not stored, a negative judgment is made in step S5908, and the auto-repeat processing ends as is. If an auto-repeat flag is stored, a positive judgment is made in step S5908, and the process proceeds to step S5909. In step S5909, the auto-repeat flag stored in the various flags storage area 933 of the RAM 914 is erased.

In the next step S5910, the auto-hit timer counter is cleared to "0". After that, in step S5911, the auto-hit display end process is executed, and this auto-hit process is terminated. In the auto-hit display end process, an auto-hit end command is output to the display control device 142. Based on receiving the auto-hit end command, the display control device 142 does not display the above-mentioned auto-hit message on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253.

Next, the auto-repeated torque control process of step S5902 will be described with reference to FIG. 156.

(Automatic torque control process)
In the auto-repeated-hit torque control process, first, in step S6001, the detection information from rotary encoder 792 is referenced to determine whether movable base 741 is located at the upper limit position of its movable range. If movable base 741 is located at the upper limit position, a positive determination is made in step S6001, and the process proceeds to step S6002, where the stationary control process is executed, and then the auto-repeated-hit torque control process ends. In the stationary control process, if a stationary torque is being generated in stepping motor 753, that state is maintained, and if a drive torque is being generated in stepping motor 753, the generated torque is switched to stationary torque.

If the movable base 741 is not at the upper limit position, a negative judgment is made in step S6001 and the process proceeds to step S6003. In step S6003, it is judged whether the movable base 741 is located between the torque switching reference position below the auto-repeated hitting detection position and the lower limit position in the movable range (hereinafter referred to as a predetermined section). In this embodiment, as a return process when returning the movable base 741 to the upper limit position, a first return control process that generates a medium level driving torque (medium torque) in the stepping motor 753 and a second return control process that generates a high level driving torque (high torque) in the stepping motor 753 are provided. If the movable base 741 is not located in the predetermined section, the first return control process is executed in step S6004, and then the auto-repeated hitting torque control process is terminated. As a result, a medium level driving torque (medium torque) is generated in the stepping motor 753 (see FIG. 157). On the other hand, if the movable base 741 is located in the predetermined section, the second return control process is executed in step S6005, and then the auto-repeated hitting torque control process is terminated. By executing the second return control process, a high level of drive torque (high torque) is generated in the stepping motor 753 (see FIG. 157).

According to the configuration shown in this embodiment, when the operation button 721 is repeatedly pressed a predetermined number of times, a special effect is executed. Such a repeated pressing operation may give the player the impression that it is irritating, but in the configuration shown in this embodiment, by operating the operation button 721 to the auto repeated pressing detection position and maintaining that state, it is treated essentially the same as if the above-mentioned repeated pressing operation had been performed. In other words, the player can choose whether to actually perform a repeated press or to substitute a long press for a repeated press, which meets the diverse needs of players. This is preferable in terms of optimally utilizing the function of the effect button device 40 to encourage active participation in the game.

Here, for the effect button device 40, there is a possibility that the operation mode will switch from rapid tapping to long press midway due to fatigue or other reasons. At this time, if the acceptance of the operation does not switch quickly from the number of times judgment to the period judgment, there is a high possibility that the effective operation period will pass in vain due to the time lag. In this respect, in the configuration shown in the present embodiment, the detection position for period judgment is shifted so that it is further back in the operation direction than the detection position for number of times judgment, and for example, there is no need to distinguish between rapid tapping and long press operations at detection position 1. Therefore, the above-mentioned time lag in switching from the number of times judgment to the period judgment can be minimized. This can favorably exert the effect of encouraging the operation of the operation button 721 and increasing attention to the game.

In addition, the stroke required for rapid tapping is shorter than the stroke required for long presses, so the above function does not make rapid tapping difficult.

<Modification 1>
In the above fourteenth embodiment, when the auto-repeat function is ON, an operation is accepted pseudo-wise every time the auto-repeat timer reaches "0." When this operation is accepted, it is also possible to configure the device to notify the user that the operation has been accepted.

<Modification 2>
In the fourteenth embodiment, the auto-repeated hitting function is quickly enabled when the detection signal from the detection sensor 791 is at a high level and it is determined based on the detection information from the rotary encoder 792 that the movable base 741 is located in a predetermined area, but the conditions for enabling the auto-repeated hitting function may be changed as follows. That is, the auto-repeated hitting function may be turned ON when the detection signal from the detection sensor 791 is at a high level and it is determined based on the detection information from the rotary encoder 792 that the movable base 741 is located in a predetermined area, and this situation continues for a predetermined period. In such a configuration, it is preferable that the predetermined period is shorter than the interval period specified by the auto-repeated hitting timer.

<Modification 3>
In the above fourteenth embodiment, the auto-repeated-hit function is enabled when the detection signal from the detection sensor 791 is at a HI level and the movable base 741 is located in a predetermined zone based on the detection information from the rotary encoder 792, but this is not limited to the above. It is also possible to omit the condition related to the detection signal from the detection sensor 791 and enable the auto-repeated-hit function when the movable base 741 is located in a predetermined zone based on the rotary encoder 792.

<Modification 4>
When the movable base 741 reaches the auto-hitting detection position, the drive torque can be changed to inform the player of the arrival of the auto-hitting detection position through a tactile change. For example, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 158, a high torque section can be set in a section including the auto-hitting detection position, and a medium torque section → high torque section can be set on the rear side of the auto-hitting detection position in the operation direction.

<Other embodiments>
The present invention is not limited to the contents of the above-mentioned embodiments, and may be implemented, for example, as follows. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of the above-mentioned embodiments, or may be applied in combination with some or all of the following embodiments. It is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or some of the various configurations shown in each of the above-mentioned embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects to be exerted) of each of the configurations to be combined is guaranteed. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration formed by a combination of the embodiments, or may be applied in combination with some or all of the following embodiments.

(1) In each of the above embodiments, the operation of the effect button device 40 is enabled (a specified valid period is set) when the first special effect, which is an operation-responsive effect, is executed, but this is not limited to the above. It is also possible to configure the effect button device 40 to always accept operations as valid, and to differentiate between operations during the specified valid period so that they trigger the start/continuation/end of a special effect.

(2) Although the effect button device 40 shown in each of the above embodiments is configured to be operated by pressing it downward, this is not limited to this. The operating direction of the effect operation means may be changed as desired. For example, the orientation of the effect button device 40 may be changed from upward to forward, and the configuration may be changed to one that is configured to be operated by pushing it toward the rear of the gaming machine. Also, the configuration of the effect operation means may be changed so that it is configured to be operated by pulling it toward the front of the gaming machine. For example, a lever-type operation means such as a joystick may be provided, or a rotation-type operation means such as a rotary switch may be provided.

(3) In the performance button device 40 shown in each of the above embodiments, a spring or other biasing member for biasing the button unit 720 to the side (upper side) away from the holder unit 750 is not provided, but a configuration may be made in which a spring or other biasing member for biasing the button unit 720 to the side (upper side) away from the holder unit 750 is provided. In this case, by rotating the rotor 752 with the stepping motor 753, the protruding pin 747 attached to the movable base 741 moves within the engagement groove 772 of the rotor 752 and moves from the horizontal portion 775 to the inclined portion 776, thereby releasing the upward displacement restriction, and the button unit 720 is displaced upward by the biasing force of the biasing member.

(4) In the effect button device 40 shown in each of the above embodiments, when the operation stroke of the operation button 721 changes with switching between the first form and the second form, the operation detection position changes according to the change in stroke, but this is not limited to this. The operation detection position may be the same in either the first form or the second form. In other words, instead of a configuration in which the stroke amount to the operation detection position is the same in either the first form or the second form, a configuration in which the stroke amount to the operation detection position changes depending on whether it is the first form or the second form may be used.

(5) In each of the above embodiments, the position of the button unit 720 (operation button 721) is identified based on detection information from the rotary encoder 792, but the specific configuration for identifying the position of the button unit 720 (operation button 721) is arbitrary. For example, a linear encoder may be provided instead of the rotary encoder 792, and the position of the button unit 720 (operation button 721) may be identified based on detection information from the linear encoder. It is also possible to provide a position detection sensor such as a photosensor or magnetic sensor for each detection position, and identify the position of the button unit 720 (operation button 721) based on detection information from the position detection sensor.

(6) In each of the above embodiments, a stepping motor is used as the driving means for switching the effect button device 40 between the first form and the second form, but this is not limited to this. For example, it is also possible to use a motor other than a stepping motor, a solenoid, or the like as the driving means.

(7) In each of the above embodiments, the effect button device 40 is disposed in the upper bulge 28 of the front door frame 14, but the position of the effect button device 40 may be changed as desired. For example, it may be disposed in the lower bulge 29, or above or to the side of the window portion 22.

(8) Although the operation direction (operation method) of the effect button device 40 shown in each of the above embodiments is the same for all of the first to third forms, this is not limited to the above. In a configuration in which the form of the effect button device can be changed, the operation direction (operation method) of the effect button device may be changed for each form.

(9) In each of the above embodiments, the outer button member 722 and the inner button member 723 are not fixed, and the outer button member 722 and the inner button member 723 are allowed to move relative to each other at least in the circumferential direction about the central axis line CLX, but this is not limited to the above. The outer button member 722 and the inner button member 723 may be fixed to each other, preventing the above-mentioned relative movement.

(10) In each of the above embodiments, the stepping motor is configured to generate a stationary torque even when the stepping motor is in the first form, but this is not limited to the above. It is also possible to configure the stepping motor not to generate a stationary torque when the stepping motor is in the first form.

(11) In each of the above embodiments, the effect button device 40 is disposed on the front portion of the front door frame 14, but this is not limited to this. The effect button device 40 can also be disposed on the side portion or top portion of the front door frame 14.

(12) In each of the above embodiments, the display of changing patterns on the actuation port display units DU, DL and the display of changing patterns on the pattern display device 253 are started based on the winning/losing lottery (determination process) being performed in the main control unit 162, but this is not limited to the above. It is also possible to start the display of changing patterns on the actuation port display units DU, DL and the display of changing patterns on the pattern display device 253 prior to the winning/losing lottery (determination process) being performed in the main control unit 162.

(13) In each of the above embodiments, when a normal jackpot result is obtained, the game is transitioned to the second normal game state (time-saving game state) corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. However, the trigger for transitioning to the second normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode is not limited to the normal jackpot result. In addition to or instead of the transition trigger, for example, the game may be transitioned to the second normal game state when the number of games (the number of games played without transitioning to another game state) performed in the first normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode reaches a predetermined reference number. Also, for example, a transition random number counter CX or the like that performs a transition lottery to the second normal game state is provided, and a transition to the second normal game state is made when a lottery using the value of the transition random number counter CX and a transition lottery table is won. It is also possible to combine these two transition triggers. In other words, it is also possible to configure the game to transition to the second normal game state when a transition lottery using the transition random number counter CX is won after the number of plays executed in the first normal game state reaches a predetermined reference number. In addition, in a configuration in which a transition to the second normal game state is triggered by reaching a predetermined reference number, it is also possible to configure the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 to clearly indicate or suggest the number of plays remaining until the predetermined reference number is reached.

As described above, in the case of a configuration in which the special game state can be transitioned to the second normal game state without going through the special game state, it is also possible to suggest or clearly indicate the transition to the second normal game state using the effect button device 40. For example, in the case of a configuration in which the transition to the second normal game state occurs when the number of games played in the first normal game state reaches a predetermined reference number as described above, a countdown effect until the predetermined reference number is reached may be executed using the effect button device 40. Specifically, it is preferable to configure the protruding level of the effect button device 40 to change stepwise (UP or DOWN) each time the game number progresses toward the predetermined reference number. Also, in the case of a configuration in which the transition to the second normal game state occurs when the transition lottery using the transition random number counter CX is won as described above, it is also possible to configure the effect button device 40 to suggest an operation to switch to the second form during the corresponding game number. In other words, it is also possible to configure the configuration in which, when an operation-responsive effect is executed based on an operation in the second form, a jackpot result or a loss result corresponding to the transition to the second normal game state is confirmed or highly likely.

Furthermore, if there is a range for the upper limit of the number of plays for the second normal game state to which a transition is made without passing through the special game state (e.g., 10 times, 20 times, 30 times, 50 times, 100 times, etc.), the transition to the second game state may be suggested by switching the form of the effect button device 40 from the first form to another form, and the upper limit of the number of plays in the case of transition to the second normal game state may be suggested depending on the protruding level. Specifically, it is preferable to configure the higher the protruding level, the higher the upper limit in the case of successful effect → transition to the second normal game state.

(14) The present invention can also be applied to other types of pachinko machines that differ from the above-described embodiments, such as pachinko machines in which an electric device opens a predetermined number of times when a gaming ball enters a specific area of a special device, pachinko machines in which a right is generated and a jackpot is awarded when a gaming ball enters a specific area of a special device, pachinko machines equipped with other devices, arrange ball machines, mahjong ball machines, and other gaming machines.

The present invention can also be applied to non-pinball gaming machines, such as slot machines, which have multiple reels with multiple patterns circumferentially attached, and which start the rotation of the reels by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and which, after the reels stop when a stop switch is operated or a predetermined time has passed, award the player with a special prize, such as a medal payout, if a specific pattern or combination of specific patterns is formed on a winning line visible through a display window.

Furthermore, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, which is equipped with a take-in device and starts the reels spinning by operating a start lever after a predetermined number of gaming balls stored in a storage section have been taken in by the take-in device.

<Inventions extracted from the above embodiments>
The following describes characteristic configurations extracted from the above-mentioned embodiment, while indicating effects, etc., as necessary. Note that in the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-mentioned embodiment are appropriately indicated in parentheses, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations indicated in parentheses.

<Features Group A>
The following feature A group was made with a problem that the invention is trying to solve regarding the background technology, which is as follows: "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means which launches gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a bonus such as a payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls is given to the player (see, for example, Patent Document 1).""In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature A1. An operation means (effect button device 40) provided on the front part of the gaming machine (front door frame 14) and operated by the player;
A game machine comprising: a presentation execution means (announcement/presentation control device 143 and a display control device 142) for executing an operation-responsive presentation (for example, an operation-responsive presentation such as a first special presentation) based on an operation of the operation means during a predetermined operation effective period;
A switching means (a function of executing a process for switching the form in the MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143) for switching the form of the operation means from the first form to a second form having an appearance different from the first form when a predetermined switching condition (development to a reach display in the game round related to the first special performance) is established;
and an operation suggesting means (a function of executing a process for suggesting an operation in the MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143) for suggesting an operation of the operation means to a player when a predetermined waiting period has elapsed since the mode of the operation means is switched to the second mode,
The performance execution means includes:
a means for executing a special effect (first special effect) as the operation-responsive effect when the operation means is operated during the predetermined operation effective period and in a situation where the operation means is in the second mode;
A gaming machine characterized by having a period setting means (a function of determining the start timing of an operation suggestion by the MPU 912 of the notification/presentation control device 143) for setting one of a plurality of periods of different length as the specified waiting period.

As shown in feature A1, if the operating means is configured to switch between the first form and the second form, the impact of the operating means can be strengthened, encouraging attention to be drawn to the operating means itself. Here, when the operating means becomes the second form, operation of the operating means is suggested based on the fact that a predetermined waiting period has elapsed since switching to the second form. Since multiple periods of different lengths are provided as the predetermined waiting period, the period during which the operating means is maintained in the second form varies in various ways. With this configuration, it is possible to encourage the player to pay attention not only to the form change but also to the length of time the operating means is maintained in the second form. This is preferable in terms of preventing the game from becoming monotonous and increasing attention to the game.

Feature A2. An information acquisition means (a function of executing the winning process for the operating port in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (winning at the operating port 83a, 83b);
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 632 provided in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A transition determination means (a function of executing a process such as a winning/losing lottery in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined transition information (a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result);
a game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, based on the result of the determination by the transition determination means being a transition corresponding result (jackpot result) which corresponds to the predetermined transition information;
An operation means (effect button device 40) provided on the front part (front door frame 14) of the gaming machine and operated by a player;
A game machine comprising a presentation execution means (announcement/presentation control device 143 and a display control device 142) for executing an operation-responsive presentation (for example, an operation-responsive presentation such as a first special presentation) based on the operation of the operation means during a predetermined operation effective period,
The performance execution means includes:
A switching means (a function of executing a process for switching the form in the MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143) for switching the form of the operation means from the first form to a second form having an appearance different from the first form when a predetermined switching condition (development to a reach display in the game round related to the first special performance) is established;
The device has an operation suggestion means (a function of executing a process for operation suggestion in the MPU 912 of the notification/presentation control device 143) for suggesting to a player how to operate the operation means when a predetermined waiting period has elapsed since the mode of the operation means has been switched to the second mode, and a means for executing a special presentation (first special presentation) as the presentation corresponding to the operation when the operation means is operated during the predetermined operation effective period and under a situation in which the operation means is in the second mode,
A plurality of periods having different lengths are provided as the predetermined waiting period,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the presentation execution means has a period setting means (a function of determining the start timing of an operation suggestion in the MPU 912 of the notification/presentation control device 143) that sets one of the different multiple periods as the specified waiting period based on the judgment result by the transition judgment means.

As shown in feature A2, if the operating means is configured to switch between the first form and the second form, the impact of the operating means can be strengthened, and attention can be drawn to the operating means itself. Here, when the operating means becomes the second form, operation of the operating means is suggested based on the fact that a predetermined waiting period has elapsed since switching to the second form. A plurality of periods of different lengths are provided as the predetermined waiting period, and the period during which the operating means is maintained in the second form varies in various ways based on the determination result by the transition determination means. With this configuration, it is possible to encourage the player to pay attention not only to the form change but also to the length for which the operating means is maintained in the second form. This is preferable in terms of preventing the game from becoming monotonous and increasing attention to the game.

Feature A3. The predetermined period includes a first period and a second period longer than the first period,
The gaming machine described in feature A2, characterized in that the period setting means is configured so that when the judgment result by the transition judgment means is the transition response result, the probability of the second period being set as the specified period is higher than when the judgment result is not the transition response result.

Feature A3 allows a player who wishes to transition to the special game state to have hope that the period during which the second form is maintained will be as long as possible (the second period). This type of configuration is advantageous in terms of increasing attention to the switch to the second form.

Feature A4. The predetermined period includes a first period and a second period longer than the first period,
A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A3, characterized in that the difference between the first period and the second period is longer than the first period.

Feature A4 prevents the difference in the specified waiting periods from becoming hidden and becoming difficult to understand.

Feature A5. The switching means is configured to switch the operation means to the second mode when the reach display is transitioned to, as the predetermined switching condition being satisfied,
The display effect executed after the transition to the reach display includes a first part and a second part,
A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A4, characterized in that the specified waiting period includes a first period defined so that the operation is suggested during the first part, and a second period defined so that the operation is suggested during the second part.

As shown in feature A5, if the operating means switches to the second form with the transition to the reach display, and operation suggestions occur in the first and second parts after the transition to the reach display, the player can infer the period during which the second form is maintained from the progress of the display presentation without having to measure said period. By clarifying the difference between the first and second periods in this way, the effects shown in feature A1 etc. can be optimally achieved.

Feature A6. The gaming machine according to any one of Features A1 to A5, characterized in that the switching means has a means for maintaining the operating means in the second mode until the predetermined waiting period has elapsed.

If the operating means suddenly switches to the first form while waiting for an operation suggestion, this can be a cause of confusion for the player. Therefore, as shown in this feature, when the operating means switches to the second form, it is configured to remain in the second form until the above-mentioned predetermined waiting period has elapsed, thereby making it possible to effectively prevent the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

Feature A7. The operation means is configured to be switchable from the second form to the first form by the operation of a player,
A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A6, characterized in that when the operation means is operated after switching to the second form and before the specified waiting period has elapsed, the gaming machine is provided with a means for regulating the suggestion by the operation suggestion means and the special presentation.

If the control means is operated between the time of switching to the second form and the occurrence of the control suggestion, the control suggestion and special effects are restricted. With this configuration, the player is prompted to wait until the control suggestion occurs after switching to the second form, and it is possible to prevent the control means from being blindly operated after switching to the second form. This is preferable for effectively exerting the effects shown in feature A1, etc.

Feature A8. The gaming machine according to any one of Features A1 to A7, characterized in that the operating means is configured such that the operating stroke of the operating means in the second mode is longer than the operating stroke of the operating means in the first mode.

As shown in feature A8, by configuring the operation stroke to be larger in the second form than in the first form, it is possible to make the operation means more noticeable while preventing the operation from becoming complicated when changing to the second form.

Feature A9. A gaming machine according to any one of Features A1 to A8, characterized in that it is provided with an elapsed period corresponding display means for performing an elapsed period corresponding display by changing the display in accordance with the elapsed period at least during the period from the change in form of the operating means to the suggestion by the suggestion means.

As shown in feature A9, displaying the time that has elapsed by changing the display depending on the time that has elapsed is preferable in terms of encouraging players to understand the game.

Feature A10. An operation means (effect button device 40) provided on the front part (front door frame 14) of the gaming machine and operated by the player;
A game machine comprising a presentation execution means (announcement/presentation control device 143 and a display control device 142) for executing an operation-responsive presentation (for example, an operation-responsive presentation such as a first special presentation) based on the operation of the operation means,
A switching means (a function of executing a process for switching the form in the MPU 902 of the notification/performance control device 143) for switching the operation means from a first state to a second state having an appearance different from that of the first state when a predetermined switching condition (development to a reach display in the game round related to the first special performance) is established;
and an operation suggestion means (a function of executing a process for operation suggestion in the MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143) for suggesting an operation of the operation means to a player when a predetermined waiting period has elapsed since the state of the operation means is switched to the second state,
The performance execution means includes:
a means for executing a special effect (first special effect) as the operation-responsive effect when the operation means is operated under a situation in which the operation means is in the second state;
a period setting means for setting one of a plurality of periods having different lengths as the predetermined waiting period.

As shown in feature A10, if the operating means is configured to switch between a first state and a second state, the impact of the operating means can be strengthened, encouraging attention to be drawn to the operating means itself. Here, when the operating means is in the second state, operation of the operating means is suggested based on the fact that a predetermined waiting period has elapsed since switching to the second state. Since multiple periods of different lengths are provided as the predetermined waiting period, the period during which the operating means is maintained in the second state varies in various ways. With this configuration, it is possible to encourage the player to pay attention not only to the change in form but also to the length for which the second state is maintained. This is preferable in terms of preventing the game from becoming monotonous and increasing attention to the game.

In addition, each of the technical ideas shown in Features A1 to A9 can also be applied to Feature A10.

<Characteristics Group B>
The following feature B group was made with a problem that the invention is trying to solve regarding the background technology, which is as follows: "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means which launches gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a bonus such as a payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls is given to the player (see, for example, Patent Document 1).""In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature B1. An operation means (operation button 721 of the effect button device 40) operated by the player in a predetermined direction (downward);
A game machine having a performance execution means (a function of executing processing for the first special performance in the MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143) that executes an operation-responsive performance (for example, a first special performance for the second part) based on the operation of the operation means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the effect execution means has means for executing a first effect (an effect that adds an effect EF to a character image CA) when the operating means reaches a first position (e.g., a first detection position CP1) on a path along which the operating means is displaced by operation toward the specified direction, and means for executing a second effect (an effect that changes the effect EF) when the operating means reaches a second position (e.g., a second detection position CP2 to a fifth detection position CP5) that is further back in the specified direction than the first position after execution of the first effect.

According to feature B1, a first effect is executed when the operating means reaches a first position on a path along which the operating means is displaced by being operated in a predetermined direction, and a second effect is executed when the operating means reaches a second position that is further back in the predetermined direction than the first position after the first effect is executed. In this way, a configuration in which the first effect → second effect is executed in conjunction with one operation of the operating means makes it possible to create innovative effects that have never been seen before. This is desirable in terms of increasing attention to the game.

Feature B2. An operation means (operation button 721 of the effect button device 40) operated by the player in a predetermined direction (downward);
A game machine having a performance execution means (a function of executing processing for the first special performance in the MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143) for executing an operation-responsive performance (for example, a first special performance for the second part) based on the operation of the operation means,
The performance execution means includes:
A start means (a function of starting a second special effect in the MPU 912 of the notification/effect control device 143) that starts a special display as the operation-responsive effect when the operation means reaches a predetermined position (e.g., a first detection position CP1) on a path along which the operation means is displaced by an operation in the predetermined direction;
A gaming machine characterized in that it has a change means (a function of changing the size of an additional effect EF displayed in the MPU 912 of the notification/presentation control device 143) that changes at least a part of the special display when the operating means reaches a specific position (e.g., the second detection position CP2 to the fifth detection position CP5) that is further back in the specified direction than the specified position after the special display has started.

According to feature B2, when the operating means is operated in a predetermined direction and the operating means reaches a predetermined position on the path along which the operating means is displaced, a special display is started, and when the operating means reaches a specific position in the predetermined direction further back than the predetermined position after the special display has started, at least a part of the special display is changed. In this way, a configuration in which the special display starts and then changes in the special display is linked to one operation of the operating means makes it possible to create innovative presentations that have never been seen before. This is preferable for increasing attention to the game.

Feature B3. The gaming machine described in Feature B2, characterized in that the effect execution means has a maintenance means (a function of maintaining the size of the effect EF additionally displayed in the MPU 912 of the notification/effect control device 143) that maintains the special display as it is when the operation means reaches the specific position after the special display has started.

According to feature B3, when a specific position is reached, the special display branches into two cases: one in which the display changes, and the other in which the display does not change. This is advantageous in preventing the results of the operation from becoming monotonous, and in strengthening the attention-increasing effect shown in feature B2.

Feature B4. The gaming machine according to Feature B2 or Feature B3, wherein the change means is configured to change the special display when the specific position is reached based on displacement in the predetermined direction, and to not change the special display when the specific position is reached based on displacement in the opposite direction to the predetermined direction.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, even if the operating means is displaced in the opposite direction to the specified direction by, for example, releasing the hand from the operating means before or after reaching the specific position, the change in the special display will not be rewound. This is preferable in terms of avoiding unintended changes in the special display due to operating errors, etc.

In addition to or instead of the configuration described in this characteristic, a configuration in which "displacement in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction is suppressed when the operating means is operated" may be used.

Feature B5. The gaming machine according to any one of Features B2 to B4, characterized in that the change means is configured not to change the special display when the operation means reaches the specific position after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation means reaches the predetermined position and the special display is started.

When configuring a special display to change in response to an operation, it is assumed that the impact of the display change will be stronger if the change has a certain sense of speed. Here, by setting a time limit for the change of the special display as shown in this feature, the player is prompted to operate the operating means toward a specific position in one go, and the aforementioned increased impact can be used to favorably increase attention to the special display.

Feature B6: The specific position includes a first position and a second position that is further back than the first position in the predetermined direction,
The change means is
a first means for changing the special display when the operating means reaches the first position;
A gaming machine described in any one of features B2 to B5, characterized in that it has a second means for further changing the special display when the operating means reaches the second position after the special display has been changed by the first means.

As shown in feature B6, if the special display is configured to change in multiple stages by operating the operating means in a specified direction, the expressiveness of the changes in the special display can be suitably improved.

Feature B7: A resistance generating means (a function of generating a resistance torque in the stepping motor 753) that generates an operation resistance when the operation means is operated in the predetermined direction is provided;
The gaming machine described in feature B6, wherein the resistance generating means is configured so that the operational resistance generated between the first position and the second position is greater than the operational resistance generated between the specified position and the first position.

According to feature B7, by increasing the operation resistance at the rear side in the operation direction, it is possible to prevent the change in the special display from ending too quickly, making the change difficult to distinguish.

Feature B8. The gaming machine described in Feature B6 or Feature B7, characterized in that the distance from the second position to the first position in the predetermined direction is greater than the distance from the first position to the predetermined position in the predetermined direction.

According to feature B8, the further back in the operation direction the operation is, the longer the grace period until the special display changes. This prevents the special display change from ending too quickly, making the change difficult to distinguish.

Feature B9: The operation means is switchable between a first form and a second form having a longer operation stroke than the first form,
A gaming machine described in any one of features B1 to B8, characterized in that when the operation-responsive presentation is executed, it is provided with a switching means for switching the operation means to the second form before an operation suggestion is made for the operation means.

As shown in feature B1, etc., in a configuration in which the movement of the operating means and the special display are linked, the link between the two can be strengthened by extending the operating stroke of the operating means in advance. It is also assumed that the operation of the operating means is often performed with force. In this regard, a configuration in which the operating stroke is extended in advance can secure a display change period, and can suitably prevent the change in the special display from becoming difficult to distinguish.

Feature B10. An information acquisition means (a winning process for the operating port in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (winning the operating port 83a, 83b);
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area in the main control device 162) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A transition determination means (a function of executing a winning/losing lottery or the like in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined transition information (a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result);
a game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, based on the result of the determination by the transition determination means being a transition corresponding result which corresponds to the predetermined transition information;
A gaming machine in which a game presentation is executed based on a result of the determination by the transition determination means,
An operation means (operation button 721 of the effect button device 40) operated by a player in a predetermined direction (downward);
and an operation-responsive performance execution means (a function of executing processing for the first special performance in the MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143) for executing the operation-responsive performance (for example, the first special performance for the second part) which is the game performance based on the operation of the operation means.
The operation-responsive performance execution means
A start means (a function of starting a second special effect in the MPU 912 of the notification/effect control device 143) that starts a special display as the operation-responsive effect when the operation means reaches a predetermined position (e.g., a first detection position CP1) on a path along which the operation means is displaced by an operation in the predetermined direction;
A gaming machine characterized in that it has a change means (a function of changing the size of an additional effect EF displayed in the MPU 912 of the notification/presentation control device 143) that changes at least a part of the special display when the operating means reaches a specific position (e.g., the second detection position CP2 to the fifth detection position CP5) that is further back in the specified direction than the specified position after the special display has started.

According to feature B10, when the operating means is operated in a predetermined direction and the operating means reaches a predetermined position on the path along which the operating means is displaced, a special display is started, and when the operating means reaches a specific position in the predetermined direction further back than the predetermined position after the special display has started, at least a part of the special display is changed. In this way, a configuration in which the special display starts and then changes in the special display is linked to one operation of the operating means makes it possible to create innovative presentations that have never been seen before. This is preferable for increasing attention to the game.

The technical ideas shown in Features B1 to B9 may also be applied to Feature B10.

In addition, the technical ideas shown in Features B1 to B10 may be applied to the above Group A of Features.

<Characteristics Group C>
The following feature C group was made with a view to solving a problem that the invention aims to solve regarding the background technology, which is as follows: "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means for launching gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a bonus such as a payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls is given to the player (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." The background technology is as follows: "In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature C1. An operation means (operation button 721 of the effect button device 40) operated by the player in a predetermined direction (downward);
A performance execution means for executing a performance corresponding to an operation based on the operation of the operation means (a function for executing processing for a third special performance in the MPU 902 of the notification/performance control device 143);
A monitoring means (a position monitoring function and a rotary encoder 792 in the MPU 902 of the notification/performance control device 143) for monitoring a position of the operation means by dividing the operation stroke of the operation means into a plurality of areas,
The monitoring means includes:
a position detection means (rotary encoder 792) for detecting in which of the plurality of areas (first area E1 to third area E3) the operation means is located;
a period detection means (a hold counter provided in the RAM 914 of the notification/performance control device 143) for detecting a period during which the operation means continuously stays in the area detected by the position detection means,
The performance execution means includes a period determination means (a function of determining a hold period in the MPU 902 of the notification/performance control device 143) for determining whether the stay period detected by the period detection means has reached a reference period;
A gaming machine characterized by having an operation-responsive presentation execution means (a function of executing a selection presentation that constitutes a third special presentation in the MPU 902 of the notification/presentation control device 143) which executes an operation-responsive presentation corresponding to the area during the stay when the period determination means determines that the stay period has reached the reference period.

According to the above configuration, when the duration of time during which the operating means is held in a certain area reaches a reference duration, an operation-responsive presentation is executed according to the area in which the operating means is held. By enabling such innovative operations, it is possible to effectively use the operating means to increase the interest in the game.

Feature C2. The operation means is switchable between a first form and a second form having a longer operation stroke than the first form,
A gaming machine as described in feature C1, characterized in that when the operation-responsive presentation is executed, it is provided with a switching means for switching the operation means to the second form before an operation suggestion is made for the operation means.

As shown in feature C1, in a configuration in which an operation-responsive presentation is executed according to the area in which the operating means is in place, the difficulty of operation increases as each area becomes smaller. There is concern that such difficulty in operation may hinder the effect of encouraging active participation in the game using the operating means. In this regard, the configuration shown in this feature makes it possible to set each of the above areas to be large by putting the operating means into the second form prior to the operation suggestion of the operating means and increasing the operating stroke in advance. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

Feature C3. The gaming machine according to Feature C1 or Feature C2, further comprising a position information teaching means for teaching a player information indicating the relationship between the position of the operating means detected by the position detection means and the area.

In a configuration in which the effects can branch depending on the hold position of the operating means, it can be difficult to grasp the position of the operating means using only tactile information. This difficulty is an obstacle to subdividing areas and diversifying the effect patterns. In this regard, as shown in this feature, the above inconvenience can be ideally resolved by configuring the game to show the player information indicating the relationship between the detected position of the operating means and the area.

Feature C4. A period information teaching means is provided for teaching a player period information indicating the period detected by the period detection means,
A gaming machine described in any one of features C1 to C3, characterized in that the period information teaching means is configured not to teach the period information during the early stage of a continuous stay in the area.

As shown in feature C1, etc., in a configuration in which the operating means is held, there is a possibility that the slightest change in the amount of force applied may result in movement between areas. If such movement between areas results in frequent resetting of period information, etc., it may give the player the impression that it is bothersome, and there is a concern that they may stop operating the operating means. In light of the need to adjust the amount of force applied when holding, there is technical significance in a configuration in which period information is not given at the beginning of a player's stay, as shown in this feature.

Feature C5. The operation means is a lift button;
The plurality of areas include a first area (first area E1) on the upper limit position side of the operating means, a second area (third area E3) including the lower limit position of the operating means, and a third area (second area E2) provided between the first area and the second area,
A gaming machine described in any one of features C1 to C4, characterized in that the size of the third area in the specified direction is larger than the size of each of the first area and the second area in the specified direction.

When holding the operating means, it is expected that the operation of staying in the third area between the upper and lower limit areas will be more difficult due to the presence or absence of a guide. As a result, it is expected that players who want an easier operation will not select the third area. Therefore, the above concerns can be alleviated by configuring the size of this third area in a specified direction to be larger than the size of each of the first and second areas.

Feature C6. A resistance generating means for generating a resistance that prevents the operation means from moving in the predetermined direction,
A gaming machine described in any one of features C1 to C5, characterized in that the resistance generating means is capable of changing the magnitude of the resistance and has a means for increasing the resistance at the boundary portions of the multiple areas.

This characteristic configuration makes it easier for players to intuitively understand that they have moved between areas due to the resistance transmitted from the operating means to their hands. This is desirable in terms of improving the convenience of the operating means for players.

Feature C7. A resistance generating means for generating a resistance that impedes movement of the operation means in the predetermined direction,
A gaming machine described in any one of features C1 to C6, characterized in that the resistance generating means is capable of changing the magnitude of the resistance and has a means for changing the resistance depending on the length of the stay period detected by the period detection means.

This characteristic configuration allows the resistance to change during operation, which effectively prevents the operation from becoming monotonous.

Feature C8. An operation means (operation button 721 of the effect button device 40) operated by the player in a predetermined direction (downward);
a performance execution means for executing a performance corresponding to an operation based on the operation means reaching a predetermined determination position in the predetermined direction;
a determination position setting means for setting the predetermined determination position in the predetermined direction,
the determination position setting means is capable of changing the predetermined determination position in the predetermined direction,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the operating means remains at a predetermined judgment position set by the judgment position setting means for a predetermined reference period, a special effect which is the operation-responsive effect is executed.

According to the above configuration, when the operating means is operated (held) in any area, i.e., when the stay period at the set predetermined judgment position reaches the reference period, an operation-responsive presentation is executed according to the stay area of the operating means. By making such innovative operations possible, it is possible to effectively use the operating means to increase the interest in the game.

Feature C9. An operation means (operation button 721 of the effect button device 40) operated by the player in a predetermined direction (downward);
a performance execution means for executing a performance corresponding to an operation based on the operation means reaching a predetermined determination position in the predetermined direction;
a determination position setting means for setting the predetermined determination position in the predetermined direction,
the determination position setting means is capable of changing the predetermined determination position in the predetermined direction,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the operating means remains at a predetermined judgment position set by the judgment position setting means for a predetermined reference period, a special effect which is the operation-responsive effect is executed.

According to the above configuration, when the operating means is operated (held) in any area, i.e., when the stay period at the set predetermined judgment position reaches the reference period, an operation-responsive presentation is executed according to the stay area of the operating means. By making such innovative operations possible, it is possible to effectively use the operating means to increase the interest in the game.

The technical ideas shown in Features C1 to C9 may also be applied to Features A to B above.

<Feature D group>
The following feature group D was made with a problem that the invention is trying to solve regarding the background technology, which is as follows: "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means which launches gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a bonus such as a payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls is given to the player (see, for example, Patent Document 1).""In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature D1. An information acquisition means (a winning process for the operating port in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (winning the operating port 83a, 83b);
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area in the main control device 162) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A transition determination means (a function of executing a winning/losing lottery or the like in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined transition information (a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result);
a game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, based on the result of the determination by the transition determination means being a transition corresponding result which corresponds to the predetermined transition information;
As the normal gaming state, a first gaming state (first normal gaming state) and a second gaming state (e.g., a second normal gaming state B or a third normal gaming state B) that is more advantageous to a player than the first gaming state are provided,
a state suggesting means (effect button device 40) provided on a front portion (front door frame 14) of the gaming machine, switchable between a first form and a second form having an appearance different from the first form, and indicating to a player that a favorable state is being achieved by maintaining the second form over a number of play times in the second gaming state when the gaming machine is in the second gaming state;
The state suggesting means is configured to be operable at least when the game machine is in the second mode.

According to feature D1, during the second gaming state, the state indicating means provided on the front part of the gaming machine takes on the second form, thereby indicating that the state is advantageous. Since the front part of the gaming machine is more easily visible to other players than, for example, a liquid crystal display device or the like disposed at the rear of the gaming machine, a sense of superiority can be appropriately aroused in the player playing the gaming machine by configuring the state indicating means provided on the front part of the gaming machine to indicate the state.

Here, the state suggesting means in the second form is operable. In this way, if the state suggesting means is operable in an advantageous state, it is advantageous for making a player's impression of the state suggesting means favorable and for increasing attention to the state suggesting means taking the second form in the second gaming state.

Feature D2. An information acquisition means (a winning process for the operating port in the main control device 162) that acquires special information (reserved information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (winning the operating port 83a, 83b);
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area in the main control device 162) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A transition determination means (a function of executing a winning/losing lottery or the like in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined transition information (a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result);
a game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, based on the result of the determination by the transition determination means being a transition corresponding result which corresponds to the predetermined transition information;
As the normal gaming state, a first gaming state (first normal gaming state) and a second gaming state (third normal gaming state) which is more advantageous to a player than the first gaming state are provided,
a state suggesting means (presentation button device 40) provided on a front portion (front door frame 14) of the gaming machine, switchable between a first form and a second form having an appearance different from the first form, which, when transitioning to the second gaming state via the special gaming state, switches to the second form before transitioning to the second gaming state or in association with transitioning to the second gaming state, and which suggests to a player that a favorable state is being achieved by maintaining the second form while a game round is progressing in the second gaming state;
The state suggesting means is configured to be operable at least when the game machine is in the second mode.

According to feature D2, during the second gaming state, the state indicating means provided on the front part of the gaming machine takes on the second form, thereby indicating that the state is advantageous. Since the front part of the gaming machine is more easily visible to other players than, for example, a liquid crystal display device or the like disposed at the rear of the gaming machine, a sense of superiority can be appropriately aroused in the player playing the gaming machine by configuring the state indicating means provided on the front part of the gaming machine to indicate the state.

Here, the state suggesting means in the second form is operable. In this way, if the state suggesting means is operable in an advantageous state, it is advantageous for making a player's impression of the state suggesting means favorable and for increasing attention to the state suggesting means taking the second form in the second gaming state.

Feature D3. A gaming machine according to feature D1 or feature D2, characterized in that it is provided with an effect execution means for executing an effect (fourth special effect) corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination means for the game round in which the state indication means, which is in the second mode, is operated in the second game state.

When the state suggesting means (second form) is operated in the second gaming state, an effect corresponding to the result of the transition determination for the game round in which the operation was performed is executed. Because the second gaming state is an advantageous state, the operation increases the opportunities for an effect advantageous to the player to occur. This is advantageous in forming a positive impression on the player of the state suggesting means, and in increasing the attention paid to the state suggesting means becoming the second form in the second gaming state.

Feature D4. A gaming machine according to any one of Features D1 to D3, characterized in that the state suggesting means has a means for maintaining the second form after switching to the second form in conjunction with the transition to the second gaming state until the second gaming state ends.

According to feature D4, the second form may be maintained until the second game state ends. This is preferable in terms of ensuring an opportunity to operate the state suggesting means.

Feature D5. The device is provided with a notification means for notifying a player to operate the state indicating means when a predetermined notification condition (e.g., a big win) is established while the state indicating means is in the second mode,
The state suggesting means is configured to be switched from the second form to the first form by an operation by a player,
A gaming machine described in any one of features D1 to D3, characterized in that it is provided with a decision means for deciding whether or not to return the status suggesting means to the second form after the status suggesting means is operated in accordance with the notification by the notification means.

When the state indicating means is in the second form in the second game state and is operated in response to a notification from the notification means, the subsequent form is split into the first form and the second form. With this configuration, it is possible to create a sense of tension regarding the operation of the state indicating means.

The configuration shown in this feature can also be described as "a gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, which is characterized in that it includes a notification means for issuing a notification to encourage the player to operate the status indication means when a predetermined notification condition (e.g., a jackpot) is established under a situation in which the status indication means is in the second mode, the status indication means being configured to switch from the second mode to the first mode by the player's operation, and the status indication means has a means for changing the mode of the status indication means after operation to the first mode when the status indication means is operated in accordance with the notification by the notification means and the first notification condition (e.g., a fourth special presentation corresponding to a jackpot result) is established as the predetermined notification condition, and for changing the mode of the status indication means after operation to the second mode when the status indication means is operated in accordance with the notification by the notification means and the second notification condition (e.g., a fourth special presentation corresponding to a miss result) is established as the predetermined notification condition."

Feature D6. The gaming machine described in Feature D5 is configured such that, when the decision means decides to return to the second mode, the return is delayed at least until the end of the game round in which the state suggestion means was operated.

By configuring the state suggestion means to delay return until the end of the game round in which it was operated, it is possible to effectively prevent the movement of the state suggestion means from becoming a factor that reduces attention to the game.

Feature D7. The state suggesting means is configured to switch from the second form to the first form by a player's operation,
A gaming machine described in any one of features D4 to D6, characterized in that it is provided with a restriction means for restricting a return to the second form during the second gaming state when the state suggesting means is operated during a non-notification period in which the state suggesting means is in the second form in the second gaming state and no notification is made by the notification means.

As described above, in a configuration in which the status suggestion means suggests that a favorable gaming state has been reached, if the status suggestion means malfunctions due to inadvertent operation, the suggestion function will not be performed properly. This is undesirable as it can undermine the reliability of the gaming machine (status suggestion means). Therefore, as shown in this feature, a configuration is adopted in which a return to the second form is restricted if the status suggestion means is operated during a non-notification period in which the status suggestion means is in the second form in the second gaming state and no notification is being made by the notification means, thereby making it possible to suitably prevent the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconveniences.

Feature D8. A launching means (solenoid 111) for launching a game ball into a play area (play area PE);
A ball sending means (ball sending device 113) for sending the game balls from a storage area (upper tray 33) for storing the game balls to the launching means;
A variable ball entry section (lower operating port 83b and electric role 91) provided in the game area and switchable between a first state and a second state in which ball entry is easier than the first state;
A switching control means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entrance section between the first state and the second state;
a payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game balls to the storage area based on the ball entering the variable ball entry portion;
a first switching mode and a second switching mode in which a switching manner to the second state is more advantageous to a player than the first switching mode, as a switching control mode by the switching control means;
The switching control mode in the second gaming state is the second switching mode,
A gaming machine described in any one of features D1 to D7, characterized in that the state indication means is configured to protrude more from the front portion of the gaming machine in the second form than in the first form.

By switching the status indication means to the second form, the amount of protrusion from the front of the gaming machine increases. While this is preferable in terms of making the status indication means more noticeable, it makes it difficult to access the area behind the status indication means. For these reasons, it is expected that the increased constraints on the placement of the status indication means will hinder the status indication means from exerting its effect of increasing attention to itself. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the status indication means is configured to switch to the second form in the second switching mode in which the loss of gaming balls is suppressed, then by arranging the status indication means near the storage area, it is possible to prevent the status indication means from essentially interfering with the replenishment of gaming balls. In this way, by relaxing the constraints on the placement of the status indication means, a practically preferable configuration can be realized.

The technical ideas shown in Features D1 to D8 may also be applied to Features A to C above.

<Features Group E>
The following feature group E was made with a view to solving the problem that the invention aims to solve regarding the background technology, which is as follows: "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means for launching gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a bonus such as a payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls is given to the player (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." The background technology is as follows: "In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature E1. A gaming machine equipped with a movable performance device (e.g., a first movable performance device 300, a second movable performance device 400, a third movable performance device 803, a fourth movable performance device 804) having a decorative body (e.g., a movable body 360 or a decorative body 410) that is arranged so as to be visible from the front of the gaming machine and a drive unit (e.g., a motor 381 or a solenoid 420) that drives the decorative body,
An operation means (operation button 721 of the effect button device 40) operated by a player;
When the operation means is operated, a performance execution means (a function of executing the second special performances A to D by the MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143) executes the operation corresponding performance (for example, the second special performances A to D) by moving the decorative body of the movable performance device;
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the operation-responsive performance is executed by the performance execution means based on the operation of the operating means, it is equipped with an instruction means (the light-emitting block 725 of the performance button device 40, the light-emitting sections LT1 to LT14 of the annular illumination section 24 and the linked display area CE of the pattern display device 253, and a function of executing processing for guidance display in the MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143) which instructs the player which movable performance device is the target of operation in this operation-responsive performance before the decorative body starts to move.

A configuration in which an operation-responsive performance is executed by a movable performance device based on the player's operation of the operating means is preferable in terms of encouraging the player to actively participate in the game. However, in such a configuration, the distance between the operating means and the movable performance device becomes large, and there is a possibility that the beginning of the operation-responsive performance will be missed due to the movable performance device being out of sight, etc. Considering that the operation-responsive performance is a performance that involves the movement of the decorative body and has a strong impact at the beginning, such a miss is not preferable in terms of increasing attention to the game. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this characteristic, when an operation-responsive performance is executed based on the operation of the operating means, the movable performance device that is the target of operation in this operation-responsive performance is instructed before the movement of the decorative body begins. With such a configuration, the above-mentioned misses can be suppressed and the attention-increasing effect of the operation-responsive performance can be preferably exerted.

Feature E2. A gaming machine equipped with a plurality of movable performance devices (e.g., a first movable performance device 300, a second movable performance device 400, a third movable performance device 803, and a fourth movable performance device 804) each having a decorative body (e.g., a movable body 360 or a decorative body 410) that is arranged to be visible from the front of the gaming machine and a drive unit (e.g., a motor 381 or a solenoid 420) that drives the decorative body,
An operation means (operation button 721 of the effect button device 40) operated by a player;
When the operation means is operated, a performance execution means (a function of executing the second special performances A to D by the MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143) executes an operation-responsive performance (second special performances A to D) by moving a decorative body of one of the movable performance devices.
A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with an instruction means (light-emitting block 725 of the performance button device 40, light-emitting sections LT1 to LT14 of the annular illumination section 24, linked display area CE of the pattern display device 253, and a function of executing processing for guidance display in the MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143) that instructs a player which of the multiple movable performance devices is the target of operation in the current operation-responsive performance before the decorative body starts to operate when the operation-responsive performance is executed by the performance execution means based on operation of the operating means.

A configuration in which an operation-responsive performance is executed by a movable performance device based on the player's operation of the operating means is preferable in terms of encouraging the player to actively participate in the game. However, in such a configuration, the distance between the operating means and the movable performance device becomes large, and the beginning of the operation-responsive performance may be missed due to the movable performance device being out of sight, etc. Considering that the operation-responsive performance is a performance that involves the movement of the ornamental body and has a strong impact at the beginning, such oversight is undesirable in terms of increasing attention to the game. In particular, when multiple movable performance devices that can be the target of movement are used in combination, such inconveniences are concerned to become more noticeable. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this characteristic, when an operation-responsive performance is executed based on the operation of the operating means, the movable performance device that is the target of operation in the current operation-responsive performance is instructed before the start of the movement of the ornamental body. With such a configuration, the above-mentioned oversight can be suppressed and the effect of increasing attention by the operation-responsive performance can be preferably exerted.

Feature E3. A gaming machine equipped with a plurality of movable performance devices (e.g., a first movable performance device 300, a second movable performance device 400, a third movable performance device 803, and a fourth movable performance device 804) each having a decorative body (e.g., a movable body 360 or a decorative body 410) that is arranged to be visible from the front of the gaming machine and a drive unit (e.g., a motor 381 or a solenoid 420) that drives the decorative body,
An operation means (operation button 721 of the effect button device 40) operated by a player;
When the operation means is operated, a performance execution means (a function of executing the second special performances A to D by the MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143) executes a performance corresponding to the operation (second special performances A to D) by operating a decorative body of the movable performance device as an operation target of one of the movable performance devices.
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the operation-responsive performance is executed by the performance execution means based on the operation of the operating means, the gaming machine is equipped with an instruction means (light-emitting block 725 of the performance button device 40, light-emitting sections LT1 to LT14 of the annular illumination section 24, the linked display area CE of the pattern display device 253, and a function of executing processing for guidance display in the MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143) that instructs a player which of the movable performance devices is to be operated in the current operation-responsive performance after the operation of the operating means is started and before the decorative body starts to operate.

According to feature E3, a configuration in which an operation-responsive performance is executed by a movable performance device based on the player's operation of the operating means is preferable in terms of encouraging the player to actively participate in the game. However, in such a configuration, the distance between the operating means and the movable performance device becomes large, and the beginning of the operation-responsive performance may be missed due to the movable performance device being out of sight, etc. Considering that the operation-responsive performance is a performance that involves the movement of the ornamental body and has a strong impact at the beginning, such oversight is not preferable in terms of increasing attention to the game. In particular, when multiple movable performance devices that can be the target of movement are used in combination, such inconveniences are concerned to become more noticeable. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, when an operation-responsive performance is executed based on the operation of the operating means, the movable performance device that is the target of movement in the current operation-responsive performance is taught between the start of the operation of the operating means and the start of the movement of the ornamental body. By adopting such a configuration, the above-mentioned oversight can be suppressed and the effect of increasing attention by the operation-responsive performance can be preferably exerted.

Feature E4: The game machine is provided with an operation detection means (detection sensor 791) that detects that the operation means operated by the player has reached a predetermined detection position (first detection position CP1);
The performance execution means is configured to execute the operation-responsive performance based on a predetermined start condition (reaching a thirteenth detection position CP13 within a standby period or elapse of the standby period) being satisfied after the operation detection means detects that the operation means has reached the predetermined detection position,
The gaming machine described in feature E3, wherein the instruction means is configured to perform the instruction from the time the operation detection means detects that the operation means has reached the specified detection position until the specified start condition is satisfied.

According to feature E4, the operation target is taught from when the operating means reaches a predetermined detection position and the execution conditions for the operation-responsive performance are met until the start conditions for the operation-responsive performance are met. This allows the effect shown in feature E3 to be optimally achieved.

Feature E5. The operation direction of the operation means is specified to be a predetermined direction,
The gaming machine described in feature E4 is characterized in that the teaching means has a means for performing the teaching based on the operation means reaching a specific position (e.g., a second predetermined position CP2 to a thirteenth predetermined position CP13) that is further back than the predetermined detection position in the predetermined direction.

According to feature E5, when the operating means is operated in a predetermined direction, the execution condition for the operation-responsive performance becomes → instruction of the action target. For example, even if a player who does not expect instruction stops operating after reaching a predetermined detection position, the operation-responsive performance will be executed, so it is possible to meet the needs of various players. In other words, it is possible to reduce the opportunities for players to feel that the instruction function is bothersome.

In addition, compared to a configuration in which the conditions for executing the instruction → operation-responsive performance are met in response to the operation of the operating means, this has the advantage that there is no inconvenience caused by the operation being interrupted before reaching the specified detection position due to the content of the instruction revealing the operation-responsive performance.

Feature E6. A gaming machine according to any one of Features E3 to E5, characterized in that the teaching means is configured to teach the player the object of operation by illuminating a route connecting the operation means and the object of operation so as to guide the player's line of sight from the operation means to the movable performance device that is the object of the current operation.

Feature E6 makes it possible to guide the player's gaze toward the target by illuminating the route connecting the operating means and the target, thereby effectively eliminating the concerns expressed in features E3, etc.

Feature E7. The gaming machine described in Feature E6, characterized in that the teaching means has a plurality of light-emitting points (the first light-emitting unit LT1 to the fourteenth light-emitting unit LT14 in the circular illumination unit 24 and the linked display area CE in the pattern display device 253) arranged on the route, and a shifting means for shifting the light-emitting points that are the light-emitting target from the operating means toward the movable performance device that is the current operation target, and is configured to teach the operation target to the player by shifting the light-emitting target.

As shown in feature E7, by configuring the light-emitting points arranged along the route to shift the target light source, the guidance function shown in feature E6 can be optimally demonstrated.

Feature E8. The gaming machine described in Feature E7, characterized in that the shifting means performs the shift in conjunction with the displacement of the operating means in the operating direction of the operating means.

Feature E8 allows the player to freely control the shift speed while preventing the operation from becoming too complicated by linking the movement of the operating means with the shift of the illuminated target.

Feature E9: The operation means is switchable between a first form and a second form having a longer operation stroke than the first form;
The gaming machine described in feature E8 is characterized in that, when the operation-responsive presentation is executed, it is provided with a switching means for switching the operation means to the second form before an operation suggestion is made for the operation means.

As shown in feature E8, in a configuration in which the movement of the operating means and the shifting of the light-emitting target are linked, the link between the two can be strengthened by extending the operating stroke of the operating means in advance. In addition, since the operation of the operating means is often performed with a lot of force, there is a possibility that the teaching period will become extremely short due to the link. In this regard, extending the operating stroke can increase the teaching period and effectively prevent the teaching from being overlooked.

Feature E10. A gaming machine according to any one of Features E7 to E9, characterized in that the speed at which the light-emitting location is shifted by the shifting means is changed so as to be relatively slow on the operation means side and relatively fast on the movable presentation device side.

As shown in feature E10, if the shift speed is slow on the operating means side and fast on the movable performance device side, it is possible to prevent the teaching period from becoming unnecessarily long while also effectively preventing the teaching from being overlooked.

Feature E11. The gaming machine described in any one of Features E7 to E10, wherein the teaching means is configured to illuminate the light-emitting location (second light-emitting unit LT2) that is closest to the operating means among the plurality of light-emitting locations when the operating means reaches the predetermined detection position.

When the operating means is operated, there is a high possibility that the player's attention will be directed to the operating means in order to aim. Therefore, when giving instructions, the system is configured to first illuminate the light-emitting point closest to the operating means, thereby directing the player's attention to the instruction means.

Feature E12. A gaming machine according to any one of Features E7 to E11, characterized in that the light-emitting location that is the target of shifting by the shifting means is a part of the operating means side that is shared on each route connecting the operating means and each of the operation targets.

If the instruction routes are configured to overlap partially on the operating means side as shown in feature E12, the initial light-emitting point will be the same for all instructions, which will effectively prevent the start of instruction from being overlooked.

Feature E13. A gaming machine according to any one of Features E3 to E12, characterized in that if the operation-responsive presentation is started during teaching by the teaching means, the teaching is terminated.

Feature E13 draws the player's attention to the instructions, reducing the chances of the player missing the operation-responsive effects.

Feature E14. The device further includes an operation suggestion unit that suggests an operation of the operation unit;
A gaming machine described in any one of features E3 to E13, characterized in that either the first half or the second half of the period from when the operation suggestion means makes an operation suggestion to when the effective operation period of the operation means has elapsed is an instruction-responsive period in which the instruction is given by the instruction means based on the operation of the operation means, and the other half is an instruction-non-responsive period in which the instruction is not given even if the operation means is operated.

This characteristic allows the player to choose whether or not to receive instructions without overly complicating the configuration. This is desirable for improving player satisfaction.

The configuration described in this feature may be modified as follows. That is, it is also possible to make it "a gaming machine described in any one of features E3 to E13, characterized in that a teaching start period during which the teaching is started by the teaching means elapses before the effective operation period of the operating means elapses."

Feature E15: The performance execution means is configured to execute the operation-responsive performance by displacing the ornament of the movable performance device that is the operation target from a performance standby position to a performance execution position;
A gaming machine described in any one of features E3 to E14, characterized in that the performance execution positions of each of the decorative objects are configured so that they do not overlap with each other when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

The decorative bodies of the movable performance devices do not overlap with each other in their performance execution positions, so if you are watching a movable performance device that is not the target of operation, there is a high possibility that you will miss the movement of the decorative body. By applying the technical ideas shown in feature E3, etc. to this configuration, it is possible to effectively prevent the impact of the operation-responsive performance from being reduced due to the movement of the decorative body being overlooked.

The technical ideas shown in Features E3 to E15 can also be applied to Features E1 to E2 above.

In addition, the technical ideas shown in Features E1 to E15 may be applied to the above Features A to D.

<Feature Group F>
The following feature group F was made with a problem that the invention is trying to solve regarding the background technology, which is as follows: "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means which launches gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a bonus such as a payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls is given to the player (see, for example, Patent Document 1).""In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature F1. An operation means (effect button device 40) having an operation part (button unit 720) that is provided on the front part (front door frame 14) of the gaming machine and is operated by the player in a predetermined direction (downward),
A game machine including a performance execution means (announcement/performance control device 143 and a display control device 142) for executing an operation-responsive performance (e.g., a sixth special performance) based on the operation of the operation means during a predetermined operation effective period,
a switching means for switching the operation means from a first form to a second form having a larger operation stroke than the first form by displacing the operation portion in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction;
a retaining means (hold mechanism 795) for retaining the return of the operation unit, which is located at the predetermined position, to the standby position when the operation unit is displaced to a predetermined position (e.g., a maximum pressing position) on the rear side in the predetermined direction from the standby position of the operation unit in the first mode under a condition in which the operation unit is in the first mode,
A gaming machine characterized in that the reservation is released when the operating means is switched from the first form to the second form.

If the operating means is configured to switch between the first and second forms as shown in feature F1, the impact of the operating means can be strengthened to draw attention to the operating means itself. Increasing the amount of displacement of the operating unit is advantageous in strengthening the impact when switching to the second form. However, simply increasing the amount of displacement is a concern as it may be difficult to ensure the strength of the operating means in the second form. This is undesirable as it may cause the operating means to break down. In this regard, the configuration shown in this feature is configured to hold the operating unit at a specified position further back than the standby position in the first form as a preparatory action before switching to the second form, thereby making it possible to increase the amount of displacement when switching to the second form. This makes it possible to more effectively exert the effect of increasing attention while eliminating the above structural concerns.

Feature F2. When the operation means is switched from the first mode to the second mode by the switching means, an operation suggesting means is provided that suggests to the player how to operate the operation unit before the switching;
The gaming machine described in feature F1, wherein the retaining means is configured to restrict displacement of the operation part from the specified position in the opposite direction when the operation means is operated in accordance with a suggestion by the operation suggesting means and the operation part is displaced to the specified position.

Feature F2 suggests the operation of the control unit before switching to the second mode, and holds the control unit in a predetermined position after it has been displaced to a predetermined position by the player's operation, thereby making it possible to optimally achieve the effect shown in feature F1 above.

Feature F3. An operation means (effect button device 40) provided on the front part (front door frame 14) of the gaming machine and having an operation part (operation button 721) operated in a predetermined direction (downward) by the player;
A game machine including a presentation execution means (announcement/presentation control device 143 and a display control device 142) for executing an operation-responsive presentation (for example, an operation-responsive presentation such as a first special presentation) based on the operation of the operation unit during an operation valid period,
a switching means for switching the operation means from a first form to a second form having a larger operation stroke than the first form by displacing the operation portion in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction;
a restriction means (hold mechanism 795) for restricting displacement of the operation unit located at the predetermined position in the opposite direction when the operation unit is in the first form and the operation unit is displaced to a predetermined position (e.g., a maximum pressing position) on the rear side in the predetermined direction from a standby position of the operation unit in the first form,
A gaming machine characterized in that the restriction by the restricting means is released when the operating means is switched from the first mode to the second mode.

If the operating means is configured to switch between the first and second forms as shown in feature F3, the impact of the operating means can be strengthened to draw attention to the operating means itself. Increasing the amount of displacement of the operating unit is advantageous in strengthening the impact when switching to the second form. However, simply increasing the amount of displacement is a concern as it may be difficult to ensure the strength of the operating means in the second form. This is undesirable as it may cause the operating means to break down. In this regard, the configuration shown in this feature is configured to hold the operating unit at a specified position further back than the standby position in the first form as a preparatory action before switching to the second form, thereby making it possible to increase the amount of displacement when switching to the second form. This makes it possible to more effectively exert the effect of increasing attention while eliminating the above structural concerns.

Feature F4: When the operation means is switched from the first mode to the second mode by the switching means, an operation suggesting means is provided that suggests to the player how to operate the operation unit before the switching;
The gaming machine described in feature F3, wherein the regulating means is configured to regulate the displacement of the operation part from the specified position in the opposite direction when the operation means is operated in accordance with a suggestion by the operation suggesting means and the operation part is displaced to the specified position.

Feature F4 suggests the operation of the control unit before switching to the second form, and holds the control unit in a predetermined position after it has been displaced to a predetermined position by the player's operation, thereby making it possible to optimally achieve the effect shown in feature F3 above.

Feature F5: The restricting means is switchable between a restricting state in which the displacement of the operation unit in the opposite direction is restricted and a permitting state in which the displacement of the operation unit in the opposite direction is permitted,
A gaming machine described in feature F4, characterized in that the regulating means is configured to switch to the regulated state when the operation suggestion is made by the operation suggestion means.

If the restriction means is configured to switch to the restricted state when an operation suggestion is made by the operation suggestion means, it is possible to preferably avoid a delay in the timing at which the restriction is activated in response to the operation → reaching of a specified position, without making the responsiveness of the switch to the restricted state excessively high.

Feature F6. The gaming machine according to Feature F4 or F5, wherein the effect execution means includes a means for executing the operation-responsive effect on an effect device (e.g., a pattern display device 253) provided at a position different from that of the operation means when the operation means is operated in accordance with the suggestion by the operation suggestion means.

When holding the control unit in a specified position, the player's gaze is guided toward the presentation device, preventing the movement of the restricting means from revealing the subsequent behavior (switching to the second form).

Feature F7. The gaming machine described in Feature F3, further comprising a means for displacing the operating section to the predetermined position when the operating means is switched from the first mode to the second mode by the switching means.

As shown in this feature, if the control unit is forcibly displaced to a predetermined position before switching to the second form, the opportunity to exert the effects shown in feature F1, etc. can be more appropriately secured compared to a configuration that relies on the player's operation, for example.

Feature F8. A gaming machine according to any one of Features F3 to F7, characterized in that the predetermined position is the innermost position of the operation unit in the predetermined direction.

As shown in feature F8, if the specified position is set to the innermost position, the effects shown in features F1, etc. can be more effectively achieved.

Feature F9: The operation means has an operation unit that combines the operation part, a base part (movable base 741) that is disposed on the back side of the operation part in the predetermined direction and configured to be displaceable relative to the operation part, and a biasing part (coil spring 745) that is disposed between the operation part and the base part and biases the operation part in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction,
the restricting means restricts displacement of the operating portion in the opposite direction against the biasing force of the biasing portion,
The switching means includes a drive mechanism (lift mechanism 785) that displaces the operation unit in the predetermined direction and the opposite direction,
A gaming machine described in any one of features F3 to F8, characterized in that the restriction by the restricting means is released simultaneously with the start of displacement of the operation unit in the opposite direction by the drive mechanism or during displacement of the operation unit in the opposite direction by the drive mechanism.

As shown in this feature, by configuring the movement after the restriction by the restricting means is released and the displacement of the operation unit by the drive mechanism to occur in parallel, it is possible to effectively suppress a decrease in responsiveness when switching between forms in order to exert the hardening shown in feature F3, etc.

Feature F10: The switching means includes a motor (stepping motor 753) that is a drive source of the drive mechanism, and a control unit (MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143) that drives and controls the motor;
The gaming machine described in feature F9 is characterized in that the period of displacement of the operation unit in the opposite direction by the drive mechanism and the period of displacement of the operation part in the opposite direction by the biasing force of the biasing part are configured to partially overlap.

As shown in this feature, by configuring the movement after the restriction by the restricting means is released and the displacement of the operation unit by the drive mechanism to occur in parallel, it is possible to effectively suppress a decrease in responsiveness when switching between forms in order to exert the hardening shown in feature F3, etc.

Feature F11: When the operation means is switched from the first mode to the second mode by the switching means, an operation suggesting means is provided that suggests to the player how to operate the operation unit before the switching;
the restricting means is configured to restrict, when the operating means is operated in accordance with the suggestion by the operation suggesting means and the operating unit is displaced to the predetermined position, the restricting means restricts displacement of the operating unit from the predetermined position in the opposite direction,
The gaming machine described in any one of Features F3 to F10, wherein the switching means switches the operation means to the second form based on the operation unit being operated in accordance with the suggestion by the operation suggestion means and the operation unit reaching the specified position, and is configured not to switch to the second form if the operation unit does not reach the specified position.

In a configuration in which the operation of the operating unit is suggested and the operation causes the operating unit to move to a predetermined position, whether or not the predetermined position is reached depends on the player's operation. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by configuring the game so that switching to the second form is avoided if the predetermined position is not reached, it is possible to prevent the effects shown in feature F1 and the like from being not fully exerted.

Feature F12: When the operation means is switched from the first mode to the second mode by the switching means, an operation suggesting means is provided that suggests to the player how to operate the operation unit before the switching;
The gaming machine described in feature F11, characterized in that the effect execution means has a means for executing a predetermined effect as the operation-responsive effect based on the operation of the operation unit being operated in accordance with a suggestion by the operation suggestion means and the operation unit being displaced to the predetermined position.

As shown in this feature, if a specific effect (operation-responsive effect) is executed when a specific position is reached, preparations for switching to the second form will be completed when the player operates the operation unit to achieve the specific effect. With this kind of configuration, the effects shown in feature F1 etc. can be effectively achieved.

The technical ideas shown in Features F3 to F12 can also be applied to Features F1 to F2 above.

In addition, the technical ideas shown in Features F1 to F12 may be applied to the above Features A to E.

<Feature Group G>
The following feature group G was made with a problem that the invention is trying to solve regarding the background technology, which is as follows: "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means which launches gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a bonus such as a payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls is given to the player (see, for example, Patent Document 1).""In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature G1. An operation means (effect button device 40) having an operation unit (button unit 720) provided on the front part (front door frame 14) of the gaming machine and operated by the player in a predetermined direction (downward);
A game machine including a presentation execution means (announcement/presentation control device 143 and a display control device 142) for executing an operation-responsive presentation (for example, an operation-responsive presentation such as a first special presentation) based on the operation of the operation unit during an operation valid period,
The operation means is switchable between a first mode and a second mode in which an operation stroke of the operation unit is larger than that of the first mode,
The performance execution means includes:
A switching means for switching the operation means from the first mode to the second mode;
A special performance means for executing one of the first special performance (non-linked performance of the third movable performance device 803) and the second special performance (linked performance of the third movable performance device 803), which are the operation-responsive performances, based on the operation of the operation unit after switching to the second form by the switching means;
a return means for returning the operation means to the second form when a first special effect is executed by the special effect means.

If the operating means is configured to switch between the first form and the second form as shown in feature G1, the impact of the operating means can be strengthened to encourage attention to the operating means itself. When the operating unit is operated after the operating means is switched to the second form, either the first special effect or the second special effect is executed. Here, if the first special effect occurs despite the expectation of the second special effect being raised, there is a concern that the impression that the second form → operation was a waste will remain. In this case, there is a concern that even if the operating means is switched to the second form to encourage the operation, the opportunity to perform the operation will decrease. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the first special effect is executed, the operating means returns to the second form. By making it possible to operate again in the second form, it is possible to leave hope for an opportunity for a highly anticipated operation-responsive effect to occur. This is preferable in terms of suppressing the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconveniences and increasing attention to the game using the operating means.

Feature G2. An information acquisition means (a function of executing the winning process for the operating port in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (winning at the operating port 83a, 83b);
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 632 provided in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A transition determination means (a function of executing a process such as a winning/losing lottery in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined transition information (a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result);
a game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, based on the result of the determination by the transition determination means being a transition corresponding result (jackpot result) which corresponds to the predetermined transition information;
An operation means (effect button device 40) provided on the front part (front door frame 14) of the gaming machine and having an operation part (button unit 720) operated by a player in a predetermined direction (downward);
A game machine including a presentation execution means (announcement/presentation control device 143 and a display control device 142) for executing an operation-responsive presentation (for example, an operation-responsive presentation such as a first special presentation) based on the operation of the operation unit during an operation valid period,
The operation means is switchable between a first mode and a second mode in which an operation stroke of the operation unit is larger than that of the first mode,
The performance execution means includes:
A switching means for switching the operation means from the first mode to the second mode;
a special performance means for executing, as the operation response performance, either a first special performance (a non-linked performance of the third movable performance device 803) having a relatively low expectation level as the transition response result, or a second special performance (a linked performance of the third movable performance device 803) having a relatively high expectation level as the transition response result, based on the operation of the operation unit after switching to the second form by the switching means;
a return means for returning the operation means to the second form when a first special effect is executed by the special effect means.

If the operating means is configured to switch between the first form and the second form as shown in feature G2, the impact of the operating means can be strengthened to encourage attention to the operating means itself. When the operating unit is operated after the operating means is switched to the second form, either the first special effect, which is a transition-response result with a relatively low expectation, or the second special effect, which is a transition-response result with a relatively high expectation, is executed. Here, if the first special effect occurs despite the expectation of the second special effect being raised, there is a concern that the impression that the second form → operation was a waste will remain. In this case, there is a concern that even if the operating means is switched to the second form to encourage the operation, the opportunity to perform the operation will decrease. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the first special effect is executed, the operating means returns to the second form. By making it possible to re-operate in the second form, it is possible to leave hope for an opportunity for an operation-response effect with a high expectation to occur. This is preferable in terms of suppressing the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconveniences and increasing attention to the game using the operating means.

Feature G3. The special performance means is a first execution means;
The gaming machine described in feature G1 or feature G2, characterized in that the effect execution means has a second execution means for executing the second special effect (a linked effect of the third movable effect device 803) based on the operation of the operation unit after the return means has returned the operation means to the second form.

As shown in this feature, when a disadvantageous first special effect is executed, the second special effect can be generated by returning to the second form and then operating again, which prevents a rapid drop in the player's attention to the game when the first special effect occurs, in anticipation of the second special effect.

Feature G4. A gaming machine according to any one of Features G1 to G3, characterized in that the operation means is configured to assume the first mode when the second special effect is executed by the special effect means.

By configuring the replay to be avoided when the advantageous second special performance is performed, and allowing the replay to be resumed only when the disadvantageous first special performance is performed, it is possible to effectively prevent a decrease in attention to the game when the first special performance is performed.

Feature G5. A gaming machine according to any one of Features G1 to G4, characterized in that the displacement speed of the operation unit when switching the operation means from the first form to the second form is changeable.

By diversifying the displacement speed of the operating part when switching the operating means from the first form to the second form, it is possible to effectively prevent the return operation from becoming monotonous.

Feature G6. The gaming machine described in Feature G5 is characterized in that it is provided with a switching means for switching the displacement speed of the operating part when the operating means is brought into the second form by the return means from a first speed to a second speed faster than the first speed.

As shown by this feature, by ensuring a driving period at low speed (first speed), it is possible to effectively prevent the movement of the operation unit from being overlooked.

Feature G7: The returning means is configured to start the returning operation of the operating means when a predetermined start condition is satisfied,
The gaming machine described in feature G6 is configured so that the earlier the timing at which the specified start condition is met, the longer the displacement period at the first speed.

The configuration described in this feature makes it possible to ensure that the driving period at low speed (first speed) is as long as possible. This makes it possible to more effectively achieve the effect described in feature G6.

Feature G8. A gaming machine according to Feature G6 or Feature G7, characterized in that the first speed and the second speed are switched so that the period from the start of a game round to the completion of the return to the second mode is the same regardless of the timing at which the specified start condition is satisfied.

As shown in feature G6 above, gaining drive time at low speeds is preferable in terms of improving player satisfaction. However, delaying the presentation progression due to such a function can lead to excessive diversification of presentation progression patterns. In this regard, as shown in this feature, by limiting the period from the start of a game round to the completion of return to the second form so that it is the same regardless of the timing at which the specified start condition is met, the above concerns can be suitably alleviated.

Feature G9. A gaming machine according to any one of Features G5 to G8, characterized in that the displacement speed of the operation unit when the return means causes the operation means to be in the second form is slower than the displacement speed of the operation unit when the switching means causes the operation means to be in the second form.

It is preferable to switch to the second form quickly the first time in order to enhance the impact. Furthermore, by making the time required for the first switch different from the time required for the second switch, it is possible to make it less likely that the impression that the switch to the second form has simply occurred twice can be given. In particular, differentiating the time required for the second switch to the second form to be longer than the first switch is preferable in terms of increasing the player's satisfaction by providing a period of time to follow the movement at the time of return.

Feature G10. The operation means has an operation unit that combines the operation part, a base part (movable base 741) that is disposed on the back side of the operation part in the predetermined direction and configured to be displaceable relative to the operation part, and a biasing part (coil spring 745) that is disposed between the operation part and the base part and biases the operation part in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction,
The switching means includes a drive mechanism (lift mechanism 785) that displaces the operation unit in the predetermined direction and the opposite direction,
a detection sensor that detects the operation unit disposed at a predetermined detection position is provided on the base unit;
The performance execution means is capable of executing the operation-responsive performance when it is determined that the operation unit has reached the predetermined detection position based on the detection information from the detection sensor,
A gaming machine described in any one of features G1 to G9, characterized in that the return means is configured to operate the drive mechanism to return the operating part to the second form when it is determined based on detection information from the detection sensor that the operating part has moved away from the specified detection position.

As shown by this feature, if the return action is started when it is detected that the device has moved away from the specified detection position, the correlation between the timing at which the player releases the control unit and the timing at which the return action starts can be strengthened. This makes it possible to favorably increase the attention paid to the control unit even when the player releases their hands from the control unit.

The technical ideas shown in Features G1 to G10 may also be applied to the above Features A to F.

<Feature H Group>
The following feature group H was made with a problem that the invention is trying to solve regarding the background technology, which is as follows: "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means for launching gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a bonus such as a payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls is given to the player (see, for example, Patent Document 1).""In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature H1. An operation means (effect button device 40) having an operation unit (button unit 720) that is provided on the front part (front door frame 14) of the gaming machine and is operated in a predetermined direction (downward) by the player;
An operation-responsive performance execution means (pattern display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a) and executing an operation-responsive performance based on the operation of the operation unit on the display screen;
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a variable means (announcement/performance control device 143 and a lift mechanism 785) for displacing the operating part to any of a plurality of positions after the operating part is operated.

According to feature H1, after the special performance is executed by operating the operating unit, the operating unit is displaced to one of a plurality of positions by releasing the operating unit from the operating unit. In this way, by configuring the operating unit to change its destination (return destination) depending on the situation, it is possible to suitably prevent attention to the operating means from rapidly decreasing as a result of the operation.

Feature H2. An information acquisition means (a winning process for the operating port in the main control device 162) that acquires special information (reserved information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (winning the operating port 83a, 83b);
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area in the main control device 162) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A transition determination means (a function of executing a winning/losing lottery or the like in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined transition information (a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result);
a game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, based on the result of the determination by the transition determination means being a transition corresponding result which corresponds to the predetermined transition information;
An operation means (effect button device 40) provided on the front part (front door frame 14) of the gaming machine and having an operation part (button unit 720) operated in a predetermined direction (downward) by a player;
An operation-responsive performance execution means (pattern display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a) and executing an operation-responsive performance based on the operation of the operation unit on the display screen;
A variable means (announcement/performance control device 143 and a lift mechanism 785) for displacing the operation unit to any one of a plurality of positions;
a position determining means for determining a position to which the variable means displaces the operating unit in accordance with a result of the determination by the transition determining means.

According to feature H2, the position of the operation unit may be changed to a position determined according to the result of the judgment by the transition judgment means. In this way, if the destination of the operation unit can be changed according to the judgment result, the player's attention is drawn to the position to which the operation unit will be displaced, which contributes to increasing the interest in the game.

Feature H3. An information acquisition means (a winning process for the operating port in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (winning the operating port 83a, 83b);
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area in the main control device 162) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A transition determination means (a function of executing a winning/losing lottery or the like in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined transition information (a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result);
a game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, based on the result of the determination by the transition determination means being a transition corresponding result which corresponds to the predetermined transition information;
An operation means (effect button device 40) provided on the front part (front door frame 14) of the gaming machine and having an operation part (button unit 720) operated in a predetermined direction (downward) by a player;
An operation-responsive performance execution means (pattern display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a) and executing an operation-responsive performance based on the operation of the operation unit on the display screen;
A variable means (announcement/performance control device 143 and a lift mechanism 785) for displacing the operation unit to any one of a plurality of positions after the operation of the operation unit;
a position determining means for determining a position to which the variable means displaces the operating unit in accordance with a result of the determination by the transition determining means.

According to feature H3, after the special performance is executed by operating the operation unit, the operation unit is displaced to one of a plurality of positions by releasing the hand from the operation unit. The position is determined according to the judgment result by the transition judgment means. In this way, if the destination of the operation unit (return destination) can be changed according to the judgment result, it is possible to preferably prevent attention to the operation unit from rapidly decreasing as a result of the operation.

Feature H4. The gaming machine described in any one of Features H1 to H3, characterized in that the operation unit is configured to be placed in one of the multiple positions after being placed in a position other than one of the multiple positions.

When changing the position of the operating unit using the variable means, the operating unit is first placed in a position that is not one of the above-mentioned positions, and then placed in one of these positions, thereby preventing the behavior of the operating unit from becoming difficult to understand.

Feature H5. The plurality of positions are set to be aligned in the predetermined direction,
A gaming machine described in any one of Features H1 to H4, characterized in that the operation stroke of the operation part is configured to differ depending on the position where the operation part is placed.

Feature H5 emphasizes the difference between each position by creating differences not only in the appearance of the position of the operating part, but also in the operating stroke when actually operated.

Feature H6. A gaming machine according to any one of Features H1 to H5, characterized in that the multiple positions include a position before the operation.

As shown in feature H6, if the multiple positions include the pre-operation position, it is possible to diversify the presentation without increasing the number of multiple positions excessively.

Feature H7: The plurality of positions include a first position that is an initial position and a second position having a larger operation stroke than the first position,
The variable means is a first variable means,
a second variable means for switching the operation means from a first form in which the operation portion is in the first position to a second form in which the operation portion is in the second position;
A gaming machine described in any one of Features H1 to H6, characterized in that the first variable means is configured to displace the operation unit to any one of the multiple positions after the operation when the operation unit is operated while the operation means is in the second form due to the second variable means.

As shown in this feature, if the operating means is configured to switch between the first form and the second form, the impact of the operating means can be strengthened, encouraging attention to be drawn to the operating means itself. Here, in a situation in which the player's attention is directed to the operating means by switching to the second form, changing the position of the operating part using the first variable means can suitably reduce the chances that the change will be overlooked by the player.

Feature H8. The gaming machine described in Feature H7, characterized in that the displacement speed of the operation unit when switching from the first form to the second form by the second variable means is different from the displacement speed of the operation unit when placing the operation unit in one of the multiple positions by the first variable means.

As shown in feature H7, when the morphological changes of the operating means occur continuously, it is not desirable to simply repeat the morphological changes in order to increase attention. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by providing a difference between the displacement speed of the operating part in the morphological change before the operation and the displacement speed of the operating part in the morphological change after the operation, it is possible to prevent such inconvenience from occurring.

Feature H9. The gaming machine described in Feature H7, characterized in that the displacement speed of the operation unit when the first variable means places the operation unit in one of the plurality of positions is configured to be slower than the displacement speed of the operation unit when the second variable means switches the operation unit from the first form to the second form.

As shown in feature H7, when the shape of the operating means changes continuously, the impression that it is simply a repetition of shape changes is strong, which is undesirable in terms of increasing attention. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by creating a difference such that the displacement speed of the operating part in the shape change after the operation is slower than the displacement speed of the operating part in the shape change before the operation, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suppressed. Since the degree of expectation in the transformation after the operation can differ depending on the position reached, deliberately making the displacement slow can appropriately arouse the player's sense of expectation.

Feature H10. The effect execution means includes means for executing a special effect, which is the operation-responsive effect, based on the operation of the operation unit arranged at any one of the plurality of positions by the first variable means;
A gaming machine described in any one of features H7 to H9, characterized in that the position at which the operating unit is positioned by the first variable means is specified to be a position correlated with the special effect executed by the effect execution means.

As shown in feature H10, the position at which the operation unit is placed by the first variable means can be specified to be a position that correlates with the special effect executed by the effect execution means, thereby providing a connection between the effects. This is preferable in terms of increasing attention to the game.

Feature H11. A gaming machine according to any one of Features H1 to H10, characterized in that it is provided with a retaining means for retaining the operating unit at an operating position before the operating unit is displaced to one of the plurality of positions by the variable means.

As shown in feature H11, the configuration of delaying the displacement of the operation by the variable means can prevent the movement of the operating part after the operation from being hidden by the player's hand and becoming difficult to see.

The technical ideas shown in Features H1 to H11 may also be applied to the above Features A to G.

<Characteristics Group I>
The following group of features I was made with a view to solving a problem that the invention aims to solve regarding the background technology, which is as follows: "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means for launching gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a bonus such as a payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls is given to the player (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." The background technology is as follows: "In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature I1. An information acquisition means (a winning process for the operating port in the main control device 162) that acquires special information (reserved information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (winning the operating port 83a, 83b);
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area in the main control device 162) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A transition determination means (a function of executing a winning/losing lottery or the like in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined transition information (a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result);
a game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, based on the result of the determination by the transition determination means being a transition corresponding result which corresponds to the predetermined transition information;
A gaming device (effect button device 40) that is provided on the front part (front door frame 14) of the gaming machine and can be switched between a plurality of different appearances;
A gaming machine comprising: a switching means for switching the form of the gaming device in accordance with the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means.

According to feature I1, the form of the gaming device installed on the front of the gaming machine is configured to change in response to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means. In other words, the form of the gaming device changes as the number of rounds of play progresses. By changing the form of the gaming device installed in a position close to the player in this way, it is possible to emphasize that the number of rounds of play has progressed and dramatically increase the attention paid to the game.

Feature I2. An information acquisition means (a winning process for the operating port in the main control device 162) that acquires special information (reserved information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (winning the operating port 83a, 83b),
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area in the main control device 162) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A transition determination means (a function of executing a winning/losing lottery or the like in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined transition information (a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result);
a game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, based on the result of the determination by the transition determination means being a transition corresponding result which corresponds to the predetermined transition information;
An operation means (effect button device 40) provided on the front part (front door frame 14) of the gaming machine and having an operation part (button unit 720) operated in a predetermined direction by a player;
A display screen (display screen 253a) is provided, and an operation-responsive performance execution means (pattern display device 253) is provided for executing an operation-responsive performance based on the operation of the operation unit on the display screen.
The operation means has a plurality of standby positions set as standby positions of the operation unit,
A gaming machine comprising a change means for changing the operation unit from one standby position to another standby position in accordance with the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means.

According to feature I2, the standby position of the operation unit provided on the front of the gaming machine is changed to correspond to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means. In other words, the form of the operation unit changes as the game progresses. By changing the form of the operation unit provided in a position close to the player as each game progresses, it is possible to emphasize that the game is progressing and dramatically increase the attention paid to the game.

Feature I3. The gaming machine described in Feature I2, characterized in that the multiple waiting positions are set to be aligned in the predetermined direction.

Increasing the number of standby positions for the operating unit is preferable in terms of achieving diversification. However, if standby positions are set haphazardly, it becomes difficult to ensure the strength of the operating means, and there is concern that this may be a factor in compromising the reliability of the operating means. In this regard, by setting the multiple standby positions shown in this feature so that they are aligned in a specific direction, such concerns can be suitably eliminated.

Feature I4. The plurality of standby positions are all operation standby positions in which the operation unit can be operated,
A gaming machine according to feature I2 or I3, further comprising a suggestion means for suggesting to a player how to operate the operating unit when the waiting position of the operating unit has been changed by the change means.

By making the operation unit operable regardless of which of multiple waiting positions the device is located in, the player can focus their attention on the situation in which the device is located in which waiting position a suggestion for operation will be issued.

Feature I5. The gaming machine described in Feature I4, characterized in that the change of the standby position by the change means is completed based on the operation of the operation unit.

By configuring the change of the waiting position by the change means to be ultimately completed based on the operation of the operation unit, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the situation in which the operation suggestion occurs.

Feature I6. The gaming machine according to Feature I4 or Feature I5, wherein the change means has a means for changing the position of the operation unit by expanding the operation stroke of the operation unit each time the number of special information preceding the special information that triggered the change by the change means among the special information stored in the acquired information storage means decreases.

As shown by this feature, by changing the position of the operating part so that the operating stroke of the operating part is expanded each time the number of preceding special information decreases, the player's attention can be drawn to how far the expansion of the operating stroke will continue. Here, since a limit is placed on the number of special information that can be stored, there is also a practical upper limit on the expansion of the operating stroke, and attention is drawn to the relationship between the number of special information stored and the form of the operating means (especially the form at the beginning of the change).

Feature I7. The gaming machine described in Feature I4 or Feature I5, wherein the change means has a means for changing the position of the operation unit by reducing the operation stroke of the operation each time the number of special information preceding the special information that triggered the change by the change means among the special information stored in the acquired information storage means decreases.

As shown in this feature, by changing the position of the operating part so as to reduce the operating stroke of the operating part each time the number of preceding special information is reduced, the player can be directed to the extent to which the reduction in the operating stroke will continue. Here, since a limit is placed on the number of special information that can be stored, there is also an effective lower limit for the reduction in the operating stroke, which increases attention to the relationship between the number of special information stored and the form of the operating means (especially the form at the beginning of the change).

Feature I8. A notification means (a hold display area NE) is provided to notify information indicating the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means,
A gaming machine described in any one of features I2 to I7, characterized in that the change means is configured to change the position of the operation unit at the timing when the information notified by the notification means is updated.

By configuring the position of the operating part to change when the information notified by the notification means is updated, the correlation between the movement of the operating means and the number of special information can be strengthened. This essentially makes the operating means function as a notification means, making it easy to sense that the game has progressed while paying attention to the operating means.

Feature I9. A gaming machine according to any one of Features I2 to I8, characterized in that it is provided with a switching means for switching between a first state in which the position of the operation unit is linked to the number of pieces of special information stored in the acquired information storage means, and a second state in which the position of the operation unit is not linked to the number of pieces of special information stored in the acquired information storage means.

As shown in feature I9, by making it possible to switch between linking and non-linking the number of special information and the position of the operation unit, it is possible to effectively avoid restrictions on the original function of the operation means (function as a trigger for operation-responsive performance).

The technical ideas shown in Features I2 to I9 can also be applied to Feature I1 above.

In addition, the technical ideas shown in Features I1 to I9 may be applied to the above Features A to H.

<Characteristic Group J>
The following feature J group was made with a problem that the invention is trying to solve regarding the background technology, which is as follows: "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means for launching gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a bonus such as a payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls is given to the player (see, for example, Patent Document 1).""In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature J1. An operation means (effect button device 40) having an operation part (button unit 720) that is provided on the front part (front door frame 14) of the gaming machine and is operated by the player in a predetermined direction (downward),
A game machine including a presentation execution means (announcement/presentation control device 143 and a display control device 142) for executing an operation-responsive presentation (for example, an operation-responsive presentation such as a first special presentation) based on the displacement of the operation unit to a predetermined detection position during an operation valid period,
The operation means is switchable from a first form to a second form having a larger operation stroke of the operation unit than that of the first form when a predetermined switching condition (development to a reach display in a game round related to a first special performance) is established,
The performance execution means includes:
When the mode of the operation means is switched to the second mode, an operation suggestion means (a function of executing a process for operation suggestion in the MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143) suggests an operation of the operation means to a player;
a means for executing a special effect as the operation corresponding effect when the operation unit is operated during the operation valid period and under a situation in which the operation means is in the second mode;
A gaming machine characterized by having a shift means for shifting the specified detection position in a direction opposite to the specified direction before the suggestion by the operation suggestion means is started.

As shown in feature J1, if the operating means is configured to switch between the first and second forms, the impact of the operating means can be strengthened, encouraging attention to be drawn to the operating means itself. Here, when the operating means switches to the second form, an operation is suggested to the player. Prior to this suggestion, a predetermined detection position that triggers a special effect is shifted in the opposite direction to the predetermined direction. This makes it possible to make the operating stroke required to execute a special effect smaller than it appears, while significantly expanding the apparent operating stroke, thereby increasing attention to the game while effectively preventing the resulting difficulty in operating.

Feature J2. The gaming machine described in Feature J1, characterized in that the shifting means is configured to shift the predetermined detection position so that in the first mode, the predetermined detection position is a first detection position, and in the second mode, the predetermined detection position is a second detection position that is closer to the player in the predetermined direction than the first detection position.

By shifting the predetermined detection position from the first detection position to the second detection position when switching from the first form to the second form, the apparent operation stroke can be greatly enlarged, while the operation stroke required to execute the special effect can be made smaller than it appears. This allows the effect shown in feature J1 to be optimally exerted.

The configuration of this feature may be modified as follows. That is, it may be modified as follows: "The gaming machine described in feature J1 is characterized in that the predetermined detection positions include a first detection position and a second detection position that is closer to the first detection position in the predetermined direction than the first detection position, and the shift means is configured to set the predetermined detection position to the first detection position in the first form and to set the predetermined detection position to the second detection position in the second form."

Feature J3. The gaming machine described in Feature J1 or Feature J2, characterized in that the direction in which the operation stroke of the operation unit is expanded by switching from the first form to the second form coincides with the direction in which the predetermined detection position is shifted by switching from the first form to the second form.

By matching the direction in which the operation stroke is expanded by switching from the first form to the second form with the direction in which the detection position is shifted by switching from the first form to the second form, it is possible to effectively prevent the configuration of the operation means from becoming complicated.

Feature J4. The gaming machine described in any one of Features J1 to J3, characterized in that the shifting means performs the shift so that the operation stroke that reaches the first detection position in the first mode and the operation stroke that reaches the second detection position in the second mode are the same.

By using the same stroke for detecting operations in the first and second modes, it is possible to effectively prevent a decrease in operability due to the enhanced presentation function.

Feature J5. The gaming machine described in any one of Features J1 to J4, characterized in that the shifting means is configured to shift the predetermined detection position from the first detection position to the second detection position during a period in which the operating means is switched from the first form to the second form.

By configuring the detection position to shift during the period when switching from the first form to the second form, the waiting period for the shift is unnecessary, which contributes to a smoother progression of the performance.

Feature J6. A gaming machine according to any one of Features J1 to J4, characterized in that the displacement of the operating part when the operating means is switched from the first form to the second form is synchronized with the shift of the predetermined detection position from the first detection position to the second detection position.

By configuring the displacement of the operating unit to be synchronized with the shift of the detection position, the shift waiting period is eliminated, which contributes to a smoother performance progression.

Feature J7. The operation means is
an operation unit (button unit 720) including a combination of the operation unit, a base portion (movable base 741) disposed on the rear side of the operation unit in the predetermined direction and displaceable relative to the operation unit in the predetermined direction, and a biasing portion (coil spring 745) disposed between the operation unit and the base portion and biasing the operation unit in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction;
A drive mechanism (lift mechanism 785) for displacing the operation unit in the predetermined direction and the opposite direction,
The operation unit is displaced by the drive mechanism, whereby switching between the first form and the second form is performed.
A gaming machine described in any one of features J1 to J6, characterized in that a detection sensor (detection sensor 791) for detecting the operation unit located at the specified detection position is arranged on the base unit, and the performance execution means is configured to execute the special performance based on detection information from the detection sensor.

According to feature J7, the operation unit, which is composed of the operation part, the base part, and the biasing part, is displaced in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction, thereby switching from the first form to the second form. At this time, the base part (detection sensor) is displaced following the operation part, so that the positional relationship between the operation part and the detection sensor can be maintained. This makes it possible to make the stroke that detects the operation the same in the first form and the second form.

Feature J8. The device further includes a resistance generating means for generating resistance against a displacement of the operation unit toward the rear side beyond the second detection position when the device is in the second form;
In the second form, the gaming machine described in any one of features J1 to J7 is configured so that the operation stroke from the second detection position to the innermost position in the specified direction is greater than the operation stroke to reach the second detection position.

By increasing the stroke of the operation further back than the second detection position, the force of the operation part can be weakened after the operation is detected. This provides optimal protection for the operation means and the player's hands.

Feature J9. A gaming machine according to any one of Features J1 to J8, characterized in that the effect execution means enters a standby state for executing the special effect based on the operation unit reaching the second detection position, and has a means for delaying the start of the special effect in the standby state until a predetermined start condition is met.

If the special effect is started when the operation unit reaches the second detection position, the operation unit may not be operated until it reaches the innermost position. In this regard, as shown in this feature, by configuring the operation unit to delay the start of the special effect rather than starting it immediately even when the second detection position is reached, the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

Feature J10. An operation means (effect button device 40) having an operation unit (button unit 720) that is provided on the front part (front door frame 14) of the gaming machine and is operated by the player in a predetermined direction (downward),
A game machine including a presentation execution means (announcement/presentation control device 143 and a display control device 142) for executing an operation-responsive presentation (for example, an operation-responsive presentation such as a first special presentation) based on the displacement of the operation unit to a predetermined detection position during an operation valid period,
The operation means is switchable from a first form to a second form having a larger operation stroke of the operation unit than that of the first form when a predetermined switching condition (development to a reach display in a game round related to a first special performance) is established,
The predetermined detection position includes a first position and a second position that are different positions in the predetermined direction,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the performance execution means has a means for setting the specified detection position to the first position in the first form, and for setting the specified detection position to the second position in the second form.

As shown in feature J10, if the operating means is configured to switch between the first form and the second form, the impact of the operating means can be strengthened, and attention can be drawn to the operating means itself. Here, if a configuration is used in which multiple operation detection positions are used depending on whether the operating means is in the first form or the second form, the degree of freedom in determining the timing for executing the operation-responsive performance can be increased.

In addition, the technical ideas shown in Features J1 to J9 can also be applied to Feature J10 above.

In addition, the technical ideas shown in Features J1 to J10 may be applied to the above Features A to I.

<Feature K group>
The following feature K group was made with a problem that the invention is trying to solve regarding the background technology, which is as follows: "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means which launches gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a bonus such as a payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls is given to the player (see, for example, Patent Document 1).""In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature K1. An operation means (effect button device 40) having an operation unit (button unit 720) that is provided on the front part (front door frame 14) of the gaming machine and is operated by the player in a predetermined direction (downward),
A performance execution means for executing an operation-responsive performance based on the operation of the operation unit (a function for executing processing for a first special performance in the MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143);
A game machine having a drive device (lift mechanism 785) that displaces the operation unit in the predetermined direction and in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction,
The drive device is
a position specifying means (rotary encoder 792) for specifying a position of the operation unit in the predetermined direction when the operation unit is displaced in the predetermined direction based on the operation of a player;
and a resistance variable means (stepping motor 753) for varying the operating resistance (resistance torque) that resists the displacement of the operating part in the specified direction based on the position identified by the position identification means.

The resistance varying means amplifies the operation resistance by making it larger when the operating part is located further back in the predetermined direction than when it is located closer to the player. This gaming machine is characterized by the above-mentioned.

As shown by this feature, if the position of the operating part in a specific direction is identified when the operating part is displaced in a specific direction, and the operating resistance is varied based on the identified position, the tactile change that occurs in the hand operating the operating part makes it possible to create innovative effects that have never been seen before.

Feature K2. The gaming machine described in Feature K1, characterized in that the resistance varying means is configured to amplify the operation resistance by making the operation resistance larger when the position of the operation part is toward the rear in the predetermined direction than when the position is toward the front.

As shown in feature K2, if the operation resistance is amplified so that the resistance is greater at the back side, it is possible to reduce the impact during operation and contribute to protecting the player's hands and the operating means.

Feature K3: The operation means is switchable between a first mode and a second mode in which the operation stroke of the operation unit is larger than that of the first mode;
the position identification means includes means for identifying a position of the operation unit in the predetermined direction when the operation unit is in the second mode,
The gaming machine described in feature K2, characterized in that the resistance variable means is configured to change the operating resistance that resists displacement of the operating part in the specified direction when the operating means is in the second form.

For transforming buttons, the occurrence of transformation (second form) often means an opportunity. For these reasons, in the second form, there is a high possibility that the operating part will be operated forcefully. There is concern that such an operation will cause a large impact on the hands and operating means. In this regard, as shown in feature K3, if the configuration is such that the operating resistance is increased so that it is greater on the back side in a specified direction, it is possible to mitigate the impact during operation and contribute to protecting the player's hands and operating means.

Feature K4. The gaming machine described in any one of Features K1 to K3, characterized in that the resistance varying means is configured to generate a constant operating resistance until the operating unit reaches a predetermined position, and is configured to change the operating resistance generated according to the operating mode of the operating unit after the predetermined position is reached.

For hardened operation parts, it is undesirable to know whether they are hard or not the moment you touch them. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the operation resistance is constant until the specified position is reached and the operation resistance is changed behind the specified position, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

Feature K5. A gaming machine according to any one of Features K1 to K4, characterized in that the resistance varying means is configured so that the rate of increase in the operational resistance is greater on the rear side than on the front side in the predetermined direction.

For hardened operation parts, if the hardness is changed drastically at the back, the player is likely to mistakenly believe that he has reached the backmost position. In this regard, if the operation resistance is configured to increase at a greater rate at the back than at the front, as shown in this feature, the operation resistance will change smoothly, and the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suppressed. In addition, configuring the operation resistance to increase at a greater rate at the back than at the front is also preferable in terms of mitigating the impact when operating the operation part.

Feature K6. The device further includes an operation determination unit that determines the operation of the operation unit;
The performance execution means is configured to execute the operation-responsive performance when the operation determination means determines that the operation unit has been operated,
A gaming machine described in any one of features K1 to K5, characterized in that the resistance variable means is configured to amplify the operation resistance when the operation determination means determines that the operation section has been operated.

Feature K6 allows you to enjoy the change in operation resistance after the operation is detected, while preventing the operation resistance from increasing, making it difficult to reach the position where the operation is judged.

Feature K7. The drive device is
A calculation means for calculating a displacement speed of the operation unit in the predetermined direction;
A gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K5, characterized in having a correction means for correcting the increase rate of the operating resistance depending on the calculation result by the calculation means.

According to feature K7, if the rate of increase in the operational resistance is corrected according to the displacement speed of the operating unit, the following measures become possible. That is, when the displacement speed is high, the rate of increase in the operational resistance is increased to strengthen the cushioning function, and when the displacement speed is high, the rise of the operational resistance is accelerated to avoid making it difficult to notice that a change in the operational resistance has occurred.

Feature K8. The gaming machine described in Feature K7, characterized in that the entire section in which the operating part is displaced in the predetermined direction is composed of a correction section in which the increase rate is corrected by the correction means and a non-correction section in which the increase rate is not corrected by the correction means, and the non-correction section is set to be on the front side in the predetermined direction and the correction section is set to be on the back side in the operating direction.

As shown by this feature, by setting the non-correction section to be on the front side in a specified direction and the correction section to be on the back side in the operation direction, it is possible to effectively prevent the player from determining whether or not the device has hardened the moment they touch the operation section.

Feature K9. The gaming machine described in Feature K8, wherein the calculation section in which the displacement speed of the operation part is calculated by the calculation means is the non-correction section.

By dividing the section into a non-correction section and a correction section, calculating the speed in the non-correction section, and then configuring the result to be reflected in the correction section, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of discomfort caused by a sudden lightening of the operating resistance during the operating stroke.

Feature K10. An operation means (effect button device 40) having an operation unit (button unit 720) that is provided on the front part (front door frame 14) of the gaming machine and is operated by the player in a predetermined direction (downward),
A performance execution means for executing a performance corresponding to an operation based on the operation of the operation unit (a function for executing processing for a first special performance in the MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143);
A game machine having a drive device (lift mechanism 785) that displaces the operation unit in the predetermined direction and in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction,
The drive device is
a speed calculation means for calculating a displacement speed of the operation unit in the predetermined direction when the operation unit is displaced in the predetermined direction based on an operation by a player;
a resistance variable means for varying an operating resistance against the displacement of the operating part in the predetermined direction based on a result of calculation by the speed calculation means.

As shown in feature K10, by configuring the operation resistance generated in the operation part to change according to the displacement speed (operation speed) of the operation part, it is possible to realize unprecedented and innovative operability.

Feature K11. The gaming machine described in Feature K10, characterized in that the resistance variable means is configured to set the operation resistance to a relatively small first operation resistance when the speed calculated by the speed calculation means is slower than a predetermined speed, and to set the operation resistance to a relatively large second operation resistance when the speed calculated by the speed calculation means is faster than the predetermined speed.

As shown by this feature, by making the operating resistance relatively small when the operation is performed slowly and relatively large when the operation is performed vigorously, it is possible to contribute to facilitating operation while protecting the operating means.

The technical ideas shown in Features K1 to K9 can also be applied to Features K10 to K11.

In addition, the technical ideas shown in features K1 to K11 may be applied to the above features A to J.

<Feature L group>
The following group of features L was made with a problem that the invention is trying to solve regarding the background technology, which is as follows: "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means which launches gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a bonus such as a payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls is given to the player (see, for example, Patent Document 1).""In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature L1. An operation means (operation button 721 of the performance button device 40) having an operation unit (button unit 720) that is provided on the front part (front door frame 14) of the gaming machine and is operated by the player in a predetermined direction (downward),
A game machine having a performance execution means for executing an operation-responsive performance based on the operation of the operation unit (a function for executing processing for a first special performance in the MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143),
The performance execution means includes:
A switching means (a function of executing processing for switching the form in the MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143) for switching the form of the operation means from a first form to a second form in which the operation stroke of the operation part is longer than that of the first form when a predetermined switching condition is satisfied;
a means for executing a special effect as the operation-responsive effect when the operation means is operated during an operation valid period and in a situation in which the operation means is in the second mode;
the operation means has a contact portion (movable base 741) that is disposed so as to wait at a position that is a rear side of the operation unit in the predetermined direction and that contacts the operation unit from the rear side in the predetermined direction when the operation unit is operated in the second form,
A gaming machine characterized in that the standby position of the abutment portion can be changed in the specified direction and in the direction opposite to the specified direction when the switching means switches from the first form to the second form.

As shown in this feature, if the operating means is configured to switch between the first form and the second form, the impact of the operating means can be strengthened, encouraging attention to be drawn to the operating means itself. Here, when the operating means is in the second form, the position of the contact part is changed and the operating part is operated to displace in a predetermined direction, causing the operating part to come into contact with the contact part. This makes it possible to convey a tactile change to the player through the operating part. With this configuration, it is possible to suggest to the player, for example, that the operation detection position has been reached or that the operation detection position is just around the corner. This is preferable for making operation easier in the second form in which the operation stroke is extended, and for optimally exerting the above-mentioned attention-increasing effect.

Feature L2. An operation means (operation button 721 of the performance button device 40) having an operation unit (button unit 720) that is provided on the front part (front door frame 14) of the gaming machine and is operated by the player in a predetermined direction (downward),
A game machine having a performance execution means for executing an operation-responsive performance based on the operation of the operation unit (a function for executing processing for a first special performance in the MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143),
The performance execution means includes:
A switching means (a function of executing processing for switching the form in the MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143) for switching the form of the operation means from a first form to a second form having a longer operation stroke than the first form when a predetermined switching condition is satisfied;
a means for executing a special effect as the operation-responsive effect when the operation means is operated during an operation valid period and in a situation in which the operation means is in the second mode;
the operation means is disposed so as to wait on the rear side of the operation unit in the predetermined direction, and has an abutment portion (movable base 741) that abuts against the operation unit from the rear side in the predetermined direction when the operation unit is operated in the second form and is displaceable in the predetermined direction together with the operation unit,
the operation means has a contact portion (movable base 741) that is disposed so as to wait at a position that is a rear side of the operation unit in the predetermined direction, and that contacts the operation unit from the rear side in the predetermined direction when the operation unit is operated under a condition in which the second form is set, and is displaceable in the predetermined direction together with the operation unit while maintaining the contact state;
A gaming machine characterized in that the standby position of the abutment portion can be changed in the specified direction and in the direction opposite to the specified direction when the switching means switches from the first form to the second form.

As shown in this feature, if the operating means is configured to switch between the first form and the second form, the impact of the operating means can be strengthened, encouraging attention to be drawn to the operating means itself. Here, when the operating means is in the second form, the position of the contact part is changed and the operating part is operated to displace in a predetermined direction, causing the operating part to come into contact with the contact part. This makes it possible to convey a tactile change to the player through the operating part. With this configuration, it is possible to suggest to the player, for example, that the operation detection position has been reached or that the operation detection position is just around the corner. This is preferable for making operation easier in the second form in which the operation stroke is extended, and for optimally exerting the above-mentioned attention-increasing effect.

Feature L3. An operation determination unit that determines the operation of the operation unit,
A gaming machine according to feature L1 or feature L2, wherein the abutment portion is configured to abut against the operation portion after the operation portion passes through or reaches a judgment position determined by the operation judgment means in the second form.

By configuring the operation part to come into contact with the contact part after the operation part has passed the judgment position or when it has reached the judgment position, it is possible to indicate to the player that the operation has been completed.

Feature L4. A gaming machine according to any one of Features L1 to L3, characterized in that the standby position of the contact portion is changed so that the operation stroke at which the contact portion and the operating portion contact in the first mode and the operation stroke at which the contact portion and the operating portion contact in the second mode are the same.

As shown by this feature, if the position of the abutment part is changed so that the operation stroke at which the operating part and the abutment part abut in the first form is the same as the operation stroke at which the operating part and the abutment part abut in the second form, it is possible to significantly change the appearance of the operating means depending on the form while preferably avoiding the operation in one form being more difficult than the operation in the other form.

Feature L5: The operation means includes an operation unit (button unit 720) that combines the operation unit, a base portion (movable base 741) that is provided on the rear side of the operation unit in the predetermined direction and is displaceable relative to the operation unit in the predetermined direction, and a biasing portion (coil spring 745) that is provided between the operation unit and the base portion and biases the operation unit in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction,
The switching means has a drive mechanism (lift mechanism 785) that displaces the operation unit in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction,
A gaming machine described in any one of features L1 to L4, characterized in that the abutment portion is formed in the base portion.

As shown in this feature, if the operation unit is configured to be displaced by a drive mechanism, the switching between the first and second forms described above can be suitably achieved. Here, if the operation unit is configured to be displaced by an operation section, a base section, and a biasing section, the base section on which the abutment section is formed will also displace following the operation section, and the stroke at which the operation section and the abutment section abut can be made the same in each form.

Feature L6. The drive mechanism has a motor (stepping motor 753) that displaces the operation unit in the opposite direction,
The switching means is configured to generate a resistance in the motor that prevents the operation unit from displacing in the predetermined direction during the second mode,
In the second embodiment, the gaming machine according to feature L5 is configured so that the resistance generated in the motor is greater than the biasing force of the biasing portion.

In the second form, the resistance generated in the motor is configured to be greater than the biasing force of the biasing portion. Therefore, when the operating portion is operated in the second form, the operating unit can be prevented from being displaced in a predetermined direction without the operating portion coming into contact with the base portion. This allows the effects shown in feature L1, etc. to be preferably exhibited.

Feature L7. A gaming machine according to any one of Features L1 to L6, characterized in that the abutment portion is formed in a plurality of portions so as to surround the central axis of the operating portion.

In the second form, in a configuration in which the operating unit and the abutment portion come into contact, there is concern that the posture of the operating unit may be disturbed when they come into contact, which may lead to snagging or the like. In this regard, the configuration shown in this characteristic makes it possible to suppress the disturbance of the posture of the operating unit when the operating unit and the abutment portion come into contact. Suppressing the disturbance of the posture in this way is advantageous in realizing smooth movement of the operating unit even when the operating stroke is extended.

Feature L8. An operation means (operation button 721 of the performance button device 40) having an operation unit (button unit 720) that is provided on the front part (front door frame 14) of the gaming machine and is operated by the player in a predetermined direction (downward),
A game machine having a performance execution means for executing an operation-responsive performance based on the operation of the operation unit (a function for executing processing for a first special performance in the MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143),
A switching means (a function of executing a process for switching the form in the MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143) is provided for switching the form of the operation means between a first form and a second form having a larger operation stroke than the first form based on an adjustment operation by a player,
the operation means is disposed so as to wait on the rear side of the operation unit in the predetermined direction, and has an abutment portion (movable base 741) that abuts against the operation unit from the rear side in the predetermined direction when the operation unit is operated in the second form and is displaceable in the predetermined direction together with the operation unit,
When the switching means switches from the first configuration to the second configuration, a standby position of the contact portion is changed in the predetermined direction.
A gaming machine characterized in that the waiting position of the abutment portion is changed in response to switching between the first and second forms by the switching means, so that the operation stroke at which the abutment portion and the operating portion abut in the first form is the same as the operation stroke at which the abutment portion and the operating portion abut in the second form.

If the operating means is configured to switch between the first form and the second form as shown in feature L8, the impact of the operating means can be strengthened to draw attention to the operating means itself. Here, when the operating means is in the second form, the position of the abutment part is changed in a predetermined direction, and the operating part is operated and displaced in a predetermined direction, causing the operating part and the abutment part to abut. This makes it possible to convey a tactile change to the player through the operating part. With such a configuration, it is possible to suggest to the player that, for example, the operation detection position has been reached or that the operation detection position is in front of them. In addition, if the position of the abutment part is changed so that the operation stroke at which the operating part and the abutment part abut in the first form and the operation stroke at which the operating part and the abutment part abut in the second form are the same, it is possible to suitably avoid a situation in which the operation in one form is more difficult than the operation in the other form while significantly changing the appearance of the operating means depending on each form.

The technical ideas shown in Features L1 to L7 can also be applied to Feature L8.

In addition, the technical ideas shown in Features L1 to L8 may be applied to the above Features A to K.

<Feature M group>
The following group M of features were made with a problem that the invention is trying to solve regarding the background technology, which is as follows: "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means which launches gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a bonus such as a payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls is given to the player (see, for example, Patent Document 1).""In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature M1. An operation means (effect button device 40) provided on the front part (front door frame 14) of the gaming machine and having an operation part (operation button 721) operated by the player toward a predetermined direction (downward);
A game machine having a performance execution means for executing an operation-responsive performance based on the operation of the operation unit (a function for executing processing for a first special performance in the MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143),
a number determining means for determining the number of times that the operation unit has repeatedly reached the first detection position during a valid operation period;
a period determination means for determining a period during which the operation unit is located at the second detection position during the effective operation period,
the effect execution means has a means for executing a special effect, which is the operation corresponding effect, when the number of repetitions determined by the number of times determination means that the first detection position has been reached reaches a predetermined number of times, or when the period determined by the period determination means that the second detection position has been located reaches a predetermined period;
A gaming machine, characterized in that the first detection position and the second detection position are set to be different positions in the specified direction.

According to the configuration shown in this characteristic, when the operating unit is tapped repeatedly, a special effect is executed when the number of taps reaches a predetermined number. Such a tapping operation may give the player the impression of being bothersome, but in the configuration shown in this characteristic, by operating the operating unit to the second detection position and maintaining that state, it is essentially treated the same as if the above-mentioned tapping operation had been performed. In other words, the player can choose whether to actually perform a tapping operation or to substitute a long press for a tapping operation, which meets the diverse needs of players. This is preferable in terms of optimally utilizing the function of using the operating means to encourage active participation in the game.

Here, for the operation means, there is a possibility that the operation mode may switch from rapid tapping to long press midway due to fatigue or other reasons. At this time, if the acceptance of the operation does not switch quickly from the number of times judgment to the period judgment, there is a high possibility that the valid period will pass in vain due to the time lag. In this regard, as shown in this feature, by configuring the first detection position for the number of times judgment and the second detection position for the period judgment to be shifted in a predetermined direction (operation direction), it is not necessary to distinguish between rapid tapping and long press operations at one detection position. Therefore, the above-mentioned time lag in switching from the number of times judgment to the period judgment can be minimized. This can favorably exert the effect of encouraging the operation of the operation means and increasing attention to the game.

Feature M2. An operation means (effect button device 40) having an operation part (operation button 721) that is provided on the front part (front door frame 14) of the gaming machine and is operated by the player in a predetermined direction (downward),
A game machine having a performance execution means for executing an operation-responsive performance based on the operation of the operation unit (a function for executing processing for a first special performance in the MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143),
a number determining means for determining the number of times that the operation unit has repeatedly reached the first detection position during a valid operation period;
a period determination means for determining a period during which the operation unit is located at the second detection position during the effective operation period,
the effect execution means has a means for executing a special effect as the operation corresponding effect when the number of repetitions determined by the number of times determination means that the first detection position has been reached reaches a predetermined number of times, or when the period determined by the period determination means that the second detection position has been located reaches a predetermined period;
A gaming machine characterized in that the second detection position is set to be further back in the specified direction than the first detection position.

According to the configuration shown in this characteristic, when the operating unit is tapped repeatedly, a special effect is executed when the number of taps reaches a predetermined number. Such a tapping operation may give the player the impression of being bothersome, but in the configuration shown in this characteristic, by operating the operating unit to the second detection position and maintaining that state, it is essentially treated the same as if the above-mentioned tapping operation had been performed. In other words, the player can choose whether to actually perform a tapping operation or to substitute a long press for a tapping operation, which meets the diverse needs of players. This is preferable in terms of optimally utilizing the function of using the operating means to encourage active participation in the game.

Here, for the operation means, there is a possibility that the operation mode will switch from rapid tapping to long press midway due to fatigue or other reasons. At this time, if the acceptance of the operation does not switch quickly from the number of times judgment to the period judgment, there is a high possibility that the valid period will pass in vain due to the time lag. In this respect, according to the configuration shown in this characteristic, the second detection position for period judgment is shifted so as to be further back in a specified direction (operation direction) than the first detection position for number of times judgment, and for example, there is no need to distinguish between rapid tapping and long press operations at detection position 1. Therefore, the above-mentioned time lag in switching from the number of times judgment to the period judgment can be minimized. This can favorably exert the effect of encouraging the operation of the operation means and increasing attention to the game.

In addition, the stroke required for rapid tapping is shorter than the stroke required for long presses, so the above function does not make rapid tapping difficult.

Feature M3: A first suggesting means for suggesting to a player that the operation unit has reached the first detection position by a change in tactile sensation through the operation unit when the operation unit has reached the first detection position;
A gaming machine described in feature M1 or feature M2, characterized in that it is equipped with a second indication means that, when the operating part reaches the second detection position, indicates to the player that the second detection position has been reached by a change in tactile sensation through the operating part.

As shown in feature M1, etc., in a configuration in which the number of hits determination and the rapid-fire determination are switched depending on the operating position of the operating unit, a tactile change is conveyed to the hand touching the operating unit when each detection position is reached, making it easy to understand that the detection position has been reached.

Feature M4. The second detection position is set to be on the back side in the predetermined direction relative to the first detection position,
The gaming machine described in feature M3, wherein the first suggestion means has a contact portion that contacts the operating portion from the rear side in the specified direction when the operating portion reaches the first detection position.

According to feature M4, when a rapid-fire operation is performed, the operating part that has reached the first detection position comes into contact with the contact part in a predetermined direction, so that a tactile change can be transmitted through the operating part.

Feature M5. The gaming machine described in Feature M4, characterized in that the contact portion is configured to displace in the predetermined direction in response to the displacement of the operation portion in the predetermined direction after contacting the operation portion at the first detection position.

After the operating part and the contact part come into contact with each other at the first detection position, the operating part and the contact part will displace in a predetermined direction together. This configuration can effectively prevent the contact part from blocking the displacement of the operating part to the second detection position, and can effectively achieve the various effects described in Features M4 and M1, etc.

Feature M6. The gaming machine according to any one of Features M3 to M5, wherein the second suggestion means is configured to suggest reaching the second detection position by increasing the operation resistance in a stepwise manner when the operation unit reaches the second detection position.

As shown in this feature, when the second detection position is reached, the operating resistance increases stepwise, suggesting that no further pressure is required, and this resistance can be used to help keep the operating means in the second detection position.

Feature M7. The operation means is
an operation unit (button unit 720) including the operation part, a base part (movable base 741) provided on the rear side of the operation part in the predetermined direction and configured to be displaceable relative to the operation part in the predetermined direction, and a biasing part (coil spring 745) disposed between the operation part and the base part and biasing the operation part in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction;
a holder (holder unit 750) that holds the operation unit so as to be displaceable in the predetermined direction and the opposite direction;
A gaming machine described in feature M1 or feature M2, characterized in that when the operating part is displaced to the first detection position in response to operation by a player, the operating part and the base part come into contact with each other in the specified direction, and after the operating part and the base part come into contact with each other, the entire operating unit is displaced toward the rear in the specified direction toward the second detection position in response to operation of the operating part.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, when the operating part reaches the first detection position, the operating part comes into contact with the base part, causing a tactile change. As the operation continues, the operating part, base part, and biasing part are displaced together in a predetermined direction toward the second detection position. With this configuration, the tactile change can indicate to the player that the first detection position has been reached.

Feature M8. The base portion is provided with a detection sensor that detects the operation portion that has reached the first detection position,
The number of times determination means is configured to determine whether or not the operation unit has reached the first detection position based on detection information from the detection sensor,
The gaming machine described in feature M7 is characterized in that the period determination means is configured to determine the period when it receives detection information from the detection sensor indicating that the first detection position has been reached and when the operation unit is located at the second detection position.

According to feature M8, the number of times is determined based on the detection information from the detection sensor. On the other hand, the period is determined when detection information indicating that the first detection position has been reached is received from the detection sensor and the operation unit is located at the second detection position. In this way, by incorporating the detection information for the number of times determination into the period determination, it is possible to immediately end the period determination when the hand is released from the operation unit located at the second detection position. In other words, it is possible to improve the responsiveness of the period determination while suppressing the complexity of the structure.

Feature M9. A switching means for switching the form of the operation means between a first form and a second form in which the protrusion amount of the operation part is larger than that of the first form by displacing the operation unit in the predetermined direction,
The effect execution means is configured to execute the special effect when, under a situation in which the operation means is in the second form, the number of repetitions determined by the number of times determination means that the first detection position has been reached reaches a predetermined number of times, or when the period determined by the period determination means that the operation means is located at the second detection position reaches a predetermined period;
the second detection position is set to a midpoint of an operation stroke in the second mode,
A gaming machine according to feature M7 or feature M8, characterized in that it is provided with a means for increasing the operating resistance of the operating part when the second detection position is reached.

The configuration in which the operating means switches between the first form and the second form as shown in this characteristic is advantageous in increasing the attention to the operating means. Here, when the special effect is generated in the second form, it is assumed that the extended operating stroke makes it difficult to understand the guide for the long press operation. Here, if the maximum pressing position is set to the second detection position, the operating stroke during a long press becomes excessively large, which is likely to give the player the impression that it is bothersome. In this regard, the configuration shown in this characteristic sets the second detection position at a midpoint in the operating stroke, while increasing the operating resistance when the second detection position is reached, thereby suggesting to the player that the second detection position has been reached. With this configuration, the above problem can be suitably solved.

Feature M10. The gaming machine described in any one of Features M1 to M9, wherein the period determination means is configured to start counting the period when the operation unit reaches the second detection position.

As shown by this feature, the responsiveness of the period count can be favorably improved by configuring the period count to start immediately upon reaching the second detection position.

The technical ideas shown in Features M1 to M10 may also be applied to the above Features A to L.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: A game machine that includes an operating means (game ball launching handle 45) operated by the player, a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) that launches game balls based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage (such as the guide passage 103 of the guide rail 100) that guides the launched game ball to a specified game area (game area PE), and various game components (nails, etc.) arranged within the game area, and that awards a special prize to the player when the game ball passes through a specified passage section (general winning opening 81, etc.) of each of the game components.

Slot machines and other reel-type gaming machines: A gaming machine equipped with a variable display means that displays a series of symbols consisting of multiple symbols in a variable manner and then displays the series of symbols in a final stopped state, in which the variation of the symbols is started by operating a start operating means, the variation of the symbols is stopped by operating a stop operating means or after a predetermined time has passed, and a special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol.

Ball-operated belt-type gaming machine: A gaming machine equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable pattern string consisting of multiple patterns and then displays the final stop of the pattern string, in which the pattern variation is started due to the operation of a start operation means, the pattern variation is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means or after a predetermined time has passed, and a special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stop pattern at the time of the stop is a specific pattern, and further equipped with a ball receiving tray and an insertion device that performs an insertion process to take in game balls from the ball receiving tray, and a payout device that pays out game balls to the ball receiving tray, and configured so that the operation of the start operation means is valid when game balls are inserted by the insertion device.

10... Pachinko machine as a gaming machine, 14... Front door frame, 27... Speaker section, 22... Window section, 24... Circular illumination section, 40... Performance button device, 45... Game ball launching handle, 80... Game board unit, 82... Variable winning device, 83a... Upper operating port, 83b... Lower operating port, 87... Main display section, 142... Display control device, 143... Notification/performance control device, 162... Main control device, 253... Pattern display device, 253a... Display screen, 300... First movable performance device, 400... Second movable performance device, 602... MPU, 603... ROM, 604... RAM, 701... Operation block, 720... Button unit, 721...operation button, 725...light-emitting block, 741...movable base, 750...holder unit, 753...stepping motor, 785...lift mechanism, 791...detection sensor, 792...rotary encoder, 795...hold mechanism, 803...third movable performance device, 804...fourth movable performance device, 912...MPU, 913...ROM, 914...RAM, AR1-AR8...arrow image, CA...character image, CP...detection position, D...main display, DL...display for lower operating port, DU...display for upper operating port, EF...effect, LT1-LT14...light-emitting unit, TQ...reference torque.

Claims (1)

A means for executing a specific determination based on the establishment of a predetermined determination trigger;
A means for transitioning a gaming state to a special gaming state which is more advantageous to a player than a predetermined gaming state based on the result of the specific judgment being a predetermined transition corresponding result;
An operation means operable by a player;
A gaming machine comprising:
The operation means is switchable between a first state and a second state having a larger operation stroke than the first state,
a switching means for switching the operation means from the first state to the second state,
As a performance that can be executed when the operating means is operated after the switching means switches to the second mode, a first performance in which the transition response result has a relatively low expectation level or does not correspond to the transition response result, and a second performance in which the transition response result has a relatively high expectation level or corresponds to the transition response result,
A specifying means for enabling the operation means to be in the second mode after a previous operation on the operation means has been performed and the first performance has been executed;
A first means for enabling a notification corresponding to a mode of the operation means to be executed in a first period before the previous operation that triggers the execution of the first performance is performed;
a second means for enabling a notification corresponding to the state of the operation means to be executed for a second period longer than the first period before a subsequent operation is performed on the operation means when the operation means is set to the second state by the specifying means;
A gaming machine comprising:

Images